QWT OIF Prof. G. R. Noyes PRACTICAL RUSSIAN GRAMMAR PART I BY R. T. CURRALL, MA. I SENIOR MODERN LANGUAGE MASTER GEORGE Watson's college EDINBURGH D. C. HEATH & CO., PUBLISHERS BOSTON NEW YORK CHICAGO ^<:^^ ^' /^.... ^'< 2t^>^ PREFACE Personal experience in commencing the study of Russian, con- firmed by more recent experience in teaching classes supplied with one of the best of existing manuals, has convinced the compiler of this book that Russian grammar, if presented from the same end as that at which the study of Latin or French or German is usually begun, will always appear to be more formidable than it is. This book, the manuscript of which was practically complete before the end of December 1916, is an attempt to deal with the subject starting from a rather unusual point. The plan, however, once it is explained, may commend itself to teachers working with classes of younger pupils and to adult private students, and it is hoped that it will justify the book's claim to the title of a ' practical ' grammar. In Russian, though it is possible to express many a simple thought or command without actually using a verb at all, the verb is still, as in our own speech, the " soul of the sentence," and is the part of speech which offers the greatest difficulty to strangers. The distinctive feature of the Russian verb is the system of ' Aspects,' the theory of which can be made clear to a serious student in half an hour (see Lesson LI of this book). But the appHcation of this theory to the practical purposes of reading and writing depends upon a thorough knowledge of the forms of the present tense. Unfortunately the present tense of the Russian 6 __...._ KAi^Qnrrr^^ _ 6 PKEFACE verb, while it is beyond question the most frequently employed of all the forms, is for a beginner something Hke a maze in its apparent confusion of consonantal and accentual changes. More real and, in the final result, more rapid progress may be made if we take what may seem at first sight to be a longer way round. It happens that the past tense of Eussian verbs is remarkably regular and simple, having only four endings ^mascuHne, feminine, and neuter singular and one plural identical in form with those of nouns of corresponding gender and number. Upon that fact this method is based. We begin with the past tense. From the first lesson sentences are constructed and read, but while the student is learning the common forms of nouns, pronouns, and adjectives his attention is not simultaneously being distracted by the vagaries of the verb, for the past tense requires hardly any special study. When a considerable number of verbs have by mere iteration become famihar, the present is taken up, the student having the advantage of learning the forms without at the same time having to acquire a completely new set of words. Not until a useful store of material has been accumulated and is at command is the presentation of the Aspects attempted. Participles are of very frequent occurrence in Russian texts : their forms must therefore be known. These have been indicated in the grammatical summary at page 35 and illustrated in notes to the paragraphs referred to on page 35, but otherwise participles have been systematically ignored. There is much to be done by the beginner before he need concern himself seriously with the study of participles in composition. Indeed the foreigner who does not enjoy complete mastery of the language, provided he PEEFACE 7 can recognize participles in his reading, may get along very well by tlie use of adverbial and relative clauses. Numerous summaries in tbe form of Lists bave been given as an aid to clearness. For those who hesitate to adopt uncompromisingly the plan of the book, some suggestions as to its use have been given on page 36. Much attention has been devoted to the important matters of Script and Pronunciation. For those who value such things a phonetic transcript of every word used in the exercises and of the Kussian exercises themselves is given . As for the system of phonetics adopted, it will be found to be approximately exact, though, especially with regard to the representation of certain unaccented vowels, there may be occasional and considerable divergence of opinion. The Vocabularies at the end of the book are, it is hoped, complete. Users of the book will welcome the arrangement of the general Russian-EngHsh vocabulary of verbs. The total number of words employed is considerable, but as the main purpose of this volume is to impress on the memory the essential forms of the language, the forms that must be mastered by the learner, there is a good deal of deliberate iteration in the exercises. For illustrations of many kinds indebtedness is acknowledged first of all to Tolstoi's AsSyKa and KHHrn njifl HxeniH , which * Primer ' and * Readers ' have exercised a very marked influence on the substance and arrangement of many a Russian school-book pubhshed since Tolstoi gave up his experiments as a dominie. 8 PEEFACE Secondly, reference has been made to many admirable books issued in Russia with tbe approval of the Eussian Government for the teacbing of Eussian to foreign children in Eussian schools. Three series of this kind that deserve to become widely known among those interested in the teaching of Eussian are : MnxeeB'B, KHHrH hjih HTeHifl, pubhshed by the LJeHTpajibHafl Tnnorpa^ia in Kazan ; flaBHCb, Poji;hoh Mip-L)), pubhshed by K. F. SnxMaH'b in Eiga ; BoJibnept, PyccKafl P-h^b)), pubhshed by the author in Petrograd. While he is alone responsible for the plan of the book and whatever faults it may still contain, the compiler gratefully expresses his sense of obhgation to his friend Mr James Melville, of George Heriot's School, in whose company he began the study of Eussian, and who has kindly read the proofs of this book. Finally, for the care he has taken with the printing more than a word of thanks is due to Messrs. E. & E. Clark's reader. E. T. C. Edinburgh, September 1917 CONTENTS PREFACE INTRODUCTION 13 Pars. I and II. The Alphabet 13 Par. III. Phonetic Symbols used . . . . .15 Par. IV. Hard and Soft Vowels 16 Par. V. Voiced and Voiceless Consonants . . . .16 Par. VI. Pronunciation ...... 16 Par. VII. Contents of Pars. VIII-XX .... 17 Pars. VIII-XX. Examples and Phonetic Values of the Letters 17-31 Par. XXI. Importance of learning Accent . . .31 Par. XXII. Summary of Regular Forms . . . 32-35 PAGE 5 SUGGESTIONS for the Use of this Book 36 LESSONS I-LVI As Pronouns are used in every Lesson, beginning with the first, they are not often separately mentioned in headings of Lessons. I. PAST TENSE OF VERB 1. Masculine and Neuter Nouns in Singular LESSON I. Typical Masculine Nominative Singular Noun (hard form) and Adjective. " Is," " is not " . II. Masculine Singular Past Tense. Nominative Singular of Pronouns, Personal, Possessive, Interrogative ..... III. Genitive, Dative, and Accusative of Nouns in "b. Pronouns IV. Use of y with Genitive to translate " to have " . V. Masculine Noun Soft Forms in h and ii. Genitive after flsa, TpH, HeTTiipe . . . . . VI. Genitive in Negative and Partitive Forms. Infinitive VII. Neuter Nouns in o, e Four Cases. Neuter Adjectives. Certain General Rules of Orthography ..... 9 37 38 41 44 45 47 49 10 CONTENTS VIII. Neuter Past Tense. Reflexive Verb Hp^BHTbCfl. Dative with Kt . IX. XOHHJI-L and meji-b. Idioms with Infinitive. Complete Declen sion of Masculine and Neuter Nouns. Instrumental Case X. Prepositional Case. Forms in ;y^ XI. Revision of Pronouns ..... Paes. 48-50. ^Accentuation of Masculine and Neuter Nouns that have occurred. Lists ...... Pab. 51. Prepositions that have occurred ... 2. Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter Nouns in Singular XII. Feminine Nouns in a and h. Rules of Orthography XIII. Feminine Adjectives, oiiiih'b, OHHa, ojiiHO . XIV. Feminine Form of Past Tense. Pronouns XV. Prepositions Bt and Ha. Compounds of meji'B XVI. Same subjects as last Lesson : Accusative and Prepositional 51 53 56 59 61 61 62 63 65 66 68 70 71 73 XVII. Feminine Nouns in b . XVIII. Idiomatic Uses of Instrumental Case XIX. Prepositions with Genitive .... 3. Complete Declension of Noun and Adjective Pars. 72-79. Nouns that have occurred classified according to Form and Accentuation of Plural. Lists . . . .76 XX. Plural of Past Tense. Pronouns. Adjectives. Suggestions for the learning of the Plurals of Nouns and incidentally for the impressing of the Vocabulary in Lessons I-XIX . 81 XXI. Plurals and Pronouns . . . . . .84 XXII. MaTb and aoqb. Preposition no with Dative . . 85 XXIII. Complete Declension of the Adjective. Forms in Liii, an, oe, and 6tt, an, 6e . . . . . . . 87 XXIV. Declension of Adjective in ifi, hh, ee . . . .89 XXV. Declension of Adjective in nift, Kan, Koe . . .90 XXVI. Declension of Adjective in hIh, qafl, qee . . .91 XXVII. A few very common Irregular Past Tenses. lueji'b and "fexaJi-B. Translation of ' from ' . . . .92 XXVIII. Prepositions ao and npo. Indefinite 3rd Plural. Passive Voice. Reflexive Pronoun . . . . .95 XXIX. Pronouns : CBOfi and forms similarly declined . . 98 XXX. Dative, Instrumental, and Prepositional Plurals of Nouns and Adjectives ....... 101 XXXI. Some Useful Idioms 102 CONTENTS 11 LESSON PAGE Pars. 117-119. List of Nouns occurring for the first time in Lessons XX-XXXI, classified according to Form and Accentua- tion ........ 104 Par. 120. Prepositions that have occurred .... 106 Note. Genitive Plurals are discussed in Lessons XXXVI, XL, XLV. II. FUTURE AND PRESENT TENSES Pars. 121, 122. Lists of Verbs that have occurred classified (1) according to Aspect A Imperfective, B Perfective ; (2) under A, according to form of Present Tense . . . 106 1. Future Tense XXXII. Future of 6biTb. Future of any A Verb . . .108 XXXIII. Complete Plurals of Personal Pronouns . . . 109 XXXIV. Time Phrases . . . . . . .110 2. Present Tense of I A Verbs XXXV. Endings of Present Tense ; Two Main Types. Present Tense of jt^jiaTb Type . . . . . .112 XXXVI. Genitive Plural of Masculine Nouns. Numerals 5-10, 20 . 116 3. Present Tense of II A Verbs XXXVII. Type CTOib, CTOiinib. Distinction between cujifkih and caHHTbCfl. Sequence of Tenses . . . .117 XXXVIII. Type ctok), CTonnib. Numerals 11-19 . . .120 XXXIX. Type CMOxpib, CMOTpninb. Numerals 30-100 . . 122 XL. Genitive Plural of Feminine Nouns. Numerals 100-1000. Adverbs of Quantity ...... 124 XLI. Revision Past, Present, Future . . . .127 4. Present Tense of I A Verbs with Consonantal Stem, or Stem in 'h XLII. Type JKHB^, >KHBemb. VariousForms of Infinitive. xoA^Tb and HTTii. Compounds of htth, their Future Tense . 129 XLIII. Monosyllabic Verbs : nnxb ; H^axb. Ordinal Numerals lst-19th 133 XLIV. Type nnm;^, nHineuib. Regular Consonantal Changes. Ordinal Numerals 20th-100th . . . .136 XLV. Genitive Plural of Neuter Nomis . . . .139 XL VI. Exercises on the Verbs of all Types discussed in Lessons XXXII-XLV 140 12 CONTENTS Lessons ivhich may be read at any time after Lesson XX, though the exercises cannot he worked with any satisfaction till after Lesson XL VI. LESSON PAGE XL VII. On Numerals Declension, etc. Ordinal Numerals from 100th upwards ........ 142 XL VIII. Verbs governing Instrumental Case . . . .146 XLIX. Predicative Adjective ...... 149 L. Comparison of Adjectives . . . . . .152 in. THE ASPECTS OF THE VERB LI. Explanation of this feature of the Russian Verb. Illustrative Passages with Translation . . . . .155 LII. The Imperative. Salutations. Distinction between Imper- fective and Perfective Imperative. Verbs in Vocabulary grouped in Classes according to formation of Aspects . 164 LIII. Declension of Bp^MH. Verbs ifecTb, "fexaTb, xot'^tb. Conditional. Verbs in Vocabulary grouped as in Lesson LII 168 LIV. Verbs in OBaxb and BieaTb. Mixture of Tenses. ' Whether.' Verbs grouped as in Lesson LII . . . .172 LV. Declension of ^hth and peGcHOK-b. Nouns in anHH-b. Verb AaeaTb. Verbs grouped as in Lesson LII . . . 176 LVI. Long and Short. Construction with Verbs of Wishing and Fearing. Distinction between caMTb and c^Mbiii . .180 List of Prepositions . . . . . . .185 List of Adjectives showing Form and Accentuation of Predicative . 186 Examples of Predicative Comparative in e . . . .188 A FEW Irregular Verbs . . . . . . .189 Examples of Russian Script . . . . . .190 Phonetic Transcript of the Exercises . . . .194 VOCABULARIES : Verbs Russian-English . . . . . .210 General Vocabulary : Russian-English (no Verbs) . . 217 General Vocabulary: English-Russian .... 229 INDEX . . . 246 INTRODUCTION I. The Kussian alphabet is called the Cyrillic, as its creation is rightly or wrongly ascribed to St. Cyril, a Greek missionary, of the ninth century who carried Christianity to the Slavs of Macedonia. This alphabet is based on the Greek capitals. It includes a few letters corresponding to Latin characters of similar form, a few more that have the form but not the value of Latin sjnubols, and several entirely new symbols that must have been invented. As applied to modem Russian the alphabet is, for various historical reasons, by no means perfect in its approximation to the phonetic ideal. It is, however, for the purpose of representing a Slav tongue far better adapted than the Latin character, for, once the Cyrillic alphabet is mastered, it is seen that the words are neither so long nor so barbarous in appearance in their native dress as when transliterated for EngUsh readers. The Czechs, Poles, and other Northern Slavs (exclusive of the Russians) use the Latin character, while the Russians, Bulgars, Serbs, and most other Southern Slavs use the Cyrillic. II. THE ALPHABET Printed ItaKc Phonetic Characters Characters Symbols A, a (viii) 1 A, a [a] [a] B, 6 (XI v) E, 6 [b] [b] B, B (xiv) B, e [v] [v] r, r (XV) r, 8 [g] [g] [g] ;.ln^^^^ fl a (xvi) a. d [d] [d] -Z/ ' E, e(ix) E, e [J8] [je] [j9] ^ Paragraph in which illustrations of the phonetic value of each letter will be found. Specimens of script are given at pages 190-193. 13 14 INTRODUCTION Printed ItaUo Phonetic Characters Characters Symbols E, e (xi) E, e [jo] }K, m (xviii) m. MC [3] 3, 3 (xvii) 3, 3 [2] [i] H, H(X) a. U P] I>i i(x) I, i [i] IT, fi(x) a. a P] K, K (xv) K, K [k] [k] JI, JI (xx) JI, JI [t] [i] M, M (xix) M, M [m] [m] H, H (xix) H, H W [A] 0, (xi) 0, [0] [a] n, n (xiv) n. n [P] [p] P, p (xx) p. P [r] [r] C, c (xviii) c. c [s] M T, T (xvi) T, m [t] [t] y, y(xii) y. y [u] (xiii) rb. b None bl, Bl (x) hi. u p] h, h (xiii) h. b [^] [J] % ^(ix) B, Tb [is] [je] [j9] [jo] a, 3 (ix) 9, 3 [s] [e] K), K) (xii) 10, 10 [ju] H, fl (vm) H, a [ja] [JA] [J9] 9, e (xiv) e. e [f] [i] Y, V this letter is another 'i'; it is no longer in use. There is no h, no w, no x; these are usually represented by r, B, KG respectively. Certain symbols are redundant, e.g. i, ^, and others have to stand for more than one distinct sound. INTRODUCTION 15 III. The phonetic symbols employed in the transcript are as follows : ^ Vowels [a] as in * father.' [a] as in * another.' [e] as in * them.' [e] as in * the^/.' [a] as in * mother.' [i] as in *b*t' (but see Par. X, note 1). [i] as in * been.' [i] second half of diphthong in words like * boi/,' * mi/,' * tr?/.' [o] as in * yon.' [u] as in * too.' [j] to represent sound of EngHsh y before any vowel. [ ] The dot placed over any consonant indicates that the consonant is to be pronounced ' soft,' i.e. to be palataUzed (French mouilU). [( Y] added to a vowel indicates that a very faint i is audible just before the succeeding consonant. Consonants Labials (6, n, b, 4>> ) [b] as in *6ooty,' [b] as in *6eauty.' [p] as in *^at,' [p] as in *pure.' [v] as in * van,' [v] as in * t;iew.' [f] as in */ar,' [f J as in */ew.' GUTTUBALS (r, K, X). [g] as in * gfood,' [g] as in * %urative.' [g] voiced form of ch which is sometimes written in EngUsh gh (North German ' wegren ' with the g aspirated), [k] as in * Aick,' [k] as in * Z^ew.' [x] as in ' ic^ ' (German), softer than ch in * loch.' Dentals (h, t, i^). [d] as in *c?one,' [d] as in * due.' [t] as in * and b : !> is called the ' hard ' sign, and indicates merely the absence of h, the ^ soft ' sign. (See Par. XIII.) No Russian word is written with a consonant as the last letter : a word must end in a vowel or in Tb or b. These two signs were themselves originally vowels. V. It is often convenient to distinguish voiceless consonants (n, $, K, X, T, c, m) from voiced consonants (6, b, r, r [g], n, 3, m), while certain consonants {m, m, H, m), are by nature soft, in the sense that they tend to palatalize even the hard vowels. VI. PRONUNCIATION The articulation of the individual sounds in Russian is not so difficult for an English-speaking person as is the correct production of French sounds. The one serious difficulty in Russian pronuncia- tion lies in the fact that Russian more than other European tongues resembles English in two important respects : the accent is variable, and only the accented vowels have their full normal value. That is to say, in order to pronounce a Russian word with a semblance of correctness, one must know on which syllable the accent falls, and bear in mind that unaccented vowels are for the most part short and relatively obscure, though long compound words often have what may be called a secondary accent. INTRODUCTION 17 Voiced consonants standing before final !> or B tend to become voiceless (see preceding paragraph), but this tendency should not be exaggerated, especially in monosyllables. In Paragraphs VIII to XX numerous examples illustrating all ordinary combinations of letters are given. VII. The following pages. Par. VIII to Par. XX, show for every letter of the alphabet : (1) Printed Character (2) Italic (3) Russian Nanfie (4) Phonetic Value Examples. Explanatory notes. The letters of the Alphabet are arranged in the following order : Vowels : a, H (Par. VIII) ; 3, e, ife (Par. IX) ; bi, h, i, ft (Par. X) ; o, e (Par. XI) ; y, 10 (Par. XII) ; -b, b (Par. XIII). Cotisonants : Labials (Par. XIV). Gutturals (Par. XV). Dentals (Par. XVI). Sibilants (1) (Par. XVII) ; (2) (Par. XVIII). Nasals (Par. XIX). Liquids (Par. XX). VIII. (1) A a, A a. Name : a. Value : [a] (acceni [a] (unaccented) ). AnrjilH AmjiiR [dngiiJA(ijA)]i England noKaaajl'b noKasajih [pAkAzat]2,i he showed KapaHflami. KapaHdaiuh [kArAnddJ]2,i pencil HaCOBOH Hacoeou [tJASAv6i]3 sentry jKapa oicapa [3Ard]3 heat ^ ' a' when accented has the sound of a in 'father,' =[a]. 2 ' a ' when not accented has the sound of a or o in * another,' = [a]. 3 ' a ' when unaccented after the consonants -m, 'i, m, m retains so little of the original open [a] sound that it might often be rendered by the symbol [a]; i.e. it becomes almost as obscure as the last vowel of 'another.* But it has been thought advisable not to insist on this refinement in the phonetic transcript. 18 INTRODUCTION Soft vowel corresponding to * a ' : (2) H. H, H H. Name : h. Value : [ja] (accented), [ja, jo] (iinaccented). (This vowel never follows r, k, x, m, h, m, m.) Hn6HiH jiroaa fl3lilK'B eA C 3anpiiri> ;^qHTCH 1 Hnoma Rzoda HdblKh ea. aanpRZh ynumcR [J9p6niJA (nJA)] 2. 8 Japan [jagAdA]! berry [jaztk]2 tongue [i9j6,j9jd]4 of her, Tier [zAprok] * he yoked [ npio6prbJih [priAbrot] 1 he obtained ci^Jia CTbdjia [s6dtA]i saddles This letter is superfluous, as it has no sound which is not also represented by * e.' It has the sounds [js, je, J9] according to the same rules as *e.' 1 In a few words ' -h ' has the sound of * e,' =[jo, o], for which see Par. XI (2). X. (1) LI H, hi bi. Name : epH. Value: [i]. (This vowel is never initial and never follows r, K, X, m, H, m, m. TBI mbi [ti] 1 thm MblTb Mbimb [mit] 1 to wash Mbm^Tb Mbmamb [mitja^t] ^ to low, bellow 6bITb dumb [bit] 1 to be 6bITOB6H dbimoeou [biUvoi] ^ taken from real life BlijIHTb emjiumb [vilit] ^ to pour out CTapbift cmapbiii [stari] ^ old KdMCHHblfi KaMeHHbiu [kdm9ni]2 made of stone ^ ' bi,' accented or unaccented, is a vowel not difficult to imitate from the living voice, but not so easily described. We have it as an unaccented vowel in the second syllable of ' pretty/.' As an accented vowel it is very nearly equivalent to the vowel of the first syllable of ' pretty,' as pronounced in the south of England, or more exactly, it is almost identical with the thick, slovenly utterance of the vowel i heard in some parts of Scotland in ' hit ' and 'f^t,' =[i]. 2 In the termination of the masculine singular of the adjective this sound is theoretically prolonged by the half -vowel ii, but the practical effect is so sUght that it has been ignored in the transcript. 20 INTRODUCTION Soft vowels corresponding to ' li ' : (2) H H, Jf w. Name : i ^BofiHoe {i double). Value : [i]. Ht^jiIh HmcuiiH [italiJA(lJA)]i Italy liea uea [ivA]l willow CMOTpHTt CMompumh [sm6trit]i he looks {at) H{H3Hb ;>tCU3Hb [3izn]2 life ni6pMa uiupMa [JirmA] 2 screen HX-L UXh [ix,jix]3 them, of them HM-B UMh [im,jim]3 to them laMH IIMU [imi,jiriii]3 {with) them ^ ' H ' has the sound of ee in ' deem,' = [i], the d being pronounced as in * c^uty.' Like all other vowels it is short when unaccented. 2 'h' after i^, jk, m is pronounced like bi [i]. After n and in this modification is not quite so noticeable and ' i ' has been kept in the transcript. 3 Only in the last three words has initial ' h ' the sound [ji]. (3) I i, / I. Name : i Cb tohkoh (i with a dot). (This letter never stands before consonants.) Value: [ij. iHC^Ct lucycb [iisiis]! Jesus iibnt ilOHb [ijiiin,]Vn]i June iiojib iWJlb [ijdiijuii]! July Poccifl PocciR [rAsiJA] 1 Russia 3HaHie 3HaHie [znanja] 2 knowledge Mip-b Miph [mir]3 world, peasant vilkige MHp-B MUph [riiir]3 peace [community 1 ' i ' has the same value as h ; it replaces h before vowels ; =[i]. 2 The termination ' -ie ' might also have been rendered by [-ija], but in natural rapid speech the [i] is so short that the dotted consonant +[ja] seems adequate to represent this combination. ^ ' i ' stands before a consonant in the one word Mipi), ' world,' to dis- tinguish it from MHpTj, ' peace.' (4) Vi Vl, H ii. Name : h ct> KpaxKoii (i with a short mark). Value: [i]. (This letter is never initial; it always stands after a vowel, forming su diphthong with it.) Matt MaU [mai]i jj^^iy capafi capau [sArai]^ cart-shed jlOMoft doMoU [dAmoi]! homeward Bofina eouHa [vAina]i war INTRODUCTION 21 yfiaeTt qeii? cxapbift flftL[6 nocjiymaftxe ! yudemh [uid6t] i HeuF [tJ6l]i cmapuii [stdri]^ HUi^o [jitso, jatso] 3 nocjiyuiaiime ! [pAsMJata] ^ ^ m;*7Z go away whose ? old egg listen I 1 * ii ' added to a vowel turns it into a diphthong [al, oi, ui, etc.] ; com- pare English ' huy,^ ' boy.' ^ ' ii ' added to bi and 1 makes in natural discourse so slight a change that it has been ignored in the transcript. ^ ' ii ' added to unaccented a, h, e, gives an indistinct sound which can be rendered by [a] or [i]. XI. (1) 0, 0. (unaccented). Name : o. Value : [o] (accented), [a] (When unaccented, ' o ' is replaced by ' e ' after jk, h, m, m, n.) Cjitra OAhza TBOft meoU repdft zepoU ^Toro dmozo nji6xo njioxo njioxdii njioxoii xopom6 xopouio [6ilgA] 1 [tvoi] 1 [garoi]! [stAVA] 2 [ptoXA] 2 [ptAXOi] 2, [xArAjo] 2, Olga thy hero of that badly bad well 1 ' o *" accented has the sound of o in ' yon,' = [o]. 2 ' o ' unaccented has the sound of o in ' other,' = [a]. Russian * o ' is always open as in ' yon ' or ' other ' ; it never has the value of the rounded o in ' home,' ' bone.' Soft vowel corresponding to ' o ' : (2) Ee, E e. Name : e. Value : [jo, ^0]. eJKHTCH eotcumcR [j63itsA] it shrivels up JKCJITMH Mcejimuu [56tti] yellow jier-b Ji'ezh [log] he lay down c^eT-B CHenvb [stjot] account mejiT. m'ejib [Jot] he went BeST. e'eah [voz, vos] he conveyed {in a vehicle) 8031. eo3h [voz, vos] cart-had ' e ' is always accented, i.e. * e ' when accented often = [jo, o]. The occurrence of this sound should be carefully noted, as it is only in books for beginners that accents and diacritics are used ; in ordinary Russian printing they do not appear, and there is nothing to distinguish * e ' from ' e.' 22 INTRODUCTION XII. (1) yy,yy. Name : y. Value : [u]. VKpaftna ynpaUHa [uki'uinA] Ukraine ^xo yxo [tixA] ear y^xaTb ymxamh [ujSXAt] to drive away ye^HH^Hie yeduHenie [uj8din6nja] loneliness yiiTH yiimu [uitf] to go away 6^fly 6ydy [btidu] I shall be TyA^ myda [tuda] thither 'y' always has the sound of oo in ' too,' = [u]. The only difference between the accented and the unaccented vowel is one of quantity, the unaccented vowel being very short. Soft vowel corresponding to ' y ' : (2) K) K), iO /o. Name: k). Value: [ju,-^u]. (In native Russian words this vowel never follows r, K, x, jk, q, m, m.) lOpbCBT. lOpbeeh [jiirj9f]i Dorpat {city) lor'b lOZh [jug,juk] south cioaa cioda [suda] hither ibHoma lOHoma [jtinAjA] a youth jiioSjiib /iiodjiio [lublli] I love lOCTiiuifl iocmui\iR [justitsJA] justice^ law HibxaTb Hioxamb [liiixAt] to smell {trans.) Fiord Fiozo [gugo] ^ Hugo 1 '10' always has the sound of u in ' use' = [ju, ul. As with 'y,' the corresponding hard vowel, the difference between ' K) ' accented and un- accented is one of quantity only. 2 '10' is used to transUterate French u and German u. XIII. (1) Id -h,!) z>. Name : ept, or TBepnBifi snaK'b (Jiard sign). Value: [none]. (This sign is never initial ; it never follows a vowel.) [brat] hrotlier [sad, sat] garden [Abjom] extent i size [jut] buffoon^ joker [isJ9vl6nJ8] testimony Examples will be given with each of the consonants showing the use of this hard sign, which was originally a vowel, but is really a superfluous char- acter in the modem tongue, for it merely indicates that the b, or soft sign, is not present. The distinction between zvh and Jib is particularly important (see Par. XX). SpaxT, caai, 6pamh cadh odheMh myx-b HStHBJieHie luymh \ ushHe/ieuie INTEODUCTION 23 qyxb Hymh rOBOpHTb zoeopumh CHAbl CRdb! Becb eecb MajieHbKift McuieubKiii JIIOGOBb jiio6oeb ji;eHb deub pyjKbe pyoiCb'e jibBa jibea pOJKb pOMCb (2) B b, L 6. Name : epb or MarKiii anaKi* {soft sign). Value: [ , j, or nil]. (This sign is never initial ; it never follows a vowel, or r, K, x.) [tju^t] 1 hardly [gAVAiit] ^ ix) speak [sa^t] 1 sit dovm ! [ves] 2 ally whole [mdldnki] ^ small [iub6if]3 love [de^n] ^ 6iai/ [ru3J6] * arm, rifle [iva]^ of the lion [roj] ^ ri/e ' b,' the soft sign, is very important, as it may not only alter the value of the consonant preceding, but very often, especially with H, Ji and x, may affect the preceding vowel. 1 The consonant preceding the b is softened by the suggestion of a very slight [ja], which however must not be made into an extra syllable. The consonants which show most clearly the difference between the effects of the hard and soft signs are Ji, H, T. Examples are given with the various consonants to illustrate this point, the effect of the soft sign being indicated by [ ]. 2 After some final consonants and when occurring between two consonants its effect is very slight, except in as far as it may modify the preceding vowel. ^ In many cases its effect is noticeable on the preceding vowel to which it adds a very short [I]. (Cf. French * Espagrwe.') When this effect is decided, it is marked in the transcript by [a^] [o^], etc. * When the b serves to separate clearly a vowel from the preceding consonant, it has been indicated by the use of [j]. 5 The absence of b in JibBa would indicate the hard [t] (see Par. XIII (1)). * After the consonants -m, q, m, m, the b has no effect. XIV. B 6 Bojirapifl 6^jiKa 6epi;e ayS-b 3bl6b 2 '6 B 6. Name: 6e. Value [b, b]. Eojizapin [bAtgariJA(rJA)]i Bulgaria 6y/iKa [butkA] ^ roll {of bread) depute [bortsa]^ shin, tibia 6eU! [bei]2 beat/ 3y6h [zup]^ tooth 3bi6b [zip]^ swell, ripple before any hard vowel sounds as 6 in ' &ooty,' = [b]. before any soft vowel sounds as 6 in ' 6eauty,' = [bj. ^ ' 6 ' final resembles p rather than b, = [p]. The distinction between 6t> and 6b is not perceptible. 24 INTEODUCTION B B, B e. Name: Be. Value : [v, v]. Beu^nm BeHei\iH 'v9ii6tsiJA (sja)] 2 Venice BijaaTb eudamb VidAt] 1 to betray BHTb eumb Vit]2 to wind BnacTb enacmb ^fpast] 3. 5 to fall in BT* KOMHaX-fe eh KOMHamm fkomiiAto] 3- 6 in the room POMaHOBT, PoMauoeh rAmanAf] * Rorrmnof JIIoGOBb jiiodoeb luboif ] 4 love BHyK-b enuKb ynuk]S grandson 1 ' b' before any hard vowel sounds as t; in ' t;an,' = [v]. 2 ' B ' before any soft vowel sounds as ?; in ' tdew,' = [v]. 3 ' B ' is sounded [f] before any voiceless consonant, i.e. before p, t, k, etc. There is no difficulty in making this distinction ; English-speaking people make it instinctively. * ' B ' when final = [f ]. The distinction between Bt and Bb when final is negligible, except in so far as the preceding vowel may be affected. ^ ' B ' is often initial before consonants. n n, il n. Name : ne. Value : [p, p]. nexp-b Ilemph [potr] 2 Peter nana nana [pdpA]i papa noji-b no/ih [poqi floor npiiiraxb npbizamb [prigAt] 1 to jump about nflTb nnmb [pait] 2 five nefi! neu! [pei] 2 drink ! nnxb numb [pit] 2 to drink cHon^ cHonrb [AsnApg] 2 about the sheaf nannpoca nannpoca [pApirosA] 1' 2 cigarette 1 ' n ' before consonants, "b, and hard vowels sounds as ^ in ' _pat,' = [p]. 2 ' n ' before b and soft vowels sounds as ^ in 'pure,' =[p]. The soften- ing before h is not so noticeable as before h, e, % e, K). O $, CD g6. Name : 3(|)T>. Value : [f, {\. Opannifl 4)aHTa3ifl $6pMa ^ap^dp-b ^ypajKKa ^liipKaTb $HJl6C0$'b paHi^m 0aHma3iH 0opMa 0ap0oph 0ypa:HCKa 0bipKamb 0UJlOCO0h [frantsiJA (sja)] [fAntaziJA(4JA)] [formA] [fArfor] [furdJkA] [firkAt] [fitoSAf] France fancy, imagination form porcelain uniform cap to snort philosopher $' has the value of English /in */ar,' =[f], or of /in 'few,' =[f]. INTRODUCTION 9 e, 9 e. Name: enxa. Value: [f, f]. 25 0e;i;opT> Q'edoph [fodAr] Theodore eoMa GoMa [fAma] Thomas KaecApa Kaeedpa [kdfedrA] pulpity teacher's desk Geccajiifl OeccajiiR [f9sdiiJA (ijA)] Thessaly GeocJ)!!:!^ Oeo0ujih [fAfit] Theophilus GHXa euma [fitd] nume of this letter This consonant appears only in a few words of Greek origin, and in many of these even it is often replaced by $, which has exactly the same phonetic value. XV. r r, r 2. Name : re. Value : [g, g rf.* (This letter is never followed by H, H, ] EG, b.) ToJiJiaHAiH FojiJiaHdiR [gAtandiJA (dJA)] ^'^ Holland rOBOpHTb eoeopumb [gAVAfit] 1 to speak Apyroii dpyeou [drugol] ^ other MHoro MH020 mnogA] ^ much, many Bpar-L epazh vrak] 2 enemy ffpyr-L dpyzh druk] 2 friend Bora Eoza bogA] 3 of God MflrKitt MRBKiU liiaxki] 4 soft 6oraTaro dozamaeo bAgdtAVA] s of rich 6ojibm6ro dojibmozo ;bAiij6vA] 6 large HOMamHflro dOMaiUHHZO dAmaJiiAVA] 5 domestic, tame caMoro caMozo "sAmAvol 5 self BliKTop'L Tiot6 Bunmoph Fweo [viktAr gugo] Victor Hugo rHHJIOH eHUjioii [gnitoi] 7 decayed 1 * r ' usu ally has the sound of grin 'grood,' =[g]. 2 * r ' when final has the sound of k, = [k]. 3 * r ' in a few words is a deep aspirated voiced guttural sometimes trans- literated by gh (the same as the initial g in Dutch or the aspirated German g in 'Segren'), =[g]. * Preceding a voiceless consonant (t, p, k, etc.), the sound described under (3) becomes voiceless like ch in ' loc^ ' or more exactly like ch in German *ic^,' =[x]. ^ In the genitive singular termination of masculine and neuter adjectives 'r'=[v]. There is no h in Russian, and although the consonant x is much nearer than r to h, this letter in foreign words has been generally transliterated by r, = [g]. The lo transliterates French u. ' ' r ' must always be pronounced, even when immediately preceding H. * In a very few words the dotted [g] has been used in the transcript, but the dis- tinction is not important. 26 INTRODUCTION K K, JT K. Name : Ka. Value : [k, k]. (This letter is never followed by H, H), bi, b.) [kitai] 1 [komnAtA] ^ [kvoHl 1 KhtM KdMHaxa Rumail KOMHama KBaCT, Keach KTb HCM^ KTb 66pery K'feM'B KHHra Kb HCMy Kb 6epezy KThMb KHuaa KpOTKitt Kpommii China room kvass toward him toward the shore with whom book gentle [knemu] ^ [gb6rogu] 2 [ksm] 3 [knigA] * [krotki] 5 ^ ' K ' usually has the sound of A; in ' A;ick,' = [k]. 2 There are in Russian several prepositions which consist of a single con- sonant prefixed to the noun, and pronounced as one word with the noun. Kt is such a preposition. In some cases, as before voiced consonants (b, d, V, etc.), where the clear sharp value of k is almost impossible, the pronunciation is faciUtated by taking [g] instead of [k]. 3 ' K ' before 'fe is pronounced as in ' iCew,' = [k]. * ' K ' must always be pronounced, even before H. ^ The termination iii is pronounced after gutturals with a slight rounding of the lips, but as this is not sufficient to warrant the use of [i] in the transcript, [i] has been used throughout. X X, Z X. Name : xa. Value : [x]. (This letter is never followed by fl, K), H, l.) XpHCT0(J)6p'b Xpucmo0oph [xristAfor] Christopher xfme xy^Mce [XU39] worse XHipbift xiimpbiii [xitri] cunning xpa6pi>ift xpaCpbiii [xrabri] brave oxoTHHKi) oxomuuKb [Axotnik] sportsman AByx-b deyxb [dvux] of two ' X ' has the sound of c^ in ' loc^,' or of softer ch in German * icA,' = [x]. XVI. J\n, a d. Name : He. Value : [d, d]. JlMlR JJamH [ddniJA (nJA)] ^ Denmark Ba dea [dva]i two H>iflH dndR [dadA] 2 uncle ntA-b dmdb [dst, dsd] 2. 3 grandfather 6yb! 6ydh! [biiit] 3 be! ^ ' 3; ' before a hard vowel has the sound of d! in ' t^one,' = [d]. 2 ' a ' before a soft vowel has the sound of c? in ' cZue,' = [d], 3 ' ' when final, before either the hard or the soft sign, approximates to the sound of i, = [t, t]. INTKODUCTION 27 T T, T m. Name: xe. Value : [t, t]. T^P^iH TypqiH ttirtsiJA (sJA)] 1 Turkey TaKt maKh ^tak] 1 so TBOii meoR tvAJa] 1 thy (Jem. sing.) Spaxt 6pamh ^rat] 1 brother dpaxb 6pamb 'hTO^i] 2 to take xpH mpu tri] 1 three xedii me6a. tabd] 2 thee, of thee MBIT-b Mhimb [mit]! washed MHTb Mbimb [mit]2 to wash =[t]. =[t]. before the hard sign or a hard vowel has the value of i in ' tool,' before the soft sign or a soft vowel has the value of < in ' fane,' Hn, IJ i^. Name : ne. Value : [ts, ts]. (This letter is never followed by K), fl, or by unaccented o, which is replaced by * e.') Uapbrpaai. Uaphzpadh [tsAifgrdt] 1 Constantinople ^apH^a i^apui^a [tSAi-itSA] 1 czarina ^BifeTB t^emmb [tSVSt]! colour, flower mino^KH t^binOHKU [tsipAtJki] 1 tip-toes miHHKT. V^UHUKh [tstnik] 1 cynic i;6pK0Bb i^epnoeb [tserkAf ] 2 church i^'fejibiii i\rhAbiii [tSSti]2 whole, entire ^ ' It ' has the sound of fs in ' hits,' = [ts]. 2 or the sound of ts in " it's useless," pronounced as one word, =[ts]. XVII. 3 3, 3 3. Name : 36. Value : [z, z]. SanaA-b 3anadh [zapAt] ^ West 3a6iiiTb 3a6bimb [zAbtt] 1 to forget BHaji-b anajib r *.n 1 znaij ^ he knew SB-fepb serbpb 'zv6ir]i wild beast 3flTb 3Hmb tdit] 2 son-in-law, or sister's BflSTb eR3h >as] 3 elm [husband BH3b en3b >ais] 3 binding ^ ' 3 ' normally has the sound of z in ' maze,' = [z]. 2 ' 3 ' before soft vowels has the value of 5 in " he sees you," =[i]. 3 ' 3 ' when final before hard sign = [s], before soft sign [s] or [s]. 28 INTRODUCTION C c, C c. Name : act. Value : [s, s]. CeBacTonojib Ceeacmonojib [savAstopA^i] 2 Sebastopc COJIb COJlb [so^i] 1 salt CTyjiT. cmyjih [stut] 1 chair CT. HHMt Cb HUMh [snim] 1 w;*7^ him cejia ceJia [soIa] 2 villages rdjiocb eo/ioch [g6}As] 3 ^;o^ce OCb OCb [os, os]3 aa;Ze 1 ' c ' normally has the value of ss in ' lo55,' = [s]. 2 ' c ' before soft vowels has the sound of 5 in * disunion,' = [s]. 3 Final 01. = [s] ; final Cb = [s] or [s]. XVIII.^ mm, m ui. Name : ma. Value : [J]. (This letter is never followed by fl, K), Li, or unaccented o.) [Jv6tsiJA (sja)] Sweden [jak] niB^mfl Uleei^iR mar-b uiazh mecTb luecmb 6amMaKii daiuManu mi^pe luupe Ham-b HOmh ^fembl ThlUb! mocc6 uiocce lUoTJiaHAlH UIomjiaHdiR SIX shoes broader our eat ! road [jest] [bAjmAki] [Jlre] [naj] [jej] [JAS6]\. , [jAttdndiJA (dJA)] ^ Scotland * m ' has the sound of sh in ' swi5^,' = [J]. Compared mth the correspond- ing EngUsh sound ' m ' is more mouth-filling, and before the vowel following this consonant there is just the suggestion of a [j]. It is, along with jk, q, m, regarded as by nature a soft consonant. ^ m may precede unaccented o in foreign words. UK m, }K a^. Name : me. Value : [3]. (This letter is never followed by H, 10, bi, or unaccented o.] JKyKdBCKlti TKymecKiu ;5uk6fski] 1 Zhukofsky wajK^a (Hca^Hcda 5a5dA] 1 thirst mUSlTy MCUAh ^5itp he lived nojiojKiiTb nojio^icumb pAtAgit] 1 to put, lay ji6}KKa Jiootcna 'tojkA] 2 spoon MyjK-b My^ncb "muj] 3 husband pojKb po:mb roJ] 3 rye 1 ' JK ' usually has the sound of s in ' measure,' =[^]. 2 ' JK ' before voiceless consonants (p, t, k, etc.) has the sound of sh in * swis^,' = [J]. 3 Final jkt. or jKb=[n. * The French name for the consonants dealt with in this paragraph, chuintants, best describes them. INTKODUCTION H q, I/. Name : ne. Value : [tS]. (This letter is never followed by a, K), li, or unaccented o.) 29 HexoBt Hexoeh [tjSXAf] Tchechof Hdft nail tjai] tea qepeai. uepeah ;tJ6r9s] through Mor^qifl Moeyuiil mAgtitJi] powerful cypr^qt cypzyHh Wgutj] sealing-wax JI CHb JlBHh letj] to lie down HTO umo Jto, tjto] 1 what HOpTT. Hopmh ;t|ort] devil qepHbiii HepHhiii [tjorni] black ' q ' is pronounced like ch in ' c^at,' = [t J]. Like jk, m, m, this letter is regarded as by nature a soft consonant. ^ Occasionally the ' h ' is heard without the [t] element. m m, ZZ( u/. Name : ma. Value : [StS]. (This letter is never followed by fl, K), bi, or unaccented o.) m^nKHH-b meriKUHh [JtJ6pkin] Shtshepkin ll^li mu [Jtji]. cabbage soup mejib li{eAh [jtjeil] crevice JKCHmnna diceninuHa [S^njtjin..] woman SpojKamia dpooicau^iii [drAsaJtJi] trembling Sopm-b 6opiJHh [borjtj] beetroot soup Momb MOlL^b [mojtj] power m^Ka iL^yna [jtjukA] pike {fish) mcKa mena [Jtj9ka] cheek 'm' is the equivalent of m + q, i.e. foolish chatter,' or * As^c^urch ' = [Jtj]. it has the sound of shch in XIX. M M, M M. Name : : SMT,. Value: [m, lii]. MocKBa Mocnea 'mAskvd] ^ Moscow MblTTTb MbllUb mij] 1 mouse Mosr-b M03Zh mosk] ^ brain, marrotv cojioMa cojioMa SAtonLAJ ^ straw MHJIO MUJIO IhitA] 2 dear, nice MeflTb Medh mot] 2 honey M'fecflU'b Mrbcm^h ^m6s9ts] 2 month, moon MOMCHT-b MOMeHnVb ^moihsnt] ^' 2 moment ^ ' M ' before hard vowels has the soxmd of English m in ' mass,' = [m]. 2 ' M ' before soft vowels has the sound of EngUsh m in * muse,' = [m]. 30 INTKODUCTION H H, if H. Name: bht*. Value : [n, n]. KHKOJiaii HuKOAau [nikAtai] 2 Nicholas HyjKa HMH-fe Hy^Hcda HblHTb nu5da] i nin9]i.2 need nowadays bohtjI eoHh! von] 1 away I Hibxaxb Hjoxamh [ni'ixAt] 2 to smell {trans.) HHTb Humb [nit] 2 thread ncHb MOHT^Hb HaKaH^H-fe mapMaHKa deHb MoHmdHb HanaHyHTh UiapMaHKa ^dein] 2 montd^n] 2 nAkAnuna] ^'2 jarmdnkA] ^ day Montaigne eve, day before barrel-organ ^ ' H ' before -l and hard vowels has the sound of n in ' none,' = [n]. 2 ' H ' before b and soft vowels has the value of ?i in ' Tiew,' = [n]. ^ ' H ' before k and r does not take the value of English ng, but retains the sound [n]. XX. Jl Ji :, Jl Jl. JName : : 3Jn>, 3Jib. Value : Lt, 1]. JlanjiaHAlH JlaiuiaHdia. [taptdndiJA(dJA)]i Lapland Jiana jiana [tdpA]l paw ji^naTb jinnamb [idpAt] 2 to smack Ji^quie jiynuie [tut jo] 1 better jirbSHUib jiio6mub [iubij] 2 thou lovest 3JI0H 3J10U. [ztoi]i spiteful, wicked sejieHbitt se/ieHbiii > [zoiom] 2 green njiaMfi WiaMR [ptdriiA] 1 flame 6ojibm6ft 60JIUIOU [bAiij6i]2 big A-fejiajiocb drbjiajiocb [dstAtAS] 1 it was done yHHTCJIb ynumejib [ut jitai] 2 teacher CTOJIt cmo/ib [stot] 1 table CTOJIb cmoAb [St0il]2 so ^roji-L yzojih [ugAt]i corner :y^rojib y 20 Jib [ugAii]2 coal ' JI ' has two sounds which are so distinct that they require the use of different symbols. ^ Hard ' Ji ' has a sound akin to that of I in English ' battte,' ' peopfe.' In Russian it occurs in any position, and may be produced by pronouncing I with the tip of the tongue drawn back so as to touch the upper palate just behind the teeth; =[t]. Tliis sound never precedes b or any soft vowel. 2 Soft * JI ' is sounded like I in EngUsh ' mi^^ion ' ; = [1]. This sound never precedes "b or any hard vowel. INTEODUCTION 31 p p. -P p. Name : ap-L. Value : [r, f]. Poccffl Poccia [rAsiJA] 1 Russia pa^'b padh [rad, rat] i glad pflflt padh [rad, rat] ^ roWy rank pyKa pyna [ruka] 1 hand, arm pibMKa pwMKa [ri-imkA] 2 wine-glass K6pKa Kopna [korkA] 1 shell, rind p^aaxb pvbsamh [rszAt] 2 to cut Benpo eedpo [V9dr6] 1 pail r6pbKift zophKiu [g6irki]2 hitter nopT) noph [por]i of times Ten^pb meuepb [tep^ir] 2 now ^ ' p ' is never silent and never uvular. It is distinctly trilled, as in Northern English ' were,' ' JSussia,' = [r]. 2 Preceding b or any soft vowel, ' p ' is pronounced as in English ' Harnet,' but rather more softly, =[r]. XXI. In ordinary Kussian books accents are not used. It is in Russian, as in Englisli, important to learn with every word the tonic accent. A difference in accentuation sometimes distinguishes to the ear words that in print are identical in appear- ance, e.g. : 6ijiKa [bstk.v] squirrel SifejiKa [betkd] of the white (of the eye, or egg) BCApo [v6drA] fine weather Bejipo [vadro] pail BOpOTT. [vorAt] collar BOpOTT, [vArot] of a gate op6roH [dArogAl] on the way AoporoH [dArAgoi] dear jKapKoe [SarkAJa] hot H^apKoe [3Ark6J9] roast meat saMOK-b [zdmAk] castle BaMOKT. [zAm6k] lock- Kanejib [kapai] of drops Kanejib [kAp^^i] chapel KpOK) [kroju] I cover KpOK) [kTAJli] I cut MOID [moju] I wash MOlb [mAJii] my {fern, ace.) M^Ka [mukA] torture MyKa [muka] flour Haqajio [UAtJatA] beginning Hanajio [UAtjAto] it began njiaqy [ptatju] I weep njiaqy [ptAtJti] I pay nojibi [poll] sexes nojibi [pAtl] floors copoKa [sArokA] magpie copoKa [sArAka] of forty CTdviT-b [stoit] it costs CTOHT'b FstAit] it stands ^me [U39] narrower yme [U3S] already ^xa [tiXA] of the ear yxa [uxa] flsh soup 32 INTEODUCTION XXII. Kussian is richly endowed with prepositions and particles, but it is a highly inflected language, i.e, the relations between words are indicated by modifications in the form of termination and stem. For this reason, no doubt, the word-order, though by no means a matter of absolute indifference, is not so rigid as in English. The total number of diflerent inflections is, however, small ; the principal ones are given in the following summary of regular forms. SUMMARY OF REGULAR FORMS NOUNS Masculines Hard Form 8oft Forms Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. nom. Ty BI Vl H b H gen. a 0BT> fl est H ett dat. y SLWb H) flM-b K) flM-L ace. L or a bi or OB-b H or fl H or CBT, b or H H or en instr. OMt aMH CM-L flMH CM-L flMH prep. 'fe axTb -fe flX'L h flX'L (See Lessons IX, LV.) Femtnines Hard Form Soft Forms Sing. a Plur. LI Sing. Plur. H Sing. b Pll H ir. nom. H iH gen. M Ty H in L(H)1 H CH [ dat. * aMTi * in flMT. H flM-B ace. y LI or -b 1 lO iK) HOTL (fi)l b H or eft instr. OK), OH aMH eK),eH ieio(eH) hmh bK) flMH (LMH) prep. -h axi) ^ in 2 flXT, H flX'L (L essons XII, XVII, XXII, Voc. XXXIV.) Neuters Hard Form , Soft Forms Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. nom. a e H Mfl MCHa gen. a -b H CH (fl) 1 MCHH MCH'L dat. y aMt K) HMT) MeUH McnaM'L ace. a e H Mfl Mcna instr. OWb aMH CM-L aMH MCHeMTj McnaMH prep. -h axTb fe (h) 2 flX-L MCHH Mcnax'L (Se BLe ssons IX and LIII.) ^ ift is the gen. pi. termination of nouns in -Ih and -ie. 2 in is the prep. sing, termination of nouns in -Ih and -ie. INTRODUCTION 33 ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVES Singular Plural M. F. N. M. F. N. nom. aro afl oe aro He biH bifl gen. bix-b dat. OMy oft OMy blMT. aco. Hii or aro yio oe nom. or gen. instr. JblM-B oVl (ok)) hlWh bIMH prep. OM-L oft OM^ MXT, (Lesson XXIII.) Variants : 6tt, ^fl, 6e (Lesson XXIII). ia, HH, ee ( XXIV). Kitt, KaH, Koe ( XXV). mift, man, mee ( XXVI). PREDICATIVE ADJECTIVES Nom. Case "b, a, o, bi (Lesson XLIX and Lists, Par. 237). COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES Comparative in --fee. Lists of comparatives in -e at Par. 238. Most useful form of attributive comparative : doji'fee + positive degree. Most useful form of superlative : caMbifi + positive degree. (See Lesson L.) ADVERBS Typical form derived from the adjective ends in -o or -e. (See Par. 189 (1) and lists of predicative adjectives and comparatives.) PRONOUNS Personal (Pars. 47 A, 69, 125, 126). Emphatic (Pars. 107 c, 235). Possessive (Pars. 104, 105, 108, 109). Reflexive (Pars. 38, 103, 132). Relative and interrogative (Pars. 47 D, 106). Demonstrative (Pars. 47 C, 106, 107). Indefinite (Pars. 47 E, 106). NUMERALS Cardinals (Par. 27, Voc. XXXVI, Pars. 148, 160, 166). Ordinals (Pars. 166, 171, 184). Declension (Lesson XLVII). 34 INTEODUCTION VERBS 6litl1 = To be Past Tense Sing. 1st, 2nd, 3rd persons, CwJit, A, (see Pars. 9, 58). Plur. 1st, 2nd, 3rd persons, 6biJlH. Present Tense Srd Sing. ecTB. 3rd Plur. cyxb (very little used). Future Tense Sing. 6^Hy, enib, ex-B. Plur. Ofj^ewbf CTe, yxTb. Imperative (Lesson LII) Sing. 6y3b, nycxb OH-b (oh^, oh6) 6fjieTT>. Plur. C^ACM-b, S^AbTe, nycxb ohh (oH-fe) dyAyxi.. Participles Adjectival ' Adverbial Pres. cy^mift, being, that is. 6fjiy^u, being, while being. Past SbiBiniii, having been, that once Gi^iemH, having been, after having was. been. Fut. Cyaymitt, about to be, that is to be, future. REGULAR VERB First Conjugation Type H'fejiaTb (Stem a-fejia-) or naxaxb (Stem nam-, nax-) IMPEBFECTIVE ASPECT PERFECTIVE ASPECT (See Pars. 202-208.) Past Tense ^ Sing, jitj, Jia, Jio ; Plur. jih. Similar endings. Present Tense Sing. K) or y, eiiib, ex'b. No present. Plur. eMTj, exe, lox-b or yxx,. (Lessons XXXV, XLII-XLIV.) ^* Future Tense Future of Gbixb + infinitive. Endings as for the endings of the (Lesson XXXII.) imperfective present tense.^ ^ 6BiB^Tb, to be usually the case, is a regular verb of the 1st conjugation. 2 This tense corresponds to the Imperfect, Perfect, and Pluperfect in other languages, and has to be rendered accordiag to the context by any one of these forms. ' The perfective aspect may belong to the First or Second Conjugation. INTRODUCTION 35 IMPERFEOTIVE ASPECT PERFECTIVE ASPECT Imperative Mood 2nd Sing, ft, H, b (one of these). Similar endings. 2nd Plur. ftTe, htc, hie. (Lesson LII.) Participles have been indicated but not thoroughly discussed in this book (see Preface). (Notes to Pars. 80, 96, 131, 139, 167). Adjectival Participles Pres, (active) -lomift, -ymift, formed No present participle, from 3rd plur. pres. tense, ' one who is doing. ^ (passive) -CMLifi, from 1st plur. No present participle, pres., ' one that is suffering the action.^ Past (active) -Bmiii, from sing, of past -Binifi. r,. tense, ' one who has done.' (passive) -hhlih, sometimes -HHbiii or -tuPl. -Tbiii, from sing, of past tense, ' one that has suffered the action.' Adverbial Participles Pres. -H, -a, from 3rd plur. pres., No present. * doing,' * while doing.' Past -BTb or -(B)mH, from sing, of past -b-b or -buih. tense, ' having done.' Second Conjugation Type roBopiiTb (Stem roBopn-) Has endings like those of the First Conjugation except in the present tense, which has Sing. K) or y, Hinb, ht-b. Plur. HM-b, HTC, HT-b or SLTh (see Lessons XXXVII-XXXIX). The present participle active has -Hmifi or -amitt. The present participle passive has -HMblft. The p:^fective aspect may be of the First or Second Conjugation. Passive Voice Apart from the Passive Participles indicated above there is no Passive Voice (Par. 102). SUGGESTIONS FOR THE USE OF THIS BOOK Naturally tlie first one is that the book should be used as it stands. But many may not care to spend so long as is required by this method before extending their knowledge of the verb beyond the infinitive and past tense. For them the following suggestions will be useful. (1) As far as the end of Lesson VIII nothing outside the scheme of Lessons I-VIII should be taken up. (2) Attention is drawn to the summary of regular forms, pp. 3235. (3) After Lesson VIII, Pars. 123, 124 of Lesson XXXII may be learned and the future tense be practised with any verb marked A. (4) After Lesson XIV, Par. 131 of Lesson XXXV may be learned and the present tense of any verb marked (131) be practised. (5) After Lesson XXI, Par. 211 (gen. rule) of Lesson LII may be learned and the imperative of any verb marked (131) be practised. But the exact value of the imperative will be appreciated only after reading Lesson LI. (6) It will tend to clearness and ultimate progress if the present tense of any other t3rpe than stjiaxb be left severely alone till after Lesson XXXI. (7) Certain Lessons, namely XL VII, XL VIII, XLIX, L, may be read at any time after Lesson XX, and the principles applied, though, of course, the exercises in these lessons cannot be done satis- factorily until everything that precedes them has been learned, for all that is assumed in them. (8) The predicative form of every adjective that occurs in the lessons and is used in that form (see Lesson XLIX) will be found in the lists in Par. 237. (9) The lesson on the Aspects (LI) may be read at any time, but its principles cannot be profitably applied till the present tense of all the main types has been mastered. (10) Illustrations of the script and phonetic transcript of the Eussian exercises will be found at pp. 190, 194. The student working without a teacher might find it profitable, after studying each lesson, to write out the transcript in ordinary Eussian script, and compare his version with the original exercise. LESSON 1 1 1. There is no article in Kussian. 2. There are two numbers, Singular and Plural. 3. Gender is not determined by natural sex, but names of males are generally Masculine and names of females are generally Feminine. Names of things or abstractions may be Masculine, Feminine, or Neuter. As a rule the form of a noun determines its gender. 4. The typical masculine noun ends in the Nominative Singular in -T>, e.g. CBiH'B [sin], a son, the son, son. 5. The nominative singular masculine of the attributive adjective ends in -bih or -oii, e.g. CTapuft MyjKHK'L [stari mu3ik], the {an) old peasant. MOJiojiioii OT^u'L [roAtAdoI Atsts], the (a) young father. 6. If the adjective ends in -oh, the termination is always accented. The termination -Lift is not accented. 7. In the phrase He is an old man, the present tense of the verb " to be " is not used in Eussian, so that Oh-l CTapBiH My^KHK-B [on stari mu5ik] means He is an old peasant. Ohx rji;^nHfi qejiOB'feK'b [on gtiipi tJatAvek] means He is a stupid man. 8. The negative form of these phrases is : Ohi. He cxapLift MyjKHKT* [on no stari mu5ik]. He is not an old peasant. OhT) He rji^HLift HCJiOB'feK'B [on n9 gMpi tJotAvek], He is not a stupid man. The dash is often used to replace the present tense of " to be " understood. ^ A word enclosed in round brackets ( ) need not be translated. The vocab- ulary of nouns and verbs in the first eight lessons has been deliberately restricted to a small number of words. 37 38 LESSON II 9-11 Vocabulary Jl'hj^'h [dsd (t)], grandfather cjiaSbitt [stabi], weak CbiHi) [sin], son ciiJibRbiii [siini], strcmg, powerful noM'b [dom], house rjiynbifi [gtiipi], stupid Ji-fecb [ies], wood, forest ^y^MHbiii [dmiuj, intelligent XJi-feS-b [xisp], bread, corn S-fejibiti [bsti], white M^Jib^HK-b [maiitjik], boy HepHbift [tjorm], black qejiOB'feK'b [tJetAvsk], man HoSpbiH [dobri], good (kind) OTCi^'b [Atsts'], father njioxofi [ptAxoi], bad Ham-b [naj], our cxapbifi [stari], old BauiTj [vaj], your MOJionoH [mAtAdoi], young H [i], and He [ns, ne, na], not a^ [a], but, and Exercise Translate : (1) GTapbiH A'feH'L. (2) Hami) 0x61^11. (3) On-b cjiaSbiii cxapbiH HCjioB'feK'b. (4) B'fejibiH xji-fed-b H qepHbiii xji-feS-b. (5) Bam-b cbm-b clijibHbiii MOJio^dft MajibHHK-b. (6) HepHbifi Ji-fecb. (7) Oht, njioxoft M^jib^HK-b. (8) Haui-b cbiH-b rji^nbiii, a eam-b cbiH-b ^mhhh M^jib- HVLKTy, (9) Gxapbltt KOMT). (10) HSiUYb JSfkjS.'h HerjI^Hblii ^ qejIOB'feK'b. BaUVb CblHh yMHblii Ma/lbHUKh. LESSON II 9. The past tense of Kussian verbs is peculiar in this respect, that it agrees with the subject in gender and number, while it does not vary with the person, i.e. there is one form of the past tense which is always found with a masculine singular subject, whether that subject be of the first, second or third person, e.g. H jli'fejiaji'b [ja dstAt], / used to do, I did do, I was doin^. Tbi ^ K'fejiaji'b [ti dgtAt], thou didst use to do, thou didst, thou wast doing. Owh jii'fejiaji'b [on dstAt], he used to do, etc. Ham-b Cbm-b A'fejiaji'b [naj sin dstAt], Our son used, etc. 10. This verb corresponds either to did do or made. It will be observed that this masculine past tense ends like the noun in -t. 11. The negative form is : H He rfjiajiX) [ja na dstAt], / did not do, or make. 1 This word may often be translated by and, but it always has adversative force. 2 Instead of making the verb negative the Russian often makes the adjective or adverb negative. * Familiar second personal pronoun used only among intimates and children. 12-13 LESSON II 39 12. In interrogative sentences the particle jih is used, e.g. JX^JiasiTj JIH ohtj? [detAt ii on ?], Did he do, or make ? Was he doing f Tbi jih n^Jiajit? [ti ii dstAt ?], Didst thou do, etc. ? 13. This particle is not required if there is in the sentence an interrogative word like who ? what ? how ? when ? e.g. Hto OHt n-fejiajit? [Jto on detAt ?], What did he do? Kto a-fejiaji-L 5to? [xto detAt stA ^\Who used to do this (or that) ? or Kto 5to A'fejiaJi'b? [xto stA detA-t T\]who was doing this (or that) ? Kyna Tbi X0HHjn>? [kudd ti xAdit ?], Whither did you use to go ? KaKOBt 6bijn> qejiOB'feK'b? [kAkof bil tJetAvsk ?], What like was the man f i.e. What sort of a man was he ? What manner of man was he ? Vocabulary As the adverbs and pronouns given in this Vocabulary will recur again and again in succeeding lessons, it is not necessary to commit them all to memory before attempting Exercise II. For explanation of figure or letter A with verbs iji this and following vocabularies see Suggestions 3-6, p. 36. Gujii* [bil], was, used to he toti> [tot], that (to, neuter form) jKHJit A [sit], lived, was living, used kto? [xto], wTw ? to live HTO? [tjto, Jto], whit ? ^zvh A [jet], ate, etc. KaKOB-B? [kAkof], of what sort ? cnajn> A [spat], slejpt, etc. KaK'L? [kak], how ? H'fejiaji'L 131 A [detAt], did, made, etc. TaKt [tak], so BHajiT. 131 A [znat], knew, etc. TaKon [tAkoi], such, such a XOAHJI'B A [xAdit], used to go bot-b [vot], there is ! there are ! see 1 nrpajiT) 131 A [igrdt], played FA'S [gds, gds], where (with verbs of upBiraJiT. 131 A [prigAt], jumped rest) about KyAa [kudd], where, whither (with paSoTaji'B 131 A [rAbotAt], worked verbs of motion) fl [ja], / Korna [kAgdd], when mdVi [mol], my, mine wh [v, f], into TBI [ti], thou, you (this pronoun is b^ Ji'fec'B [vlss], into the wood used only in familiar discourse) xopouio [xArAJo], well TBoft [tvoi], thy, thine njioxo [ploxA], badly OKI, [on], he, it ho [no, ua], but ero [J8v6], him, it (direct object) MHoro [mnogA], much ero [J9v6], of him, his, its HeMH6ro [nomnogA], {a) little ^TOTT* [stAt] (m.), this, that, that one Ji-fexoM-B [IstAm], in summer (^TO, neuter form) SHMOtt [zimoi], in winter 40 LESSON II 13 Exercises A. Translate : (1) Bam-L Ji-hjiii Gbijitj cxapLitt qejioB-feKt. (2) SumoVi owb paCoxaji-b HeMH6ro; oh-b cnaji-b. (3) H xopom6 snajit qepntitt HOMT, (see Par. 16 (2)), r^-fe oht, jkhjii> 3HM6i4. (4) Hamt OT^iXb Smji-l He TaKoft cjiaGbm qejioB'feK'b. (5) Jl-feTOM-L oh-l xoahji-l b-b Jiifecb, rjifb owb MH6ro paGoxajit. (6) Ero cbiH-b Oliji'l ;^MHbii! MajibHHK-b. (7) JlibTOMTj OH-b HrpajiB H npi^iraji-b. (8) Ho oht. ObiJi-b Herji^nbifti MajibHHK-b. (9) TA-fe OH-b nrpaji-b 3hm6h? (10) Tbi HeMHoro padoxajiB bhmoh; xh He xoahjib B-b Ji-fecb. (11) ^xoxx) Majib^HKB -feji-b 6ijibiH xjiifeSB. (12) Tbi xopouio BHajiB Ham-b aomb. (13) Tbi er6 snaji-b. (14) Mofi mojio6h cbin-b anajiB XBOii aomtj. (15) BOXX, MOtt CblHX,. (16) B0XT> OH-b. Mou. MOJiodou cbiHh ana/ih meoii doMh. B. Bonpocbi {= questions). This rather mechanical exercise serves a twofold purpose : it affords practice in the interrogative forms and repeats the vocabulary and phrases of Exercise A. (1) Kxo 6bijn> cxapbiii qejioB'feKB? (2) Hxo ohx> a^Jiajix. 3HM6fi? (3) K^Kx> H anaji-b somi>, r^-fe >khjix> Bamx, n-fea-b? (4) Kxo h6 6bijn> xaKOH cjia6biH? (5) Kyjia ohb xonHjn>? (6) Kor^^ OH-b xojiiijib B-b Ji-fecx)? (7) KaKOBB SbiJiB er6 CbiHx.? (8) Hxo ohx> ^'fejiaji'b? (9) Hxo ifeji-b MajibqHK-b? (10) 3Hajix> jih h xBott aoMT>? [say, *you knew it'). C. Translate into Russian : (1) Our father was a strong young man. (2) He did not sleep much. (3) In winter my old grandfather slept but my father worked a great deal. (4) He worked and {use conj. a) his young son plaj'-ed. (5) In summer the boy used to go into the wood, where your grandfather lived. (6) Whither did the boy go ? (Whither the boy went ?) (7) Your intelhgent son well knew my old house. (8) He was a young boy ; summer and winter he played and jumped about. (9) Was he a stupid and bad man ? (10) What did you eat ? {say here, ' thou didst eat, i.e. atest '). (11) I ate the white bread. (12) What did the boy do in winter ? (13) What was the man like ? (14) He was a kind intelligent man. ^ Form described in Par. 69 is also common. 14-18 LESSON III 41 LESSON III 14. The genitive case of nouns in -T* ends in -a, e.g. npyr-B, Hp;^ra [druk] [driigA], /newd CTapiiK-L, CTapHKa [stArlk] [stArikd], old man. (a) Some words preserve througliout the singular the accent of the nominative singular, like apyrij. To this class belong all the nouns in Vocabulary I except oxeu'b. (6) Some words do not have the accent in the oblique cases on the same syllable as in the nominative. To this class belongs the word oxei^t, OTuia [Atsts] Utsa], father. Note. This word, like many other masculine nouns with e or o in the final syllable of the nominative singular, drops that vowel in all the other cases. 15. The dative case of nouns in -t> ends in -y, e.g. Apyr-L, p:^ry [druk] [drdgu], /ne?wi. CTapHKT>, CTapHK^ [stAiik] [stAriku], old man. OT^U'b, OTU^ [Atets] [KiB [druk] Jiowb [dom] gen. Ap:y^ra [drugA] a^Ma [domA] dat. Apyry [drdgu] AOMy [domu] ace. spyra [drtigA] ji,owb [dom] 18. In the phrase B'b Jii^CL, into the wood, Jii^cb is the accusa tive case after the preposition bt>. 42 LESSON III 19-21 19. Tlie genitive means * of a thing or person.' It corresponds to our possessive case, e.g. cani, MyjKHK^ [sad (sat) musikd], the garden of the peasant, the peasant's garden. 20. The dative means ' to a thing or person.' It is used after verbs oi giving, saying, etc. to indicate the indirect object, e.g. Ont ABJiTb MajibHHKy xji-feS-b [on dat mailtjiku xisp], He gave the boy the bread. 21. The genitive and dative of pronouns used in this lesson are : from fl TM OHt OHiS KTO ( ^TOTt \ 5to TOTt HTO (a) meiiA^ [rhana], of me (6) uwh [mns], to me, Te6ii 1 [t8bd], of thee Te6i [tabe], to thee, ero 1 [J9v6], o/ Mm, his euf [jamii], ?o Mm, HXT, 1 [jix], o/ ^m, their hmt. [jim], to ^^m, K6r6? ^ [kAvo], o/ ii?^m ? whose ? kom^? [kAmu], to whom ? ^Toro 1 [stAVA], of this ^TOMy [stAmu], to this, Tor6 1 [tAv6], of thil Touf [tAmti], to that, Her6? [tj9v6], of what ? qcM^? [t/amu], to w;;ia ? VOCABULAEY 6p^Ti>, a 2 [brat], brother BufKTi, a [vnuk], grandson apyrij, a [druk], /nerifi oropoAt, a [AgAr6t], kitchen- garden, orchard caaij, a [sad, sat], garden CTapi^Kt, a [stArik], art oZ^i maw MywHK-L, a [mu5ik], a peasant Ciipi), a [sir], cheese juajit [dot], gave CKaaajTb [skAzdt], said; told noKasaJii. [pAk.\zat], showed roBopi^[jn> A [gAVAfft], spoke Ten6pb [tap6*r], now HHKorfla [iiikAgda], nsver Tor^a [tAgda], then TaMt [tarn], there BjlfloCh [zdes (s)], here OHeuh [otjen], very ^T0 [tjto, Jto], that (conjunction) no-p^ccKH [pArtiski], Russian, in Russian no-aHrjiificKH [pAongifski or pAon- giiski], {in) English Owh HHKorAa hc^ roBopHjn> no-p;^ccKH [on nikAgdd n9 gAVAflt pATuski], He never spoke Russian. 1 Are also accusatives. Sxoro and Tor6 are used as the accusative only of animate beings. 2 When, in the Vocabulary, the genitive termination is not accented, the accent falls throughout as in the nominative singular. ^ Notice the double negative used in the Russian form for he never, etc. So with all negative adverbs and indefinite pronouns. 21 LESSON III 43 Exercises A. Give tlie genitive, dative, and accusative of CBIH'B, XJI'feC'b, M^JIbHHKt, CTapi^KT., OT^lXby H, OH'b, KTO. B. Translate : (1) M^jibqHK'b aajiT* exapHK^ tot-b qepHHft xjiifeGt. (2) TboK HoSpMft OT^JXb noKaa^jit Mwh TBoii cani. h oropoA-L. (3) Bairnb BHyK-L uhi'h CKas^ji-B 5to. (4) Ohtj MeH>i hc simsi-b. (5) H Te6it He SHajiTj. (6) Ero ^mhhh chht> noKaaajit ie6'k Mott CTapLitt aomt*. (7) H noKasaji-B cilHy 6'^jiuVl aom-l Spaxa. (8) 5to He S-fejibift, a HepHbia xji-feS-b. ^(19) H najiT) cm^ Bami* Cbip-b. (10) OH'b ero "fejii*. (11) Hx-b Spax-b YoBopHJi-b xopomo no-pyccKH, ho OH'b roBopiijiXi xoraa oqeHb hjioxo no-anrjiiiieKH. (12) Tn'fe Bam-b ox^n-b? (13) Ohx> xenepb a^'fecb. (14) JI'fexoMT. CHJibHbift MyjKHK'b xoA^Ji'b Bx. Ji-fecX); OHx> xaMx> pa66xajix>. (15) TBoft BHyKX> noKa3ajix> MH-fe orop6ax> oxna. (16) Hami. npyrx> 6biJii> xor^a MOJioffoii, a oht, xen6pb cx^pbiii HejiOB'feKx>. (17) H xopom6 sHajix. cx^pbitt flOMX>, rji'h JKHjix> cxapiiKX>. (18) Tbi HHKoraa ne paCoxajn*. C. BonpocBi: (1) KoM^ MajibqHKx> najix> Hepnbiii xji^6i)? (2) ^xo ohx> cm^ a^jn>? (3) Hxo MH-fe noKa3ajn> XBoii ox6nx>? (4) Hxo MH-fe cnaaaji'b Bann> bh^k-b? (5) Hxo xeS-fe noKa3^jn> er6 cbiHX>? (6) Kom;^ h noKa3ajix> ^omx. 6paxa? (7) Hxo ohx> 'fejix>? (8) Kxo roBopiijix> xopomo no-pyccKH? (9) KaKX> oht. roBopiiJix> xorj];a no-aHrjiificKH? (10) Kyjia xoAiijn> ji'fexoMx> cxapbiii My>KHKx>? (11) Hxo ohi. Tawb n-fejiajii.? (12) Hxo MU'h noKa3ajix> XBoii BnyKX.? Hyda xodu/ih jirbmoMh cmapbiii My^cuKb? D. Translate into Russian : (1) The brother's garden ; the peasant's kitchen-garden ; the father's house ; to the old man's son ; he is an intelligent boy ; that is his white house ; your black bread ; did he know that ? what did he do in summer ? he used to go into the wood ; I said to the boy's friend ; I spoke English badly then. (2) To him, to me, of thee, of them, to whom, of that, I showed him that. (3) There he is ; there is the old man ; he was never there. (4) He showed me your garden. Who was speaking ? I did not know where he (was). Their son gave them your old house. To whom did he give it ? He said that you (were) there. [Xm 44 LESSON IV 22-26 LESSON IV 22. The genitive is also used after many prepositions, e.g. y [u], at. 23. y OTUia. [u Atsa] means at the father' Sy i.e. at his house, at his place of business, in his possession, near him. y MCHii [u riiand] means in my possession, at my house, etc. 24. (a) The form most frequently used to express our verb to have is a combination of the phrase in Par. 23 with the requisite tense of the verb " to be," e.g. (1) y oxna Shjii. MOJioaoii chh-l [u Atsa bit mAtAdoI sin], The father had a young son. (2) y MyjKHKa 6i>ijn> cxapbifi hom'B [u mu5ika bit stari dom], The peasant had an old house. , (3) y Hero Shjite. ;^MHHfi Spax-L [u navo bit timni brat], He had an intelligent brother. (4) y HHXt dbiJi-B xopomitt xji-fedi. [u nfx bit xAr6Ji xisp], They had the good bread, ^t^ (h) To s^HRe present tense of the phrases in (a) the verb is simply omjWa, e.g. y OT^j^pMOJiOAoft CLIH-L [u Atso niAtAd6i sin], The father has a young son. (c) The usual interrogative form is : BBun. Ji^ y Hero? etc. [bil ii u navo]. Was there to him ? i.e. Had he ? EcTb JiH y Hero xji'feO'L? etc. [jest ii u n8v6 xisp ?], Is there to him, i.e. Has he the bread ? 25. In examples (3) and (4) of the last paragraph notice y Hero and y hhx'B. The obUque cases of the third personal pronoun when governed by any preposition always have this H prefixed. We say y Hero [u ngvo], in his 'possession, etc., but y ero OTi^a [u jovo Atsa], in his father^ s possession, because it is oma, not ero, that is governed by the preposition. VOCABULAKY xopomiii [xAroJi], good (the most oanamAbi [Adnasdi], once general equivalent) pasT. [raz, ras], once 3ji;op6Bbiii [zdArovi], healthy ji;jih [dia, diA], /or ") govern the SojibHott [bA^inoi], ill, sick Sea-b [bss, bos], without Y^ . . q^CTO [tJastA], often y [u], at i ^ eCTb [jest], there is, there are, there exist 26 LESSON V 45 ^ ^ , EXEECISES A. Translate : (1) ]J,Jifi Majib^HKa. (2) Besi, cxapHK^. (3) Y ap^ra. (4) V Hero. (5) JXsin Menn; y HHXTb; hjih tcSh. (6) J^jih Kor6? (7) y Kor6? (8) BesT, tcSh. (9) y oma. (10) J^jih OTua. (11) r* atHjn> 66pBm cx^pbifi Jipyrt OT^a? (12) Hto cm^ aajii. TBOtt ot^htj? (13) OnHa>Kbi OH-b Aajii nejioB'feKy xopomiii d-fejitm aomt.. (14) KoM^ OH-b CKaa^ji-b 6to? (15) JI-fexoM-b ^tott, MajibHHK'b dbiji-b qacTo y MyjKHKa. (16) Tor^a Bami. ;^MHbiii npyr-b jKHJi-b s^ifecb. (17) 3hm6h[ CMH'b TaM-b padoxaji-b Sea-b OTita. (18) Tbi xopomo anajii. 5to. (19) Bpax-b oxua CKasaji-b hmi. 5xo. (20) Kyjta MajibHHK'b qacxo xo^HJiTb ji-fexoMX.? (21) Mo^ MOJioAott BHyK-b xen6pb y Mena. (22) Kxo SbiJi-b xorAa y Te6A'> (23) y uenA aa-fecb noSpbiii Apyr-b. (24) y ^xoro My>KHKa SbiJi-b qepHbiii xji-fedx.. (26) Gbip-b h6 sjih xe6ii, a sjih hhxx.. (26) OhX) nHKor^d ne nrpdji-b y mchh. Ee3h dpyea HHunozda He xodujvb eh jivbch. B. Translate into Eussian : (1) The peasant's friend was a kind intelligent man. (2) To whom did he give [he gave] the good white bread ? (3) That is for the father. (4) He lived then at the son's. (5) He is now without a friend. (6) The black bread is for their grandson. (7) In summer he hved at his father's. (8) The peasant's kind friend is not a powerful [strong] man. (9) Who gave him that ? (10) To whom did he show your old house ? (11) They have a sick son. (12) At their friend's. (13) At whose house ? (14) Who is here ? (15) When did he live with him ? (16) He lived with me then. (17) He never lived with me. (18) There is his friend. (19) Have you a father ? (20) Had he an old house ? LESSON V 26. -T> is the hard termination for masculine nouns. But there are many masculine nouns ending in the nominative case in -b or -ft with corresponding soft terminations in the other cases, e.g. Hard Endings Soft Endings nom. oxeu'b [Atsts] napb [tsa^r], czar repofi [g9r6i], hero gen. oxna [Atsd] napii [tsAra] repofl [garoJAJ dat. OXH^ [Atsy] napib [tsAru] rep6K) [garoju] ace. oxna [Atsa] napii [tsAra] repofl [goroJA] (a) b is always preceded by a consonant, Vi always by a vowel. (6) As stated in Par. 16, names of inanimate things have the same form for accusative and nominative. 46 LESSON V 27 27. Instead of the nom. plur. and the ace. 2>^ur., the genitive singular ^ is used after the forms HE a [dva], two, xpn [tfi], three, HCTbipe [tSstirg], four, e.g. SB a cajxa [dva sadA], two gardens. qcTiipe CTapHKa [tjatirg stArika ],/o2*r old men, TpH i^ap;i [tri tsAra], three czars. Vocabulary paSoTHHK'b, a [rAb6tnik], workman MaJiCHbKifi [maianki], small OJi^Hb, fl [Ai6^n], stag SojibmoH [bA^ijoi], big Uapb, H [tsa^r], czar xp^6pbiH [xrabri], brave cap^ii, H [sAiai], cart-shed p66KiH [ropki], timid repoii, h [garol], hero SpyroH [drugoi], other aBopeit'bj^-piia [dvArsts, dvArtsa], TOJibKO [to^ikA], only palace OHli [aiu], they (m. and n.) ojUliH'b [Adi'n], 07ie, certain no - ^pann^acKH [pAfrAntsuski], SoraxHii [bAgati], rich French, in French S-feAHbiii [bsdni], poor . rri IX Exercises A. Translate : (1) Bea-b rep6H. (2) ^jih cxapHKa.' (3) JXbq. cxapHKa. (4) V Ltapa. (5) Bea-b oji6hh. (6) Tpn rep6fl. (7) Bojibm6ft capaii. (8) XpaSpbift rep6ii. (9) GnjibHbifi i^apb. (10) 3op6Bbiii Majib- qHR-b. (11) MojioA^ti cbiH-b i^apii. (12) y tqQA Gor^xbiti Apyri.. B. Translate : (1) BibflHbift MyjKHK'b SHajiT. rep6fl. (2) XpaSpbifi rep6tt n6- 6pbiii qejioB'feK'b. (3) 3hm6h cxapbiii paSoxHUK-b ne qacxo xoAiiji-b B-b CSLKb. (4) Jl'fexOM'b Bam-b dOJIbHOH CblH-b JKHJI-b sjxifecb. (5) Tflife OH-b xen6pb? (6) Y oxita xpn ciAim; BOTit ohpiI (7) V MyjKHKa xenepb oneuh MajicHbKiii oropoji'b Sea-b capdn; ohx. hc dor^xbiii, ho OHSHb S-fenHbiii qejiOB'feK'b. (8) Paa-b c^JibHbifi i^apb aaji-b repoio Gojibuioii AOM-b. (9) y cxapnK^ qexiiipe BH^Ka. (10) y Her6 dojibHoii cbiH-b. (11) OjtHHTb cbiH-b napfl roBopHJi-b xoponi6 no- $paHny^3CKH H no-p^ccKH, a npyrofi roBopIiJi'b x6jibK0 no-p;^ccKH. (12) H ero HHKorAa ne anaji-b. (13) Fjifb mun-b 6ojibm6ii ojienb? ffpysoU cbiHh eoeopujih mojibKO no-pyccKu. C. Translate into Kussian : (1) At the father's. (2) The czar's friend. (3) Without the hero. (4) For the stag. (5) Two cart-sheds. (6) Three peasants. (7) Four boys. 1 See Pars. 179, 180. 2 Dechned hke ot^u-b. 28-32 LESSON VI 47 (8) Three palaces. (9) Without whom ? (10) For me. (11) At his house. (12) Without him. (13) Without it. (14) The czar had a great palace. (15) He was never a timid boy. (16) Your friend spoke French, but very badly. (17) The stupid man did not often work ; he slept. (18) Where did the peasant's son use to go in winter ? (19) For that. (20) Without them. LESSON VI 28. In negative phrases the genitive of the object is used instead of the accusative, e.g. fl aHajn) homT) [ja znat dom], / knew the house. fl He SHajii. AOMa [ja na znat domA], / did not know the house. 29. The genitive is used also instead of the nominative in the negative forms corresponding to the examples given in Par. 24, e.g, y meuA H-hTb xji-feSa, H-feT-B capan [u mana nst xiebA, net SArdJAJ, 1 have no bread, no cart-shed. This word H'^T'l represents He ecTb [lie jest], not is. He cyTb [ns sii^t], not are. 30. The genitive is used after adverbs of quantity,^ e.g. MHoro xji'feSa [mnogA xiebA], much bread (or com). Majio Ji'feca [matA Issa], little forest. 31. The forms given in Pars. 29-30 are really all examples of the partitive genitive (cf. the French forms je n'ai pas de maison, heaucowp de pain). This partitive genitive appears also in simple affirmative phrases without any adverb or measure of quantity, e.g. Owh \i.wh flajii* xji'feSa [on jim dat xisbA], He gave them bread, i.e. some bread. Out HMT. Aajn> XJi-feSi. [on jim dot xlsp]. He gave them the bread. Cf. French il leur donna du pain, il leur donna le pain. 32. The great majority of Russian verbs have the infinitive in -Tb, e.g. 6hiTh [bit], pa66TaTL [lAbotAt]. From this infinitive is formed the masculine past tense by changing Tb into Jit, e.g. jKHTb, >KHjn> [3it, ^li], to live, lived. cnaxb, cnajit [spa^t, spat], to skep, slept. 1 See Voc, XL. 48 LESSON VI 33 33. The infinitive is used in many common idioms corresponding to om: English forms, e.g, Oht. xoT'feji'L Hrp^Tb [on xAtst igrd^t], He wished to play. H He Mor-B cnaTb [ja ne mog spa^t], / could not sleep. VOCABULAEY OBecb,^ BCd [avos, Afsa], oats cfeflTb A [s6jot], to sow kiX^aaa^ HqM^Hb, A [J9tjm6^n, d], barley roHiiTb 131 A [gAnd^t], to^unt) ocejii)/ cji^ [Asot, Astd], ass noHHMaTb 131 A [pAnimd^t], to H^TTo [nst], no, there is not understand aa, yes KyoHTb [kupit], to buy noqeMy? [pAtJemti], why ? xoT^Tb A [xAt6^t], to wish M^Jio (adv.) [mdtA], little tcTb (irreg.) A [Jest], to eat CKOJibKO [sko^kA], how mwihy how 6biTb [bit], to be many jKHTb A [sit], to live etc., see Par. HHqer6 {gen. of HHqxd) [iLitj9v6], 32 and Vocab. II nothing n Mdnb [ja m6g], / could KaK6ii [kAk6I], what ? what sort of? Exercises A. Give the genitive, dative and accusative of oceji-b, HHM^Hb, uymikKh, capM. B. Translate : He has much bread, he has no oats, ^p garden, no father, no friend, little barley, no ass, how much bread ? had he the oats ? have I any bread ? C. Translate : 1 did not buy bread, oats, barley, an ass, a house. D. Translate : (ni TT ' y, A \ / hve here, sleep, eat, hunt the stag, buy a garden. E. Translate: ^jj^^ (1) HcTiipe ocji^. (2) Bes-b nqMCHji. (3) JXzvr ocjia. (4) Ocji^. (6) BbijiT. TorA^ 6HeHb CEfJibHHfi H CoraTbiH napb; y nerd Gbuii. GoJibmoH ABop^U'b. (6) Y napH dbiji-b jtpyr-b-repott.^ (7) L^apb naji-b rep6io Ba n6Ma h 6ojibm6ft Ji-fecb. (8) JI-feTOM'b gh-b xoT'feji'b roHATb oji^HH. (9) Brb^Hbifi MyjKHK'b noKaaajiT. ^Mf xpn ojichh. ^ Declined like ox^ut, note to Par. 14. 2 Treat these two nouns as one compound noun or as a noun plus an adjective clause. iaWI r^ ' He6oraTi>iH HejiOBfeK-B; y Hero Majio xji-feSa, ho ohi. cfenSib'^Horo HHMeHH H OBca. (12) 3HM6ii ohi ne Mon> padoTaxb. (13) GnjibHbift napb xot^jit. Kynnxb ero MajieHbKift aomt.. (14) V MyjKHKa TOJibKO flBa ciina; ojtHH'b chhi. mhofo padoxaji-b, Apyroli HHKorjia HHHero ne A^jiaji-b, ho ohb -feji-b xop6mifi[ xji-feS-b y oxna. (15) Oxeii-b HHKoraa ne xox'fejn> aaxb ei^^ xji'fe6a. (16) CxapHK'b flaji-b ocjiy MHoro OBca. (17) y Her6 H-fex-b H^ivieHH. (18) H Morx. xojibKo Majio noHHMaxb. Omei^h HUKOzda He xommjih damb eMy xjimda. F. Bonpocbi: (1) KaKdii apyrx. 6bijix. y ^apfl? (2) Hxo eivi;^ najix, uapb? (3) CK6jibK0 0HX> eM^ Aajix.? (4) Koraa repott xox'fejix> roHHXb oji6hh? (5) Hxo eM^ noKaaaJix. MyrnHKij? (6) Hxo xox'fejix nacxo A'fejiaxb CbiH-b MyjKHKa? (7) Mnoro jih obc^ y MymnKa? (8) Kora MyjKELKx. Majio pa66xajix>? (9) KaK6BX> 6bijiX) oaHHx> cbiHx>? (10) A jtpyrofi? (11) IIoqeM;^ oxenx. ne xox-fejiX) aaxb 5xoMy CHHy xji-feSa? (12) Hxo cxapHKX> Aajix> ocjiy? G. Translate : (1) I did not wish to buy it. (2) The czar's young friend was hunting the stag. (3) Did he see the stag ? (4) No. I do not know why he did not understand it. (5) What sort of a house did the man give him ? LESSON VII 34. Neuter nouns end in -o or -e (-e if accented) and are declined thus : Habd Form Soft Forms nom. ceji6 [s9t6], village ^ Mope [more], sea nnxbe [pitjo], drinh gen. cejia [seta] Mopn [m6rA] HHXbfl [pitjd] dat. cejiy^ [satii] M6pio [mofu] nnxbib [pitju] ace. cejio [seto] Mope [mora] HHXbe [pitjo] (a) Nominative singular ends in -o or -e, -e (always accented). (6) Genitive and dative have the same endings as the mas- culine nouns. ' (c) Accusative has the same form as nominative. This is true of all i^euter substantives and adjectives. ^ With a church. D 50 LESSON VII 36 35. Adjectives like nouns have _ , rmasc. 6'fejii.itt [bsti], white Haed EroiNGS 1 {^^^^ 64jioe [bAjl] ^ rmasc. SojibHott [bA^in6t], sicjfc, ill I Ineut. SojibHoe [bA^in6J9] cs ^ , o fjoiasc. ciiHift [sfrd], blue or Soft Endings 3 -^ , , r-.. -, ' Ineut. CHHce [sineja] (a) If tlie stem ends in K, r, x, m, h, m, ii|, itt not tifi must be written, e.g. MajieHbKifi [maienki], small. Similarly we must write ee, not oe, when the o is not accented, after jk, h, m, m, i^, e.g. xopomifi, xopomee [xAr6Ji, xArojaja], good. , Vocabulary ceji6, a [s9t6, a], village BK^CHbift [fkusni], mce {to taste) M6pe, H [mora, a], sea Kiicjibiii [kisti], sour h66o, a [nsbA, a], shy, heaven diAt^iiHiH [siiii], blue iiSjiOKO, a [jab^AkA, a], apple Moii, Moe [moi, mAJo], my, mine 3ji;aHie, h [zdanjg, a], building TBOii, TBoe [tvoi, tvAJ6], thy, thine riHTbe, H [pitjo, a], drink KOTopbift, oe [kAt6ri, Aja], which K^maHbc, fl [kiiJAnja, A\,food namt, name [naj, naja], our, ours i;B'feT'b, a [tsvet, a], colour BauiTb^ ^W^ ['^^J' ^^\^\ your, yours noTOMT) [pAtom], then, thereupon ^TOXb^'i^Td fstAt, stA], this, that BOTT) noHCMy [vot pAtJamu], that is TOT-b, to [tot, to], that why OflHO {neuter of o^HH'b) [Adno], one, cn-fejibiH [spsti], ripe a certain yneHbe^ CB'feT'b, a neyq^Hbe^ TbMa [utJ6nJ9 svet, a nautj^nja - tma], Learning is light, but ignorance is darkness. Exercises A. Translate : (1) BK^CHoe iiSjiOKO. (2) CnHlii nB-fex-b H^Sa, (3) Cihiee Mope. (4) B-fejioe h66o. (5) Gn'fejioe h6jioko. (6) MajiCHbKoe saanie. (7) Xopomiii CHpi) h xopomee nHTbe. (8) Box-b XBoe cnibjioe A6JI0K0. (9) Hame xopomee Kymanbe. (10) Kncjioe nnxbe. (11) B^me dojibmoe cejio. (12) 9xo SAanie Sojibmofi ABop^n-b, koxo- pbifi Aaji'b repoio ciijibHbiii napb. (13) MajieHbKiii cbmT> p^ra ObiJiT. SAopoBbiH Majib^HK-b; OUT. ifeji-b 5x0 6ojibm6e h6jioko, Koxopoe TH MH-fe naJIX*. (14) riOXOMTj OWh XOX-fejII) HrpdXb. (15) MaJIbHHK-b HrpaJiTj H npbiraji'b; BOx-b hohcm^ h HHKorjta ne Morx. cnaxb. JJomoMb OHh xomrbjih uzpamh. ^ Also spelt -ie. 36-38 LESSON VIII 51 B. Translate into Russian : (1) A ripe apple. (2) Tasty food and drink. (3) Blue sky. (4) For the village. (5) Without food and without drink. (6) Our little village. (7) My good food. (8) His sour drink. (9) My old village. (10) Your timid old father. (11) The colour of the apple. (12) What was the peasant's son eating ? A nice ripe apple. (13) At his father's. (14) At their house. (15) The blue sea. (16) That large building is not his house. (17) That is the czar's palace ; his son used to live there in winter. (18) When did the man use to go [when the man went] to work ? (19) When did the Uttle boy eat the good food ? (20) He never had food and drink [ne 6biJio].^ (21) The great palace that used to be there. (22) That is why he worked little and played a great deal. (23) The poor man who did not Imow the friend's house. (24) Four villages. Two apples. Three heroes. Two colours. C. Give the genitive, dative, and accusative of KymaHbc, bh^kt., caAi., AQsioko, nBopen-L, OBecb, h66o. LESSON VIII 36. The neuter singular of the past tense ends in -o, e.g. masc. OH-L dbiJi'B [on bil], he (it) was. neut. OHO ^ 6hjio [Ano bitA], it was. 37. Reflexive verbs are very numerous in Russian. Sometimes they may be rendered hterally ; sometimes they are employed where we should use the passive voice ; sometimes they correspond to Enghsh neuter verbs ; sometimes they do not admit of a hteral translation at all. 38. HpaBHTLCfl [nravitsA], to he pleasing ^ is a common reflexive verb ; the syllable -ch is a contraction for ce5fl meaning self. The past tense is masc. HpaBHJiCH [nrdvitsA], was pleasing, neut. HpaBHJiocb [nravitAs], was pleasing. Note : (a) The t after the Ji is absent from the mascuUne form, (b) -CH is written -Cb after the vowel in the neuter. The word is used thus : ^TOT'B noMt CMy HpaBHJiCH [stAt dom jamii nravitsA], This {that) house was pleasing to him, i.e. he liked this house. ^ Note the accentuation in He Gbijio. 2 oh6 is not so frequently used as oh-b ; its place is often taken by dxo, to, thisy that. 52 LESSON VIII 39 And so ' / did not like the village ' is ' The village did not please me,' i.e. Ceji6 MH-fe HeiipaBHJiocb [ssto miis nanravitAs], the thing or person liked being the subject of the Russian verb, while the name of the person who is pleased is in the dative case : 5to hm-l H6Hp^BHJiocb [stA jim nanravltAs], They did not like that. 39. The dative is governed by certain prepositions, e.g. KTb (ko) [k, ko, kA], towards : K'B OTn^ [kAtsii], towards the father. Ki. HHM'b [kiiim], towards them, to them. KG MH'fe [kA mns], towards me, to me. Note. KG is used instead of Kt before words beginning with a combination of consonants difficult to pronounce ; k, m and H together would be rather awkward ; the G is inserted after k. Vocabulary KHiisB, H [knas], prince HpaBHTbCfl A [nravitsA], to he pleas- MCflB'fenb, H [ihadv^^t], bear ing ceroAHH [savodnA], to-day, lit. of this coJKaji'feHie [sA5Ai6riJ9], regret day K'B CGJKaji'feHiK) [ksA5Alenju], to one's AOMa [d6mA], at home (with verbs of regret, unfortunately rest) BTb Ji-fecB [viss], into the forest (ace.) nGTGMy- qxo [pAtAmiijtA], because bt. Ji-fecy [vlesu], in the forest (Par. 46) BH^-fexB A [yidot], to see b-b ca^-B [fsat (d)], into the garden HHrfl'fe [nigde], nowhere bT) ca^y [fsAdd], in the garden Exercises A. Add the necessary terminations where they are lacking in the following phrases : (1) Mg- gt^ii- Ten6pB ohchb cxap- qe^iOB-feK-. (2) Ham- n66p- jJipyri). (3) Bam- xopom- K^manB-. (4) 5t- d-feji- xji^S-b. (5) Ero cn-feji- hSjigk-. (6) Mg- khcji- nnxBe. (7) Oh-b xg^hji-b B-B 6ojiBm- ji-fecB. (8) Oho Sjbiji- b-b ca^y. (9) H xoahji'b K'B Mop- (10) OH'B XGAHJI-B K- MH'fe. (11) 5x- HJIGX- HHXBe. (12) HcpH- xji'feS'B. (13) Xopom- GBecB. (14) MajiCHBK- hSjigkg. (15) Ma- jieHBK- Gceji-B. (16) K'B oxLt-. (17) y Gxi^-. (18) fljifl 6pax-. (19) y exapHK-. (20) Tpn ceji-, (21) Hexi;ip- capa-. (22) y repo-. (23) Ham- rji^n- MaJie:^BK- cbih'b. (24) H xojimji'b K'B MyjKHK-. (25) 5x0 MH'fe HpaBHJi-. (26) H^me chh- h66o cm;^ HpaBHJi-. (27) Bea-B hhxb-. 40 LESSON IX 53 B. Translate : (1) CHHifi UB'feT'L MOpH H H66a MH^ 6qeHb HpdBHJICH; QosihuidVL jii^cb MH-fe HpaBHJicfl, HO Baiue MajieHbKoe cejio MH'fe oqeHb Majio HpaBHJIOCb. (2) CerOAHH OAHHI, HCJIOB-feK-b XOT^JIT. BBfl-feTb MeflB^Afl B-b Ji'fec^^ (3) KHH3b, jipyr-b napn, roHHJi-b Me^B^jiifl. (4) 5to eMy CKaaaji-b MyjKHKTb. (5) noTOMi. h BH^-feji-b ^Toro qejiOB^Ka bi. can;^ MymHKa. (6) K-b caJKaji-feniio y MyjKHKa SojibHoft MaJieHbKifi chh^; cerojiHfl OHT, SbiJiTb y ^Toro cxapHK^, KOTopbift bt. caa^ paSoTaji-b. (7) Bk^choc K^y^maHbe eM^ HpaBHJiocb, hotom^ ^to oh^ xoT'feji'b -fecTb. (8) Bojibinoe sAanie, KOTopoe Tbi Taan. BHa-fejiT., SBop^Lt-b KHjisH. (9) MoPl jipfr-b He AOMa xenepb . (10) K-b cojKaji'feHiio a er6 OTi;a HHrs'fe He Mor-b BHjt'feTb; OH-b HHKorna h6 dbijii. ^ A6Ma. (11) Bott* OH-b xenepb. Eojibiuoe Bdame, Komopoe mui maMh eudmjih, deopei^h i^apn. C. BonpocBi : (1) Hto TeS-fe HpaBHJIOCb? (2) Hto TeS-fe HenpaBHJiocb? (3) Hto XOT^JI'b BHA'feTb HejIOB-feK-b? (4) KOF^a OH-b er6 XOT-fejIl) BlIa'feTb? (6) r^i^ Gbiji-b MejiB'feAb? (6) KaKOBi, y MyjKHKa chhti? (7) J^OMa JIH oht. cerojUHH? (8) rio^eM^ Tbi ne Mon. BH^i^Tb ero oxi^d? (9) Koro Tbi He Mor-b Bii^ifeTb? D. Translate into Kussian : (1) I wished to see my friend to-day, but unfortunately he was not at home ; that is why I could not see him. (2) In summer he often used to go towards the sea, because he liked the blue sea. (3) The little village that I saw there, I did not like. (4) The intelUgent boy gave the old man tasty food and drink. (5) Did he wish to see the little building that you [thou] showed me ? (6) There is the great palace where the czar's friend lived ! (7) Why was the poor man sowing oats ? (8) He gave a lot of oats to this ass. (9) Had he not a kind friend ? * * Pars. 123, 124 may be studied at this point and the future tense be practised with any A verb. LESSON IX 40. The word xgahji'L, past tense of xohhtb, lias been frequently- used. It means ' one was in the way of going, ^ ' one was in the habit of going, ^ as when we say in English, * When he was young, not every hoy went to school.^ If we wish to say that * one was actually going, ^ as when we say in EngHsh, ' He was going along the street when that happened,' we must use the Russian verb masc. OH'L luejit [on Sot], neut. oho iiijio [aho Jto]. ^ Note the accentuation in h6 Ghji-b. 54 LESSON IX 41-43 41. Notice the following idioms illustrating tlie use of the in- finitive : Hto ^-fejiaib? [Jfco dstAt], What is to be done ? Hto MHife (CMA^) fl-fejiaTh? [Jto miis (jamli) dstAt], What am I {is he) to do ? Bo3m6}kho jih paSoxaxb Ji-fexoMt bI) Ji-fecy? [vAzm65iiA ii rAb6tAt IstAm vlasii]. Is it possible to work in the forest in summer ? HejibBH pa66TaTb 3hm6io (-oh) b-b Ji-fec^ [naiza rAb6Ut zimoju (61) vl9Sli], It is impossible to work in the forest in winter. 42. Four cases of the noun have been given. But there are altogether six cases in Russian. (Only one or two nouns have a special form for the Vocative.) The remaining two are the Instrumental and Prepositional. Their endings are identical for masculine and neuter nouns, viz. Haed Form Soft Form instr. OM-B ewb (ewh if accented) prep, ib 'fe 43. The complete declension in the singular of the five types of nouns is, therefore, as follows : (The plurals are printed here, but as no plural forms wiU be used before Lesson XX., they need not be learned at this point.) Hard Forms Masc. Neut. Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. nom. ot6ut> OTUbl ceji6 cejia gen. OTua OTUOBT, ceji^ ceJiT. dat. OTu:^ OTUaMT, ceji:^ cejiaMT* ace. OTi^a OTUbBT. ceji6 cejia instr. OTudM-b 1 [Ats6m] OTUaMH cejiOMTb [88t6m] cejiaMH prep. OTLt'fe [Atss] OTixaxi. ceji'fe [sale] cejiaxT. Soft Forms Masculines Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. nom. uapb uapH repofi repoH gen. uapfl ^apeH repofl repocBt dat. uapib ^apflM'b repoK) repoHM-b ace. ixscpA uapett repoH repocBTb instr. uapeMT> [tsArom] uapflMH repocMT) [g8r6jam] rep6HMH prep, uap^ [tsArs] uapflX-B repo-fe [garoje] repoHX-b 1 After w, H, ni, m, n. unaccented o never appears; its place is taken by e.g. c-b TOBkpvnafiwh [stAvdfiJtJem], with the companion 44 LESSON IX 55 Neuter Sing. Plur. nom. Mope Mopii gen. Mopfl Mopefii dat. M6pio MopiiMTb ace. M6pe Mopii instr. MopeM-B [morain] MopHMH prep. Mop-fe 1 [mora] MOpHXT* ^ {a) It must be remembered that masculine names of inanimate things have the same form in the accusative as in the nominative. 44. The instrumental case is used after certain prepositions, e.g. CL MaJib^HKOMt [smd^itJikAm], with the boy CO 2 MHOK) (mhoK) [sAmnoju (mnoi)], with me nepcAt cejiOMT) [p^rat satom], before the village 3a CTOJiOMt 3 [zAstAtom], behind the table Vocabulary TOBapniut, a [tAvdriJtJ], companion Mor^qiii [mAgiitJi], powerful aoMHK'b, a [dorhik], little house aepeBHHHBiii [daravdni], wooden MHRHCxpt [rhinistr], minister KaMCHHbitt [kdiiiani], of stone CTOJi-L, a [stot, stAtd], table co mhok) [sAmnoju], with me Kop6jib, H \kAx6A'\, king CB to66k) (oft) [stAboju (boi)], with pySjib, A [rup, rubld], rouble thee Macjio, a [mdstA], butter CL HHM'b [snim], with him, with it OKHO, a [Akn6, d], window Cb hhmh [snfihi], with them Kpecjio, a [ki-EstA, a], arm-chair Ch ^THM-b [s6tim], with this (adj. or CTOiixb A [stAJd^t], to stand pron.) CTOHTb A [stoit], to cost, be worth Cb T'feM'b[stsm],m^A^^<(adj.orpron.) KpacHBbiH [krAsivi], beautiful Cb K'feM'b? [sksm], with whom ? HCKpacHBbiH [nakrAsivi], not pretty, wiaWhl [tjem], with what ? u^ly o6biKHOB6HHO [AbiknAvsnA], usually Exercises A. Give the dative, accusative, and instrumental of repoii, ABopei^-b, pyGjib, MacJio, cojKaji'feHie. B. Translate into Russian : (1) Towards me, thee, him, that, whom, the table, the boy. (2) Into [requires the accusative'] the garden, house, forest, village. (3) Behind me, thee, him (it), that, whom, the building. (4) With the father, czar, hero, sea, man, stag. (5) For me, them, thee, him (it), that, whom, the little house \(me wcyrd], \ * Nouns in -ie like ananie have prep. sing, in -in and gen. pi. in -iii. * See note to kg in Par. 39. ' This is the Russian phrase for at table. With verbs of motion aa and n^pea-t require the accusative. 56 LESSON X 45 C. Translate : (1) Mor;^qiii khhsb Cb mhhhctpom'b. (2) BK^CHbitt xji-feSt Qea-h Macjia. (3) Cn-fejioe ;i6jiOKO eny HenpaEHJiocb. (4) Ero aoSpLiii jipyrt jKHjn> 3d Ji-fecoMt.^ (5) Oaho Kpecjio ctohjio n^pej^-L okhom'l, a apyroe ctohjio y CTOJia (n^pen-L ctojiom-b). (6) ^tottj ctoji-b hc ctohjitj qexLipe pySjiii. (7) MajieHbKiii MajibHHKt nrpaJi'B ct TOBapnmcM'b'^B'L ca^f. (8) B-fenHbrn cbin-b cTOHJi-b cb oTixoM-b nepe^-b ^THM-b OKHOM-b. (9) C-b Ki^M-b OH-b meji-b ktj Mopio? (10) V MeHH ebiji-b Torna KaMennbitt soMnKT. cb capaeMi.. (11) CKOJibKO CTOHJIO 5to nepeBHHHoe Kpecjio? (12) y Kopojin 6bijn> KpacHBbm caa-b. CKOAbKo cmoujio dmo depeemiHoe npecAO? D. Translate into Russian : (1) Why was the boy's companion standing [why stood, etc.] behind the arm-chair ? (2) I saw him when he was going towards the house. (3) When did you see [thou sawest] the father with his son ? (4) I told you [thee] that. (5) Was he going towards the window ? (6) In summer I used often to go into that wood. (7) The boy's father is there now with (his) companion. (8) He was going towards him. (9) The peasant's son was never with me at table. (10) How much was that Uttle house worth ? (11) The wooden table, that used to stand before the window, was worth only three roubles. (12) To-day I saw the boy's companion. (13) Why was he there to-day ? (14) Did you [thou] see the Uttle stone house behind the garden ? (15) No, I was never in the garden. . (16) He used often to go towards the sea. (17) The great stone building that you saw there was not their palace. (18) Once he was going home with them. (19) (With) what did he usually do that ? (20) Before whom was he standing ? (21) What is he to do ? (22) He never saw the man ; that is why he could not tell you where he (was). (23) It is impossible to speak with his friend. (24) Is it possible to work in the forest in winter ? , LESSON X 45. The Prepositional case is never found without a preposition : hence its name. Prepositions requiring this case are : o (written also oCt and 66o), na, bt>, npn, e.g. OhTj roBopHJii. o flOM-fe [on gAVArit a d6m9], He was speaking of the house. * Note the accentuation. 46 LESSON X 57 660 1 MHife, o TeS-fe, o HeMt, oSt ^ ^tomt,, TOMt [AbAmn^, Atebe, An6m, AbstAm, Atom], 0/, about, concerning me, thee, him, this, that. Ha CTOJi'fe [na stAis], on the table. BT. oropoa'fe [vAgArode], in the kitchen-garden. BO 1 MH'fe, btj TeS-fej^B-b HeMt, BT) ^TOM-L, BT) TOMt [vAmns, ftabs, vnom, vetAm, ftom], in me, in thee, in him, in this, in that. npH HeMT) [pri nom], in his entourage, in his presence. 46. A number of very common masculine nouns, nearly all monosyllabic, bave a form in -^ following tbe prepositions Bi. and . Ha. BT> Jiifecy 3 and Bt cajty bave already been given in tbe Vocabulary to Lesson VIII. Sucb are Ha noji^ [nApAtu], on th. floor. Ha 6eper;^ [nAboregu], on the shore. Ha Bcpxy [nAvarxii], on top. Ha Jiyry [nAtugii], on the meadow. Ha moct;;^ [nAmAstii], on the bridge. Bi. roji;^ [vgAdu], in the year. Bii UB'fex^ [ftsvatti], in bloom. (a) The y is always accented in tbese pkcases. Vocabulary B'b'fesA'L, a [vjsst, zdA], entrance ryjiHTB 131 A [guid^t], to go walking no JIT), a [pot], floor {for pleasure) expert, a [b^rek, gA], bank, shore K^maxb 131 A [kiijAt], to eat BepxTb, a [vsrx], top part nocjiaxb [pAsta^t], to send TbKb, a [god (t), dA], year cxpoHTb A [stroit], to build Jifrii, a [tuk], meadow OH-b nomejiT* [on pAjot], he went MOCTi*, a [most], bridge {once) nepo, a [paro], pen jiOKaxb A [i83a^t], to lie, recline o, oST), 660 [o. A, Ab (Ap), 6bA], HaKOH^ix-b [lukAnsts], at last, in the about, of, concerning end B'b (bo) [v, f, VA, vo], in qxoSbi [Jtobi], in order that Ha [ela, na], on xome [t659], also npH [pri], near, at, in the time of xaKJKC [tdg39], also o Hnx-b [Anix], about them npn caMOM-b B-b-ksjifk [pri sdmAm o KOMTb? [Akom], about whom ? vj6zd9], near, at the very entrance o no-Wht [Atjom], about what ? saH'^M'b? [zAtjsm], with what object? A^Maxb 131 A [dumAt], to think why ? ^ See note to kg in Par. 39. ^ Used before vowels. ^ Cf. BT. a-fec-B in Vocabulary to Lesson II. 58 LESSON X 46 Exercises A. Translate into Kussian : (1) He was speaking of you [thee], him, me, that, this, the floor, the bridge, the shore, the garden, the forest, the window, the companion, the sea, the regret. (2) The pen was lying on the table, on the bridge, on the floor. (3) I was walking on the shore, in the garden, in the kitchen-garden, in the forest ; he was with me [in my presence]. B. Translate : (1) Ojukn-b CHJibHHfi i^apb CTpoHJit 6ojibm6ii KaMCHHLifi ABop^nt. (2) n^peat ^THM-L sh^hIcmt. 6bijn> ohchb KpacHBBiH cajx-b. (3) Ho npH CaMOMT. B-b^aa-fe BT. Ca^-b CTOHJI-b MaJICHbKifi nepeBHHHblH AOMHK'b. (4) 5to HenpaBHJiocb i;apib. (5) B^b ^TOM-b jtoMHK'fe musi-b dlaHuuA MymHK-b, a ch HHM-b er6 OT^i^-b. (6) JI-feTOMi. itapb ^acxo ryjiHjn. Cb MKHHCTpoM-b B^b ca^y^. (7) Pas-b ohtj roBopHJi-b cb TOBapnmeM'b O TOM-b MyjKHK^. (8) HaKOHCIl'b USL^h HOCJiaJIT, MHHHCTpa K'b MyjKHKy^, HT66bi OH-b KynHji-b cxapHii noMnK-b. (9) Korna MnHficTp-b nomeji-b B-b oropo^'b, nejioBi^K'b ne Sbiji-b noMa; OH-b paSoTajii. Tor^a B-b Ji-fec^. (10) GxapHK-b TaKJKe He Shjit. aoMa, a T6jibK0 OHCHb MaJicHbKlH cbiH-b MyjKHKa 6biji'b 3a CTOJiOM-b. (11) Ky'inaJi'b qepHbifi xjiifedi) cb MacjiOM-b, a K'b cojKaji'feHiio Tox-b MaJibHHK'b ne Mor-b CKasaTb MHHiicTpy, rflib Tor^a Sbui-b OT^i^-b. (12) Hto a-fejiaxb? Hejib3>i KynHTb A6MHKa. C. BonpocH: (1) Hto cTpdHJiT. i^apb? (2) Hto ctohjio nepea-b SAanieM-b? (3) Kto jKHJi-b BTb ^TOM-b AOMHR-fe? (4) OjtiiH'b [alone, by himself] jiH OH-b TaiM-b H^HJi-b? (5) FA'fe ryjiHJi-b i^apb? (6) G-b K-feM-b OH-b ryjiiiji'b? (7) O KOM-b OH-b roBopnji-b oanaJKabi? (8) KyAa i^apb nocjiaji-b MHHHCTpa? (9) Saq-^MX.? (10) Koro MHHHCxp-b Bik]s,1asn> y MyatHKa? (11) rioHCMy' MyrnHK-b h6 dbiJi-b flOMa? D. Translate into Russian : (1) The old man's wooden house used to stand at the very entrance to [bt. with ace.] the king's beautiful stone palace. (2) The powerful king wished to buy that little house. (3) One day the king was walking with the minister and saw the peasant at work [saw how the peasant worked] in the garden. (4) The peasant saw the minister and sent his son to him. (5) When the king's minister was on the bridge, the peasant's son, who was not a stupid boy and spoke Russian very well, went towards him and said to him, "The little house was grandfather's [use y with genit.}. He never wished to give it to the king." 47 LESSON XI 59 are LESSON XI 47. The pronouns that have been introduced in Lessons I to X A. Personal Pronouns First Second Third nom. H,/ TBI, tJlOU OHi,, OHO, he, it OHiky they'^ gen. MCHH, of me Te6fl, etc. (H)er6, etc. (h)hx'i>, of themy their dat. MH-fe, etc. leQ'h (H)eM:^ (H)HM'b, to them ace. MeHfl TCdH (H)er6 (h)hx'I>, etc. instr. MHOK) (6ti) to66k) (6ft) (h)hm'i> (h)hmh prep. MHt TCO'fe HeM-L HHX-B B. POSSESSIVES Moii, Moe, my, mine HaniTb, name, our, ours TBOH, TBOe, thy, thine Bami), B^me, your, yours For the third person there is no possessive : ero,^ the genitive of OH-b, is used as the equivalent of his or its; HXt, genitive plural of ohh, stands for their. C. Demonstrative Pronouns and Adjectives Masc. Neut. Masc. Neut. nom. TOTi> TO, that ^tot-b ^to, this gen. dat. instr. prep. nom. ace. nom. gen. dat. ace. instr. prep. Toro TOMy TOT'b TO or Toro T-feMT. TOM-B ^Toro ^TOMy ^TOT-L 5t0 or ^Toro ^THMt ^TOMT. D. Interrogatives and Relatives Masc. Neut. K0T6pbitt KOTdpoe, which, that; which? K0T6pbiii {inanimate) KOTopoe Singular and Plural KTO? ^ who ? HTO? ^ what ? which ? Koro qero kom;^ hcm;^ K0r6 HTO K-feM-L q-feMT. KOMT) HCM'B * Fern, form is oh+.. ^ See Lesson XXIX for use of CB6tt. ^ This word is also used as a relative. 60 LESSON XI 47 LESSON XI Masc. Neut. nom. KaKdET,? ace. KaK6Bi) {inanimate) nom. KaKoii? (attrib. adj.) ace. KaKdfi (inanimate) KaK0B6? of what sort ? KaKOBO KaKoe? of what sort ? which ? KaK6e E. Indefinite hhkt6 [iiixt6], no one, and hh^to [fiijto], nothing, are declined like kto and HTO, e.g. in the genitive case they have the form HHK0r6, HHHer6 [nikAvo, riitJ9v6]. When compounded with prepositions the negative particle is separated from the pronoun by the preposition, e.g. hh cb KifeMt [riisksm], hh o newb [riiAtJom], with no one, about nothing. The forms kt6-to [xto-tAJ, kt6-jih6o [xto-libA], kto-hhS^AB [xto- nibd^t], and qxo-TO [Jto-tA], ht6-jih6o [Jto-iibA], qxo-HHS^Ab [Jto-nibuit], standing for some one, any one and something, anything, are in very frequent use, but in this book the forms given in this paragraph (E) will be little used except hhkto and HHqer6. Exercises A. Supply tlie proper forms of H, TBI, GH-b, 5tO, kto, ^TO, TOTT, after each of the prepositions AJIH, n^pcAi*, K-b, Ha, o, CTb. B. Translate : y Menn; Sea-b Koro?; o hcmT)?; sa mhoio; y tcSh; GesTb Her6; cb K'feM'b?; o HCM-b; B-b Te6^; ch to66k); na ^eM-b?; o komT) oht* roBO- pi^ji-b?; o HCM-b?; KOM^ OH-b 5to roBopHJi-b?; c-b ^thmi,; K-b aroMy; KaKOBO 6biJio ^To 3ji;^Hie?; nepo, KOTopoe jiejKaJio Taivi-b; MajiCHbKift aoMii, K0T6pbiH CTOiiji'b HpH B'b'hsji'h; KaKOB-b Slijit. er6 cbiH-b?; tm nomeji'bK'b hcm^; qi^M-b?; K-bcomaji-feniio; h HHKorAaHC CKaaaJi-b ^Toro. ^ HUKoeda He cKoaajib dmozo, C. Translate into Russian : (1) The great bridge that you saw yesterday. (2) That black arm-chair that used to stand before the window. (3) Where was his palace ? (4) What was on the floor ? (5) Who had a friend ? (6) Your oats. (7) His corn. (8) At their house. (9) Who told him that ? (10) What did he tell you [thee]? (11) Forme, (12) Without him. (13) With you [thee]. (14) For him. (15) About me. (16) With what ? \no preposition required : use in- strumental]. (17) What was I speaking about ? (18) I did not know that. (19) He did not know you [thee]. (20) Our building ; your companion ; ids table ; that butter ; my food ; his drink. (21) Behind it. (22) I liked it. (23) You liked it. (24) He Uked it. (25) He never saw it. 48-61 ACCENTUATION 61 Nouns that have occurked in Lessons I-XI 48. Nouns that preserve throughout the singular the accent of the nominative, e.g. H'fen'L, riji;a ; oropofl'L, oropojta. H^^Kh Jl'feC'b OJl^Hb CblHt xji-feSt MejcB^flb BuyK-b CHpi. h66o Spaxt orop6m> A6ziOKO HCJIOB'feK'B C2LKh Kp6cjio MaJIbHHK'L UBifeTT. Macjio TOBapHIU'L MOCTI. Mope flpyr-B BCpX-b 1 sflanie MHrnicTpt rem, coKaji-feHie paSdTHHKT. BT.'feaH'B ceji6 HOMt Ceper'b OKHO noji'L capaii HHTbe AOMHKT, repdii K^maHbe Jiyr-L KHfl3b The forms in -y after B-L or Ha (see Par. 46) are exceptional. 49. Nouns which have the accent on the termination, e.g. cTapHKi*, ciapHKa. cTapiiKT) K0p6jlb MymJiKi. napb CTOJIt HHM^Hb 0T6^'b py6jib ji;Bop6ui> OBeCL ocejiT. 50. Observe that no neuter nouns occur in the second Hst : in neuter nouns the accent does not change in the singular. 51. The Peepositions that have akeady occurred are : with the genitive : 6e3'b, y, n^JiH dative-, ktj (kg) accusative'. B'b,^ Ha,^ sa^ instrumental: sa,^ c-h (co), nepe^-b^ (n^pcAo) prepositional: o, bt.^ (bo), Ha,^ npn ^ Bepx6Mi. [v9rx6m] with the verb fexaxi, means as the top, astride a horse, mounted. ^ ^ See Lesson XV. ' With verbs of motion governs the accusative. 62 LESSON XII 52-54 LESSON XII 52. Feminine nouns end in -a, e.g. nana [tapAJ, jpaw -fl, e.g. HHHfl [nanA], nurse -h, e.g. HOHb [notj], night 53. Nouns in -a and -a are declined thus : Haed Form Soft Form Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur, nom. Jiana [tapA] JianLi hhhh [nariA] uAuu gen. jianbi [tdpi] Jian-L hhhh [nani] HjiHb dat. Jianib [Wpa] Ji^naMt HHH-fe [nana] HflnHM-L ace. Jiany [tapu] JianM hhhk) [nanu] hhhb . rjianoH [tapAi] jianaMH fHHHefi [nanal] hhhhmh "^^ ^* \jianoK) [tdpAJu] (HHHeio [nanoju] prep. Jian'fe [tdpa] Jianax-b nAw^ [nana] uAhhxtj Note. The plurals need not be learned at this point, as no plural forms will be used before Lesson XX. (a) After K, r, x, m, h, m, ui, the vowels h, h, io never appear ; they are replaced by H, a, y, e.g. co6aKa [sAbakA], a dog gen. co6aKH [sAbaki] (b) After jk, h, hi, m, u unaccented o never appears ; it is replaced by e, e.g. K6jKa [k63A], leather, hide instr. KdmePL (eio) [k639i (oju)] HTHua [ptitsA], bird instr. UTiknem (eio) [ptitsai (aju)] (c) For the declension of nouns in -in see PocciH in Voc. XXXIV. Dat. and prep. sing, in -in ; gen. pi. in -iii. 54. Some nouns accented on the termination draw back the accent in the accusative, e.g. BORSi [vAdd], water ace. BOAy [v6du] 55-66 LESSON XIII 63 Vocabulary JlSLMSLf bi [damA, i], lady co6aKa, h [sAbdkA, i], dog KoniKa, H [koJkA, i], cat jK^Hmnna, li [s^nJtJiiiA, i], woman cjiyjKaHKa, h [stu5diikA, i], servant cecxpa, ii [sastrd, i], sister 6a6ymKa, h [babuJkA, i], grandmother fl-feBOiiKa, H [devAtJkA, i], little girl hAhr, h [ndnA, i], child's nurse Ji^na, LI [tdpA, i], paw K6jKa, H [k63A, i], skin, leather m6fl, H [J^JA, J6i], neck Bona, IJ [vAdd, i], water nTHixa, H [ptitsA, i], bird OHa [And], she MOH (fern.) [niAJd], my, mine TBOfl (/em.) [tvAJd], thy, thine eA {not an adjective: genitive ofouA) [J9J6 j^. of her, her, hers Hama ^ [ndjA], our, ours Bama [vdJA], your, yours ^xa; Ta [stA, ta], this; that Exercise Translate into Kussian : Without water, at the grandmother's, for the nurse, towards the lady, into the water, behind the servant, with the cat, in front of the dog, about the lady, in the water, on the neck, your dog, our cat, her servant, her father, she is our servant, the boy's nurse, the servant's son, his dog's neck, that lady, the colour of the bird, the grandmother's house, the girl's bread, for the woman, with the woman, she is my nurse, she is not his sister. The Uttle boy lived in that house with his grandmother. He was speaking of his sister. The nurse has two [rbIo, femJ] cats and a dog. What did he tell the lady \datJ] about her servant ? I did not know the woman. LESSON XIII 55. Feminine adjectives end in -aa or -nn. The full form of the nominative singular of the adjective is therefore : Hard Form M. 6oraTHH [bA^dti] F. Gordxan [bAgdtAJa] N. 6oraxoe [bAgdtAJa], rich M. SojibHoii [bA^inoi] F. SojibHafl [bA^indJA] N. SojibHoe [bA^noja], ill Soft Form M. CHHiii [sini] F. chhah [sfnaja] N. e^nee [sineja], blue 56. The complete nominative singular of OflHH'b is : ojUHH'b, onHa, oaH6 [Adfn, Adnd, Adno], ons, a certain, alone. ^ The complete declension of Hami. and the other possessives will be found in Pars. 104, 105. 64 LESSON XIII 56 Vocabulary KycoKT),^ Ka [kus6k, kuska], piece anrjiiiiCKitt [angliski or angliski], Beapo, a [vedro], pail English MHCO, a [liiasA], meat ^panityscKiH [frAntsiiski], French qHCTbiii [tjisti], clean ecTb [jest], there is, there are rpflSHbift [grdzni], dirty ecTB jih? [jest ii], is there ? are p^ccKiii [ruski], Russian there ? Exercises A. Translate : (1) ycoSaKHKycoK'LMjica. (2) B^jiaflJianaKouiKH. (3) Gxapaa h>Ihh H^bBOHKH. (4) y Hero SoraxaH 6a6ymKa. (5) JHoOpan py^ccKaH naMa cb fl-feBO^Kott bt> ca^. (6) San-feM-B Hepnan KOUiKa Ha CTOJi-fe? (7) Ona xenept na noji>\ (8) H . BHA-feji-B aany ci. coSaKOH B-L ji-fecy. (9) MajieHbKiii pyccKm MajibHHK'b nrpaji-b ct> Hiineio Ha Mocxy-. (10) Y kohikh KpacHBaa men. (11) CeroHHH MOH MOJioAaH cecxpa na Jiyry^. (12) Hxo OH-b cerosHH j^aji-b coSaK-fe? (13) H He roBopHJi-b o coOaK-fe. (14) Xopomift xjifeO-b dea-b Macjia H Mflca He^paBHJicfl cjiyjKaHK-fe. (15) FpHSHan Boaa bt. Beap'fe; ^HCxaH Boa'i^ B-b caff^. Fpsiauasi eoda eh eedpm; Hucman eoda eh cady. B. Translate : (1) There is another dog behind the arm-chair. (2) The Russian peasant was eating a piece of bread and [say with] butter. (3) His son used to live in summer at his grandmother's. (4) I never knew her grandmother. (5) The young man went towards the lady ; he was Russian but he spoke French and Enghsh very well. (6) I have one servant ; she is my old nurse. (7) The woman's dirty house did not please him. (8) Did you see the dog's paw ? (9) I did not see his dog anywhere [I nowhere not saw]. (10) There it is. (11) Why was your Httle sister standing in front of the house ? (12) She was playing with the cat, that is why she was in the garden. (13) It is possible to work in the house without a servant. (14) What is the woman to do ? (15) It was impossible to sleep, because the boy was playing with (his) brother and sister in the garden. (16) Has the boy two sisters ? [ecxb JIH y etc.]. ^ Declined hke oT^qi : the o disappears in every case except the nominative singular. 57-59 LESSON XIV 65 LESSON XIV 57. The feminine form of the past tense ends in -Jia, e.g. Ona jxyMajia, roHiijia, cnaji^, Swjia [Ana dumAtA, gAnatA, spAtd bita]. She was thinking {thought), hunted, slept, was. 58. The complete singular of the past tense is therefore cnaJi'B, cnajia, cnajio [spat, spAtd, spatA] n^Majit, a^Majia, a;^Majio [ddmAt, diimAtA, diimAtA] The accent does not always remain on the same syllable in all three genders. Wherever the termination is accented, the feminine form, and if necessary the neuter form, will be indicated. 59. The feminine form of OHt is ona [ahq], she. The singular is declined thus : , r / t gen. (H)eH [J8J6, ]M\ dat. (h)6h [j6i] ^ ace. (H)ee [J9J6] instr. (h)6io [j6ju] prep, (o) h6h [An6i] As with the masculineCand neuter forms, the oblique cases, when governed by prepositions, must have the H prefixed. Vocabulary 6^6a, LI [babA], peasant-woman crapyxa, h [stAiuxA], old woman repoHHH, H [gerAiriiV], heroine BH^qna, h [vnutJkA], granddaughter napiana, bi [tsAritsA], czarina ^xy [stu] is the accusative of ^xa, this caMKa, H (oji^Hfl) [samkA (aU^ha)], Ty [tu] is the accusative o/xa, that hind, doe {female of stag) Maxb [ma^t], mother noapyra, H [pAdrug a], female friend Mon>, Morjia, Morjio [mog, lUAgta, no^Ka, H [dotJkA], Utile daughter mAgto], could Hi;x'L xaKoro apyjKKa, Kan-b poanaH Maxymna [nst tAk6vA dru3ka, kak lAdnaJA matuJkA], There is no such good friend as one's own dear mother. Exercise (1) Rewrite Exercises B and D of Lesson VIII, substituting feminine for masculine forms wherever that is possible. (2) Rewrite Exercises B and D of Lesson X, treating them in the same fashion. Substitute noflpyra for MHHHCxp'b.i ^ Par. 131 may be learned at this point and the present tense be practised with any verb marked 131. E 66 LESSON XV 60-62 LESSON XV 60. btj and Ha are used with either accusative or prepositional (cf. Vocab. VIII). In the simplest instances, the rule that decides which case is to be used, is that with either of these two words the accusative suggests motion towards ; the prepositional does not. In less obvious idioms this principle is of doubtful utility. Compare : Ona Jierjia Ha nojit^ [Ana iogta nd pAt], She lay doum on the floor {i,e. she performed an act involving motion), with Ona JiejKaJia na nojiy' [ahq i93atA nA paM], She was lying on the floor {i.e. she was occupying a certain position, no suggestion of motion being present). Similarly : (1) Ona cksiSi na cxyji'b (ace.) [Ana s^tA nA stut], She sat down on the chair. Ona CHA'fejia na CT^Jiife (prep.) [Ana sidstA nA stiiie], She was sitting on the chair. (2) Oht> nomeJiTj {or Bomejn>, entered) b-l caa-L [on pAjot (vaJoI) fsat], He went into the garden. Oh-l ryjiHjn> bij cajny [on guidt fsAdu], He was walking in the garden (the motion was not from somewhere else into the garden). In Oh'B CMOTp'feji'L Ha nrpy {ace. feminine) [on smAtrgt nA igrii], He was looking at the game, the application of the principle can stUl be felt ; the gaze was directed on to the game. 61. Some phrases : HacoJiHuife [nA sontsa] {prep, neut.), in the sun. Ha ;^JiHH'fe [nA uiitsa] {prep, fem.), in {on) the street. Ha i^TOMTb M'fecTife [nA stAm meste] {prep, neut.), in that place. Ha HpMapKy [nA jdrm^vrku] {ace. fem.), to the fair. BT) ^TOMTb cjiynaife [vstAm stiitjAJo], in that case. B-L Ji-fec^ [viesu], in the wood (cf. Par. 46). 62. The verb uicjiTj has been employed already : its meaning was explained in Par. 40. Note the following compounds of this verb : Oh-L BOmejI-b [on VAJot], \ ... . ^ j - t ^^ - a x. i.x. , ' r ' li ' n ^^^^ *^^o> ie- entered, is followed by the Ona BoniJia [Ana vAjTa], y . ' .^u ^u ^- ^ , ' r ' ci-'-t preposition BT) with the accusative, e. or. Oho bouijio [Ano vaJTo], )^ ^ ' Ona Bomjia Bt ^omT) [And vAjtd vdom]. ^ Notice the accentuation ia this phrase. 63 LESSON XV 67 Ont npHmejn> [on pri|6t], went, but in the direction of the speaker, i.e. came ; generally followed by preposition Kt, e.g. Ona npHHiJia ko MH-fe [Ana prijtd kA mns]. Oht. npomejn> [on prAj6t], went through, i.e. traversed. OhT) name JIT} [on nAj6t], came upon, i.e. found. OhT) nomejit [on pAjot], went once (generally to some definite place). Ohi uiejit MHMO [on jot mfni.v], was going past. 63. Compare with me Jit and npHUieJiTj in Par. 62 : Hect, Hecjia, necjio [nos, nasta, nasto], carried, was carrying, and npHHecB, npHHCCJia, etc. [prinos, prinasta], brought. {a) Observe that Hect, like Mor-B, has no Jl in the masculine. See also Jier'b and enact in the following Vocabulary. In Par. 239 is given a list of irregular verbs many of which show this feature. VOCABULAKY cfejit [sst], he sat down (inf. cfeCTb) ynajit [updt], he fell Jiert, Jierjia, Jierjio [log, iagta, enact, cjia, cjio [spas, spAsld, iegto], he lay down, i.e. he laid spAsto], he etc. saved himself down P'feKa, H (Par. 54) [rakd], river enrfjit A [sidst], he was in a seat, nocTejib {nx)m. or ace.) (Par. 64) he was sitting [pAste^i], bed JieJKajit A [i85dt], he was in a re- M^fecxo, a [liisstA], place dining position, i.e. he was lying HeyjKCJiH [ii9U36ii], can it he that ? CMOipi^Tb A [smAtr^^t], to look [at) surely not ? Exercises A. Translate : (1) Ona npniujia na HpMapKy. (2) GoSaKa exapHKa jiemajia Ha cojinn-fe. (3) Hepnaa KOUiKa ynajia Bt p-feny [or p'^Ky]. (4) H CH HPira-fe He BHA-fejit, HO axoTt MajiLqHKt ee enact. (5) Ona CMOxp-fejia na caMKy Bt Ji-fec^. (6) Ont nect Bcapo ct boji;6io. (7) Heyn^^JiH ona enajia na 5xoMt M'fecx'fe? (8) Bt 5xoMt cjiyqa-fe ona CH He Morjia BHa-fexB. (9) Mojioaan noapyra jKeHn5HHbi npouijia caat H Bomjia Bt Ji-fect. (10) Hcjibsh cKaaaxt, r^-fe ona xen^pb. (11) HeyjKejiH ona ynajia Bt Bo^y? (12) Boxt onal Heyjfce/iu ona yna/ia eh eody? 68 LESSON XVI 63 B. Translate into Kussian : (1) The poor peasant woman went into the house. (2) She never saw her in the house. (3) The czarina's daughter came to him. (4) The woman's friend went home with her. (5) The old man's granddaughter was going past the house [genit. after mhmo, which may be either an adverb or a preposition]. (6) The poor old woman lay down on the bed. (7) She was lying on the floor. (8) The peasant woman's friend was at the fair {j^ep.). (9) Surely she did not bring it here [hither] ? (10) It is not possible to sit on that chair. C. Write sentences 4 and 6 of Ex. A in the feminine, and sentences 1, 7, 8, 9, 11 in the masculine. LESSON XVI Y Same subjects as in Lesson XV. > Vocabulary lidcb, a [nos], nose 6p6cHTB [brosit], to throw Xbocttj, a [xvost], tail y6'fe>KaTb [yb95a^t], to run away rJiasTb, a [gtas], eye jihtl (jiiijia) A [lit (iiW)], to pour MOJIOKO, a [mAtAko], milk hhtb (nnjia) A [pit (pila)], to drink c6jiHii;e, a [sontsa], sun cxaTb [std^t], to begin, to set about, rojiOBa, LI (Par. 64, ace. roJiOBy) to become [gAtAva], head cIhtb 131 A [sijd^t], to shine jipaKa [drakA], quarrel, fight Kai^t paaii [kak ras], just then, as it Kpy^i'Jibift [krugti], round happened p630Bbift [rozAvi], pink cioji;a [sudd], hither seJiCHbift [zoioni], green xyaa [tudd], thither piijKlH [ri3i], brown, reddish CHOBa [snovA], anew, again HJiHHribiH [diini], long Bqepa [ftjord], yesterday cfepbiii [seri], grey MeiKfly {instr.) [m63du], between CJiyHHJiocb [stutjltAs], happened to, hto [to jto], that which OTornaTb [AtAgnd^t], to drive away eme [J9|tj6], still, yet nocTynHTb [pAstupit], to behave, to btj 5to BpcMH (neut.) [vstA vr6mA], act at that time, then Ona JiHJia na Komny BOfloii [And iitd nAkoJku vAdoi], ^S'^e poured with water on to the cat, i.e. she poured water on the cat. Exercises A. Translate : (1) Bqepa noSpbifi CTapliK'b cuA'feji'b sjvhch na ^xoM-b cxyjiife, K0T6pbiH ero BHyn-b npHHecb na Sepen,. (2) Cojihuc eme ciajio. (3) On-b BliA'feji'b, KaK-b Tarn. JieiKajia cfepan Kdmna. (4) noxoM-b 63 LESSON XVI 69 OH^ CT^Jia HHTb MOJIOKO, KOTOpOC Cfi npHHCCJld aHFJliiiCKafl jI'feBoqKa. (5) KaK-L pasi, boiiiji^ b-b caa-b pi^LJKan co6aKa. (6) npHuiJia K-b KoiuK-fe, xoT-fejia oTornaTb ee. (7) He Morjia. (8) BbiJia apana MCJKjiy co6aKoii h koiukoh. (9) CTapHKi. CMOTp'feji'b Ha HpaKy. (10) B-b ^to BpeMfl cxapaa 6a6a lujia mhmo. (11) Biiflifejia H^ OHa to, ^to cjiyHMJiocb. (12) Hecjia naK-b paa-b 6ojibin6e Bej^po c-b Boa6tt h cxajia JiHTb Bondfi na KoniKy u co6aKy . (13) Go6aKa yS-fejKaJia. (14) KouiKa Jierjia h cnbBa cxajia cnaxb na cojiim'fe. Komna nezjia u cHoea cmojia cnamb Ha cojiHi^m. B. Bonpocbi : (1) Kto CHfl-feji-b Ha 6eper^ p-feK^? (2) Kyaa npHHecb er6 BHyK-b cT^^ji-b? (3) KaKaH Sbijia nordaa?^ (4) KaKOBa 6hisik KouiKa, KOTopan TaMb jie>KaJia? (5) KaKofi SbiJi-b y nefi Hocb? [pink] XBOCT-b? [long] rjias-b? [green] (6) KaKaH 6biJia y nea rojiOBd? [round]. (7) Hto ona cxajia nnxb? (8) Koxopoe mojioko? (9) Hxo cjiyqHJiocb KaK-b paa-b? (10) Ki* KOMy npnuiJia co6aKa? (11) Hxo HoxoM'b cjiyqHJiocb? (12) Ha qxo CMOxp'feji'b cxapiiK-b? (13) Kan-b nocxynnjia cxapan 6a6a? (14) Hxo cjiyqnjiocb cb [to, lit. with] coSaKofi? (15) A C-B K6u.K0ft? ^^^, , ^ C. Rewrite Exercise A, substituting cxap^i^xa and BHyqKa for cxapiiKX. and bh^kt. ; MyiKiiK-b for 6a6a ; ^^meH6K'b, Ka [Jtjenok, Jtjankd], puppy, for co6aKa ; KOxenoK'b, Ka [kAtonAk, kAtonkA], kitten, for KOUiKa. D. Translate into Russian : (1) I did not know what had happened yesterday. (2) It was fine weather [Ex. B 3] and she was sitting in the garden before the house. (3) Just then our little black puppy went into the garden and lay down in the sun. (4) The peasant-woman's stupid son saw the dog lying [how the dog lay] there and wished to drive it away. (5) He could not. (6) Then he behaved very badly. (7) He found a small bucket of [with] water that was standing behind the house. (8) He brought it, poured it on the puppy, and threw the puppy into the water ; it was dirty water. (9) Then the young dog ran away and unfortunately it fell into the river. (10) But another boy came and saved it. (11) Then there was a scrimmage between the boy who (had) poured the water on the dog and the boy who (had) saved it. (12) The little-girl [one word] liked the cat's round head, its pink nose and green eye. (13) Surely she did not say that ? (14) It is impossible to say what she used to do. (15) What is she to do now ? ^ H in this position means too, also. ^ What sort of weather was it ? (pAg6dA). f F-l -H^^-^l 70 LESSON XVII 64-66 LESSON XVII 64. Many feminine nouns end in -b. They are declined tlius : nom. SBcpb [dWr], door gen. JiBepH [dv6ri] dat. SBepn [dv6ri] ace. ABcpb [dve^r] instr. aBepbK) [dverju] prep. HBepn [dv6ri] Note. (1) Nominative and accusative are identical. (2) Genitive, dative, and prepositional are identical. (3) Prepositional ends in -H. 65. MaTb and JtOHb are not declined like aeepb (see Par. 86). 66. -b is the one termination that, of itself, affords no exact indication of gender, for, as was seen in Par. 26, masculine nouns also have this ending. The feminines are in a majority. VOCABULAKY TCTpaAb, H [tatra^t], copy-hook Bife (fern, of HBa) [dvs], two JiomaAb, H [tojAt], Jiorse Tenjibiii [topti], warm Hoqb, H [not/], night xoJioaHbiii [xAtodni], cold nocTejib, H [pAsU^i], hed TeMHbiii [tomni], dark 6ceHb, H [osan], autumn CB-fexjibiti [svstti], light KOHibuiHfl, H [kAnuJnA], stable B^AHOCTb (/.) HC nopoK-b [bsdnAst na pAiok], Poverty is no vice. Exercises A. Indicate the meanings of the following prepositions and the case or cases they govern : Ses-b, Ha, K-b, nepe^-b, B-b, 3a, o, npn. Give one short sentence illustrating the meaning of each. B. Indicate the meaning of the following nouns, indicate the gender of each by placing an adjective before each nominative, and give the dative and instrumental case of each noun : uapb, 6a6a, Bcapo, KouiKa, TOBapHiUT), mhco, BHyK^, HOHb, capaft, noApyra, h66o, pyOjib, aBopen-b, ojienb, Mope, KycoK-b, cojKaji'feHie, caMKa, pifena, oceji-b, KOHibniHH. C. Combine each of the nouns in B with jiiBa, flB'fe or nexbipe. 67-69 LESSON XVIII 71 LESSON XVIII 67. The instrumental case, apart from its use after prepositions as explained in Par. 44, is also employed, as its name implies, to indicate the means by which, or instrument with which, an act is performed. Contrast Ona npnmjia Cb aaMOii [And prijtd sddmAi], She came with, i.e. along withy the lady, with Ona HHcajia nepdn-L, KapanaamoMt, M-fejiOMt [And pisdtA p9r6m, kATAndAJom, liistAm], She wrote with a pen, a pencil, chalk. KpecTbHHHH'b naxaJi'L cox6k) [krestjdrdn pAxdt sax6ju]. The peasant was ploughing with a plough. 68. The instrumental is also used in certain idioms expressing times and seasons, e.g. ceroAHH ^TpoMTj [s9v6dnA litrAm], this morning {to-day in the morning). BHcpa BeHcpoMt [ftjard v^tJarAm], yesterday, last evening. saBxpa yTpoM'L [zdftiA utrAm], to-morrow morning. JtneM'L [dnom], day, by day. HO^bK) [notjju], hy night. BCCHOH [vesnoi], in spring. 3Hm6h [zimoi], in winter. oceHbK) [osgiiju], in autumn. Ji'^TOM'b [istAm], in summer. 69. The instrumental case is also used predicatively after the verb 6i>iTb (and several other verbs, some of which are illustrated in Lesson XL VIII). This is the general form of the phrase when a change of state or a temporary condition is described, e.g. no CMepxH {prep.) oxna OH-b SbiJii, {or cxaji-b) uapeM-b [pA sm6rti Atsd on bit (stat) tsArom], On, i.e. after, his father's death he was {became) czar. Ona c^-fejiajiacb noBapHxcio (oh) [And sdstAtAs pAVArixAJu (aI)], She made herself, i.e. became, a cook. Note. If the complement of 6bixb, cjii'fejiaxbCH, to become, is an adjective, use the instrumental case (Par. 88) after the infinitive, and the predicative nominative (Par. 187) after any other form of the verb, e.g. Ona xox'fejia 6HTb doraxoio [And xAtstA bit bAgdtAJu], She wished to he rich. Ona 6biJia Si^AHa [And bitd badnd], She was poor. 72 LESSON XVIII 69 Vocabulary BecH^, jk [vasnd], spring ji^me [da 59], even Ji'feTO, a [istA], summer hjih [iii], or dceiih, H [osaii], autumn OTflbixaTb 131 A [Adixa^t], to rest 3HMa, ik (ace. ^y) [zima], winter BCTp-feTHTb [fstr6tit], to meet ji;eHb, AHA [de^n, diia], day CKaaaxb [skAza^t], to tell, say ;^Tpo, a [utrA], morning pascKaaaxb [rAsskAza^t], to relate B^qep-b, a [v^tjor], evening ona WHJia A [siW], she lived noroaa, bi [pAgodA], weather naxaTb A [pAxd^t], to plough Mopds-b, a \mA.v6B\, frost maib A [sa^t], to reap Aep^BHH, H [dar^vriA], village BbipacTaTbl31A[virAstd^t],^o5^row^, BI) aep eBH'fe [vdor^vne], in the country grow KpecTbiiHHH'b, a [krastjdrdn], npHroTOBJiHXb 131 A[prigAtAvid^t], peasant to prepare nojie, fl [poio], field jKapKitt [sdrki], hot jKaxBa, bi [5dtvA], harvest xpyA0JiK)6HBbm [trudAlubfyi], w^orA:- JKHXO, a [s'itA], grain loving, i.e. industrious cepni), a [ssrp], sickle MOKpbiii [mokri], damp Koca, bi [kAsd], scy^/ie aypnoH [durnoi], had coxa, II [sAxd], Russian plough noHXH [pAtjtf], nearly KHHra, H [kni'gA], hook Bcerna [fsogdd], always uiKOJia, bi [jkotA], school HHorji;a [iiLigdd], sometimes ypdK-b, a [urok], lesson y>K6 [U38], already Bee xo, Hxo a'fejiajiocb [fso to Jto dstAtAs], aW ^M did itself, i.e. aM t^^ was done, took place. Note. cejio is a village with a church, ^ep6BHfl is a hamlet, a village without a church. Exercises A. Translate : (1) Bnepa yxpoM-b h Bcxp-fexHJia noApyry, Koxopan mhIj pascKa- sajia Bce xo, ^xo ji^jiajiocb, Korjia ona JKHJia B-b aepeBH-fe. (2) BbiJia BecHOH eme xojioAHaa noroaa, ho xpyaojiioSHBbift KpecxbjiHHH'b naxaji-b MOKpoe nojie coxoio, h cfenji-b aqMCHb h obcct*. (3) ^HeMX> OH-b paSoxajix. na Jiyr;^ hjih B-b canf; BeqepoM-b oii-b oxAbixajix., a HoqbK) OKI) cnaji-b. (4) Bcchoh moh nojipyra xome xo^HJia bx> uiKOJiy. (5) BeqepoMX> oh^ npnroxoBJiHJia yp6KX>. (6) JT^xomx* 6bijia oSbiKHOBeHHo xopoman, xenjiaa, nnoraa H^apKan noroaa, H HHMeHb ym6 BbipacxaJiij. (7) 6ceHbH) 6biJia JKaxBa. (8) Kpecxb- HHiiH-b JKaji-b >KHxo ccpnoM-b iKjiH KOCOK). (9) 3hm6h 6bijia no^ixH Bcerna aypnaH noroaa h ciiJibHbm Mopos-b. (10) 3hm6h HejibSH paOoxaxb na ABop'fe [out of doors]. SuMoii ueAhdR padomamb ua deopm. 70 LESSON XIX 73 B. Bonpocbi : (1) H-feM-b naxaji-L KpecTi>flHHHT>? (2) A H'feM'B owb JKaji-B jkiIto? (3) KaKaH dbijia occhbio bte> aep^BH-fe nor6Aa? (4) Bosmojkho jih padoxaxb 3hm6h na HBop-fe? (5) IIoqeM^? (6) Kora^ A'feBoqKa npnroTOBJifljia ypoK-L? C. Translate into Russian : (1) The girl's book was lying with her pencil on the table that stood before the window. (2) She has no [y ueA H'feT'B] copy-book, and her pen and black- pencil are in school. (3) In spring the peasant was never at home ; he was always ploughing or sowing, and often he was still working in jfield or meadow in the autumn. (4) Last night our young son lay down in [on to] bed, but this morning he was lying on the floor. (5) Surely he (had) not fallen on to the floor ? Yes, he was on the floor. (6) Yesterday morning, when I was walking on the meadow, I saw the two (little) girls ; one was playing with the dog, the other was working. (7) In that year there was a hot spring, and a cold autumn. (8) In winter the boy usually went (Par. 40) to [into] school. (9) In summer the idle man used to lie in the sun ; he would never [never not wished to] work, because he always wished to sleep. V (10) To whom did the httle girl bring the nice ripe apple ? (11) What was the old man talking about this morning ? (12) Who was standing before the door ? (13) Whom did you see this morning ? (14) With what did she usually do that ? (15) I was not speaking of the rich man who became a peasant. (16) Last night I saw him giving [saw how he gave] oats to the horse. (17) He generally ploughed in spring when there was still bad weather ; and in autumn, when there was often hot weather, the industrious peasant reaped barley that had grown up [grew up] in the summer. (18) Is it possible to reap or sow in winter ? (19) Why did your old friend nearly always wish to work outside at night ? (20) He could see all you [thou] showed him. (21) I never knew that you [thou] still reaped corn with a scythe, because I never lived in the country. LESSON XIX 70. Of the prepositions governing the genitive several have already been introduced. The most frequently used are : 6631. [bss, bas], without HSTb [iz, is], out of, from SjiHaTb [biis], near KpoM'fe [kroriia], besides BM-fecTO [vilisstA], instead of mhmo [liiimA], past BOSJi-fe [vozio], beside ott. [ot. At], from, away flJiH [dia, diA], /or y [u], at, near ao [do, dA], up to, till, before 74 LESSON XIX 7i B.g, : 6e3T> KHHrH [bas knfgi], without a book. Sjihs-b iiepKBH [biis ts6rk\d], near the church. BM'fecTO nepa [vihsstA para], instead of a pen. BOSJiife neepH [voT^h dv6ri], beside the door. flJlfl MeHfl [diA riiand], /or me. SO ^Toro AHH [dA stAVA diio], till this day. H3i> niKOJibi [is jkoli], from school. H3'L PocciH [is lAsii], from Russia. KpoM'fe Toro [kroiha tAvo], besides that, in addition. MHMO aoMa [ihimA domA], past the house. OTt Apyra [At drtigA], from a friend. y BacL [u vas], with you, near you, in your possession, etc. 71. Observe : OHTb SbiJiT. aoMa [on bit d6inA], He was at home (rest). Oh-l nomejit aoMoii [on pAj6t dAmoi], He went home (motion). Ona npHUiJia aoMOii [Ana prijta dAmol], She cams home. VOCABULAKY Kaeeapa, li [kafodrA], teacher's desk pncoBaTb A [risAva^t], to draw CKaMCHKa, H [skAiii^IkA], bench yqiixt A [utjit], to teach 6yMara, h [bumdgA], paper yqi^Tbca A [utJitsA], to teach one- JtocKa, li {ace. flocKy) [dAska], self, to be taught, i.e. to learn board but yqiiTb ypoK'B [utjit urok], to KJi^ccHaH ji;ocKa [ktasnAJa dAska], learn a lesson black-board (class-board) cnpocHTb [sprAsit], to ask, to make noxBajia, bi [pAxvAtd], praise an inquiry yHHxejibHHixa, bi [ut/itainitsA], /o^2/- cnpauiHBaTb 131 A [sprdJivAt], to teacher ask questions yqHTCJib, H [utjitai], teacher OTB-feHaTb 131 A[AtY9tja^i],to answer yHCHiiK'b, a [utjanik], pupil KpacHbift [krdsni], red yqcHHua, bi [utjanitsA], girl-pupil Ji-feHHBbiii [ianivi], idle LtepKGBb,! KBH [tssrkAf], church BHHMaxejibHbiH [vnimdtaim], atten- whsiTy, a [mst], chalk tive BOKBaJiT), a [vAkzdt], railway-station npHJiejKHbiH [priissni], diligent nocifemaTb 131 A [pAsaJtJd^t], to CTapmiii [stdrji], elder, eldest visit, frequent MJiaamiH [mtdtji], younger (o)K6HHHTb [(A)k6ntjit], to finish cypoBbiii [surovi], severe HHTaxb 131 A [tjitd^t], to read OTKy;:^^ [AtktidA], whence ^ As in KycdK-B or oTe^I. the vowel in the second syllable disappears in the oblique cases. 71 LESSON XIX 75 Exercises A. Translate : (1) MoH cxapmiii ctmi. ym6 KOHqHjit niKOJiA^. (2) Ho Kor^^ H SbiJit B-L AepeBH'fe, ero MJiaaniiii SpaxTj noc%i5ajn> eme MajiCHbKoe yqnjiHme,! Koxopoe ctohjio 6jiH3'L'^0K3aJia. (3) Past oh-l npHineji-B HOMOH HST* lUKOJibi. (4) Er6 ^S^pSrHJii) ero MajienbKiii TOBapnm'L. (5) GnDocj^jit ^6, Hto tm cer6ji;HH ^xpoM-b a-fejiaji-b bx. iiiKOJi'fe?* (6) npfajiejKhLiH yHeHHKx> noKa3ajix> eMy KHHry h xexpa^b, paacKa- aajit Bce xo, hxo ^-fejiajiocb oSbiKHOB^HHo^H ,CKa3ajn>, hxo 6e3T> KHHrH H xexpaAH Hejib3H yqiixbcfl. (7) KpoM-^^ KHnrn 6biJix> y Her6 qepHbiH KapaH3;ann>. (8) Hnor^a cxapmiii yqeHHKX> nncajix. nepoMt BM^cxo KapaHXtama. (9) KpoM-fe ^ xoro ohx> nHcajn> na CyMar-fe. (10) Kjia6raa^ Hocika ' cxoHJia B03Ji'fe'KaeeApi>i yqE[xejiH H nepej]ix> okh6mx>. (11) Tpyaojiio6HBLiH yqnxejib nacxo nncajix. M^JioivTb' Ha aocK-fe. (12) JliHHBbiii yqeHHKx> Bceraa CHa'fejix> na CKaMCHK-fe 6JIH3X, KaoeApbi. (13) GypoBbift cxapbitt yqiixejib j;ajix> yp6Kx> ceroAHH ^xpoMx>. (I^J^Dh-l . mhofo cnpamnBaji-b, ho, kX) cojKaji^HlK), xojibKO oniiHX. BHHMaVcjibHbiii y^enJiKX. xox'fejix. otw^- qaxb. (15) 5xoxx> MajibqHKX> nojiyqnjnb oxx> y^Hxejifl noxBajiy'. dmomb MOJihHUKh noAijHUAh oim> yuumeAR noxeajiy. B. Kewrite Exercise A in the feminine, as far as the sense will admit of that. (Use no^pyra in place of TOBapHmi>.) C. Complete the following : KpoM-fe ^x-, 6e3x. xoBapnm-, 6e3'b hhh-, cx> yq^xcjibHHit-, cx> yqiaxeji-, npn napiiix-, no ABopit-, BM-fecxo kojk-, kx, cecxp-, mm cxapyx-, BX, pifeK- [in], bx, p'feK- [into], na cxoji-, na Ji^r-, Bbsji-fe ABep-, OXX> HCJIOB'feK- H3X> I^CpKB-, HpH I^ap-. D. BonpocBi : (1) OxKyaa npHinejix, Bauix, chhx,? (2) Kyji;a ohx, npnmejix.? (3) Hxo ero cnpocHJix> xoBapnmxj? (4) Hxo ohx> noKasaJiX) xoBa- pnmy? (5) Hxo oh-l Bce pa3CKa3aJix,? (6) Tv jih xaKjKe cnnijix, yqeHHKX.? (8) T^h cxoHjia KJiaccnaH AOCKa? (9) y Koro mhofo M-fejia? (10) H-feMX} y^Hxejib HHcaji'L Ha HocK'fe? (11) HaHeMx,nHcajix>yHeHiiKX>? (12) Kxo oxB-feqajiX), Korfla ynnxejib cnpamHBajix>? ^ yiiijiHme, a [utJiliJtj9]=niK6Jia. 76 PLURALS 72 E. Translate into Russian : A warm spring ; a cold summer ; the cat's green eye ; its pink nose ; its black tail ; its two paws ; ripe corn ; good barley ; blue chalk ; a red pencil ; a lazy boy ; she is a kind teacher ; he is a good teacher ; he told you that ; I told her that ; she never spoke French well ; I related everything to him ; a lot of paper ; a little oats for the ass ; he has no oats for the horse ; how much bread ? two palaces ; three heroes ; once I asked him ; he used to be always putting questions ; he usually went to school, when he lived with his grand- father ; this morning he was going past the house ; he went to school yester- day ; she was at home ; she went home ; what is his sister to do ? surely he has not left school yet ? was it possible to save [cnacTii] the dog that fell into the river ? it is impossible to answer [na with ace.] this question. F. Translate into Russian : (1) Once in the spring my Uttle sister came home in the evening. (2) She showed me a pretty red pencil which the lady- teacher had given her. (3) She always used to answer when I questioned (her), and on that occasion she related everything to me, when I asked her what happened in school. (4) I (had) bought a lot of paper. (5) I gave it to her, so that she might draw or write on it [so that she drew, see Ex. X B 8]. (6) But that paper did not please her. (7) She read very well, because she was a diligent little pupil. (8) At that time she studied in the school that used to stand beyond the meadow. (9) Her young brother could not yet read. (10) He was always a lazy boy ; that is why he could not read. (11) Surely he was not always playing out of doors ? THE PLURAL OF NOUNS 72. Masculine and Feminine Nouns Hard Form Nominative plural ends in -bi, e.g. Jl'^Kh, Jl'iiJiM [dsd (t), dsdi], grandfather. Jiana, Jianti [tapA, tapij, paw. Soft Form Nominative plural ends in -H, e.g. napb, napii [tsa^r, tsAri], czar. ABcpt, ABepn [dve^r, dv6ri], door. (a) If tlie stem ends in r, k, x, m, q, m, m, the termination is always -h, e.g. KapaHAam-B, KapaHAamii [kATAndaJ, kArAndAji], pencil. 73-77 PLUKALS 77 73. Neuter Nouns Hard Form Nominative plural ends in -a ; e.g. MrbcTO, M'fecTa [ihestA, riiasta], place. Soft Form Nominative plural ends in -fl ; e.g. Mope, Mopii [m6ra, niArd], sea. (a) If the stem ends in r, k, x, m, H, m, m, the termination is always -a ; e.g. yqiijinme, yqiiJiHiua [utjliijtja, ytJiiijtJA], school. 74. In all neuter nouns and adjectives, and in masculine and feminine forms denoting inanimate things, the accusative plural has the same form as the nominative plural. 75. The accent frequently changes in the plural and there are many other irregularities among nouns in frequent use. A list is given here of the nouns that have occurred in Lessons I-XIX. The list is, of course, chiefly for reference, but it is recommended that the list be learned gradually group by group and every new noun as it occurs placed in the proper group. 76. Nouns that have occurred in Lessons I-XIX The nominative and genitive singular, nominative plural, and occasionally (in brackets) the genitive plural are given. The genitive plurals will not be used before Lesson XXXVI. 77. Masculine Nouns 1 n-feaib, H'fena, H^jibi, grandfather BHy^K-B, a, H, grandson oropoji'L, a, li, Jdtchen garden usLJihmiK-b, a, H, boy Bt'feaji'L, a, li, entrance MHHHCTpib, a, LI, minister M'feji'L, a, chalk ji6mhk'l, a, H, little house Mopoa-L, a, u, frost TOBapHiu'L, a, H, companion CB'feT'L, a, li, light, world paSoTHHKi., a, H, workman ypoK-L, a, h, lesson BOKS^ji'L, a, li, railway station nopoK-L, a, h, vice 78 PLUKALS 77 Most polysyllabic masculine nouns not accented in the nomina- tive singular on the last syllable, especially nouns in eiJ['b, o6t>, OKh, yet, do not change the accent in the oblique cases. 2 CTOjn>, CTOJia, ctojih, table cepni), a, bi, sickle MymiiK-b, a, h, peasant XBOCT'b, a, li, tail yqcHHK'B, a, h, pupil ZlBop'b, a, LI, court, yard Kapanaamt, a, li, pencil exapHK-L, a, ii, oZcZ man Most polysyllabic masculine nouns accented in the nominative singular on the last syllable and many monosyllabic nouns have the accent on the termination in the oblique cases. 3 OTei^Tj, oma, OTixbi, father ABopent, pua, LI, palace Kyn^U'L, nua, li, merchant OBecL, Bca, i^i, oats KycoK'L, CKa, ii, piece ocejiT), cjia, % ass npyjK6K'L, Ka, ii, dear friend 4 cajii'b, cana, cajubi, garden nojiT*, a, LI, floor moct'L, a, li, 6nc?g'e HOCL, a, lii, wose Bepxi), a, ii, to^, upper part paai), a, li, a fime CLipi), a, li, cheese 5 capaft, capafl, capan, cartshed rep6tt, fl, H, hero cji^qafi, h, h, occasion, opportunity 6 i^apb, i^apa, i^apn, C2;ar Kopojib, A, A, Hiigr flHMeHL, h, h, ftar/ey p^6jib, ii, H, rouble oji^hl,^ h, h, s^agr acHb, HHH, aiiH, (Za?/ MCjliB^Ab,^ H, H, bear 7 rjiasTi, rjiasa, rjiasa (t>), eye noMT), a, a (oBT)), y^owse h^T'l, a, a (ob^), meadow ji'fec'L, a, a (oB'L),/ores^ Beqepi., a, a (obtj), evening d^per-L, a, a (ob-l), bank, shore ^ Notice the accentuation of oji6Hb and MeflB'tflb. 78 PLURALS 79 y^HTejib, yHiiTejiH, yqHTeji}i,~ , (mre) y^HTCJiH,/ 8 xji-feS-L, xji-feSa, xji'fe6^, 6recw^, rda-B, roaa, roaa,"\ Zoaves (rare) rosLi,/^ xji^6i>i, c(yrn ^B'feT'B, UB-fexa, ixB-fexa, coto^^r ii;B'feTbi, flower 9 ClilH'L, Cl5[Ha, CLIHOBBH (B^ft), SOn apyrt, ap^ra, JipysbH (36H),/nenc? KH^3B, KH^3H, KHHBbii (S^tt), ^n^WJe dpax-b, Spdxa, SpaxBH (BeBi>), brother CT^jiT), CTyjia, CT^JiBH (bcb-l), chair 10 Young of animals peSeHOK-L, peSeHKa, peSflxa [raWnAk], child mcHOK'B, HKa, Hflxa, puppy KOXCHOK-B, HKa, THxa, Utten (Cf. Par. 229.) 11 Names of classes of people and of many nationalities KpecxBHHHHT., KpecxbiiHHHa, KpccxbiiHe, a peasant (Cf. Par. 230.) 12 HCJiOB'feK'b, qejiOB-^Ka, juban (eft), man, people 78. Feminine Nouns 1 Accent fixed 6a6a, 5a5bi, 6a6i>i, peasant woman 6yMara, h, h, paper A-feBOHKa, h, h (ckx,), little girl 6a6ymKa, h, h (en-b), grandmother >KaxBa, bi, bi, harvest BH;^qKa, h, h (eKTb), granddaughter KeHii;HHa, bi, bi, woman repoHHH, H, H (b), heroine Kaee^pa, bi, bi, teacher's desk nana, bi, bi, Za^??/ KHHra, h, h, 600A; nepcBHfl, H, H (cHb), village, hamlet K6>Ka, h, h, leather AOHKa, H, H (eK'b), little daughter KOHiomHH, h, h, 5to6Ze npaKa, H, H, quarrel KouiKa, H, h (eK'b), cai 80 PLURALS 79 Ji^na, H, bi, paw CKaM^iiKa, h, h (ck-b), he'mh, seat MaxyuiKa, h, h (cK'b), mother cjiymaHKa, h, h (oKt), servant HHHH, H, H (b), child's nurse co6aKa, h, h, dog noBapHxa, h, h, cook cxapy^xa, w., u, old woman norojxa, li, weather TbMa, bi, gloom, darkness nojipyra, h, iiy female friend yqeHHita, bi, bi, schoolgirl noxBajia, iJi, bi, praise yqiixejibHHi^a, bi, bi, ZacZ?/ teacher nxHixa, bi, bi, ftiVc^ i^apHija, bi, bi, czarina caMKa, H, H (oKt), female (of men, h, h (ft), neck animals) lUKOJia, bi, bi, scAooZ 2 Singular termination accented ; plural stem accented Hrpa, iJi, bi, game Koca, bi, -^bi, sc^/^^^ cecxpa, bi, -bi (ep-b), s*5ier eecua, ^i, -bi (ch-b), spring {season) coxa, II, -^H, plough The last four ma/ also have ace. sing, accented on stem. Termination accented except in accusative singular and nominative plural BOfla, iJi, ^y, -^bi, water 3HMa, bi, ^y, -^bi, m?ifer roJiOBa,bi,-^-y,--bi (first syllable), aocKa, h, ^y or -f, -^h, 6oarc^ /leowi pi^Ka, ii, ^y or -y, -h, nVer The difference in accentuation distinguishes in these words and in the words in Group 2 the genitive singular from the nominative plural. 4 AB^pb,^ HBepH, nBepH (eft), door nocx^Jib, h, h, bed Hoqb,^ H, H (eft), night occHb, h, h, autumn Ji6maji;b,i h, h (eft), horse xexpa^b, h, h, exercise-book CM^pxb,^ H, H (6ft), death 6'feaHOCXb, h, poverty ^6pK0Bb,^ KBH, H (6ft), church 79. Neuter Nouns 1 Draw bach accent in plural Bejipo, BCApa, Benpa (ep-b), pail okho, OKHa, OKHa (KOH-b), window cejio, cejia, cejia, village * Termination accented in oblique cases of plural. 80 LESSON XX 81 2 Move accent forward in plural Macjio,Macjia,Macjia(ceji'b), 6ttWer yxpo, a, a, morning M'fecTO, a, a, place Miico, a, plur. rare, meat Jl'feTO, a, a, summer, years jkhto, a, plur. rare, g^ram nojie, nojifl, nojiH (6ft), ^eW Mope, h, h (6ft), 5ea The transposition of accent in neuter nouns is very general. 3 Do not change the accent mojiok6, a, a, milh nnxbe, h, h (6ft), cfrmA; Kpecjio, a, a (cejit), arm-chair K^^manbe, h, h (itt), /oo), sky, bp6mh, chh, end, tim heaven (Lesson LIII) LESSON XX 80. The plural of the past tense of any verb ends in -jih. The complete form of the past tense is therefore : tr H\]xfMSi^i>, a^Majia (ny^Majio), thought TH Vnomeji'b, nonijia (nouijio), went owb, OHa, OHoJMor'b, Morjia (Morji6), could Plural Mbi [mi], we^ , rj/ \-x ona (m. ay^ I ) [Ai]. [nom [P4 'J 0H4c/:)[Anii(4i"''["ff"] ^ Also spelt -ie. 82 LESSON XX 81-83 Note. (a) The pronoun bbi and the possessive Bamij are often, especially in correspondence, written with a capital. (6) Adverbial past participle (invariable) : jt^MaBT. or A;^MaBmH, nom^AniH, M6rmH, having thought, gone, been able. Adjectival past participle active (declined Hke an adjective) : a^MaBUiitt, nomenmiii, Mormifi, one who has thought, gone, been able. Adjectival past participle passive (declined like an adjective) : (3a)3;;^MaHHbitt, something that has been thought. These forms are given only in order that the student may be able to recognize them in reading : they will not often appear in Part I of this book. 81. MOH [mAi], TBOH [tvAi], HaiiiH [naji], BauiH [vaji] are the plurals for my, thy, our, your or mine, thine, ours, yours. Hxt [jix] = of them, their, theirs. 3TH [eti] and xife [ts] are the pliu-als of axoxt and TOT'B. 82. Nominative Plural op the Adjective Habd Fobm Masc. Fern. Neut. sing. 6'fejiHti 6'fejiaH 6'fejioe, white plur. 6'fejibie [bstija] 6'fejibiH [betijo], 6'fejitiH [bstije] sing. MOJiOAoft MOJioaaH MOJionoe, young plur. MO JIG jpiie [mAtAdij 9] mo jig abih [m AtAdij a] mg JiOAiiH [niAtAdij a] Soft Form Ma^. Fern. Neut. , sing. Kpattnift KpaftHHH Kp aft nee, extreme, last, least plur. KpaftHle [krdinije] Kpaftnifl [krairiija] KpattniH [krdinijs] That is, the endings are, in the masculine plural, -Lie or -ie, and in the feminine and neuter plural, -lih or -in. 83. Remember that h can never stand after r, K, x, m, H, in, m : the plural of pyccKiii is pyccnie, in [ruskijo]. The difference between tie and bih and that between ie and ia exist only in writing, as, in ordinary discourse, there is no appreci- able distinction to the ear. 84r-86 LESSON XX 83 84. The accusative of masculine and feminine plural adjectives qualifying names of inanimate things has the same form as the nominative. All neuter accusatives of nouns and adjectives have the same form as the nominative. 85. Before taking up Lesson XXI, at least the regular nomina- tive plurals should be learned. These and most of the others will be impressed on the memory with very httle effort by reading over the Kussian examples in Lessons I to XIX, taking them according to the following scheme. Re-read the Exercises, substituting, as far as the sense admits of it, plural for singular subjects. Omit oji;hht>, etc. (The word 66a, 66'fe, 65a [obA, 6bo, oIda], meaning both, is a word that suggests itself now and then, but 66a ^ takes the genitive singular like flBa.) (a) Learn masculine groups 1, 2, 3, 4, 12. Ex. I A, Nos. 1, 2, 3, 7, 10. Ex. II A (omit Nos. 6, 14, 15, 16). Ex. Ill B (omit Nos. 6, 8, 11, and 16). Ex. IV A, Nos. 13, 14, 15, 18, 20, 21, 24, 25. (b) Learn masculine groups 5 and 6. Ex. V B, Nos. 1, 2, 3, 8, 12, 13. (c) Learn masculine groups 7 and 9. Ex. VI E, Nos. 5-13. (d) Learn masculine group 8, and neuters 2-6. Ex. VII A. (e) Learn mascuHne groups 7, 8, 9 again and the remaining groups of neuter nouns. Exx. VIII B, IX C, X B. (/) Learn masculine groups 10 and 11 and the rule for the formation of feminine plurals (groups 1-3). Ex. XIII A, Nos. 1-12, Ex. XV A, and Ex. XVI A. (g) Learn feminines, group 4. Exx. XVIII A, XIX A. /HaM'L = to us \ \BaM'B = ^o you). See Par. 176, d. 84 LESSON XXI 86 LESSON XXI PLURALS AND PKONOUNS Vocabulary npHKaaqHKT., a, h [prikdstjik], kjhoh-b, a, vi [klutj], key shop-assistant, clerk cyxott [suxoi], dry BCMJiii, ^, -K), ^H [zemid], earth, land HpKitt [jarki], bright OBu;a, iJl, -LI [Aftsa], sheep cepaiiTbiH [sorditi], angry, violent KopoBa, bi, bi [kAiovA], cow eme pas'b [jajtjo ras], still a time, Tpaea, lii, bi [tiAvd], grass i.e. once more KyxHH, H, n [kuxiiA], kitchen TOMy Haaaai* [tAmii mvzdt], to that KOMHaxa, bi, bi [komnAtA], room hack, i.e. ag'o ;^jiHiia, bi, bi [tiiitsA], 5iree^ TpH roAa tom^ Hasaa-b [tri godA saMOK'b, MKa, MKH [zAmok], lock tAmii nAzdt], three years ago TpyflT), a, li [trud (t)], trouble, diffi- ^aBHbiM'b-AaBHO [dAvnim-dAvn6], culty long ago Exercises A. Write the following sentences with all nominatives in the plural : (1) npundsHUKh npninejiT. kx spyry. (2) Eopdea a oei^d y Mcemi^UHbi. (3) Bn^HKa ryjiHJia ch dddyiuKou. (4) H cm^ j^aji-b KHiiry cecmpiji. (5) yudmejib roBopHJi'b o mempddu. (6) Cemmjiaa ^jiui^a MHife OHCHb HpaBHJiacb. (7) MonpaR mpaed na Jiyry^. (8) CyxdH seMJiA emf H^paBHJiacb. (9) On-b cTp6Hjn> ji;epeB>iHHbi^ AOMT. ndpefl-b deopi^oMb. (10) CecTpa omt{d 6bijia xaM-b. (11) MoU moedpuuf^h KynnjiT, OojibiuoH saMOK'b cb KJiioqoM'b. (12) Tbi npn- uieji-b K-b onm^. (13) Cxapafl cjiyjKanKa npHHCCJia MajieHbKoe Bcapo ch eodou, (14) YHHTejibHHi^a cnn'fejia ua Mocm^. (15) On-b Tyaa nomeji-b Ses-b Md/ibHUKa. (16) Hepnaa Jiomasb 'fejia mpae^. (17) B-fejiafl co6aKa CToajia n^pe^T) jioiuadbio. (18) Kkhsb BHA-fejiii kpKzu cemmh bi. KOMuamrb. (19) Y cmapund CB-fexjibiH homhkt., MaJiCHbKift cajn-b, SojibuioH Jiyr-b, d-fejibiii oceji'b, qepnafl OBi^a. (20) yqcHiii^a nponiJia luKo/iy. yneuui^a npomjia mno/iy. B. Substitute for the words in italics in Ex. A the proper form of the 3rd personal pronoun. 86-87 LESSON XXII 85 C. Translate into Russian : (1) Did the diUgent pupils enter [into] the school ? (2) Why were they sitting on the floor ? (3) The young men did not come to [Kt] the prince. (4) Surely they did not go home ? (5) They came to that man. (6) The old women went through the room. (7) Why was the lazy cook not working in the kitchen ? (8) Once more the industrious peasant-women went into the forest. (9) We never used to come home in the evening. (10) Surely you were not always out of doors ? (11) The Uttle girl was going home when she saw a bright light. (12) Why was the angry teacher always asking questions ? (13) That happened here long ago. (14) They arrived [came] here [hither] two years ago. (15) The hard-working lady- teacher asked once more but the idle pupils never answered anything [never nothing not answered], (16) Could they understand that without difficulty ? (17) They sat down on the wooden chairs. (18) They were lying in bed. (19) We were sitting at the window.* * Par. 211 may be studied at this point and the imperative be practised with any verb marked 131. LESSON XXII OF MSLTh AND AOHb Plural MaxepH [matari] Maxepeii [mAtei-^i] MaxepflM-L [mAterdm] Maxep6ft [mAtor^l] MaxepflMH (pbMH) [mAtarami (fmf)] Maxepiixi. [mAtordx] The declension of noHb [dotj], daughter, is exactly similar. 87. The preposition no is used with the dative case ; ^ it means along, on, according to, over. Some illustrations : no MH^ [pAmns], or no MoeMy' [pAmAJemii], according to me, as far as I am concerned, in my opinion. no HCMy [pAnamti], in his opinion. no KpafiHeii M'fep'fe [pA krainoi rii^ra], according to the hast measure, at least. Ona mjia no y'Jinnli [And jla pA tiiitsa]. She was going along the street. Ona 6poAHJia no ropojxy, no Ji-fecy [And brAditA pA gorAdu, pdiasu], She wandered about the town, the forest. In n6 Ji'fecy note the accent, no ropojuy may be similarly accented. ^ In quite different senses it is used with the accusative or prepositional, e.g. no CMcpxH in Par. 69. Cf. also Par. 183. 86. Declension Singular nom. Maxb [ma^t], mother gen. Maxepn [mdteri] dat. Maxepn [mdtari] ace. Maxb [ma^t] instr. MaxepbH) [mdterju] prep. Maxepn [mdtari] 86 LESSON XXII 87 Vocabulary M^pa , H , M [ih^rA], measure ohx y SHajit [on uzna t], he recognized, JI'fecTHH^a, M, H [UsnitsA], sto*Vs, Ae gro to know flight of stairs cna^aJia [snAtJaU], at first, to begin OHt CA-fejiaji-L [on sdetAt], did (once) with OTKpiiiJii, [Atkrit], opened caMT,, a, 6, caMH [sam, SAmd, sAmo, OHT. noAHHJiCH [on pAdnatsA], raised sdriii], self (emphatic) himself, i.e. went up no^TOMy [pAstAmu], so, therefore, for Ona noAHHJiacb no JiicTunn-fe that reason [And pAdriAtds pA Usnitsa], She Xopom6, qxo OHt 5to CKasaJit raised herself by the stairs, i.e. [xaiaJo, Jto on stA skAzdt], It is went up the stairs good, nice, a good thing, that he said that IIOBTopeHie MaxB yqentH [pAftAr6nJ9 ma^t utj6nJA], Repetition is the mother of harning. Exercises A. Translate : (1) JKenmnHa noniJia no yjinn-fe cb 6qepbK). (2) HaKon^n-B ona npnmjia k-l nB^pn. (3) Gxapaa Maxb OTKpMJia caMa neepb n Bomjia. (4) Gna^iajia ona npouiJia k;^xhk) h HB-fe KOMHaxM. (5) rioxoMx. 6"^^- nafl jK^nmnna noanajiacb no Ji'fecxnnn'fe n yanajia HBepb. (6) JXbq. roAa xoMy^ nasajii'b ona o^enb xopomo snajia 5xy HBepb. (7) Ho jKenmHHa ne xox-fejia caMa oxKpi^ixb. (8) ITo^xoMy ona sajia ^dqepn KJiK)Hx> ox-b KOMHaxbi. (9) flo^b Oes-b xpy^a oxKpiijia h on-fe eme paa-b BOUiJiA. JJ,OHh 6e3h mpyda omKpbVia a oum eu^e pash eoxujiu. B. Rewrite the sentences in A making the subjects plural. C. BonpocLi : (1) !> K-feM-b noHb nomjia no ^Jinii-fe? (2) Ky^a on-fe HaKon^nx. npnmjiH? (3) Hxo cjiynnjiocb? (4) Kxo oxKpi^iJix, ABcpb, Maxb HJiH OHb? (5) Hxo cjiyqiijiocb nox6Mx>? (6) KaKyio KOMnaxy OH-fe cnaqajia npomjin? (7) Kani. on-fe noAHfljincb? (8) Hxo oni ysnaJiH? (9) Kor^a on-fe oqenb xopomo anajin 5xy HBepb? (10) KoMy^ Maxb Aajia KjiK)qx>? KaKott kjiiohx*? (11) H-feM-b oqb oxnpi^ijia HBcpb? D. Translate : (1) Yesterday morning two (little) girls were walking along the street. (2) I walked along the street. (3) The old man's sons went into the peasant's garden. (4) The young women lived in the house that used to stand beyond LESSON XXIII 87 the village. (5) His young companions opened the doors. (6) At first the lazy pupils thought that the flowers (were) not in the room. (7) The lady- teachers were not at home. (8) The diUgent pupils were writing with pencil on paper. (9) It is a good thing that the two boys went up [verb plural] the stairs. (10) I could not see him anywhere. (11) I saw the old benches in the room. (12) Surely the little girls did not wish to play with that woman's daughter ? (13) At last the mother came and opened the door. (14) She wished to go for a walk with (her) mother. (15) We learned that the old servants (were) in the kitchen. (16) At least one old peasant woman went in. (17) She passed through the room and entered the kitchen, where the grandmother was sitting. (18) Beautiful, clean, bright villages. \J{19) In the evening we saw the old woman once more. (20) They were walking on the bank of the stream and were playing with the nurse. (21) That happened three years ago. (22) In his opinion the room is a very dark (one). (23) The kind intelligent boys saved the girl from [h3I>] the water. 88. LESSON XXIII Declension of Adjectives Hard Forms (a) Stem accented Masc. CT^pbiH [stdri] Neut. Fern. cxapoe [starAJa] cxapafl [stdrAJa], old gen. dat. ace. instr. prep. nom. gen. dat. ace. instr. cxaparo [starAVA] cxapoMy [starAmu] gen. or nom. nom. cxapbiMX> [stdrim] cxapoMX) [starAm] Plural Masc. Neut. cxapbie [starijo] cxapbiH [stdrija] cxapoii [starAi] cxapoii [stdrAi] cxapyio [stdruju] cxapoii (oK)) [stdrAi (aju)] cxapoii [stdrAi] Fern. cxapHfl [stdrija] gen. or nom. cxapbixX) [stdrix] cxapbiMX) [stdrim] nom. cxapbiMii [stdrimi] gen. or nom. prep. cxapbiXT> [stdrix] The complete declension of the plural is printed here for conveni- ence : the obhque cases will not be employed before Lesson XXX. 88 LESSON XXIII 88 (b) Termination accented Masc. Neut. Fern. nom. npocT6it [prAstoi] npocT6e [prAstoja] npocT^n [prAstaJA], sm^Ze gen. npocToro [piAstovA] npocToii [prAstoi] dat. npocTOMy [prAstomu] npocT6fi [prAstoi] and so on, in all forms corresponding to (a) above. Note. (1) Except in the nominative and accusative the masculine and neuter forms are identical. (2) In the feminine singular the gen. dat. instr. and prep, are aUke. (3) In (6) the masc. nom. sing, and the feminine gen. dat. instr. oxidprep. are aUke. Vocabulary TBepsbiii [tvordi], hard (opp. of soft) anaKt, a, h [znak], sign Tp^SHbiii [triidni], difficult Kyn^n'L, nna, ii [kupsts], merchant TflJKejibitt [t836}i], heavy My>KqHHa,ibi, bi {masc.) [muJtJfnA], JKCJiTbiH [sotti], yellow man {not a woman). HSiyLK-bf a, II [J9zik], tongue, hinguage Exercises A. Decline in tlie singular and nominative plural : jKejiTbifi KapaHnam-b, KpacHBan fl'feBoqKa, xoji6AHaH hohb, cxapHtt oceji-b, qepnan Jioma^b, Tenjioe ji-fexo. B. Give the (1) genitive singular, (2) instrumental, and (3) nominative jplural of the Russian equivalent for : Bad weather, a large pail, a diJfficult tongue, the hard sign, a young boy, yellow oats, a sick peasant-woman, long lesson, cold day, rich merchant, damp grass, red sun, green grass, brown horse, long nose, grey cat, brave hero, the rich woman, old book, the long garden, the old house, intelHgent man, this woman and that man. * HejioB-feKi can have the wider sense of person. 89-90 LESSON XXIV 89 89. LESSON XXIV Declension of Adjectives (continued) Soft Form Singular nom. Masc. Neut. p^HHifi [rdni] paHHee [rdnaja] Fem. paHHHH [rdnaja], early gen. dat. ace. instr. prep. paHHHro [rdnavA] paHHeMy [rdnamu] no7n. or gen. nom. paHHHMT. [rdnim] paHHeMTj [rdnem] Plural paHHeii [rdnai] paHHCft [rdnei] paHHiOK) [rdnuju] paHHeii (eio) [rdnai (9Ju)] paHHeii [rdnoi] nom. pdHHie [rdnaja] paHHin [rdnaje] paHHiH [rdiiaja] gen. dat. ace. instr. prep. paHHHX'b [rdnix] paHHHMt [rdriim] nom. or gen. paHHHMH [rdmriii] paHHHXT. [rdnix] 90. That is to say tlie declension of panniH is identical with that of CTapHii, the soft vowels replacing the hard vowels throughout, i corresponding to H preceding ii or a vowel H Bi in all other positions ^ )) j> ^ e unaccented o 10 y Vocabulary nosAHlii [pozni], hxie nep^AHflH [pai'Miioja] (a feminine adjective in form and declined as such), entrance-hall aoManiHiii [dAmdjni], tame, domestic JKHBOTHoe [3iv6tnAJ8] (a neuter ad- jective in form and declined as such), an animal 90 LESSON XXV 91-92 Exercises A. Decline in singular and nominative plural : CHHce Mope, nosAHHH BCCHa, soManiHce jkhbothoc, paHHHH occhb. B. Give (1) genitive singular, (2) prepositional singular, (3) nominative plural of the Russian equivalent for : tame bird, green sea, red door, white paper, warm spring, heavy board, cold day, black cat, clean water, large bed, dark entrance-hall, late summer, early autumn. LESSON XXV 9L Declension op Adjectives {continued) In tlie writing of adjectives, as in every part of Russian ortho- graphy, the general rules must be observed, that LI, H, K) never appear after r, k, x, jk, h, m, m ; they are replaced by H (or i before vowels and half-vowels), a, y ; fl, K), never appear after ii ; they are replaced by a, y ; unaccented is replaced by e alter >K, H, m, m, ii. In words hke aHKiii [diki], wild, and ropHHiii [gAratJi], hot, these rules must be carefully -observed. 92. Adjectives in r, k. X nom. Singular Masc. Neut. jU^Kiii [diki] niiKoe [dfkAJa] Fem. Ai^KaH [dikAJa], wild gen. dat. ace. instr. prep. HHKaro [dikAVA] jliHKOMy [dfkAmu] nom. or gen. nom. mKUMh [dfkim] AHKOMT. [dikAm] A^Koii [dikAi] miKoii [dikAi] nHKyio [dikuju] miKOH (OK)) [dikAi (AJu)] miKOfi [dikAi] nom. Plural miKfe [dikija] W^kir [dikijo] jiAkih [dikijg] gen. etc., H HUKUXh [dikix] replacing bi. 93-94 LESSON XXVI 91 93. The terminations in wliich tlie type flHKiii differs from the type cxapbiH are printed in italics in Par. 92. Vocabulary BCJiiiKiii [vaiiki],^ great mnpoKlti [Jiroki], hroad JierKifl [ioxki], light, easy ^3Kiii [tiski], narrow MiirKiii [rhaxki], soft Exercises ' A. DecHne in singular and nominative plural : jKapKoe ;^Tpo, MHrniH SHaK-B, Beji^mtt uapt, jierKitt ypdK-L, HiiKoe mHBOTHoe, mnpoKan CKaMeiiKa, ^3Kifi CTOJi-b. B. Translate into Russian : soft hands, bright suns, broad streets, narrow rooms, easy lessons, hot [a^^pKlft] days. C. Give the proper forms in the singular of the examples in Ex. B (1) with the prep, o (2) HJiH (3) KT, LESSON XXVI 94. Declension of Adjectives {continued) Adjectives in >k, q, m, m Singular Masc. Neut. Fern. nom. ropflHiH[gAratJi] ropHqee[gAratJoJ9] ropiiqa^ [gArdt/eja], ^o< gen. ropaqaao [gAratJavA] ropaqeH [gAratJai] dat. ropHHCMy [gAratjemu] ropaqeH [gArdtJoi] ace. nom. or ace. nom. ropHq[/io[gArdtJuju] instr. ropflqHMT> [gAratjim] ropHHctt (eio) [gArdtj8i (eju)] prep. ropHHeMt [gAratJ"9m] ropH^eft [gAratJai] Plural Masc. Neut. Fern. nom. ropfl^ie [gAratJija] ropHHin [gArat|iJ9] ropHqin [gArdtJijg] gen. ropflqnx'L [gArdtJix] etc., like paHHift in Par. 89. ^ Cf . p. 26, note 5 to k. 92 LESSON XXVII 95-96 95. The type ropHqift is very similar to the type paHHiii, from which it differs only in the terminations printed in italics in Par. 94 : a and lo never follow m, h, ui, ux. Vocabulary cqacxie, h [stjastja], happiness HCCHacTie, h [nastjdstja], unhappi- cfwbf a, bi [sup], soup ness, misfortune Exercises A. Decline : xopomaH noroaa, ropiiqiH cyni.. B. Translate into Russian : much ripe corn ; how much clean water ? he was speaking of the hard sign and not of the soft sign ; little warm water ; (it is ) cold weather to-day ; with the black horse ; of the blue chalk ; in the dark room ; about the easy lesson ; a late summer ; to a difficult language ; with a yellow pencil ; on the wooden table ; of the old black arm-chair ; without the poor man ; behind the dark forest ; into the old school ; about a difficult language ; on to the wild animals ; I was speaking of your great misfortune and of her happiness ; he saw a tame bird ; about the rich merchant ; into the deep water ; towards the bright light ; there are our black horses ; there is her poor mother ; his intelligent sons. LESSON XXVII 96. Certain irregular past tense forms,i e.g. necL, carried, and MOn>, could, was able, have been already employed (see Par. 63). Two verbs in frequent use having mascuHne past tense without the usual Ji are : OHt yMcpij [uriier], he died. OHT) Bes'b [vos], he carried in a vehicle, conveyed. In all such verbs the other forms of the past tense are regular in appearance : yMepjiai ^Mcpjio, yMepjiH [uiherla, uriiorlA, timarii] BCSJia, BCBJio, BCSJiH [vazlo, vazlo, vazlij (a) The past participles (cf. Par. 80, note b) of these and the verbs dealt with in Par. 97 are : 1 See hst of several such forms in Par. 239. 97-98 LESSON XXVII 93 Adverbial past participle : yMepuiH, BesuiH, xohhb'L, lueAuiH, ixaBt. Adjectival past participle : yMepmift, BeamlH, xonHBUiifi, ineHuiiH, ixaBuiili. . j..jjErU^ dt^^..^^^^ . u^kf^ 97. The verbs xoaHJii* {inj. xoahtb) and mejn> {inf. htth) both v^ . mean Ine went. The distinction between them was explained in V Par. 40. But both these verbs always mean to go on foot, to go hut not in a conveyance. If the word go means to travel by any kind of vehicle, not on one's own legs, then the word that replaces uieji'L is (oHT>) 'fexaji'L [jsxAt], e.g. : Oht> mejiTb MiiMO [on Jot ihfmA], He was walJcing {walked) past. OiYh 'fexaJi'B MHMO [on jsxAt rfiimA], He was driving {drove) past. And just as we have Oht. npHmejit (n'femKOM'B) [on prijot pejkom]. He arrived {on foot), so OhT) npi'fexaJi'B [on prijsxAt] means He arrived {in a conveyance). npi'fexaTb BepxoMT) [prijexAt verxom], to come riding. The prefix npn in these words evidently corresponds to the EngUsh near, up, up to. In the second example it is written npi because i, not u, is the regular form of this vowel when it precedes a vowel. Similarly we form compounds of 'fexaxb corresponding to all the other compounds of htth {infin. of uieji'L) given in Par. 62 : B-L-fexaxb [vexAt]; npcfexaTb [prAJsxAt]; na^xaTb [nAJexAt], to drive up, come together; ncfexaxb [pAJsxAt]. 98. The preposition from is sometimes troublesome to trans- ^ late. Notice these examples : 6^ Fepoii nojiynHJi-b HBopeu'b OTt i^apii [gardi pAtutJit dvArets At ^ tsArd], The hero received a palace from the czar, Maxb yMcpjia oxt xcji^pbi [ma^t uriiertd At xAlsri], The mother died from {of) cholera. Ohtj npi-fexajix. nst Apyr6ro ropoAa [onprijsxAtiz drugdvA gorAdA], He arrived from {out of) another tovm. Kojibuo c^'fejiaHO 1 HS-L aojioxa [kA^itso sdstAnA iz z6tAtA], The rin^ is made from {of, out of) gold. ^ Neuter predicative (Par. 187) of passive past participle cfffejiaHHMft. The active past participle of this verb is cH'fejiaBinitt (cf . Par. 80, a). 94 LESSON XXVII 98 G-L Tor6 HHfl OHt HHKorsa h6 SbiJit xaM-L [stAvo dna on nikAgda nsbit tarn], From {since) that day he was never there. Note. Ct (co) =from, is used with the genitive : Ohtj CHfljn> KHHry co CTOJia [on snat knigu sAstAta], He took the hook from {off) the table. Vocabulary r6pojii'b, a, a [gorAt], town Bapyn* [vdruk], suddenly HapoAt, a, LI [n^vrot], people OTBeat [Atvoz (s)], conveyed away ^pMapKa, H, H [jarmArkA], fair ocTaxbCH [Asta^tsA], to remain, be left xojiepa, LI [xaIsia], cholera njiaKaxL A [ptdkAt], to weep H^ena, li, -li [sand], wife saSoji-feTb [zAbAkit], to fall ill SojiLHHi^a, Li, LI [bA^initsA], hospital SHaHHTTj [znatjit], that means, that is 6oJi43HL, H, H [bAl^zn], disease to say ymsicuhiii [uT^asm], terrible MHoro napojuy^ [mnogA rnvrodu], ccHqaCL [satjds], immediately, lit. many folks, many people this hour Euf TOJibKO TpH roaa [jamti t6^ikA tri godA], He is only three. Exercises A. Translate : (1) B-L OAHOM-b ropoA'fe 6Lijia HpMapKa. (2) Bt. 5to epeMH SLiJia xoji^pa. (3) Mnoro napday yMepjio^ ot-l 5toh ymacHoii doji-feaHii. (4) npiixaji-L na ^xy npiviapKy o^hh-l Kynei^-L hs-l apyroro ropoAa cl jKenoH h mojig^oh ao^KOii. (5) JX-^BO^K-h 6LIJI0 TOJiLKO HexLipe r6ji;a. (6) Bjiipyr-L oxeiiTb h Maxb saGoJi-fejin. (7) CeH^acL oxbcsjiii b-l SoJiLHHtty GojiLHoro oxita cl 6'fe^H0H MaxepbK). (8) SHaHHXx., ocxajiacb MaJicHLKaa A'^BO^Ka o^Ha. (9) njianajia, 6ibji;HaH, njiaKajia.^ SHamimh, ocmaaacb McuieHbKaH dmeoHKa odua. B. BonpocBi : (1) Tflife SLiJia HpnapKa? (2) KanaH Soji-fesHL Smia b-l 5xo BpcMfl? (3) Hxo yme cjiynHJiocL? (4) Ox-l KaKofi Soji'fesHH ohh ^ This form in -y is a partitive genitive found in certain phrases after measures, weights, adverbs of quantity. Cf. namKa Haio (Voc. XLIII). 2 Note the neuter singular verb, the subject having the force of a singular collective. ' In English, too, we make use of this simple device of repetition, in order to deepen the impression of intensity : she wept and wept. 99-100 LESSON XXVIII 95 ^MepjiH? (5) Ct. K'hu'h npi-fexaji-b Kyneiit? (6) Ckojilko nd^K-fe ji-feTt [years]? (7) Hto cjiyqnjiocb, Koraa Kyn^iit Cb JKenoil npi^xajiHi? (8) Ky^a cettHact oxBesjiii otu^ h Maxb? (9) Hto CJiyqiijiocb ct [happened to] AO^KOii? C. Translate into Kussian : (1) They usually lived in one small room. (2) In the winter my poor father died of that illness. (3) At that time a great many people were walking along the street. (4) The rich merchants drove up when we were standing before their door. (5) The cold streets of the big town did not please me. (6) His young son was then only two years old. (7) When did her old mother turn ill ? (8) The sick boy was in the other building, but I did not know then who (had) carried him away there [thither]. (9) Why were they left alone in that great dark house ? (10) She received that book from my father. LESSON XXVIII 99. The preposition no governs the genitive and means to, up to, till, before, e.g. ao i^Toro AHH [do (dA) stAVA dna], up to, till, before that day. no PomnecTBa [dA rA5d9s(t)va], till Christmas. no BOHHLi [dA VAini], before the war. no PoJKnecTBa XpHCTOBa ^ [dA rAsdostvd xristovA], up to, i.e. before the birth of Christ, B.C. OTt Ha^aJia no KOHn;a [At nAtJatA dA kAntsa], from beginning to end. . no ^Toro MajiCHBKaro noMa [dA stAVA maienkAVA domA], up to that little house. 100. The preposition npo is used with the accusative ; it means about, of, concerning, e.g. H yanajit npo Bame Hccqacxle [ja uznat prA vdja nostjastja], / got to know, learned, of your misfortune. Mm pascKasaJiH npo Bofiny [mi rAsskAzdii prA vAinii], We told of the war. That is, npo with the accusative has the same value as o with the prepositional. ^ Notice this plural form, where, in English, the singular would be used. * Oenitive of Xphct6bi>, a, o, h, an adjective found only in this short form. 96 LESSON XXVIII 101-103 101. Tlie 3rd plural of the verb used without a subject expressed has the force of the indefinite they or people, e.g. roBopHJiH [gAVAriii], They were speaking, they were saying. CKasaJiH [skAzaii], They said, it was said. 102. (a) This indefinite 3rd plural is often the most convenient idiom to use in translating our passive, e.g. Mwh CKasajiH [mns skAzaii], They told me, i.e. / was told. He nycKajiH en. [lis puskaii J9J6], They did not admit her, i.e. she was not admitted. (b) The passive may often be rendered by the Kussian reflexive verb, e.g. ^TO cjnibjiajiocb [stA sdstAtAs], That was done, that took place. 103. The reflexive pronoun for self referring to any subject is decHned thus : . gen. ce6fl [saba] dat. ceS'fe [sabs] ace. ce6fl [ssbd] instr. C06610 [sAboju] prep. ceS'fe [sdhi] Vocabulary CHpoxa, bi, OTBi [sirAta], orphan HCKaTb (with genit. or ace.) A CHpoTKa, H, H [sirotkA], little orphan [iska^t], to seek BOftHa, ik, BOHHbi [vAina], war sa^^Maxb [zAdumAt], to conceive a CCMbfl, H, H [s^mja], family plan PowaecTBO, a [rA5das(t)v6], Christ- p'feniHTb [rajit], to make up one's mas mind, resolve, solve HaqaJio, a, a [iiAtjatA], beginning SpofliiTb A [brAdit], to wander rope, H, H [goi-a], grief, sorrow about CBOH [svoi], one's own B3Hjn>, Jia [vzat, vzaIq], he took qyjKOH [tju36I], strange, not one's {once) own B3HTb K-b ceS-fe [vza^t ksabs], to take U'fejlbiH [tssli], whole, entire to oneself, to adopt CHacTJiHBbiH [stJAs(t)iivi], happy Homeji-b, mjia, 6 [dAj6t, jta, 6], went HecHacTHbiH [n9stjas(t)m], unhappy, up to, reached unfortunate OTHiero? [AtJ9v6] stands for OTt TaK-b H [tok i], and so too Hero? from what ? i.e. from what nycKaxb 131 A [puska^t], to let, cause ? and is a common equiva- admit lent for why ? 103 LESSON XXVIII 97 EXEKCISES A. Translate : (1) HsLKOu^JXh OHa saa^Majia ncKaib otu,l h MaTb. (2) Ilomji^ OHa no r6poay. (3) Bpoanjia i^-fejibiii eHb h xojibKO Kt B^nepy AouiJia ona no Sojibuion 6ojibHHnbi. (4) Ho BTt GojibHnny eA ne nycKajiH. (5) 'fexajii, mhmo fl-feBo^KH Soraxbiii Kyn^i^-b. (6) Ona pascKasajia CMy npo CBoe ^ rope. (7) j[i;66pbiii HejioB^Ki* Bomeji'b B-b SojibHiiny yanaTb npo OTi;a h Maxb HecHacTHott ^-febOHKH. (8) TaMt eMy^ CKaaajiH, hto ohh yjK^ ;^MepjiH. (9) H p'femnji'b noSpbiii Kynei^i. B3flTb cnpoTKy K-b ceSi. (10) Tan-b h cjxhsiasn>. (11) Gxajia jkhtb HecqacTHafl cnpoxa B-b HyjKott ceMb^ KaKX. bx> CBo6fi.2 TaMh eMy cKaacuiu, umo ohu y^yfce yMepjiu. B. Rewrite Ex. A, making the subject of eacli sentence plural. C. Bonpocbi : (1) Hxo ona p'femiijia cH-fejiaxb? (2) CK6jibK0 BpeMCHH [of time] OHa SpoAHJia no ropoay? (3) Korji;a ona AoniJia ao 6ojibHiinH? (4) Morjia jih ona BH^ifexb oxu^a h Maxb? (5) Oxqer6 nifexx*? (6) Kxo npl-fexaji-b B-b 5x0 Bp^MH? (7) Ilpo ^xo MajienbKafl A'feBoqKa bm^ pascKaaaJia? (8) KaKOBX. 6bijix. ^xoxx. Kynei;x>? (9) Hxo OHt ysHaJiT* Bx> SojibRHi^-fe? (10) Hxo ohx> p'femHJii> ca-fejiaxb noxoMX*? (11) Cff-fejiajiT) JIH OHX> 5x0 BT> caMOMX> A'feji'fe? [in very deed, cf. npn c^MOMX> EXj-fesA-fe in Ex. X]. D. Translate into Russian : (1) Surely she did not wish to wander all day about the street ? (2) We took it into our heads [conceived the plan] to remain in the garden all [bcio] night [ace. sing.]. (3) They said he never reached the white house in which the old woman lived. (4) From the beginning of the year till Christmas he was left alone in that large house. (5) Why did they not let the boy into those beautiful rooms ? (6) What did you learn about the poor man's unhappy son ? (7) It was well that I was not told about that. (8) The rich man (had) already died in the great hospital. (9) I learned that only last night. (10) The young men were standing in front of that large window. (11) The kind Russian ladies who arrived to-day adopted the little orphan. (12) She was walking past the little house. * About her (own) grief. 2 In her (own) family. The distinction between eA and cB6it is made clear in the next Lesson, Par. 109. 98 LESSON XXIX 104-107 LESSON XXIX Declensions of Possessives, Demonstkatives, etc. 104. MOH, TBOH, CBOH, my^ thy, one's own. Singular Plural M. N. F. M. N. F. n. CBoii [svoi] CBoe [svajo] CBo;i [svAJa] CBOii [svAf] g. CBoero [svAJavo] CBoett [svAJ6i] cbohx-l [svaIx] d. cbocm;^ [svAJomu] CBo6ii [svAJei] cbohmi. [svAim] a. nom. or gen. nom. cbok) [svAJii] cboh [svai] , -Hxt [svaIx] i. CBOHM-L [svAim] CBoett(eio)[svAJ6i(6ju)] cbo^mh [svAuiii] p. CBoeMT) [svAJ6m] cbo6h [svAJ6i] cbohx'l [svaix] MOfi and TBOH are declined in exactly tlie same way. 105. HauiTj, Kama, name, nauiH, our, ours, and Bamt, Bama, Bame, BauiH, your, yours, are declined exactly Hke tlie words in Par. 104, except that the termination is never accented, e.g. Hamero, Hamen, HaiuHX'B are the genitives. 106. The following pronomis and adjectives are also dechned like CBoii : qett [tj6I], Hbfl [tjja], Hbe [tjjo], hbh [tjji], whose? (stem qt, e.g. ace. sing. HLcro, Hbio, Mbe), e.g. O ^bctt KHHr-fe Bm roBopiaJiH? [AtJj6I knige vi gAVArili], Whose hook were you talking about ? ceii [s6i], cia [sija], cie [sijo], cIh [sii], this (stem c, e.g. gen. sing, cero, cefi ; ace. fern. CK) or ciib). This word is idiomatic in a few set phrases and is otherwise little used, e.g. ceroffHH [sevodnA], of this day, i.e. to-day ; ciib MHH^xy [sijii mimitu], this minute, i.e. at once. BCCb [ves], BCfl [fsa], Bce [fso], Bcife [fse], all (stem bc, e.g. gen. sing. Bcero. 'fe replaces H, e.g. instr. sing. BcfeMT*, gen. plur. Bcifex'L), e.g. Bce 5x0 [fso stA], all that ; jiiJiH BcfexTi Hact [dlA fssx nas], for us all. 107. aTOT'b [stAt], this, is dechned fully thus : Singular Plural Masc. Neut. Fern. 31. N. F. nom. ^TOT-b 5to ^xa [stA] 5xofi [stAi] 5xH [6ti] gen. i^Toro ^XHX-b [etix] dat. ^TOMy 5X0H [stAi] etc. ace. gen. or nom. 5xy [etu] instr. ^THMT, 5X0H [stAi] prep. ^TOM-b 5xofl [stAi] 10^109 LESSON XXIX 99 (a) TOT'b, that, is similar in declension but takes "fe every- where instead of H and always accentuates the final syllable, e.g. gen. sing. Toro [tAVo]. axoT'L corresponds to either ' this ' or ' that.' TOTt means ' that.' When both words occur in a sentence axoTt means *this' and TOT'b means * that.' (6) OHHH'L, oji;Ha, ohho, with plural ohhh (-Hxt) for masc. and neut. and OHH-fe (-'fexT>) for feminine, is decHned like stottj, but the accent always^falls on the final syllable, e.g. gen. sing. OAHoro [AduAVo], OAHOii [Adnoi], (c) The emphatic pronoun caMt, caMa, caMO, caMH, self, has genitive caMoro, -oh, -oro, -hxt>, and is otherwise dechned like OHHHt, oana, -ho, -hh.^ (One form only for all genders in plural.) 108. The words ero [J8v6], en [jajo], hxt> [ix, jix], are the genitive forms of oh-l, oho, ona, ohh and oui, but, as has been learned by this time, they do duty for the possessives of the 3rd person with the meanings his, her, its, their. 109. The distinction in use between the possessives moh, tboh, HauiTb, Bani'L, ero, en, hxT), and the word cboh, cboh, CBoe, cboh, must be carefully observed. The latter always refers to the sub- ject of the clause and may refer to a subject singular or plural, of first, second, or third person, and may accordingly at different times require to be translated by any one of our possessive adjec- tives, e.g. H BiiA'feJit er6 ciiHa [ja vidal: J9v6 siiia], / saw his son. H BHH'feji'b CBoer6 ciiHa [ja videt svaJ9v6 siha], / saw my {ovm) son. Oh-l BHA'feji'b Moero Cbinsi [on videt inAJ9v6 sinA], He saw my son. Ohtj BVijifh^Ti CBoer6 ci^ina [on videt svaJ9v6 sinA], He saw his (own) son. Oh'l BHS'feji'L ero ciiiHa [on vid9t J9v6 sinA], He saw his {another man^s) son. j Ona BHjt'fejia ero (oh) Cbina [Ana vidgtA J9v6 (J9J6) smA], She saw his or her {another person's) son. Ona BHA'fejia CBoero ci^iHa [And vidgtA svaJ9v6 sinxv], She saw her (own) son. ^ In the fern. ace. singular there is an alternative form caMoe [sAmAJo]. 7^ /^^^ ^"^ 100 LESSON XXIX 109 VOOABULAEY TCTKa, H, H [t6tkA], aunt npaBJia, bi [pravdA], truth rAusi, VLf II or h a [dadA], uncle r6jioc'L, a, a [g6tAs], voice nJieMiiHHHKT., a, h [piaihdnik], KOJibi^o, a, -^a [kA^itso], ring nephew bojioto, a [zoUtA], gold nJieMHHHHi^a, m, bi [piamdnitsA], rpoMKitt [gromki], loud niece aojiOTofi [zAtAtoI], of gold pyna, h, ^h [ruka], ace. pyKy, Kp-fenKiii [krspki], firm hand or arm po>KamiH ^ [drA5aJtJi], trembling n^jieit'L,! najibi^a, li [paiats, cjnimaTB A [stiJAt], to hear pd^itsA], finger HyjKHO [nu3nA], it is necessary Exercises A. Translate : (1) Bbi cxpoHJiH CBoft aoM'B. (2) Xopomo, qxo a xox-fejit KynHTb Baui-b AOM-b. (3) Oh-b paSoTaji-b B-b cBoeM-b ca^^. (4) HeyjK^jiH OHi. cioAa npi'fexaji'b hsi* Toro ropoaa? (5) Mm 5to nojiyqHJiH ot-b CBoero OTi^a. (6) Bauia KopoBa SpoaiiJia Becb eHb no i^TOMy Jiyry. (7) Heii rpoMKiii rojiocb mm xan-b qacxo cjibimajin? (8) Bcfe 5xh miKifl mHBOXHMH i^JIH x6jIbK0 OAHy OBny. (9) HYJKHO SblJIO HX-b SpysbflM-b CKasaxB Bce xo, hxo mm yjK6 nexbipe roaa snaJiH. (10) Bo3m6hho jih 6bijio EHfl-fexB xo, qxo Bbi n'fejiaJiH b-b CBo6ii KOMnax-fe? (11) Bcfe naniH npy3BH 6bijih xor^a s^-fecB. (12) HBCMy- ciiiHy Bm a^jiH cxapyio CBoib KH^ry? (13) HBeii Honepn bm pascKaaajin Bce xo, qxo cjiy^HJiocB? (14) HeyjK^JiH ^xo npaB^a? (15) ITo CHacxiio fl He aHaJi-B 5xoro r6pona. B. Translate into Russian : (1) My aunt is the sister of my father or mother, or my uncle's wife ; I am her nephew. (2) My uncle is the brother of my father or of my mother ; I am his nephew. (3) My niece is the daughter of my brother or sister ; I am her uncle and my wife [remember the my wife is the subject of an in- dependent statement] is her aunt. (4) I heard his trembling voice. (5) He gave me his trembling hand. (6) The little boy was playing with his finger. (7) His firm hand was lying on the table. (8) In a trembling voice \instr. without preposition] he was reading my book. (9) Whose book was he read- ing ? (10) I saw a gold ring on your finger. (11) Her ring was of (Par. 98) gold. (12) Can it be [is it possible] that he slept in his room ? {ambiguous in English]. ^ This word is declined like oTe^'B, but as the ji in the nominative is soft, the b appears in the other cases to indicate that the Ji is still soft. * In form a present participle active. 110-114 LESSON XXX 101 LESSON XXX 110. The dative, instrumental, and prepositional plural of nouns have one set of endings throughout, viz. : Haed Form dat. plur. aM-L, e.g. ctoji&M'B [stAtdm], tables instr. aMH, ctoji^mh [stAtami] prep. axt, ctoji^x-l [stAtdx] Soft Form dat. plur. HWb, e.g. HiinflM-L [nanam], nurses instr. HMH, HiiHflMH [ndnoihi] prep. HXT., H^HHXt [ndnax] 111. Exceptional Forms in Instrumental Plural. ^Feminine nouns belonging to group 4 in Par. 78 often end in lmh, e.g. JiomaAbMH [lAjAdihi], horses. Maxb has MaTcpbMii [matarmi] (see Par. 86) jiom, noMepBMH [dAtJerihi] 112. Note that those words marked ^ in group 4 in Par. 78 have the accent on the termination in the obhque cases of the plural, e.g. nom. sing. Jioma^b [t6jAt] but dat. plur. JiomaAiiM'b [tAJAddm] nom. plur. JidmaAH [t6jAdi] instr. plur. JiomaABMJi [tAjAdihi] prep. plur. Jioma^jix'B [tAjAddx] 113. The corresponding case-endings for adjectives are : Hard Form dat. plur. BiMt, .gr. KpiLCUUWb [hcasnim], red, beautiful instr. LIMH, KpdCHHMH [krdsmmi] prep. HXT., Kp^CKHXT) [krdsnix] Soft Form dat. plur. HM-B, e.g. paHKHM-B [rdrdm], early instr. HMH, paHHHMH [rdnimi] prep. HX'B, paHKHXi. [rdnix] 114. In connexion with the terminations given in Pars. 110 and 113 remember the universal rules of Kussian orthography : H must never appear after r, K, x, m, h, m, m, i^ : write a. H r, K, X, m, H, in, m : write h. 102 LESSON XXXI 115-116 VOCABULAEY nopxHdii (an adj. in form) [pArtnoI], BHc6Kift [visoki], high tailor rJiydoKiii [gtuboki], deep KopdxKiii [kArdtki], short hhskIh [nlski], low {not high) fldJirift [dotgi], long (more generally thxIh [tixi], low (not loud) of time) Exercises A. Decline in the singular and plural (omitting the genitive plural) : noSpLiH Kyn^tti), mojiojs,6Pl njicMiiHHHK'B, xop6mee kojibiio, Tp^^Hbift HSBiK'b, innpbKaH ^jiHi^a, Moji qepnaH coSaKa, ;^3Kafl KdMHaxa, Hauia rjiy66Kafl p-feK^, eA Apomdmiii rojioct, ero Kp-feuKiii n^jiei^t, er6 npyraH jiom>. B. Translate into Russian : (1) He was speaking about the long days. (2) Into all the long, broad rooms. (3) Towards these low doors. (4) For my rich old uncle. (5) Into the deep rivers. (6) About all the loud voices. (7) With [cb] whose gold rings ? (8) From the nephew of that poor tailor. (9) Along [no] our narrow streets. (10) On the long tables. (11) Between your kind old aunts. (12) On to these short bridges. (13) Before their low doors. (14) The boys fell into the deep water but a brave man saved them. (15) About our damp fields. (16) Towards that high place. LESSON XXXI Notice the following idioms : 115. Hto ^to 3a nepo? [jto stA za paro], Wh^t is that for a pen ? i.e. Wh^t kind of pen is that ? What is there to know about that pen ? KaKHM-L ddpaaoMt? [kAkim 6brAZAm], By what means ? How ? 116. Mjrh JierK6 (h^jkho) 5to S'fejiaTb [mne hxk6 (ntisnA) ^tA d^tAt], It is easy (necessary) for me to do that. Euf Tp^AHO roBopHTb no-pA^ccKH [J9mti trdduA gAVArit pAidski], It is difficult for him to speak Russian. Mn-fe (HaMx) nplHTHO cjnimaTb 5to [mne (nam) prijdtnA si^iJAt stA], It is pleasant for me (v^) to hear that. :^ft HenpijiTHO CMOTp'feTb Ha ^xy nrp^ [j6I naprijatnA smAtr6^t ua ^tu igrti], She does not like to look at that game. Of. Par. 189, 2. 116 LESSON XXXI 103 Vocabulary ndpeHb, pHH, H [paran], lad CTapdTbCfll31A[stAra^tsA],to5nve, piiat, a, iJi (b-l pflfl^, among) [ra t (d)], try : row, rank CKpLiB^Tb 131 A [skriva^t], to keep KpoeaTb , H , H [krAvd ^t], bed, bedstead concealed H^BCTBO, a, a [tjvifstYA], feeling CKpbiTb [skrit], to conceal Kp^CHHfi [krasni], red o^CBiinHO [AtJavfdiiA], evidently noKpacH-fexb [pAkrAsn6^t], to blush pii^OMi. ch [rddAm s] (with instr.)y Gjl'feHHHfl [biedni], pale alongside, close beside (lit. in one no6ji'feji;HrfeTb [pAbiadn^^t], to turn row with) pale MauiHH^jibHO [mA|ma^inA], absently, 3aM'feTHTb [zAiii^tit], to notice mechanically, instinctively Exercises A. Translate : (1) O^H^ MOJiOAafl jKenmHHa, K0T6paH CH^-fejia oji;Hd>Kji;Li pAjiou-b cb cBo6tt 1 CTapoii xeTKoii, h ManiHH^jibHO nrpajia naJibiiaMH en^ pyKii, saM^THJia aojioToe KOJibi^o na usLSihixh TexKH. (2) Ona cnpocHJia, TeTKa, WTO ^to sa K0Jibi;6? (3) Gxapan a^Ma noKpacH-fejia, noTOMT. noSji'feAH'fejia, h CKaaaJia nsLKOU^ixh npojKamnM'b rojiocoMt, MH'fe HenplHTHo oS-B ^TOM-b roBopHTb. (4) OqeBi'iAHO ona cxapa- JiaCb CKpblTb OT-b nJieMHHHHI^bl CBOli^ H^^BCTBa. Oueeuduo ona cmapojiacb cKpbimb omh n/ieMHHHUiibi ceou uyecmea. B. Rewrite tlie passage A, substituting a small hoy for the young woman, an uncle for an aunt, and make the old uncle answer in a firm voice. C. BonpocLi: (1) r^'fe cnrfjia MOJioAaH jK^nmnna? (2) KaKOBa SbiJia eii TexKa? (3) H-feMi. nrpajia njieMHHHHi^a? (4) KaKX* ona 5to H'fejiajia? (5) Hto ona cnpoci^Jia? (6) Hto cjiy^HJiocb?] (7) Xox-fejia jih cxapaH jtaivia roBopiiTb o sojioxoM'b KOJibn-fe? (8) Hxo 68 6iiJio HenpiflXHo? (9) Ox-b Kor6 ona xox-fejia CKpHBaxb H^BCXBa? D. Translate into Russian : (1) The rich merchant's beautiful wife drove up to {Kh\ the door. (2) At last the door was opened [see Par. 102, a] and she entered [into] the hospital. (3) First she passed through a dark entrance-hall, then she entered a large 1 cBoeft referring to the subject MOJionaH weHmnHa. 2 eji does not refer to the subject, but to the other person, the aunt. ' cBoii referring to the subject in this sentence, oh^. 104 PLUKALS 117 bright room, where (there) were clean white beds on which ^ lay the sick men. (4) She entered another room, passed one bed and came up to [Ex. XXVIII, A, 3] the bed which she was seeking. (6) There she found her son, the unhappy boy whom she had adopted two years ago. (6) He had been a strong, healthy lad then. (7) But suddenly he had fallen [past tense'] ill with that dreadful disease. (8) There he (was) now a poor weak man. (9) His pale fingers were playing absently with the yellow papers that were lying on the bed before him. (10) The mother sat down on the chair that stood beside the wooden bed. (11) It was evidently difficult for her to conceal her feelings. (12) But she could say in a firm voice, " What papers are these ? " Nouns that have occurred for the First Time in Exercises XXI-XXXI The numbering of the groups corresponds to that used in tbe list given in Pars. 77, 78, 79. 117. Masculine Nouns ^ 1 bh^kTj, h, h, sign njiCM^iHHHK'B, a, h, nepheiv cfwh, a, LI, soup npHKa3^HKT>, a, h, shop-assistant HapoA'L, a, bi, people 2 xpys'b, k, ill, trouble, difficulty kjiio^'B, k, ii, key flSiiiK'b, S, il, tongue 3 Kyn^U'B, nua, uuj^i, merchant n^Jieui,, Jibua, jibubi, finger {see BaMdKT., MKa, H, lock note to Voc. XXIX) 4 p^STi, a, lii (t), time, occasion pHAt, a, ii (na pnjty', in a row, at the same time), row, rank 6 ndpcHb, pHH, H (eft), (peasant) lad 7 rdsiocb, a, l, voice r6poji'b, a, k, town Feminine in Form 13 AJiAH, H, H (eft) or hA (b^Bt), uncle MyjKHHHa, u, bi, man ^ KOT6pMii is declined exactly like any other adjective in -mM. 2 nopTiidti, tailor, is in form an adjective. 118-119 PLURALS 105 118. Feminine Nouns 1 6ojibHHi^a, M, LI, hospital np^BHa, bi, truth KOMHaxa, bi, H, room CHp6TKa, h, h (ok-l), little orphan KopoBa, bi, bi, cow TCTKa, H, H (oK-b), uunt K^XHH, H, H (OHI) or OHb), kitchen ;^JiHi;a, bi, bi, sfreei Ji-fecTHHUja, bi, bi, 5to*V5 X0Ji6pa, bi, bi, cholera M-fepa, bi, bi, measure HpMapKa, h, h (0K'b),/a*V njiCMHHHHi^a, bi, bi, mece 2 BOHH^, iJi, -^bi, t^ar TpaB^, iJi, -^H, grra5 JKCHa, bi, -bi, w?*/e 3 OBi^a, li, -^H (ei^i)), 5^eejp seMJiii, A, -H), -^h (6jib), eari^, land CHpoxa, bi, 6Tbi, orphan pyna, li, -^y, -^h, y^^wZ, arm The first two mai/ have the accent drawn back one syllable in the accusative singular, e.g. cnpoxy. Note ccMbii, 6, -^H {^i^), family, has the accent on the stem only in the nom. plur. 4 6oJiife3Hb, H, H (e^), sickness, disease KpOB^Tb, H, H (efi), bed, bedstead 5 M^Tb, epH,*epH (6ft), mother no^b, epa, epn (6ii), daughter 6 nep^AHHH (fern, adj.), ^ZZ, fo66y 119. Neuter Nouns ^ 1 K0Jibu6, ^, -^a (jieuT)), ring 2 r6pe, fl, A (6h[), g^ne/, sorrow 3 H^^BCTBO, a, a, feeling naHaJio, a, a, beginning SOJIOTO, a, groZc^ Pokacctbo, a, a, Christmas ^ aHB6THoe, animal, is in form an adjective. 106 VERBS, A 120-121 Hecq^cTie, h, h (iii), misfortune 3 {cont.y inesSy c^acTie, h, h (itt), happiness noBTop^Hie, h, h, repetition 120. Prepositions that have occurred in Lessons I-XXXI With gen. : Sea-L, Gjihst,, BM'fecTO, B63Ji'fe, jih, ao, hst,, KpoM-fe, m6mo, OT-L, y. (iaf. : Kt (ko), no. accits. : npo, 3a, b-l (bo), na. instr. : M^JKsy, 3a, cl (co), pii^OMTb cb, n^peni,. prep. : o, na, Bt (bo), npn, no (Par. 69). Verbs that have occurred in Lessons I-XXXI 121. I A (cf. Lesson XXXV) (1) BLipacxaTB (no)roHHTb (no)ryji;iTb (no)A;^MaTb (c)ji;'fejiaTb (c)A'fejiaTbCfl (y)3HaTb (C'b)HrpdTb ^ (no)K^maTb (1) OTB-fe^aXb (1) oT^bixaxb (1) nOHHM^Tb (1) nocfen^aTb (1) npnroTOBJijiTb (1) npbiraxb (1) nycKaxb (no)pa66TaTb (3a)ciHTb (1) CKpblB^Tb (1) cnpaniHBaTb (no)cTapaTbca A (see Par, 206) I A a, 6, c, (a) (cf. Lesson XLII) (no)Be3Tti (no)>KHTb IIA 1, 2, 3 1 (cf. Lesson XXXVII) * (no)roBopHTb (no)jiejKaTb (no)HTTH 2 (inf. of meji-b) (no)cHa^Tb (no)HecTii (inf. of necb) (no)cnaTb (6) (cf. Lesson XLIII) (no)jiiiTb (BlJl)nHTb (c)jKaTb (c) (cf. Lesson XLIV) (no)^xaTb (no)HCKaTb (Bc)naxaTb (Ha)nHcaTb (3a)nji^KaTb (c)Moqb (inf. of Mon*) [fut. is CMor^] (no)c^flTb (Par. 168 a) (no)CTOHTb 2 (cf. Lesson XXXVIII) (y)B6fl;'feTb (no)HpaBHTbCfl (y)cjn^imaTb (2) CXdHTb (no)cTp6HTb 3 (cf. Lesson XXXIX) (no)6poji;iiTb (no)CMOTp'feTb (Ha)yqHTb (Ha)yqHTbCfl (2) xoA^Tb (no)qHTaTb (3a)6oJi'feTb (simple verb = fo be ill) (3a)xoT'feTb (irreg., (Ha)pHCOBaTb Par. 222) (Par. 225) 1 'hw must be written u. (no)^CTb, to eat, is ir- regular (Par. 220) * Contracted to nofixHt. 122 VEKBS, B 107 122. noKpacH-feTb noSjii^AH^Tb saSoji'feTb ^ sanymsiTh CA'fejiaTb ysHkTh B (see Par. 206) I a, 6, c * B3flTb (1) otbcstA (1) npHHecTii noiiTH (nomejii.) * npHTTiA (npHinejiT*) * npoiiT^ * HafiTii * BOfiTil (1) nocjiaxb (1) yndcTb (yn^Ji-b) (1) cnacTb (cnacb) * CKasaxb (1) noKaa^Tb (Par. 232) (1) pa3CKa3aTb(Par.232) (1) OTKpiiiTb (Par. 232) (1) CKpbiTb (Par. 232) (1) nO^HHTbCH (1) CHHTb (1) npi-fexaTb (1) Jieqb (jier-b) (1) cfecTb (c-fejib) (1) CTaxb (1) OCTaXbCH (1) yaiep^Tb II 1) BaM-feTHTb 1) p'hunkTh 1) CJiyHHTbCfl 1) cnpociiTb 1) 6p6CHTb 1) nojiyqHTb 1) K6HHHTb 1) KyniiTb 1) yQ-bm^iTh 1) nocTyniiTb 1) BCTp-fexHTb 1) OTornaTb 1) cjiyqHTbCH (1) AaTb (naji-b) is ir- regular (Par. 231) 6iiiTb is irregular (Page 34) no'feji'L is irregular (see Par. 220) * See note to Voc, LIII. 108 LESSON XXXII 123-124 LESSON XXXII The Futuee Tense 123. The future tense of the verb Cbitb is : fl 6^jiY [budu], / shall be TBI Qfjieuih [btidaj], thou wilt be, etc. OH-B^ OH^ le^^ACTi. [btidet] oh6J MH Qfjieu-b [biidam] BLi 6;^AeTe [btidata] OHil^^^y^^ [b6dut] 124. Tbe future tense of any verb in the groups marked A (Par. 121) is composed by simply adtiing to the forms given in the preceding paragraph the infinitive of the verb, e.g. Ona 6fjs,eT'b pHCOBaxL [Ana btidat risAva^t], she will draw. Bbi Oy'flCTe CTapaTbCH [v! biideta stAra^tsAJ, you will try. Note. ^No verb under B (Par. 122) can have a future of this form. This is most important (cf. Par. 204). VOCABULAEY np^BHJiLHO [pratiinA], correctly ;icH0 [jasnA], clearly npaBO [pravA], really np6>K3;e {prep, with gen. or adv.) npaBAa [pravdA], truth, the truth is [ipH^dd], before, formerly CKopo [skoiA], quickly, soon nocjiife (prep, with gen. or adv.) M^HJICHHO [rh^diaiiA], slowly [p6si9], after, afterwards nosAHO [p6z(d)nA], late no-H^MeuKH [pAnemetski], in n63>Ke [p639], later German pane [ranA], early no-HTajibHHCKH [pAitAljanski], in paHbme [rd^nja], earlier, sooner Italian ropasAO 66jibme [gArazdA bo^ijo], MOJKCTb-SbiTb [m639t-bit], may be. far more Hhkto HHqer6 He noHHMajni [iiixt6 iiitjevd na pAiiiindt], No one understood anything. 125-126 LESSON XXXIII 109 A. Translate : (1) ripaBAa, fl ^Toro He 3Hajn>. (2) P^ho Ajih n63AHO h bc6 6^fly 3HaTi>. (3) Toraa oh-l roBopHJit no-p^ccKH, ho d^enb m6a- JICHHO. (4) CKopo OHi> SyAeT'L roBopi^Tb iicHO h npaBHJibHO. (5) OhT) npHuiejiTb nosflHO, a ona npHUiJia ropasAO n63>Ke. (6) Hhkt6 ^Toro HHKorfla ne 6yji;eTi> noHHMaTb. (7) MojKeT-b-SbiTb, OHTb MeHii HHKorAa He noHHMaji'L. (8) Ona TOJibKO d^enh neMHoro roBopHjia no-H'^feM6i;KH h no-HTajib^iHCKH. (9) npem^e ouA TOJibKO HCMHoro HHxajiH, HO BT. mK6ji'fe muTy HyjKHO 6fji,eTi> rop^3ji;o 66jibme HHTaxb. (10) Xopomo, qxo OH-fe T6jibK0 n63>Ke [not till later] 6^ayTl> OTB'feHaTb. B. Translate into Russian : (1) Why will the boys be taught at home ? (2) Will they not learn far more at school ? (3) She will never answer quickly and clearly. (4) It is impossible to say when the industrious workmen will rest. (5) It is well that he will not eat all his bread till later [say : will eat only later}. {&) No one will write anything. (7) The corn will be growing up in spring. (8) From whose friend will she try to conceal her feelings ? (9) Sooner or later these old men will be working in the fields. (10) All the diligent school-girls will learn their lessons. (11) The one girl will lie on this bed, the other will sit on that chair. LESSON XXXIII 125. The complete plurals of the 1st and 2nd personal pronouns are nom. Mbi [mi], we bm [vi], ymt gen. nacL [nas], of us, etc. Bacb [vas], of you, etc. dat. HaMTj [nam] BaM-L [vam] ace. Hacb [nas] Bacb [vas] instr. HaMH [naihi] BaMH [vaihi] prep. HacL [nas] ! BacB [vas] 126. The plural of the 3rd personal pronoun is : Masc. and Neut, Fern. nom. OHH [Alii] OH-fe [aus], they gen. (h)hxt> [(j)ix], of them, etc. dat. (H)HM'b [(j)im] ace. (h)hx'L [(j)ix] instr. (h)6mh [(j)imi] prep. HHXT. [nix] Most of these forms have already been introduced. 110 LESSON XXXIV 127-128 127. URWb [nod], over, above, noat [pod], beneath, below, are both used with the instrumental. Accompanying verbs of motion noAT) governs the accusative. Exercises Translate into Russian : A. About them, on to them, behind us, over them, over me, between them, between us and you, with you, up to them, under us, with you, for them, towards them, according to them, towards you, about you, before them, in them, beside them, under them, over you, in his presence, in their presence. B. (1) We saw them all. (2) They answered us. (3) You heard it. (4) What were you doing there ? (5) We shall speak of you. (6) They will ask them questions. (7) When shall we eat them ? (8) They never let us (in). (9) Are you speaking of our tame animals ? (10) The white sheep were lying under the old bridge. (11) I saw this bright light above them. (12) We shall look for it later. (13) He will know it far better to-morrow. (14) Who found the black cow that fell into the deep water ? (15) She will never do that again. (16) They heard nothing. (17) He was sitting under the old chair. (18) He never spoke to us. (19) Whose pupil was trying to read ? (20) Have you (got) those books I gave you yesterday ? LESSON XXXIV 128. Time phrases : KOTopLifi ^acb xen^pb? [kAt6ri tjas tap6^r], what time is it now ? Bt KOTopoMTj qacy? [fkAtorAm tjAsd], at what time ? at what o'clock ? BT> HE a qaca [vdva tJAsa], at two o'clock. btj paHHCM'B Hacy [vrdfi8m tJAsuJ, at an early hour. "Bii BOCKpec^Hbe [vVAskr9s6nja], on Sunday. Bii i^TOMb roay [vstAm gAdii], in this (or that) year. BX Gy^aymcMb ^ rojif [vbudujtjom gAdu], next year. Bb TCKymeMb 1 roa^ [ftektijtjam gAdu], in the current year. btj HacTOHiuee ^ BpeMH [vnAstAJaJtJoja vr^iiiA], at the present time. Ha npyroH AeHb [ua drug6I de^n], on the following day. K'b Beqepy [kv6tJ9ru], towards evening. no B^^iepaM'b [pAv6tJorAm], of an evening. P'fe^KO [rstkA], rarely, seldom. ^ These words are participles. 128 LESSON XXXIV 111 Vocabulary oS^At, a, LI [Ab^t], dinner saBTpaKt, a, h [zdftiAk], break- fast qdcL, a, LI [tjas] (after 2, 3, 4, gen. sing. [tJAsa]), hour noHe^-fejiLUHKi., a, h [pAngd^^inik], Monday BOCKpeceHLe, h, n (eB-L) [vAskra- seiija], Sunday n^Jio, a, a [dstA], business, ajfair poJKL, pjKH [roj], r^/e nmeHHLta, li [pJanitsA], wJieat PocciH, H (h, k), efi, h) [rAsiJA], Bussia B-L Poccz'u [vrAsii], in Russia OpaHLtiH, H (H,io,eft,H)[frdiitsiJA], France BO OpaHi^iu [vAfrantsii], m France Anrjiifl [angiiJA], England Hxajiifl [italiJA], Italy FepManiH [ggrmaniJA], Germany HHOcxpaiieu'L, Hi^a, li [uia- strdnats], stranger y foreigner aHrJiHqaHHHT), a [angiitjdnin], pi. aHrjiKHane, aH-b [angiitjdna], MH'feHie, fl, H [mn6njo], opinion HHHcro [iiitj9v6], is not worth speak- ing about, never mind BOBce [v6f89], at all 6cjiH [j6sii], if H6BLifi [n6vi], new TCK^mitt [takujtji], current S^aymiii [budujtji], future HacTOJimift [nAstAJdjtJi], present, actual np6mjiLift [pi*6J^i] V^ist, last rpoMaaHLlii [grAmddni], enormous OHi> ymeji'L [on ujoi:], he went away Exercises A. Translate : (1) IIpejKne MaJicHLKaH yqen^i^a tojilko neMHdro yqiijiacb, a B-L S^^ymeM-L TOjif OHa rop^sao 66jiLine Sy^nexT. yqHXLCH. (2) IIoqeM;^ OHa S^nex-L cnpLiBaxb ox-l mchh cboh MH-fenifl? (3) Hejib3^ 3Haxb, Hxo saBxpa Sy^ex-b. (4) B-b BOCKpec^Hbe ohh d^ayx-b hmxi HHcaxb. (5) ficjiH Bbi Bcer^a nneM-b h Hoqbio 6yji;exe pa66xaxb, Bli 6yAexe doji-fexb. (6) ripaB^a, h HHKora odxi ^xoM-b He a^^Maji^. (7) Hhkxo HHKoraa ne Sy^nexnt nycKaxb xaKoro MajicHbKaro M^Jib- HHKa B-b Hamy K6MHaxy. (8) B-b CyAymeM-b ro^^ ^xh 6oraxbie HHocxpaHi^bi d^nyx-b cxpoHXb rpoMannbiii HOBbiii ^Bop^ix-b na 6eper;^ p-feKii. (9) J\o PojKjtecxBa mh Q^mwh yniixbcfl HOMa. (10) Ha Jtpyr6ii nenb mh roBopHJiH ciy BauiHM'b ap^roM'b. (11) BecHoii npHJi6>KHLiH KpecxLiinHHi. G^^ex-L cibflxb H^M^Hb H OBecb, a occhlio poJKb H nmeHHHy. (12) Xlo^eM^ anrjiH^^He HHKorad ne xox^jih roBopAxb c-h HHMH? (13) Bx> KOxdpoM-b qac^ Bbi npninjiii aoMoii? (14) On-b npumeji'b na Apyrofi nenb. (15) ObA BdBce ne noHHMaJin Bcer6 5xoro. 112 LESSON XXXV 129 B. BonpocH: (1) Hto yqeHtI^a np^jK^e ^-fejiajia? (2) Hto ona S^flext ^'fejiaxb? (3) Hero HejibSH snaTB? (4) Kor^a OHii 6;^yTT> hmt, nHcaxb? (5) O HCM-L OHT, HHKorAa He n^MajiT,? [Oh-b HHKorna ne ayMajii, o TOMT), HTO, about the fact that, etc.] (6) Koro HHKor^a He GyAyTt nycK^TB? (7) Kto h rife S^ayxT, CTponxB J^Bop6^'B? (8) KaKofi ^B0p6^'B OHii S^flyT-B CTpOHTB? (9) ^O KOTOparO HHH MBI d^^^eMT* y^HTBCH? (10) Hto KpecTBiiHe S^Ayx-B c^htb BecHofi? C. Translate into Eussian : (1) To-morrow we shall speak about all that with the Russian merchants who arrived here last Sunday. (2) We shall all work by night and amuse our- selves by day [say ryJliixB H HrpaxB]. (3) After dinner we shall sleep in your bed. (4) It was not easy to speak with your poor friends, as [xaKX. KaKi)] they came very late. (5) Their yoimger daughter will speak with you at an early hour on Monday. (6) How much will that breakfast cost ? (7) Next year we shall be in Russia and perhaps we shall live there till Christmas. (8) She was never in France before ; last year she was in Germany and this year she will be in England. (9) Why will the old peasant-woman pour the clean water on the already damp ground ? (10) Next day the peasant's friends arrived early from the town, but the old man (had) arrived still earlier along with us, and his wife arrived only a little later. (11) We shall write to them in the current year about this business. (12) At what time did they go in T^ (13) They found him here at four o'clock. (14) Why did the silly boy not eat this black bread ? (15) Never mind, he will eat it to-morrow. (16) Wheat was sown last year and rye will be sown this year. (17) EngHsh- men will not always speak Russian badly. (18) They rarely spoke Russian well. (19) If you always speak [fut.] so fast, no one will ever understand what you are trying to say. (20) After Sunday we shall be hving with our old friend. LESSON XXXV The Present Tense 129. Up to tliis point only the infinitive, future, and past tense of the verb have been used. The Present Tense is not quite so simple in form as the past tense, and in many verbs it is not so simply derived from the infinitive ; in fact two verbs may be in the in- finitive very similar, and in the present tense quite different in appearance. Eussian verbs are usually classified according to the form of the present tense. 130-131 LESSON XXXV 113 130. All verbs, excluding a very few irregulars, have in tlie present tense one of the two following sets of endings : I n 1. fl K) or y [ju, u] H) or y [ju, u] 2. TH euib [j9j] ^HlUb [IJ] 8ing.- OH'L^ 3. OH^ I ex-B [J9t] HXT, [it] . OHO J '4. MH CM-b [J9m] HMT) [im] Plur. 6. Bh exe [jate] Hxe [ita] ioxT> or yx-b [jut, ut] HX-B or axx. [jot, at]. Note, (a) Cf. the endings learned in Par. 123. (6) The variety of possible stem-fori tns is considerable. 131. All the verbs under I A in Par. 121 form the present tense by substituting the endings I in Par. 130 for the Tb of the in- finitive, so that we have : (1) (2) . (3) fl n^Maio [diimAJu], ryjuiio [gulaju], cxapaiocb [stArajus], try think walk Xbi ^^Maenib [diiniAJaJ] ryjifleuib [gulajaj] cxapaenibCfl [stArd jaJsA] ona j-a^^Maex'b [ddniAJat] ryjiflcx-b [guidjat] cxapaexcfl [stAra jatsA] OHoi MH H^MacM-b [ddniAJem] ryjiiieM-b [guldjam] cxapacMCfl [stArdjemsA] Bm jt^Maexe [diimAJate] ryjiiiexe [guld J9t9] cxapaexecb [stArd J9t9s] ^|Ay^MaH)X'b[dumAJut] ryjiiiioxxj [guld jut] cxapaioxcfl [stArd jutsA] These are not three distinct types ; they are merely three examples. Verbs in 'fexb belong chiefly to this class. (a) The present participles of verbs of this type have the following forms : Adverbial present participle (invariable) : nyMaa, ryjiaa, CTapaacb (pres. stem plus a), while thinking, walking, trying-, Adjectival present participle active (declined as an adjective) : HyMaiomiii, ryjiaiomlH, CTapaiomiiica (formed from 3rd plur. pres. tense), one who is thinking, walking, trying. (b) Compare Par. 80 (b). H 114 LESSON XXXV 132 132. Note carefully the spelling of the present tense of the re- flexive verb : Cb in 1st sing, and 2nd plur. {i.e. after vowels). Cfl in all other cases. Before reflexive cb, ch, in all parts of the verb h is preserved but t is omitted. VOCABULABY Ji^Mna, H, Bi [tampA], lamp 3a>KHr^Ti> [zAsigd^t], to light, set on niima, h, h [piJtjA], food fire HtejiaTb [38td^t], to wish, desire TporaTb [tr6gAt], to touch npoHOJiJKaTb [prAdAt5dit], to con- cJiymaTb [stuJAt], to listen tinue ynoTpeSjiHTb [upAtrebla^t], to use OTKpbiBaTb [Atkrivd^t], to open pifemaxb [rejd^t], to solve, resolve saKpbiBaxb [zAkrivd^t], to shut yM'fexb [um6^t], to understand, to know nojiaraxb [pAtAgd^t], to suppose, hoiv to have an opinion BHHMaTeJibHO [vnimdtaiiiA], atten- nojKHBaTb [pA5ivd^t], to live, to dwell, tively to he {of health) All verbs in this vocabulary belong to class I A. . ^ , , Exercises A. Translate : (1) H BHHMaTeJibHO cji^^maio Bce to, hto Bh qnTacTC. (2) Ohh BcerAa ^JiaioTi>, KaK-b JKCJiaiOT-b. (3) Ilo^eMy^ Bbi npoaojuKacTe roBopHTb oST) ^TOM'b? (4) Hto HaM'b Cfl^JiaTb \to do now, once, on this occasion]! Ohhl cKpbiBaiOT'b OT-b nacb Bce to, qTO ohh ayMaiOT-b. (5) Ona xopomo yM'feeT'b npHroTOBJiHTb 5to miIco. (6) Bcer^a JIH pano sajKHraioT-b JiaMny? (7) H n^^Maio, hto ona ne cjiy^maeT'b. (8) B-b PocciH H B-b repManin pojKb ynoxpeSjiHiOT'b B-b nnmy [as food]. (9) KaK-b Bbi nojiaracTc? (10) HeyH<6jiH oH-b yjK6 yqiiji-b ypoK-b? (11) He nojiaracT-b jih OH-b, hto en yneHHitbi nosjKe S^ayx-b yqHTbCH? (12) Xopomo, hto Mbipanbuie ne HpnuiJiiiciofla. (13) KaK-b Bbi HOJKHBaeTe? [How are you?] B. Write sentences 1-3, 5, 6, 8, 9, 11 in the past and future. C. Translate into Russian : (1) They wish ; they conceal ; we think ; you know , do you know ? what do you know ? (2) They touch. (3) We solve them all. (4) They are preparing that meat. (5) We are opening this book. (6) They shut it. (7) I am listening to all that [Bce to, hto] you are reading. (8) He supposes that they will speak to them. (9) It is done [H'fejiaTbCfl] here. (10) We are trying 133-137 LESSON XXXVI 115 to teach ; they will learn. (11) Do they always [Bceraa JIH OH A] do that ? (12) She fell ill. (13) She showed them all that. (14) Who generally opened this door ? (15) Did she not give them good food and drink ? (16) Does he not understand what [that which] you said ? (17) We use meat as food. (18) She can [i.e. knows how to] speak distinctly and quickly. (19) Will he not [He Sy^fleT'b jih] touch this thing ? (20) He asks them how they are. LESSON XXXVI Genitive Plural of Masculine Nouns and of Adjectives 133. Nouns in -T> have genitive plural in -OBt, e.g. CTOJi'L, ctojiobTj [stAtof] or -CB-L, e.g. najien'b, najibi^eB-b [pafeaf], after i^ when the termination is not accented. 134. The most notable exceptions that have occurred, apart from words dealt with in Par. 136 (b), are : rjiasT), eye, which has gen. pi. rjiaat. paa-B, time, paa-b. anrjiHqaHHH'B anrjinqaHi. [anglitjan]. KpecTbflHHH-b KpecTbHHT. [krastjdn]. 135. Nouns in -Pi have the genitive plural in -eBij, e.g. CJif^SiU, cji^qaeB-B [stutjAJaf] (Group 6, Par. 77). 136. (a) All nouns in -L, both mascuUnes and feminines, have the genitive plural in -eii, e.g, napb, napeii [tsAr6i]. nocTejib, nocTejieH [pAst^lsi]. (Masc. nouns, Group 6, Pars. 77 and 117.) (Fem. nouns. Groups 4 and 5, Pars. 78 and 118.) (b) All nouns in ->KT>, -Hi>, -ui'B, -uxh, have the genitive plural in -en, e.g. HOKi), HOJKeii [noj, nA36l], knife. 137. The genitive plural ending of adjectives is for all genders -i>ixi> in the hard form, e.g. KpacHBHii, KpacHEbixt [kiAsfvix], beautifuL 116 LESSON XXXVI 138 and -HX'b in the soft form, and after r, k, x, jk, ^, ui, ux, e.g. nocJi-feflHiii, nocji-fe^Hnxt [pAsUdnix], latter, last. MJi^Ainifi, MJiajxinHX-B [mtdtjix], younger. 138. Tlie genitive singular of the noiin must be employed after ji;Ba, TpH, HeTLipe, these words being nominative or accusative.^ With numerals, after 4, in the nominative or accusative case the genitive plural of the noun is used. Examples : aea pySjiH [dva rubid], two roubles. necHTb pySjieii [d6s9t rubUi], ten roubles. BT) BOCCMb qacoBT. [vvosom tJAsof], at eight o'clock. Notice the usage with compound numerals : aBafluaxB oflMHt py6jib [dvatsAt Adin rup] (nom. sing.), twenty-one roubles ; ^BaAuaxL ABa py6jiH (gen. sing.), twenty-two roubles; and so with 23 and 24, but ABaAnaTb hhtb pydJi^fi [dvatsAt pa^i rubi6i] (gen. plur.), twenty-five roubles, etc. etc. Vocabulary ^^JKHH-B, a, LI [u5in] supper yqHjiHmHbiii [utjiiijni], school, of HBop-b, a, bi [dvor], yard, court the school cajmax-b, a, bi (tb) [sAtddt], soldier bchkIh [fsdki], every 3aaHa, h, h [zAddtjA], problem, KaJKabiii [kdsdi], each exercise nocji'feaHiH [pAsMdni], latter, last HHXb [pa^t], five SesnpecxaHHO [basprostdnA], iTices- mecxb [jest], six santly, continually ceMb [sem], seven BM'fecx'fe c^h [vih6stas], together with BOCCMb [y6s9m], eight HrpaxbB-b coJiji;axbi[igrd^tfsAtddti], ACBflXb [d^vat], nine to play at soldiers necHXb [d6s8t], ten saHHMaxbca I A [zAnimd^tsA], to HBaauaxb [dvdtsAt], twenty occupy oneself, to be occupied Bce [fso], all, always xaK'b KaKX) [tak kak], as (conj.) MH'fe HyjKHO [mns niisnA], to me ii6o [ihA], for (conj.) necessary, i.e. I must, I need to Exercises A. Give the genitive plural of : Majib^HK-b, oceji-b, rjias-b [irreg.], repoit, ji;Bepb, najieit'b, Maxb. B. Translate into Russian : 3 boys, 5 boys, 20 boys, 21 boys, 22 boys, 26 boys. 1 Read Pars. 179, 180 at this point. 139 LESSON XXXVII 117 C. Translate into Russian : past all the red houses ; beside these black tables ; for those tame animals ; from the other houses ; from my kind aunts ; out of the narrow, dark entrance- halls ; from those Russian towns ; till a late day ; that is done in our house of an evening ; we are trying to answer ; they are ill [Coji'feTb] ; what are their sons reading ? whose sons are reading ? D. Translate : (1) Hto ^'feJIaeT'b xenepb Bami, mojioaoh chh-b? (2) IlpaBO He 3Haio, HO fl noJiaraio, hto oh-l xenepb BM'fecT'fe co cbohm'l dpaxoM-b BTb yqiijiHin-fe. (3) On-b, MdjKex-b-Sbixb, co BcfeMH apyriiMH MaJienb- KHMH MajibHHKaMH Hrpacx-b Ha ynnjiHinnoM-b ABopi bt. cojih^xh, xaKTb KaKTb, btj Hacxoflmee bp^mh, BCHKift nejioB'feK'b saHHMaexcH BoiiHoio, aajKe MajienbKie ayMaiox-b xojibKO o H^ii. (4) KajK^bift B^Hcp-b, Koraa samHraroxT. jiaMny, hxx. MJiaAuiiii cbiH-b Bcerna p^i^oM-b ch cxapuiHMH cecxpaMH y cxojia. (5) Tporaex-b, oxKpbiBaex'b, saKpbiBaex'b KHiirH h xexpaan. (6) Bee BHHMaxejibHO cji^maex'b xo, Hxo HMxaiox-b ero 6paxbfl h cecxpbi. (7) OShkhobchho nocji-feanie no ^H^HHa npnroxoBJifliox'b ypoKH h p'femaiox'b 3aji;aqH, a OH-b Bcera^ acejiaexX) yanaxb, qxo a-fejiaexcH. (8) BeanpecxaHHO cnpauiHBaex'b, HO cecxpbi o^cHb qacxo ne oxBibHaiox'b na ero Bonpocbi. E. As far as tlie sense admits of it, write the sentences in Ex. D in the past tense and future. LESSON XXXVII Present Tense of type II A 139. Verbs in group II A in Par. 121 have in the present tense the second set of endings given in Par. 130, e.g. (1) H roBopib [gAVArii], speak Xbi roBopiimb [gAVArij] OWb\ ouk VroBopHXT. [gAVAi-it] oh6J Mbi roBopHM'b [gAVArim] Bbi roBop^xe [gAVAi-ita] ^^SjroBopax'b [gAVArat] , (2) cxpoK) [str6ju], build cxpoHUib [stroij] cxpoHX-b [stroit] cxpbHM-b [str6im] cxpoHxe [str6ite] cxpoflx-b [str6J8t] (3) yq^ 1 [utjii], teach ^^HUib [litjij] ^qHXX) [lit/it] ^qHM-b [lit Jim] ^HHxe [utjita] ^qax-b 1 [litjAt] 1 H) and H never appear after r, k, x, m, n, m, m, u,. 118 LESSON XXXVII 140-141 (a) Types (1), (2), (3) differ only in accentuation. (6) The participles of verbs of these types have the following forms : Adverbial participle present : roBopa, cxpoa, yna ^ (pres. stem + a), while speaking, building, Adjectival participle present active : roBopHiniii, CTpoflmiii, ynamiH ^ [from 3rd plural pres.], one that is speaking, etc. Adjectival participle present passive : , cipoHMBiH, yHHMBiH [from 1st plur. pres.], one that is being built, taught. Adverbial participle past : roBopiiB'B, cxpoHB'B, yHHB'B [from past tense], having spoken, built, taught. Adjectival participle past active : roBopHBiuift, cxpoHBUiiH, yHHBmiii [from past tense], one who has spoken, built, taught. Adjectival participle past passive : roBopeHHBiH, (no)cTp6eHHHH, yqeHHBm [y or lo of pres. tense changed into eHHBiii], one that has been spoken, built, taught { = learned). (c) Compare Par. 80 (6), 96 (a), 131 (a). 140. There is very frequently a change in the form of the stem. In verbs of the 2nd conjugation such a change in the present tense appears as a rule only in the 1st singular. 141. Present Tense of Type II A 1 CHA'^Tb, to be sitting BHcfexb, to hang, to be hanging/ cumf [sisii] BHm^ [vijii] CHHiimb [sidij], etc. BHCiimb [visij], etc. caaiiTbCfl [sAditsA], to sit doum cnaxb, to sleep caJK^cb [sA5tis] cnjiK) ^ [spiu] caAiiuibCH [sAdijsA, sadiJsA], etc. cnnmb [spij], etc. ^ 10 and fl never appear after r, k, x, jk, % m, m, u,. 2 Ji is inserted after 6, b, m, n before m. 142-144 LESSON XXXVII 119 JieJKdxL, to lie, to recline cxoiiTb, to stand Jiemf [iasu] * CTOib [stAJii] JieJKHUib [ias'ij], etc. CTOiimb [stAij], etc. JioJKliTbCfl, to lie down npHHajocJiejK^Tb, to belong nomfch [tA^iis] npHnaaJiem^ [prinAdiasu] JioJKHinbCfl [tA3iJsA], etc. npHHaAJieH^Aiub [prinAdigsiJ], etc. 142. (1) In cmjifkTh and caAHTbCH the ji; changes to m in the 1st singular present tense. This is characteristic of verbs ending in -HHTb and -H'feTt. (2) In BHC^Tb the c changes into ui in the 1st singular present tense. This is characteristic of verbs in -CHTb and -cfexb. 143. Observe carefully the difference in meaning between jie^Kaxb, to be lying down (a verb of rest) and jio^khtbch, to lay oneself down, i.e. to lie down. Of. CHaixb and caAHTbca (Par. 60). Note JiojKiATbCH enaxb [tA3itsA spa^t], to go to bed. 144. In English we say, * What is he doing ? ' ' I think he is reading,' and the Kussian Hto oh'l H'fcjiaeT'B? Ilojiaraio, hto OHt HHTaexTb exactly corresponds. If the second sentence is reported in the past, it becomes, ' She thought he was reading,' but in Russian the verb in the subordinate class must still be present, e.g. Ona A^Majia, hto OH'b qHT^eT-B. So : H CKasaJi'b cm^, hto er6 Maxb cujiAttj y OKHa, / told him that his mother ivas sitting at the windoiv. Vocabulary BOJIKX., a, H (oB-b, termination KapTHHa, bi, h [kArtinA], ptcf^re accented throughout oblique cases JiHca, bl, li (jiHCHua, bi, m) {use 2nd of plural) [votk], wolf word in oblique cases) [iisd , Jiee-b, jibBa, JibBbi [isv (isf), iva, IMtsA}, fox ivi], lion CBHHbii, ii, H {termination accented ^HCTTE), a, bi [dist], stork in oblique cases of plural) Isymja], MKypaBJib, A, 6 [surdf, surAvia], pig crane cxifena, i^i, ^y, -h [stand], wall 3B'fepb, fl, H (6h, jiM-b, etc.) [zWr], ji;6peB0, a, a or aep^Bbfl (BbCBt) wild beast [d^ravA], tree A'feBymKa, h, h (cK-b) [dsvuJkA], me [T^e], for, indeed, often suggests an girl {growing up) antithesis 120 LESSON XXXVIII 145 Exercises A. Translate : (1) ^-feByuiKH CHAHTt y OKH^. (2) Ona CH^-fejia na CT^Ji-fe y OKHa; OHa c^Jia Ha cTyjit. (3) ^hcmtj jibbh h Bcfe jtpyrm seepH cnax'b B-B Jl-fec^. (4) JIhC^ CTOHTI. 3a ^THMT, A^pCBOM'B. (5) AhCTH H wypaBJiii CTOflTi> Ha moct^. (6) Mh B6Bce ne noHHMaeMt, noqeM^ eH KpacilBLIH KapTHHLI BHCHTt Ha CT-fenaXt ^TOtt TCMHOft KOMHaTLI. (7) Mbi nojiaracM'B, 'ito T-h CBiiHbH npHHaAJien^aT'b G-feflHOMV npecTbii- HHHy; eM^ >Ke npHnaflJiejKHT'L ^Ta S^Jian jidmaab. (8) 5th 4>paH- HyacKie coji^aTbi jiomaTCH naacMb (=Ha seMJiio); ohh siemki-b na MOKpoii acMji^. B. Write Exercise A in the past and future, as far as the sense admits of that. Omit sentence (2). C. Translate into Russian : (1) He asks whose picture is hanging on this wall. (2) Our old dog is not sleeping. (3) She told me that the lazy girls were lying in bed. (4) They lie down on the bed. (5) They lay down on the bed. (6) They always went to bed at nine o'clock. (7) Why are you always speaking either [hjih] of lions [O with prepositional] and other wild beasts or of tame animals that belong to poor peasants ? (8) To whom does this black pencil belong ? (9) I never go to bed at night ; I sit at the table and work all night, and then I sleep till dinner. (10) That is why they went upstairs [naBepx-b]. (11) On whose chair are you sitting ? (12) She always sits on my chair. LESSON XXXVIII 145. Present Tense of Type II A 2 (Par. 139) Bli^'feTb, to see cjniimaTb, to hear BHJKy ^ [vi'su] cjHiimy [stiju] Bii^Hmb [vidij], etc. cjibimnmb [stijij], etc. CTpoHTb, to build HpaBHTbCfl, to be pleasing cxpoK) [stroju] HpaBJiiocb ^ [nrdvius] CTpoHmb [stroij], etc. HpaBHmbCfl [nraviJsA], etc. CT6HTb, to cost n6MHHTb [pomnit], to remember ct6k) [stoju] noMHK)^ [pomiiu] CTOHmb [stoij], etc. noMHHmb [pomnij], etc. ^ Cf. Par. 142 (1). ^ Ji inserted after 6, b, m, n before lo. ^ Governs the genitive or takes o with the prepositional. 146-148 LESSON XXXVIII 121 146. Do not confuse ctohtb with CTOHTb. Note the difference in accentuation. He CTOHTt [na stoit], It is not worth while. noK6pHO 6jiaroaapib Bacb.)) He CTOHT-b.)) [pAkornA btAgAdArd (II A 1) vas. na stoit], '/ thank you very sincerely (lit. devotedly)' 'Do not mention it.' Em^ ct6hti tojibko naMt noKasaTb nacnopTi> [jamii stoit to^ikA nam pAkAza^t pa JpArt], He only needs {it costs him only) to show iis his -passport. 147. noMHHTb is often used reflexively and impersonally, e.g. BaMt noMHHTCfl, MomtT-h-^hiTh [vam pomnitsA, mosat-bit], You remember, perhaps. 148. Numerals 11-19 OAHHHaTOaTb [AduiAtsAt] 11 ^B-feHajiiuaTb [dvandtsAt] 12 TpHHamJtaxb [trinatsAt] 13 qe-n^ipHaALtaxb [tJotirnAtsAt] 14 EHTHaauaTb [patnatsAt] 15 mecTHaAiiaxb [JastnatsAt] 16 ceMHaaLtaxb [samnatsAt] 17 BOCCMHaai^aTb [vAsamndtsAt] 18 ji;eBflTH4AU[aTb [davatnatsAt] 19 These numerals mean some unit added on to ten, anaxt being contracted from necflXb. Except 11 and 14 all have the accent on Ha. Carefully observe the speUing, e.g. the final e of qexBipe and the b of nflXb etc. are dropped. Vocabulary noM-fenxHKTb, a, h [pAih6jtJik], land- ffyS-b, a, iJi [dup], oah owner CTOJiOBaH {fem. adj.) [stAtovAJa], pnc^HOK'b, HKa, HKH [ristinAk], dining-room sketch, drawing Miiimb, H, h (eii) [mij], mouse ycaAbSa, bi, u. (aed-b) [usd^dbA], SjiaroaapHTb II A 1 [btAgAdArit], estate to thank cnaJibHfl, H, H (en-b) [spa^iriA], noKopHbm [pAkorni], submissive, bedroom humble 122 LESSON XXXIX 149 Exercises A. Translate : (1) B^AHxe jiH Bm ^tot-b rpoM^^Hbifi aomx? (2) Ilojiardio, ^to owb npHHaajiejKJ^T-B ^TOMy noM-femnKy. (3) T-fe KapxHHbi HMt BdBCe HCHpaBHTCH. (4) MH-fe OHCHb HpaBHTCH ^Ta MaJICHBKaH co6aKa. (5) Gb^hbh ctoht'b noAt nyGoM-L. (6) Ckojibko ctoht-b xa ycaAB6a? (7) He ctoht'l n^^Maxb oS-b ^tomt,. (8) Mn-fe noM- HHTCH, HTO BauiH flpysBH HHKorji;a He Shjih y Menji. (9) Owb MeHH noKopno Gjiaro^apHT-b, ho npaBO He ctohti,. (10) BoT-b noqeM^ M6fi ji,Aji,fi HOBbifi capdft CTpoHX-b. (11) Hcjibsh cjibimaxb BT. CTOJioBOH ero npojKamaro rojioca. (12) H HHKorjia He cjniiuiaji'b, HTO OHa er6 naniJi^ na Jiyr^. (13) TpHnaAi^axb MajibHHKOB-b na yniiJiHmHOM'b HBop'fe. B. Write Exercise A in tlie past tense. C. Translate into Russian : (1) All that belongs to that rich old man that used to live in the village, (2) He said he never heard or saw anything. (3) Don't you remember the old wooden table that used to stand in the dining-room ? (4) Yes, I remember it. (5) I don't at all understand why he always goes to bed so early. (6) Surely you know that I have no sketches here. (7) How many bedrooms are there in this immense house ? (8) I supposed there were at least four large bedrooms. (9) Then I think the house is costing too [cJinniKOM'b] much. (10) I do not like these little pictures. (H) ^ Fifteen men, nineteen men, three tall men, six tall men, twenty-four tall men. [Note that with numerals the genitive plural of qeJiOB'feKTb is like the nominative singular. 1 (12) Eleven rich merchants, five long fingers, three grey mice, fourteen lazy pupils, four old teachers, five heavy keys. (13) ' Thank you ; I did not know about that.' ' Don't mention it.' LESSON XXXIX 149. Present Tense op Type II A 3 (Par. 139) xoAHTb,^ to go KypHTb [kurit], to smoke xojK^ [xASti] Kypib [kurii] xoAHUib [xodij], etc. K^pHnib [kiirij], etc. dpofliiTb,^ to wander jiioShtb [lubit], to love 6po>Ky [brA5u] jik)6jii5 ^ [iubiu] 6p6aHmb [brodij], etc. jhoShuib [iiibij], etc. 1 Read Pars. 179, 180. ^ Cf. Par. 142 (1). 2 n inserted after b, b, m, n before lo. 150 LESSON XXXIX 123 CMOTp^Tb, to look at AepjK^Tb [darsait], to hold CMOTpib [smAtrii] epjK^ [d^r^ii] CMOTpHUib [sm6trij], etc. j;6p>KHmb [d^rsij], etc. CJiyjKHTb [stu3it], to serve cjiyjK^ [stu5u] cji^jKHUib [stu3ij], etc. 150. Numerals 30-100 TpiimxaTb [tritsAt] 30 c^Mb^ecflTi, [s^mdosat] 70 cdpoK-b [s6rAk] 40 BdceMb^ecflT'b [v6s8md9sat] 80 nflTbji;eciiT'B [padasat] 60 neBHHOCTO [davanostA] 90 mecTbaecjiT'b [Jasdasdt] 60 cto [sto] 100 Distinguish these numerals carefully from the -feew5. Here we are dealing with multiples : * 5 tens,' etc. Notice that the accent does not always fall on the corresponding syllable. Again observe the spelling (b or !>) : xpHHi^axb alone is contracted, and the Tb in 50-80 is to be thought of as the genitive plural ending of ^eCflXb. The form for ninety has never been properly explained, while cop 0Kb is the middle part of the Greek word for 40 (recraapdKovTa). Vocabulary qHH6BHHK'B, a, H [tjin6vnik], official Ho6poTa, h [dAbrAta], goodness CTapocTa, bi, bi (m.) [starAstA], B^mb, h, h [v6JtJ], things affair village elder npaB^HBOCTb, h [prAvdivAst], up- CTaKan-b, a, u [stAkan], glass rightness CK^3Ka, H, H [skaskA], tale, fairy-tale jKHJibe, h, -h [3iij6], dwelling 6acHfl, H, H (enx) [basnA],/a6Ze Ha npHM'fep'b [ha primer], for CHrapa, w, bi [sigarA], cigar example nannpoca, bi, bi [pApirosA], cigarette CKp6MHbift [skromni], modest Tp^6Ka, H, H (oK-b) [triipkA], pipe cjiiimKOM'b [siijkAm], too much, too H jik)6jii5 er6 3a CKp6MH0CTb (ace.) [ja iubiu javo za skromnAst], I like him for his modesty. CJiy>KHTb tp^6kok) {instr.) [stu3it trtipkAJu], to serve as a pipe. yniiTb (II A 3) Hanay'CTb [utjit nAizdst], to learn by heart. JIioSoBbH) Mipii a^pjKHTCfl [lubovu riiir d6r3iLtsA], TTie world is maintained by love. JH66poe a-fejio caMO ce5ii XBdJiHT-b [dobrAJa dstA sAmo saba xvdiit], A good deed needs no praise {praises itself). Tpyni) KopMHTi., a Ji'feHb nopTHT-b [trut korihit a ie^n portit], By labour we live, but sloth leads to ruin {work feeds, sloth spoils). 124 LESSON XL 151-152 Exercises A. Translate : (I) OSlIKHOBCHHO Mbl XOHMMT, HOMOft B-L J^^BHTb qac6B'L. (2) CLiHOBbii Kyni^a SponflTt no ropoay. (3) ^tot-b j^epeBiinnbift capaii cji^JKHT-b SojibnoMy cxapHK^'^ HtHJibCM-b. (4) Oht, K;^pHT'b rpiianyK) Tpy6Ky; cnrapbi n nannpocbi ctohtt. cjiiimKOM-b MHoro. (5) Mbi jnbSHMTj Bamnx-b Hpys^ii 3a hxtj jio6poTf h npaBaiiBOCTb. (6) Bjiaroapib Bacb sa KpacHByio KHnry, KOTopyio Bbi MH-fe aajin. (7) HejibSii yanaxb, qxo on-b aepjKHT-b pyKoio (B-b pyK'fe). (8) 5to np6>KAe cjiyjKiijio HBopnoMTj. (9) npnjiejKHbie yqennKH ;^qaT'b ypoKH HaH3;^cTb. (10) GTapocTa h HeBHHOcxo mecxb KpecxbHH-b CXOflLX'b nepe^-b nOMOM'b ^HHOBHHKa. B. Substitute past and future for the present tenses in Ex. A. C. Translate into Eussian : (1) Wild animals are wandering about [no with dat] the forest. (2) It is possible to find out [get to know'] all that. (3) What are you holding in your hand ? (4) They said they liked the Russian fairy-tales, but that the fables were not so pleasing to them. (5) I thought they were always smoking bad cigars. (6) What are you looking at ? [on to what, etc.]. (7) They sent us five glasses of water and a little black bread. (8) Fifty cigarettes are not worth two roubles. (9) Why could he not show me the new books he had bought ? (10) Do you learn this lesson by heart ? (11) 15 industrious men, 55 poor men, 46 red pencils, 87 stone houses. LESSON XL Genitive Plural op Feminine Nouns 15L Nouns in -a have the genitive plural in -i>, e.g. KOMHaxa, KOMHaxX) [komuAt], room. ^ cA^^ 152. (1) Nouns in -a have the genitive plural in -b, e.g. I **^ HHHH, HHHb [110^11], child's nuTse. (2) Nouns in -h preceded by a vowel or b take h, e.g. m6fl, m6i4 [J6ja, |6!], neck, or eft, e.g. ccMbji, ceMeii [samja, h^mkl], family. 153-155 LESSON XL 125 153. If tlie a or H is preceded by two consonants whicli would be diflS.cult to pronounce when final, the pronunciation is facilitated by inserting o or e (when accented tliis is sometimes e) between those two consonants in the genitive plural, e.g. cjiyjKaHKa, cjiyjK^HOK'L [stusdnAk], servant. cecTpa, cecTep'L [89st6r], sister. caSjifl, ca6ejib [sdblA, sabei], sahre. This e is also used in the genitive plural to replace b or h, e.g. Kon^iiKa, KonecKT. [kAp6IkA, kAp^jak], copeck. cnaJibHH, cnaJiCHt [spd^iiiA, spdkn], bedroom. Notice in this last example T> is found where we might have expected b. Note. Nouns in b were discussed in Par. 136. 154. As the points dealt with in Pars. 152, 153 are rather troublesome to remember, the genitive plural has been indicated of all feminine nouns not accounted for by Pars. 151 and 136. 155. NuMEKALS ' hundreds ' and ' thousands.' aB'fecTH [dv6sti] 200 Tpncxa (cxa gen. sing, of cxo) [tfistA] 300 HCTbipecTa [tjatirastA] 400 nflTbCOTt {gen. plur. of cxo) [petsot] 500 mecxbcox'b {gen. plur. of cxo) [Jasts6t], etc. 600 xbicflqa [tisetJA] 1000 AB-fe xi^iCHHH {gen. sing.) [dvs tisatji], etc. 2000 HHXb Xbicflq-B {geni plur.) [pat tisatj], etc. 5000 MHJiJiioH-b, a, M [liiiijon] 1,000,000 VOCABULAEY qHCJio,^ a, ^a (ejn>) [tjisto], qacxb, h, h (6ii) [tjast], part number, date OKpecxHOCXb, H, h [AkrssnAst], MHomecxBO,^ a [mn63astvA], a neighbourhood number, many, a lot r6HqiH [gontji], hunting HOJK-L, a, H (6h) [no J], knife MorfmVt [mAgutJi], powerful ACHbrH, erx> {fem. plur.) [d6^ngi, BejiHKOJi'fenHbift [vaiikAlspni], d6nak], money KBapxHpa, bi, H [kvArtiTA], h^me, ocxpbiH [ostri], sharp flat xynoii [tupoi], blunt ca6jiH, H, H (ejib) [sdbiA], sabre Majibiii [mdti], small ^ Governs the genitive. Cf . Par. 30. 126 LESSON XL 155 M^Jioe qHCJi6,^ a, a [matAJa CK63ihKO '^ [skoAkA], how many, hoio tjisto], a small number much M^H-fee ^ [m6naJ8], fewer H^CKOJlbKO ^ [nsskA^kAJ, a few, 66ji'fee ^ [bo^ioja], mx)re some MHoroHHCJieHHbift [mnogAtjisioiii], ctojilko ^ [sto^ikA], so many, so numerous much MiiJiuii [miti], nice, dear 6oJibmaH ^acxb ^ [bAilJdJA tjast], H3o6pamaiomiH {a present parti- a large part ciple) [izAbrA3djuJtJi], depicting Sojibman ^acTb ^ [b6^ij9Ja tJast], the MaJio ^ [matA], few, little larger part, the majority HCMHoro 1 [namnogA], few, little Exercises A. Translate : (1) MHOJKeCTBO TymilXTb HOJK^ft. (2) H'fecKOJIbKO npi^THblXT. p-feK-b. (3) Mnoro GojibniHX'b ycafleSi*. (4) GTOJibKO Kon^eK-b. (5) Ha cyxoii seMJirl^. (6) CKOJibKO neHer-b? (7) Bojibuiafl qacTb S^nHbix-b JKenmHH'b. (8) Men-fee jibBOB-b h Coji-fee BOJiKdE-b. (9) MHoroqHCJieHHMH c^MbH p^ccKHX-b KpecTb^Hi.. (10) B-b npiiixHoii 0Kp6cTH0CTH HaiuHXT, ^epeBeHb. (11) GjinniKOM-b MH6ro MOKpoii xpaBbi. (12) HeMHoro Soraxbix-b noM'femHKOB'b. (13) Mhojkccxbo OCXpblXX, CaSeJIb. (14) H-fecKOJIbKO ^OM^UIHHX'b JKHBOXHblX'b. (15) Majioe HHCJio KpaciiBbix-b KOMHax-b. (16) GxojibKO KapxiiH-b h30- SpajKaiomnx-b MyjKqHH-b h M^JibqHKOB-b. (17) GjinniKOM'b mhofo BejiHKOJi^HHbix'b aoMOBT.. (18) Y noM'femHKa o^eHb MH6ro roHqnx'b coSaK-b. (19) GxojibKO Jincni^'b. (20) O Mory^qeMx. KHiiat h noqe- pHXlj CKpOMHarO KpeCXbHHHHa. (21) IlpOCXblfl JKHJIbH CKp6MHbIXX> jiioaeH. (22) Gx6jibK0 A^nerx, h xaK-b MaJio xji-feSa. (23) Mo A MHJiaa HHHH H cii MHoroqiicjieHHbie py3bii. (24) KaJK^OMy MaJib- qHKy naJiH 6cxpbiH ho}kx>. (25) B6ceMbji;ecHXx> nnxb qejiOBrfeK'b. (26) GcMb xbicflq-b mecxbc6xT> xpiinuaxb aepcB^Hb. B. Translate into Eussian : For the young Russian ladies, the large estate of my old aunts, the dirty windows of that large infirmary, without money and without books, out of the dark rooms, the great doors of those splendid houses, at their nurses', his sisters' games, the necks and tails of the black cats, the white paws of their dogs, old women's tales, each of [na-b] them, 100 cigars, 777 idle men, 11 small rooms, 16 young boys, 2222 wooden houses, the majority of your new pictures, the too numerous friends of our elder sisters, so many difficult lessons, how many splendid churches. 1 Governs the genitive. 155 LESSON XLI 127 LESSON XLI Revision Present, Past, Future Tense. Vocabulary jiK)663Htifl [iubszm], agreeable^ HHiepecHO [interssiiA], it is in- amiable teresting XHxpbitt [xitri], cunning mojkho [m63nA], it is possible xiiiUHLiii [xfjni], ravenous HcaaBHO [naddvnA], not long agoy HM^Tb I A [im6^t], to possess, to own recently npeanoHHTaTb I A [pratpAtjitd^t], B-feab [ve^t], why, surely to prefer ch fl-feTCTBa [sdststvA],/rom childhood H3o6pa>KaTb I A [izAbrA3d^t], to ohh (oH'fe) snaKOMbi [ahi (ahs) depict znAkomi], they are known 3a6iiTb [zAbit], to forget bo BCiiKOM-b cji^qa-fe [vAfsakAm stiitjAJa], in any case . ^ , , Exercises A. Translate : Mbi p'femaeM'B, ona SyflCTT. cujiiThf ona H^cjiajia, h 6fjxy sajKnraTb, OHT. TpdracT-b, on-b cnaji-b, h cxoib, mu sajKHraeM-b, Bbi roBopHxe, OHH CJI^^maiOT-b, H CTpOK), OH-b CTOHT-b, OHT. CTOilTl), OH-b BilAHTT., CHHT-b JIH OHa? npHrOTOBJIfleTT. JIH OH-b? 5tO HMTb HCHpaBHJIOCb, OHii xoAHT-b, fl jiepmf, h nojiaraio, ohh ^qaxcfl, KypHxe jih Bbi? h ot- KpbiBaio, Bbi CH^HTC, ona bhchtt., OHii S^jtyx-b cnaxb, a Kypib nanHp6cy, ona saRpbiBaex-b, a chjk^ HOMa, a cnjiib, ohh cji^JKax-b, qxo OH-b nep^KHx-b B-b pyK'fe? onii dpoAHX-b, OH'b CMOxpHXi*, mh jiejKHM'b, H 6yay cnaxb, Bh cjnJiuiHxe. B. Translate into Russian : He was reading, he is reading, he was lying, she is lying in [na] bed, they will stand, it will cost, I saw, I see, I worked, I am working, it cost, it costs, he stood, he stands, we do that, we used to do it, it used to hang, it hangs, we slept, we are sleeping, I hear, she heard, he is here, he was here, he will be here, I do not love her and she does not love me, I was smoking yesterday, I do not usually smoke, I shall not smoke to-morrow, I serve, he served, he serves, what are you gazing at [na with ace] ? we shall conceal it from her, it belonged to him, it belongs to me. C. Translate : (1) B-b Hamefi OKp^cxHOcxH ecxb o^i^hx, 5oraxbiii h Mor^qiK nOM^mHK'b. (2) OhX> HM-feeXX) MHOJKCCXBO rOHHHXX. C06aKX> H JiomaA^H BX> CBO^ft yca^bSife. (3) EMy HpHHaAJie}KHXi> h [also]- 128 LESSON XLI 165 aTOT-B rpoManHbiii, eejiHKOJi'fenHbift jjom-b, KOTopuft ctoht'l npn CaMOM-B B-b^SA-fe B-b Jl-feCb. (4) KOFAa CHffHTT. y MCHH B^b cnajibHife, ]a[jiH CTOiix-b y OKHa B-b nep^aHett, mojkho BH^-feTb ^TOT-b asopei^'b BOSJI-fe IXepKBH. (5) GkOJIBKO CTOHT-b TaKOe JKHJIbe? (6) IIpaBO, H He 3HaK). (7) Bo BCHKOM-b cji^naib Bce ;to MH-fe ne HHxepecHo, h6o (xaK-b KaKT,) H npejtnoHHTaio CKpoMHbix'b jnoaett h npocTbiH B^mn. (8) Ha npHM-fepij, a nacxo xojk;^ CMOxp^xb na i^xh MHJibiH homhkh, Koxopbie Bbi BHAHxe aa JiyroMii. (9) Mn-fe npaBHXCH ^xh Kpacii- Bbifl KapxM[Hbi, KOXopbiH BHoixx. Ha cx-feHax^ Bameii KBapxnpbi. (10) He^aBHo JiK)663Hbiii apyr-b moh nocjiaji-b Moett cecxpi ORuf HS-b CBOHX-b KHHrX) Ch pHCy^HKaMH H3o6pa>KaK)mHMH cxapbiH p;^CCKifl 6acHH H cKasKH, KoxopbiH KamaoMy hsx. nacb ch ^-fexcxBa snaKOMbi. (11) B-fejtb H Bbi caMH He 3a6biJiH BojiK'b h Ancx-b*, JTHca h >KypaBJib, JIeB'b h Mbimb, GBHHbH hoaT) jiy6oM'b, JJ,B'h Go6aKH. D. Bonpocbi : (1) FA'S HOM'l^mHK'b? KaKOB-b ^xox-b HejiOB'feK'b? (2) KaK^x-b coSaKTb y Hero MHOJKecxBO? Fa-fe on-b hxi. jtepjKHx-b? (3) Tjifb HaxoAHXCfl [finds itself, i.e. is] ero hobmh aoM-b? KaKoii y Hero AOM-b? (4) OxKyna mojkho EHj^-fexb ero? (5) Hxo roBopHn^eMy [speaker'] ropasAO Sojibine npaEHXCH? (6) Ha qxo eM^ npiaxHO CMOxp^xb? (7) Ffl-fe HaxoAHXCfl KapxHHbi? (8) KaK^K) KHiiry nojiyqiijia [received] neaaBHO MaJieHbKan a-feBOHKa? Ox^ Koro? Hxo HSoSpajKaiox-b phc^hkh? (9) Snaexe jih Bbi cb n-fexcxBa H^CKOJibKO Sacen-b h CKasoK-b? Kanie, na npHMibp-b? E. Write Exercise C in the past tense. F. Translate into Russian : (1) A lot of tame animals, of horses, cows, sheep, pigs, dogs, cats. (2) How many wild animals, lions, wolves, bears, 'foxes ? (3) Twenty- one cranes and five storks. (4) Four oaks and many other large trees. (5) Twenty old books, forty-one new books, ninety-six French books. (6) Five thousand six hundred and forty-four men. G. Translate into Russian : (1) The teacher showed the younger pupils a number of pretty sketches and pictures. (2) He asks them what those pictures represent. (3) In theii opinion they all represent old Russian fables. (4) You could see the raven- ous wolf lying [say how the wolf lies, or break the construction and say simply the woK lies] under the tall oak in the forest along with the sick lion and the sly fox. (5) I always thought that there were a great many beautiful trees on the large estate of the rich proprietor who owns this village. (6) Surely they are not still sitting at table in the dining-room ? (7) I suppose they are smoking cigars after dinner ; at least they usually do that. 156-157 LESSON XLII 129 (8) In any case there are a lot of books lying on the table. (9) I know that she is still lying in bed. (10) We have known [pres. tense] these tales from childhood ; the majority of [hs'l] them are also known to om: friends. (11) Next year we shall, perhaps, be in France, and if we like yom* town and its environs, we shall stay there till Christmas. (12) Did those Englishmen understand what was said? (13) I am told that it was two of his sons who saved him when he fell into the river. (14) We are all taught in the old school. LESSON XLII Present Tense, I A (a) 156. In Paragrapli 121 a small group of verbs is given under I A (a, 6, c). They are sometimes treated as irregular verbs. The present tense of these verbs has a stem ending in a consonant, in -^ (preceding -htb), or in -b (see Par. 162). These verbs all have in the present tense the endings -y,^ -eniL, -ext, -eMT>, -exe, -yxi,.! 157. I A (a). Terminations accented throughout : (1) MKHTi* [sit], to live Be3TH[ [vostf], to be actiially carrying >KHB^ [Sivii] in a vehicle, to convey jKHBeuib [sivoj] Be3^ [vazii] jKHBCT'b [sivot] Besenib [v8z6J] MKHBCMt [s'ivom] etc. H^HBCTe [s'ivotQ] JKHBCT'b [sivtit] Similar are : (2) TKaxb 2 [tka^t], to weave TKy, TKemb or xnemb, etc. [tku, tkoj (tjoj)] TKyT-b [tkut] (3) npHCTb [prast], to spin npHA^, npaaenib, etc. [prAdii, prAd6J] (4) HecTH [nasti], to carry, to be actually carrying uecf, Hccemb, etc. [nasii, nasoj] (6) HTTH [iti], to go, to be actually going ujif, Haenib, etc. [idii, idoj] (6) cwhAihCH. [smajd^tsA], to laugh CMibibcb, CM'feembCfl [smajiis, sihajoJsA] ^ Become lo and ion. after vowels or i>. 2 This verb might also have been given under Par. 163. 130 LESSON XLII 158-159 (a) The participles of these verbs have the following forms : Adverbial participle present : H^HBfl, Be3fl, , npHHH, HCCH, HUH (ujiymi), CMMCb. Adjectival participle present active : TKHBymiii, Beaymiii, TKymifi, upnjiyuxim, necymiii, HAymiii, CM^feiomiiicfl. Adjectival participle present passive : , BeSOMBlii, , npanOMBIH, HeCOMBIH, , . Adverbial participle past : JKHBUIH, BeSUIH, TKaBUIH, npHHUIH, HeciiiH, mefluiH, CM'feflBUIHCB. ^ Adjectival participle past active : jkhbiuIh,. Besmift, TKaBiuiii, npanmifi, Hecmiii, mefliulH, CM'feHBmiiiCH. Adjectival participle past passive : (npo)>KHTBiH, (no)Be3eHHbm, TKanHLm, npflaenHBifi, HeceHHtm, (6) Compare Pars. 80 (b), 96 (a), 131 (a), 139 (6). 158. Note that changes in the stem of these verbs are frequent, and that, as well as the typical ending of the infinitive, viz. vowel + Tb, e.g. ji;4jiaTb, to do, there are the forms ^ in consonant + Tb, e.g. npacTb, to spin, consonant + th, e.g. hccth ^, to carry, vowel + Hb, e.g. MOHb ^ [motj], to be able, can. 159. XOAHJIT* and meJi'b, which were exactly distinguished in Par. 40, are the past tenses of the verbs xo^HTb, to go, to be in the way of going (pres. xoJKy), and htth, to go, to be actually going (pres. Hay), e.g. 06hkhob6hho h xgh^^ no B^nepaM-B A0M6ii [AbiknAvsiiA ja xA3ii pAv^tJerAm dAmoi], I generally go home of an evening. Kyna OHT, Tenepb Haexi.? [kudd on tape^r idot], Where is he going now ? Gn-fer-B HflCTt * [snek idot], It is snowing. J^OKflB HAex-B [dojt idot]. It is raining. ^ See Par. 239. ^ Infin. of Heci,, carried. ' Infin. of Mort, C(mld. * =n^Haen. [padAJat] cntn., Snow is falling. 160-161 LESSON XLII 131 160. The compounds of htth (see Par. 122, 1 a, 6, c noiiTH, etc.), like tlie compounds of most other simple verbs, have a form which looks exactly hke a present tense, but is really an immediate future referring to one definite event (see Par. 204), e.g. H nofia^ ccHHacB [ja pAidd satjds], / shall go at once. Oh-b BOHaeTt H^peat nacb bi. KOMHaxy [on vAldot tJ6ras tjas fkomnAtu], He will enter the room in an hour (lit. through an hour, after the lapse of). Cer6HHfl Mbi npiiineM-b (or npHaeM-b) kt> BaMi. b'b Tpn naca [sevodnA mi pridom kvam ftri tJAsd], To-day loe shall come to you at 3 o'clock. Similarly : npoHji;^ [piAidii], / shall go through, traverse. BbifiAy [viidu], / shall go cnit (come out). nepettji^ [pareldii], / shall go through to the other side. TifiVmif [dAldii], I shall reach, go up to. 161. Past tenses of verbs in Par. 157 : Beat, Bcsjia, bcsjio, bcsjiA H^HJIt, JKHJia, JKHJIO, JKlijIH TKajit, TKajia, tk^jio, TKajiH npflji-b, npfljia, npflji6, npnjiii HecL, Hccjia, Hecjio, necjiH meJiT>, mjia, mjio, mjiH CM-feiijicfl, CM-feiijiacb, etc. Vocabulary JiibAH, 6h[ ^ (m. pi.) [iudi], people CH-fer-L, a, k [snsk], stww B'b CH'fer^ [fsnegu], in the snow AOJKb, A, [dojt], rain yfeaai), a, bi [ujsst], canton, district rySepnlH, h, h (ifi) [gub^rniJA], government (corresponding to province or department) H35a, iJi, y, bi [izbd], peasant's house, hut H'fejio, a, a [detA], act, deed, business, affair rojiOAHbift [gAtodni], hungry OHT) aoJUKeHi. n-fejiaTb [on dotsan dstAt], he is under an obligation to (he must) do ^ instr. plur. -i,uvl. ^ Cf . OHa AOJiJKHa [dAt3na], she must oho jiojijkho [dAt5n6], it must OHH aojijkheJi [dAtsni], they must Ha ABop'fe [nA dvArs], out of doors, Kt. on the yard HST) HOMy 2 [izdAmu], out of the house OKCAHeBHO [J938dnsvn.v], daily, each day coBci^M'b H'feT'b [sAfssm nst], not ai all VL^pesTi {gov. ace.) [tj^fas], through, across HaxojiiHTbCfl [nAXAditsA], to find it' self, to be yMHpaxb I A [uriiirait], to die oTTb^xdjioHy {gen. in -y), Voc. XLIII. 132 LESSON XLH 161 Exercises A. Translate : (1) Ha HBop-fe HseT'B AOJKAb. (2) He SHdexe jih Bm, npHH^T-L jiH [whether] xen^pt ;^th CTap;^XH? (3) GoBcfeMt H'^t'l; OH-fe TKyT-B. (4) Mm nojiaraeMTb, hto H-feMeitKie coji^aTbi nepeuiJiH q6pe3T> pin^. (5) Ond yjKe Hexiiipe roaa jKHBexi. b-l ^tomt. ccji-fe, ho Hxt aepeBHH HaxoAHTca BT) npyroMTb yfeaa-fe. (6) ^TOTt MajitHHK'B ujxeTb b-l lUKdjiy, BOTt uoneuf owb HeceT-B KHiirH h TexpaHH. (7) Cer6j];HH OH-B npifinexT. noMoii ii3i> niKOJibi bx, xpn qaca, ho oSbikhob^hho x6jibK0 Bb HHXb qacoB-b npHXOflHX'b. (8) Oxqer6 Bamn jipyshA Bcerna CM-feibxca? (9) Mbi aojiJKHbi paSoxaxb okcah^bho jio <'^H^HHa. (10) rojioffHbifl co6dKH jiejK^XTi B-b cH-fer^. (11) Hhm iisSbi cxoaxb 3a p-feKoii? (12) HeyjK^JiH 5xh MHoroHHCJiemibm c6MbH Bcife jKHB^^xb Bb offHOM-b nepeBiiHHOMb HOMnK-fe? (13) HejibaA yanaxb, nomjj.eT-h JIH OHa o 5xoro M^cxa. (14) J];66pbie jho^h yMHpaioxx>, ho A'feJia hxx. JKHB^X-b. B. Translate into Kussian : (1) In the hut the old peasant woman is spinning or weaving, but her husband is always working out of doors in summer. (2) She will come out of the house after dinner ; she will go through the garden and come to us. (3) We have lived in this town for [we Uve already] two years. (4) Our town is [say finds itself] in one of the large governments of Russia. (5) Surely you have not lived here for two years ? (6) I am going home now. (7) I go home every day at six o'clock. (8) To-day I'll go home at seven. (9) They went along the street this morning. (10) We must carry the little boy. (11) She is not to go out of the house. (12) What are we to do ? Do you know that it is snowing ? (13) He did not carry it. (14) I suppose she is spinning ; she does not know how to weave. (15) In this government there are [find themselves] seven districts, forty-six towns, two hundred villages, and one million two hundred and seventy thousand people. (16) Did she get to know that ? (17) Not at all ; she never reached the house where her friends were living at that time. (18) I did not know whether she came here yesterday. (19) They continued to laugh, because they did not understand what the old teacher was [is] saying to them. 162-166 LESSON XLIII 133 LESSON XLIII Present Tense, I A (b) (Par. 121), Monosyllabic Words 162. Initial consonant soft tkrougliout : nHTb [pit], to drink nbK) [pju] nbenib [pjoj] nbCTt [pjot] nbCM'b [pjom] nbCTe [pj6t9] nbH)Ti> [pjut] Similar are : jiHTb [lit], to pour BHTb [vit], to windf twine niHTb [Jit], to sew 6wTh [bit], to beat 163. Some other monosyllabic verbs, often called irregular : 3KaTb [3a H], to reap jK^axb [sda^t], to wait muy [3nu] mny [sdu] JKHenib [snoj], etc. mjieuih [sdoj], etc. H^aTb [sa^t], to press TKaTb TKmy [smu] (see Par. 157) >KMemb [siiioj], etc. The 3rd plural forms are JKHyTi, JKiviyx-b, wnyTt, TKyTl>. 164. Past Tenses HHTb, BHTB, JIHTB, MK^aTB, TKaTB bave the accent on tbe feminine ending ; all tbe otber past tense forms of verbs in Pars. 162, 163 have tbe accent on tbe stem. 165. Distinguisb hhtb from ni^TB, noio, euiB, etc., n-fejiB, nijia [pe^t^ pAJU; pAJoJ pet^ PstA], to sing. 166. Ordinal numbers are, as a general rule, formed from tbe cardinals by giving tbem tbe termination Biii, aa, oe. Just as in Engbsb, among tbe first few ordinals tbere are some exceptional forms : n^pBbifi [psrvi] 1st BTop6tt [ftAr6I] 2nd 134 LESSON XLIII 167 xp^Tift (hH, be) [tr6ti (tj9, tj9)] 3rd qcTBepTbift [tj9tv6rti] 4th uAtuPl [pati] 5th mecT6ft [Jastoi] 6th cefli.M6fi [sadmoi] 7th B0CbM6ft [vAsmoI] 8th ACBiiTbitt [davati] 9th neoiTHii [dasati] 10th OAiiHHai;aTLiti [AdinAtsAti] 11th and so on up to IQtli, the accentuation being the same as in the cardinals. 167. These words are decHned Hke any regular adjective of corresponding form. In TpeTift the stem is everywhere, except in the nominative masculine, Tpext-. The genitive singular is xpeTbHro, xpexbeH, xpexbflro ; otherwise the declension is that of qeft, hlh, etc. (Par. 106): Tp^TbHro HHH [tr6tJ8VA dna], tTie day before yesterday. The nominative plural is xpextH [ti-etji] for all genders. Vocabulary qdft, fl, H [tjai], tea bhh6, 4, -^a [vino], wine pyqeii, hA, b6 [rutj^l], brook, stream nJiaTbe, h, h [ptdtja], dress, clothes q^uiKa, H, H (cKt) [tJdJkA], cup thxo [tixA], low, softly q^mKa naio ^ [tJaJkA tjdju], a cup rpoMKO [gromkA], loudly, alcmd of tea aojiro [dotgA], hng {of time) pyS^uiKa, H, H (cK-b) [rabajkA], e^Ba [jodva], hardly shirt HCCMOTpii na t6, qxc [nasmAtra nxAqKa, h, h (ckT)) [ptftjkA], little nAt6,jt6], not looking onto, i.e. in bird spite of, the fact that BcpcBKa, H, H (oK'b) [varofkA], noJiHBaxb I A [pAiiva^t], to liJa^er rope, line JiHXb pyqbeMX. (pyqbHMH) [lit cjies^, ii, -bi [siazd], tear nitjjom (rutjjdriii)] or JiHXb He^-fejiH, H, H (b) [nad^lA], week KSLK^b HS-b BC^pa [lit kak iz n'fecHH, H, H (ewh) [p6snA], song vadrd], to pour in torrents CHpoxcxBO, a[sir6tstvA], orp^w^oo^ jK^xbCH ox-b x6jiOAy ^ [3a^tsA At rHibaad, A, -a [giiazdo, gnozdA], xotAdu], to shrink together with nest cold, to be pinched with cold. u&BO, a, d [pfvA], beer 1 Cf. Voc. XXVII. 2 cf. rial HOMY in Voc. XLII. 167 LESSON XLIII 135 Exercises A. Translate : (1) Bt KOT6poMi> qac;^ Bh nbexe ejKenH^BHo H^ii? (2) Cer6AHfl HCJibSii BiJiHTH lisT* AOMy, noTOM^ HTO Hexopomafl noro^a. (3) Hauia MHJiaH, TpyAOJiioSiiBaH Maxb mbeT-B njiaxbH ajih MJiaarnHX-b H0Hep6ft H py6amKH ^jih cbiHoe^ft. (4) Bqepa JHOTK^b jikjit, py^bjiMH; HecMOTpfl[ Ha 5x0, CTapaa cjiyat^HKa nojiHeaeT'b mokphh ym^ cslkl. (5) ^aBHiJiM'b-fl;aBH6 Bcife KpecTbiiHe Bt ^xoii ^ep^BH'fe n^Jin n'fecHH, HO ym^naBHo 66jibme saifecb He noibx-b. (6) Tp^xbHro ahh OH'b BHJi-b BepeBKH. (7) He BHSHxe jih Bm, KaK-b hxhhkh Bbiox-b rH^SAa? (8) H xox-fejix. ysHaxb, noHeM^ Bamx. chhi. 6bexx> CBOib co6aKy. (9) Ona xaKi> x6xo noexx>, hxo h e^Ba cjnJimy. (10) Il^pBbm aenb Heit-fejiH BOCKpec^Hbe, a Bxop6ii noHerfjibHHKi.. (11) Ten6pb ce^bMaH Hen'fejiH rbaa. (12) Xopomo, wto xen^pb xenjian noro^a; npiflXHO pa66xaxb na SBop'fe. (13) B'fecHoio noc^HSiu,^ a oceHbio jKHyxx>. (14) Majib^HKH jKMyxcH oxx> x6jioAy. (16) Bx. cnpdxcxB'fe >KHXb CJieSbl JIHXb. B. Translate into Russian : (1) Every day at five o'clock most ladies drink a cup of tea ; their little daughters drink a glass of milk. (2) It is well that she can [knows how to] sew. (3) I used to see her sewing [how she sews] at the window. (4) It is pouring in torrents to-day, and all the little birds are sitting in their nests, huddled together [and they press themselves] with cold. (5) Our friends did not sow in spring and they will not reap in autumn. (6) When does that bird build [wind, weave] its nest ? (7) In spite of the bad weather we go to school each day, but to-day, perhaps, we shall not go to school. (8) How many cups of tea do you drink ? (9) The industrious peasants must make [wind] ropes in the evenings, when it is impossible to work out of doors. (10) A lot of large birds are building their nests in the wood. (11) I thought that they usually reaped the harvest with a scythe or a sickle. (12) They have lived for fifty years ^ in our government. (13) Why were they speaking of the sixth day of the week ? (14) When I passed her, there she was pouring [pours] the water on the garden in front of our door. (15) Ten men came through the second field. (16) Five easy books, eighty- two white horses, four deep streams, six long years. 2 (17) He never drinks wine or beer. ^ the sowing was done. * Genitive plural with numerals after qexiipe is JitrB from Ji-fexo. 136 LESSON XLIV 168-169 LESSON XLIV 168. Present Tense, IA(c) (Par. 121) Termination accented only in 1st singular or not at all. (1) nnc^Tb [pisait], to write nnm^ [piju] nHUieniB [pijaj] nHincT'L [pijet] nAm^Wh [pijam] niimeTe [pijata] nnmyT'L [pijut] Similar to nHcaxt are : (2) BHsaxb [veza^t], to knit BflJKy, Bi^H^emb [v93u, vasaj], etc. (3) njiaKaxb [ptakAt], to weep njiaqy, njianeuib [ptatju, ptdtjaj], etc. (4) HCKaxb [iskd^t], to seek (governs gen. or ace.) vmxf, Hmemb [ijtjii, ijtjej], etc. (5) ^xaxb ^ [jsxAt], to drive in a vehicle, ride, go -feay, ijtenib [jedu, jsdaj], etc. (6) naxaxb [pAxa^t], to plough nam^, namemb [paJu, pdjaj], etc. (7) MO^b [motj], to he able, can uovf, MbjKenib, etc., Moryxt [mAgu, 111659 j m6gat] (a) Verbs in -"feflXb, like cfenxB, to sow, have the same endings : ctio, ctenib [seju, sejaj], etc., K) replacing y after the vowel. 169. Notice in these verbs the changes in the form of the stem : (1) Verbs in -caib, e.g. nHcaib, change c into m in the present tense. (2) Verbs in -3HTI> and -saxb, e.g. Bflsaxb, change 3 into m. (3) Verbs in -xaxb and -Kaxb, e.g. njiaKaxb, change x or k into H. (4) Verbs in -cxaxb and -CKaxb, e.g. HCKaxb, change ex or CK into m. (7) Verbs in -Hb, e.g. MOHb, change q in the 1st singular and 3rd plural into r or K, in the other forms of the present tense into jk or q. ^ The important distinction between this verb and htt6 was pointed out in Par. 97. 170-171 LESSON XLIV 137 170. Past Tense of verbs in Par. 168 : (1) nHcajn>, nncajia, ajio, ajiH (2, 4, 6 similar). (3) njiaKajiTj, njiaKajia (5 similar). In fact all these verbs preserve in the past tense the accent of the infinitive. (7) Mor-b, Morjia, Morjio, mofjih. 171. Ordinal Numerals tens, hundreds. ABajxnaTLiii [dvAtsati] 20th ABaanaxb n6pBHii [dvdtsAt p^rvi] 21st ne^AUaTL BTop6ii [dvdtsAt ftAr6i] 22nd and so on to 29th. TpnanaTMft [tritsati] 30th COpOKOBOft [SATAkAVOl] 40th nflTHjteciiTbifl [p9tid9sati] 60th mecTHecflTBiti [Jastidesati] 60th ceMHaecjiTMH [saihidesati] 70th BOCbMHAecHTBiii [vAsihidasdti] 80th aeBHH6cTLiii [davanosti] 90th c6Ti.m [soti] 100th CTO c6poKi> HjiTbift [sto sorAk pati] 146th Notice in the last example that, as in Enghsh, only the last element has the form of an ordinal. Vocabulary M'fecfln'b, a, Bi (eB-b) [ih^sats], month taaxb 3a rpanAny [za grAnitsu], to liHCbMO, a, a (cMT*) [pismo], letter go abroad, i.e. beyond the frontier ^lyjiOK-b, JiK^, JiKli (oK-b) [tJuMk], dHTb 3a rpaHnneio [grAiiitsaju], to stocking be abroad npyr'b np^ra [druk drtigA], each BcpKbHi} [varxom], on horseback (Kt. other as the top, the upper part) flpyr'b Ap^ry [druk driigu], to each rfexaxb BepxoM-b [varxom], to ride, to other be riding rpaniina, h, h [giAnltsA], frontiery xoAHXb n-femKOM-b [xAdit pajkdm], boundary to go on foot TiopbM^, li, -^H (cMb) [turma], Haflxii [iiAlti], to find prison BaaA'b h Bnepefl-b [vzatifpardt], back- wards and forwards, to and fro Hxo Bbi xaKX) nocxyn^exe? [Jto vi tak pAstupd jata]. Why do you act so ? (Hxo? = Oxqer6?) ./ P^SB-fe OH-b iSxo cn^Jiaji-b? [rdzva on stA sd^tAt], Perhaps he did that? V 138 LESSON XLIV 171 Did he do that ? equivalent to M6>KeT'B-6HTb, OHi. 5to crfjiaJi-L, or simply Ga^JiaJI-b JIH OHTb ^TO? Oh-l He xoT'feji'b (}Keji^jn>) OTB-fenaTb, na h T6jibK0 [on na xAt^t (satat) Atvatja^t, da i t64kA], He did not wish to answer, and that is ally that is the end of it. He bcAkiVl xjifeSi. n^meTi., aa BcAviVi er6,'fecT'b [na fsaki xisp pajat, dA fsaki J9v6 jest], Not everyone grows {ploughs) corn, but everyone eats it. JJ,vltA njianeTb, y Maxepn c^parte SojniTt^ [ditd ptatjot, u mdtari s6rtso bAlit], The child cries, the mother's heart is sore, i.e. whn the child cries, etc., etc. Exercises A. Translate : (1) PasBife OHi. HHKorad He niimeT'L? (2) H noKopno 6jiaro- api5 ji;65pyK) cxap^xy, KOTdpan MH-fe BHrneTb nyjiKH, ho ona Bce roBopiiT'b: ne cxdHTb. (3) Kb comaji^Hiio OHb Bb HacTonmee Bp^MH 'fe^eT'b 3a rpaHiii^y; nejiba^ cnpociiTb ero. (4) Kte> cqacxiio OH-b ym AOJiro jKHBeTb 3a rpaHiii;eK). (5) PasB-fe Bbi ne 3HaeTe, HOHeM^ A-feBOHKa njianexb? (6) Mnife CKasaJiH, hto jnoHKa T'fex'b Sfenbixb Jiiojt^ii yjK6 A6jiro limexb MaTb, ho ne MoiKexb HattxA en. (7) Hxo OHH ^myxb cBoero oxua? (8) H ne mejiaio 5xoro CKa3axb, aa H xojibKO. (9) Mn-fe homhhxch, hxo moh cecxpbi npittn^xb cioji;^ cero^HH. (10) Hxo OH-fe Bce x6ji;HXb B3a^b h Bnepefl-b? (11) H-fecKOJibKO Jiioa^ii nojiaraioxb, qxo ym oxBesji^ Bauiero apyra bi. TiopbM;^. (12) H He Mor^ BaMi noKasaxb naiunxb HOBMXb KapxHHb. B. Translate into Russian : (1) Perhaps you did not know for whom the countr3rwoman was knitting stockings. (2) What sort of stockings does she knit ? (3) I think she does not knit stockings at all. (4) They write letters to each other. (5) They are riding to-day in the forest. (6) I usually go to the town on foot. (7) I cannot send them all ; neither can they [they also cannot do it]. (8) Why are they weeping ? (9) Whose letters was she carrying ? (10) What are you writing about and to whom ? (11) Surely you have known that for long ? (12) They told me he was walking to and fro in the garden. (13) He is at the present moment riding along the street. (14) Why can they not relate that story to you ? (15) I suppose they do not wish to, that is all. (16) The 25th day of this month is Sunday. (17) I was talking of the 37th week of the year. (18) A great many, too many, wealthy Russians live abroad. 1 With a personal subject this verb Soji-ixi. belongs to I A, 172-174 LESSON XLV 139 LESSON XLV Genitive Plural of Neuter Nouns 172. Nouns in -o have genitive plural in -t, e.g. Ji'feTO, Ji'fex'B [istA, let], yeaff summer. As was explained in Par. 153 it is often necessary to insert o or e, e.g. okh6, 6kohi [Akno, 6kAn], window. Kp6cJio, Kp^ceji-B [kr^stA, kf^set], arm-chair. 173. Nouns in -e preceded by a consonant have -eft, e.g. M6pe, Mop6ft [more, mAr6i], sea. Nouns in -ie take -ift, e.g. ajii^Hie, BAaHiii [zddnja, zdani], building. 174. The genitive plural of aU neuter nouns is either indicated in the vocabulary or accounted for in Par. 172. Vocabulary HSB'ifecTHbifi [izvss(t)ni], certain, yibTHBifi [ujutni], comfortable, cosy Tmown, well-known BBicoTa, ii, bbic6ti^i [visAtd], height HaJieKift [dAi6ki], distant Exercise on the Declension of Nouns of all Genders Translate : The colour of the blue seas, how many distant places, a lot of wooden arm-chairs, the height of those tall buildings, a few pretty villages, for the splendid houses, towards the angry men, in a certain place, to [into] a remote village, of the simple pictures, from [OT^] other friends, from [cl] the long tables, from [nsi.] a distant government, a few difficult things, a number of 'large pails of [with] water, too little good rye, about the bad weather, he does not know these enormous buildings, he does not know these rich land- owners, of your gold rings, so many pleasant rooms, about [o or npo] the large estates, in a numerous family, the larger part of the dark forest, the majority of the Russian peasants, in my cosy bed-room, in their splendid dining-room, on to the green meadow, in front of their new red house, the angry lion's tail, in that beautiful neighbourhood, on the blue walls, under the wooden chairs; 6 brothers,^ 13 wooden chairs,^ 8 sons,^ 18 friends,^ 31 chairs, 86 years, 804 people. 1 See Par. 77 (9). 140 LESSON XLVI 174 LESSON XLVI Revision toXLV. Verbs of all the types discussed in Lessons XXXII Vocabulary n^aymKa,^ h, h (cKt) [deduJkA], grandfather 6aTK)mKa ^ [batujkA], father MaxyiUKa ^ [matuJkA], mother can6n>, 4, ti (-l) [sAp6k], booty foot- gear K6jKa, H, H [k65A], leather noc^Aa, H {sing, collective) [pAstidA], vessels, utensils M66ejib, H [rh^h^i], furniture MCT^Jib, H, H [m9t6^i], snow-storm n^qb, H, H (ett) [p6^tj], stove npoBa, % {neut, plur.) [drAva], wood fuel H'^TH {an irregular neuter noun, Par. 229) [d6ti], children B3p6cjibiii [vzrosti], grown up Apyr-L CL Hp^roMt [druk sdrdgAm], with on. another ^TO npocTO [stA pr6stA], that is simple ^TO yibTHO [stA ujiitnA], that is cosy 6biBaTb I A [bivd^t], to be usually the case, to be customary, to happen saHHMaxbCfl I A [zAnimd^tsA], to busy oneself, to be engaged TCMH-feTb I A [tamn^^t], to grow dark paacKasbiBaxb I A [rAsskdzivAt], to be relating {stories) noHHHjiTb I A [pAtJind^t], to re- pair ToniiTb (jiib, 6nHmb) [tApit], to heat BaxonjiflTb I A [zAtApld^t], to heat, make up fire npOBOAHTb (>K^, OAHUIb) [piAVA- dit], to spend {time) poBHO [roviiA], exactly OAH^KOKT. [AdndkAj], however HTTii cnaxb [iti spa^t], to go to bed np^JK^e Bcero [pr^sda fsavo], before all, i.e. first of all OHa XOHCXX. (Par. 222), she wishes Exercises A. Paying attention to the accentuation of each word, read aloud and translate the following verb forms : OHH xodujiu, OHa HCCJia, mh npsuiu, bh n^exe, xbi ^Mcueemh, oH-fe ruiaHymh, h npuHadjieotcy , ohh BomjiH, ona ebemh, Bbi jkhbcxc, h cjiyoicy, OHT) depofcumh, h xomy, Bbi MO>Kexe, mh Sy^eM-b cudrhmb, ynumecb, eudmnib, cmounvb {two words), cmoumb, cmoRirib, cmpoumh, npHACxTb, MorjiH, nucajia, ona mKertih, mm neceM'b, bh omKphieaeme, ona npnuijia, h CMompw, lubjomh, cmeim, cmapacMCH, npuzomoe/isiemh, /iiodumb, jiwdumb, h cnmy, ohh cAbiuiamb, ^ Diminutives in frequent use instead of the more formal H'feH'B, oT^n-b, MaTb. 174 LESSON XLVI 141 B. Give tlie infinitive and the 1st singular, 2nd singular, 3rd plural of the past, present, future tenses of the verbs printed in italics in Ex. A. C. Translate : (1) Mh JKHBCMt B-L M^JICHLKOtt HSS-fe BT* yfes^-fe BCkMli HSB-fecTHOfi jiajicKoii ry66pHiH. (2) SnMott oqenb ^acTO y nact SbiBaeT-b nypnafl noroAa. (3) IIo^TOMy mm HHora He MOH^eM-B ryjiaxb bt. Ji-fec^ [or no Ji-fecy]. (4) Gero^HH cn-fer-b HACT'b. (5) Ha jiBop^ cepaHxafl MCT^jib H HCJibSfl BbiiiTH ik3T> ffOMy. (6) Mofl MJiaflmaH cecTp^ njiancT-b h xoqex'b snaxb, qxo naiM-b A'fejiaTb h o ^ewh roBopHXb. (7) Oah^kojkx. Bce 5xo dneuh npocxo. (8) TaK-b KaKX. yjKe pano xeMHibexx>, 3a>KHr^K)xx> jiaMny bx> xpn ^aca. (9) Ho np^JK^e Bcer6 Mbi 3axonjiiieMX> ne^b; ne^b x6nflxx> (HpoBaMH). (10) M^jiCHbKifl A-fexH, KOxopbiH He oji>KHii pa66xaxb, y>Ke c^jih na cxyjibH Bosji-fe HCH. *(11) OhH HHXaK)Xl> KHiirH, Hrpdl0XX> Ap^rX> CX> npyTOMT>, HJIH pa3CKa3biBaK)xx> j;pyrx> ap^ry CKa3KH h 6^chh. (12) B-b h36^ nplHXHO H yibxHO. (13) JK^HnjHHbi npHroxoBJiiiioxx> K^manbe. (14) B^qepoMx. Mbi nbCMX. naniKy naio poBHO bx> ccMb qac6Bx>; nox6MT> Moft MJianmiii 6paxx, jiojkhxch cnaxb. (15) Ho BspocjibiMX. n6cji'fe fmnna. eme AOJiro h^jkho paSoxaxb. (16) MaxyniKa h 6a6ymKa XKyxx>, npflA^xx>, BHJKyxx> HyjiKii, nibioxx> njiaxbH. (17) A CaxiouiKa mbexx> canorii h3x> kojkh, i^jih noHHHiiexx> noc^^ay h MeSejib. D. Rewrite Ex. C, 1-9, 11-17, in the past and future. E. BonpocLi : (1) Fa'fe roBop^imiii H? (2) Hxo 6biBaexx> qacxo y !Sxhxx> jiiOA^tt 3HM6ft? (3) IloqeM]^ hmx> Hejib3H ryjiaxb na ABop-fe? (4) KaKafl cero^HH nor6aa? (5) IloHCMy^ ne M6ryxx> bijhxh ii3x> HOMy? (6) Hxo xo^exx. snaxb MJia^maH cecxpa? (7) Tp^^HO jih 5xo CKa3^xb? (8) Bx> KOx6poMX> ^ac^ 3a>KHraioxx> Jiaiwny? (9) rioHCM^? (10) H'feMx> x6nHXX> neqb? (11) Ky^a yjKe c^jih a^xh? (12) KaKiiMX> 66pa30MX. OHi^ npoBOAHXx. bp^mh ji;o fmvLUSi'7 (13) KaKX> 6biB^exx> Bx, H36'fe? (14) B-b Kox6poMx> nsLCf nbioxx> naniKy Haio? (15) Korfl^ H^xx> cnaxb cerojiHfl? (16) H-feMX. 3aHHMaioxcH JK^nmnHbi h MyH^HHHM nocji-fe ;^mHHa? F. Translate into Russian : (1) I was told that this man's two sons lived in the little village beyond the river, but at the present time they live, I am told, in that great house that you see before you. (2) Surely you sometimes have good weather in this district. (3) Do you know what problem they are solving now ? 142 LESSON XLVII 176-176 (4) I suppose their father has been carried away, that is why they are crying. (5) Perhaps they did not tell you that they went upstairs and entered the large dining-room, where the old lady was sitting. She was sewing or knitting. (6) What's to be done now ? (7) What is he to do ? He does not know how to work. (8) I thought that the stove used to stand near the windows, but there it is standing behind the door. (9) I was lying on one bed and he lay down on the other. (10) He is sitting there now. (11) What are they talking about ? (12) We told each other that that was not the truth. (13) Why did most of these poor people always drink tea ? (14) They do not drink tea at all ; they drink water or milk or bad wine or beer. (16) She remembers that the EngUsh lady gave him that little gold ring. (16) I do not like the colour of those enormous buildings at all. (17) Surely she does not want to go to school yet ? (18) Really I cannot say whether boots are always made of good leather. (19) You are obliged to remain at home after dinner. (20) Did you never think of the lesson that you were to learn by heart ? (21) Usually we go home at five o'clock ; to-day we are going home at four and after Sunday we shall always go home at three o'clock. LESSON XLVII The Numerals 175. The declension of ordinal numerals was indicated in Par. 167. If an ordinal numeral be compound, only the last element is declined, e.g. in " the 674tli verst," mecTbCOTi. ceMbAecHTT) HCTBepTaa BcpcT^ [J9s(t)s6t s^mdasat tJ9tv6rtAJa versta] only qeTBepxafl is declined along with the noun. 176. The declension of cardinal numbers : (a) Numbers ending in b are declined like regular feminine nouns in b ; in 5-10, 20, 30 the accent is on the termination, e.g. naxb, HHTH [ptft, pati]. (6) copoKt, nesHHOCTO, CTO, TbiCflHa, MHJiJii6HT> are declined like nouns of corresponding form. But when copoKb, aeBHHOCXO, CTO stand before other numerals the oblique cases all end in a, e.g. copoKa nflXH, of 45 ; directly before nouns this also happens ; the prepositional ends in ife or a. The genitive plural of cto is COT'L. 177-179 LESSON XLVII 143 (c) The declension of ojiuuh was indicated in Par. 107 (6). The plural means the only^ alonej the ones. (d) nom. 66a (m. and n.) [obA], 66"^ (/.) [oba], both, has gen. o66hxl [Aboix], o6ivLXh [Abeix], etc., etc. 65a, like PiBa, takes the noun in the genitive singular. 66'fe takes the nominative plural. (e) nom. JiBa (w. and n.), HB'fe (/.) gen. Hsyxii [dvux] dat. SByM-B [dvum] ace. nom. or gen. instr. aeyMH [dvuriia] prep. neyx'B [dvux] (/) nom. xpH [tri] qextipe [tjafire] gen. Tpex-L [trox] qcTHpext [tjefirox] dat. TpcMT* [trom] qexBipcMTj [tjatirom] ace. Tpn or xpexx. nom. or gen. instr. xpcMii [treihd] qexfcipbMfl [tjatiriha] prep, xpexi [trox] lexbipext [tjatirox] 177. In numerals of two or more digits each figure is separately decHned, if the number be cardinal, e.g. nom. xpiicxa [tfistA], 300 mecxbXbiCHq'B [|9s(t)tis9tJ], 6000 gen. xpex-LCOX-b [troxsot] mecxHXbiCHHb [jastitisatj] dat. xpcM'bCxaM'b [tromstam], etc. mecxHXi^iCHqaM'b[j8stitisatJam],eto. Fortunately, however, numerals occur with great frequency in the nominative or accusative. 178. It has already (Par. 138) been pointed out that after the word ojuhhTj in the singular, even when this is merely the last element in a compound numeral, the noun is singular, e.g. cxo ACBAHdcxo OAHa JKenmnna, 191 women. 179. JIBS, and qcTLipe {two pairs) were dual forms. The dual of masculine nouns happened to be identical with the genitive singular, and when the dual fell into disuse the mechanical rule became universal that after 2 and 4, even when they are merely the last element in a compound numeral, the genitive singular of the noun 144 LESSON XLVII 180-181 must be used. Tpn came to liave the same effect by analogy. In any phrase involving one of these three words, i.e. where the con- struction normally requires nominative or accusative, though the noun is in the genitive singular, the adjective is nominative plural or genitive plural, e.g. jtB^auaTB Ba 6ojihm.uxT> (6ojibmie) a6Ma [dvatsAt dva bAiijix (bA^ijije) domA], 22 large houses. 180. After other numerals from 5 upwards, when the numeral is nominative or accusative, both noun and adjective are in the genitive plural, e.g. xpiiauaTb mixb 6ojii>mHxi> aom6bi. [tfitsAt], thirty- five great houses. Whatever be the cardinal numeral used in a phrase, if the phrase be nominative or accusative, the numeral determines the form of the noun ; if the phrase be in any other case, the numeral must agree with the noun. 181. (a) The date of the month is expressed by using the genitive {^ of the tenth of the month '), or nominative neuter. HCCHTaro Man, cer6 (M'fecHua) [dasatAVA maJA, sevo (rii^satsA)], on the tenth of May, of this month, curt. Cer6Hfl neciiToe (qHCJi6) iibjin [s9v6dnA dasatAJa ijiilA], To-day is the 10th of July. (b) The date of the year is expressed in two ways : (1) ' 1892 A.D.' is B-b TiicHqa B0ceMLc6Ti> neBHHocTO BTopbHi. Tonf no POJK- necTB'fe {no = after takes the prep.) XpHCTOBOM'b [xrist6vAm] {after the birth of Christ). (2) ' the 22nd June 1892 ' is SBaAuaxb BTop6ro libHH TMCHHa BOceMbcoT-b aeBHH6cT0 BTop6ro r6na. (3) 'In June^ is B-b iibni^ [vijiina]. (4) * On Monday ' is B-b nonea^JibHHK'b [fpAnadd^lriik]. * On Mondays," * of a Monday," is no nonen'fejibHHKaM'b [pApAnad^^l riikAm]. (c) The time of day is expressed thus : MHH^xa [ihintitA], minute. qacb [tjas], one o" clock {=hour). flBa, xpn, qexijpe nacd [tjAsd], two, three, four o'clock. nflXb, mecxb etc. HacoBT) [tJAsof], five, six etc. o'clock. 182-184 LESSON XLVII 145 q^TBepxb qcTBcpTaro [tj^tvart], 3*16 {a quarter ofihefcmrth hour). nojiOBHHa HeTBepxaro [pAtAvuiA], 3-30 {half of the f mirth hour). Sea-L H^TBcpxH Hexiiipe [bas tj^tverti], 3-45 {four, less a qimrter). A^CHXb MHH^xi> nnxaro [d^sat riiinut patAVA], 4-10 {ten minutes of the fifth hour). Qes-b A^CflXH unufTb nflXb [d^sati], 4*50 {five less ten minutes). B'b nflXb ^lacdB-L, at five o'clock 6kojio nflxii qacoBt [6kAtA], about five o'clock (genitive). 182. To indicate an approximate number the numeral is placed after the noun, e.g. HBaartaxb py5ji6H [dvatsAt rubMi], twenty roubles. but py6ji6fi flBajmaxb [ruble! dvdtsAt], about twenty roubles. rdaa Hexbipe [g6dA tjatira], about four years. 183. To express the distributive form {at the rate of, so many each) no is used with the accusative of HBa, xpn, HexBipe, but with the dative of any other numeral, e.g. Oh-l viwh AajiX) no Ba pySjiii [on jim dat pA dva rubld], He gave them two roubles each. no oaH6ft Kon^liK'fe [pA Adnoi kAp6ika], one copeck each. Ilo xpHHaauaxH [pA trinatsAti], at the rate of thirteen. 184. Ordinal numbers that have not yet been given are : HByx-bC^Xbift [dvuxs6ti] 200th xpex-LCOXbifi [tfoxs6ti] 300th Hexbipex-LcdxHii [tjatiroxsoti] 400th nHXHCOXbiii [patisoti] 500th mecxHCOXbift [Jastisoti] 600th ccMHCOXbiH [samisoti] 700th B0CbMHc6xbm [vAsmis6ti] 800th aeBHXHCOXbitt [davatisoti] 900th XbiCfl^Hbiii [tisatjni] 1000th HByxt xi^icfl^Hbiii [dvux tisatjm] 2000th cxoxbiCHHHbiii [stAtisatJni] 100,000th MHJiJii6HHHH [mii6ni] 1,000,000th 146 LESSON XLVIII 185 Vocabulary BOCK^ec^Hhe, Sunday (Voc.XXXIV) MapTT>, a, bi [mart], March noHeH'fejibHHK'b, Monday (Voc. anp-fejib, h [Apf6^i], April XXXIV) Maft, fl, H [mai], May BxdpHHK'b, a {second {working -)day) iibnb, h, h [ijii^n], June [ft6rnik], Tuesday iiOJib, h, h [ijii^i], July cpeaa, li {middle {of week)) [sradd], ^Brycx'b, a, bi [avgust], August Wednesday cenx^Spb, A, h [sontabr], September HBTB^pr-b, a [tjatvsrk], Thursday OKTHSpb, h, h [Aktabf], October ni^THHita, bi [patnitsA], Friday H0H6pb, a, h [iiAJabr], November cy666Ta, bi {sabbath) [subotA], ^CKaCpb, A, w. [dekdbr], December poUHTbCfl [rAditsA], to be bom HHB^pb, fl, H [janva^r], January CKOHqaTbCfl [skAntja^tsA], to die, lit. ^eBpaJib, A, II [favra^i], February to come to an end, to decease Exercise Translate into Russian : (1) The woman's rich friend died on the 29th of January, 1852. (2) They were born on the 10th of May 1903. (3) To-day is the 9th of October. (4) How much did she give you ? She gave us only ten copecks each. (5) In June we sometimes have good weather, seldom hot weather. (6) The third day of the week is Tuesday. (7) There are 365 days in the year. (8) Twenty men went into this Uttle room ; but the twenty-first man they did not admit. (9) The landed proprietor who lives near [in the neighbourhood of] the town has four beautiful white horses and about twenty hunting-dogs. (10) The twenty-fifth of December is Christmas. (11) They came here early in the morning of the 23rd of this month. (12) We saw about 40 soldiers who were walking along this wide street. (13) 546 men, the 546th man. (14) On Fridays we always go to church. (15) 257,649 roubles. LESSON XLVIII 185. Certain verbs in frequent use require tlie complement in the instrumental case. Such verbs are : 6biTb [bit], to be ^ cxaxb [sta^t], to become ^ cjt'fejTaTbCfl I A [sdstAtsA], to become ^ cjiyjKHTb (^, ^Hinb), to serve as 3BaTb (30B^, euib) [zvQ^t], to Call, to name ^ Especially when a merely temporary quaUty or change of state is expressed. See note to Par. 69. 186 LESSON XLVIII 147 HasHBaTbCH I A [nAziva^tsA], to he called c^HTaTb I A [stjita^t], to reckoriy to consider no^HxaTbCH I A [pAtJita^tsA], to be regarded as BJia^'i^Tb I A [vtAd6^t], to dominate^ to rule over Examples : Owh CTaji-b doraTbiMT. KyniidM-b [on stat bAgatim kupts6m], He became {a) rich merchant. pT3L KdMHaxa CM^ c^frnvLTTy cnaJibHCK) [stA k6mnAtA jamti sttisit spd^naju], This room serves him as a bedroom. Ero aoB^^Tt HnKOJiaeM'b [J9v6 zAviit nikAtdjam], They call him Nicholas {by the name of N.) 5to h CHHxdio Hy^jKHbiM-b [stA JQ stjitdju niisnim], / consider that 186. caMbiii [sami] preceding an adjective gives to it the force of a superlative. This word itself means self, same ; prefixed to an adjective it means extremely , in the highest degree, e.g. cksLhiVi. 6ojibm6ft [sdmi bA^ijoI], the largest. Vocabulary KysH^iXT), a, bi [kuznsts], smith B'feK'b, Si, u or a. [vsk], age, century Ha CBoeM-b B-feK^ [na svAJom vekii], in his {life)time itapcTBO, a, a [tsdrstvA], kingdom, empire i^apcTBOBaxb [tsdrstvAVAt] (^apcT- Byio, emb [tsdrstvuju]) (see Par. 225), to reign rocyHapb, a, h [gAsudd^r], the Ruler, Lord, Emperor HMnepaTop-b, a, bi [impordtAi], Emperor rocya. HMnep. [gAsudd^r impord- tAr], His Majesty the Emperor rocyflapcTBO, a, a [gAsuddrstvA], state, empire Kopoji^Ba, bi, bi [kAFAisvA], queen BJiaa-fenie, h, h (Ih) [vtAd^nje], territory, possession BJiaA-fexb I A [vtAd^^t], to rule over. cfeBcpi), a [ssver], north ibr-b, a [jug, juk], south BOCTOK'b, a [vAstok], east sanaa'b, a [zdpAt], west npHTOKTi, a, H [prit6k], a tributary BcpSjiiofl'b, a, bi [verbiiit], camel CM^pxb, H, H (6tt) [sriiert], death Bcpcxa, ii, -H [varstd], verst (1067 metres) pa66xa, bi, bi [rAbotA], work nycxbiHH, H, H [pustinA], wilderness, desert oaepo, a, ^'a [oi^erA], lake, noKOHHbili [pAkoIni], deceased, late paSoHlft [rAbotji], working, work- man npasffHHHHbift [prdz(d)nitjni], holi- day, feast{-day) (adj.) noji63HbiH [pAiszni], useful XHH^xbCfl {f, ^enib) [UnuitsA], to stretch, extend Hoxoniixb (}K^, 6Hmb) [dAXAdit], to reach Bnajt^xb I A [fpAdd^t], to fall into 148 LESSON XLVIII 186 . , , ^ Exercises A. Translate : (1) B-L mecTH^HuaTOM'L B-feKife h6 6hjio bi> BJiaa-feHiH Poccfn hh OHHor6 M6pH, HO xenepb ona BJianibeT-b h^ckojibkhmh Mop;iMH. (2) B-B npdmjiOMt rojt,f iiapcxBOBaji-Lrocyaapb MMnepaxop'L HnKOJiaii BTopoli; OHt cxaji-b (cA-fejiajicfl) HMnepaxopoMT, nocji'fe (or no vdth prep.) CMepxH noKofinaro AjieKcan^pa xpexbaro. Bi. nacxojimee Bp^MH y>K6 ne napcxByexT>; xenepb n-fex-b HMnepaxopa. (3) P^ccKoe napcxBO, KOx6poe xflnexcn cx> B0cx6Ka na 3anaHx> na xpHnaanaxb XHCfl^'b BepcxT), a cb cfesepa na lor-b na qexbipe xbicnqn Bepcx-b, pyccKie cHnxaioxx, caMbiM-b 6ojibmHMx> rocyaapcxBOM-b na CB-fex-fe. (4) HexBepxbift aenb neaibjiH nasbiBaexcH cpeaoio, a mecxoii nenb nnxHHna. (5) Illecxb paSoqnx'b h6h jnban paSdxaioxi, n'fejibifi nenb, a Bb BOCKpec^Hbe h B-b apyrie npasAHHqnbie hhh Bcfe oxjtbixaioxb ox-b paGox-b H xonflx-b Bb nepKOBb. (6) B-b rojif AB-fenaanaxb M^CHncB-b, a ^BifeHaAnaxbiii M'fecHnb soB^x-b jj,eKa6pewb. (7) P-feKa, KOXopaH He nox6flHxx> ao Mopn iijih jio 63epa, a BnaA^exi. bt, apyryio P'^K^, HasbiBaexcH npHXOKOMb. (8) Bep6jiiox> onenb noji^snoe WHBOXHoe, xaK-b KaK-b MOJKexb npoiixii, q6pe3x> nycxbinio, ox-b cxa BOCbMHJXeCHXH ^B^^XCOXT* BepCX-b B^ HefltjIK). (9) On-b pOAHJICfl B-b xi^iCHqa BOceMbcdx-b SBaanaxb BxopoM-b rojif, a CKon^ajicfl (^Mep*b) xpiAanaxb n^pBaro MaH xbiCHHa BOceMbcoxi. aeBHH6cxo niixaro rd^a. B. BonpocLi: ^^ ^? (1) Kor^a Poccifl ne BJia^-fejia hh oaneiso M6p? (2) Kxo ^ napcxBOBajiT. B-b Anrjiin bx> xi^icnqa BoceMbCoxx. AeBflnocxo naxoMX* roa;^? (3) Kxo ^ cxajib KopojieM-b no CMepxn 5xoti Kopoji^Bbi? Koxopoe napexBO anrjinqane cqnxaiox'b c^MbiMb dojibniHM'b na CB-fex-fe? (4) GKOJibKO padoqnx-b an^ft B-b nefl-feji^? (6) KaKX> /j 30Byxb n6pBbiii HeHb He^^Jin? A xpexiii j];eHb? (6) KaKan pi^K^ Ha3biBaexcH npnxoKOMb? (7) rioHCM^ BepSjiib^b cqaxaexcH nojies- HMMX. JKHB6XHbIMb? (8) KOFA^ Bbl pOffllJIHCfl? C. Translate into Russian : (1) I have been told that the present landowner is the son of a smith who lived in this district forty-five years ago. (2) The smallest wooden house in the village served his father as a dwelling at that time. (3) But a few years after the death of his wife the man went abroad. (4) He lived in one of [031.] the largest towns in England. (5) There he became a merchant and was soon regarded as a very rich man. (6) The youngest son, who was only ten i years old at the time of his mother's death, was boirn on the 24th of February 1885. (7) The father died abroad ten years ago and the second son, who had always wished to live in Russia, bought this little estate. (8) He has been Uving here for five years now [pres. tense with ym]. ^^ BHKT6pifl. ^ Bfly&pa-b. 187-189 LESSON XLIX 149 LESSON XLIX 187. Most of the adjectives that have occurred have been used attributively, i.e. they quaUfy nouns. But there is also a shorter form of the adjective ending in -t, -a, -o, -u (or -h), which, in theory, ought to be used when the adjective is predicative. y Hero 6ojii>h6h cbih'l, He has a sick son, shows the attributive form. Ero CbiHTi SojieHTj [jovo sin bolen], His son is ill, shows the predicative form. This form is obtained from the attributive by substituting in the mascuUne t for hh, oft, by dropping, in the feminine and neuter, the final fl and e, and, in the plural, the final e or fl, e.g. cjiaSbift, cji^SaH, cji^5oe, cjidSbie, hh cJiaS'L, cjia6a, cji^So, cji^Sbi [stab (p), stAba, stabA, stabi], weak. In fact the predicative adjective in the singular and often in the plural has the endings already associated with the past tense of the verb and with the noun. 188. The word pa^Tj [rod (t)], meaning glad, has no longer form. Adjectives in ckIh Hke pyccKift, and adjectives indicating materials and ending in hhhhh, Hke AepeBHHHtiH, are without the predicative form. Most other quahfying adjectives have this form. As it is found very frequently in current speech and in Hterature, the pre- dicative form must be known, but both in writing and speaking the attributive form takes its place to a very great extent. Outside popular poetry one rarely meets the predicative form in the obHque cases. 189. The neuter singular is of very frequent occurrence : (1) Used as an adverb, e.g. xopom6 [xArAjo], loell. nji6xo [pt6xA], badly. 150 LESSON XLIX 190-191 (2) As the complement of the verb to he expressed or mider- stood in phrases like MH'fe H^JKHO, HcnpiHTHO, JierK6, Tp^H0 5to A'fejiaTB [mne nu5nA, naprijatnA, l9xk6, triidiiA stA detAt], It is necessary ^ unpleasant^ easy, difficult, for me to do this. (Cf. Par. 116.) 190. It will be observed in the lists given in Par. 237 that o or e is sometimes inserted in the mascuUne to faciUtate pronunciation ; e.g. KopoTKifl : Kop6TOK'L [kArotAk], KopoTKa, etc., sTiort, TTpfjlKuPL : Tp^ACHt [truden], Tpyana, etc., difficult, but to give a rule is hardly practicable, for combinations of consonants that at first seem almost impossible to the foreigner are quite easily negotiated by the Russian, e.g. MepxBjb [mortf], dead. 191. The accentuation of the attributive adjective is a very simple matter : the accent remains throughout on the syllable corresponding to the accented syllable of the nominative singular mascuhne. In the predicative form the accent can only be mastered by continual observation. Paragraph 237 gives the predicative forms of most of the adjectives that are used in this book. Vocabulary r'pn6'b, ^,j^i[gH^,gviha'\, mushroom rpoaa (in ace. sing, and nom. plur. Tp^Cb, a, LI (oBt) [trus], coward stem accented) [grAza], thunder- SbiKT), a, H [bik], ox storm necB, nca, bi [pos], dog miksHh, h [31211], life r^Cb, H, H [gns], goose KOCTb, h, h (6h) [kost], bone mK^n-b, a, i>i [Jkap] (ei. musiuf Hano [nadA], it is necessary [fJkApti]), cupboard jk^jiko [3dtkA], it is a pity rpdwh, a, bi (oB'b) [grom], thunder BJi'feBTb [vlest] (BJi'fes'b, BJi-fesjia ; jiOAKa, H, H (oK-b) [totkA], boat fut. -"feay, -emb), to climb JianKa,H,H (oK-b) [tdpkA],/oo<,^a!z; exaxb [sta^t], to become, get; to set (diminutive) about H He 3H^io, npomeji-b jih ohi. [ja na znaju, prAjot ii on], I do not know whether he has passed, it is past. epasy no ABa, AB'fe [srazu pAdva, dvs], tivo at a time. The following simple examples are taken chiefly from Tolstoi's AsSyKa. Any adjectives not yet given in the vocabularies will be found in the Hst in Par. 237 and in the general vocabulary. 191 LESSON XLIX 151 Exercises Translate : A. (1) A-fea-b SbiJit CTapi. H cjiaSi., a BHyKi. MJiaA-L^H rjiyn-B. (2) GTajit HaniT. cajHT. rojit. (3) Cxaji-B nam-b neci> njioxi,. (4) Majib- qHK-b CbiJiTb pafl-b. (5) FpHS-b 6hmT> rnnji'b. (6) Owb SbiJi-b Tpy- cjiHB'b. (7) Gxaji-b 6uK'b aoji-b. (8) Owb n6cjiife Toro He fl6jiro SbijiT. rnHB-b. B. (1) Hrp^ SbiJia njiox^. (2) Go6aKa 6biji^ yMHa. (3) HsSd 6biJi^ He Majia. (4) Ba6a 6biJi^ pa^a. (5) Bo^a SbiJia ^Hcxa. (6) CTajia JioHKa nojina Bomi. (7) Jlnca ijia cpaay no rb^ ADbiuin, n CT^jia jKHpna. (8) Eh >KH3Hb Tpy^n^. (9) Kp^nKd KaK-b Kocxb. r C. (1) Ha Boa-fe 61J1J10 TSikjiKO. (2) Ha Bop^ Sijjio HiicTo. (3) Em^ cxajio CMibmno {he felt inclined to laugh). (4) Mwh JierK6 5x0 a^Jiaxb. (5) BbiJia rpoaa h rpoM-b.^ MajibHHK-b dHJi-b xpycb. On-b BJi-fes-b b-l niKani). TaMi. 6iiiJio cm^ xeMHo h a^mno. Em^ h6 6biJio cjibimno, npouiJia jih rposa. (6) TnibaAO ym6 Si^iJio nycxo. (7) Bee, hxo Haji;o. (8) Ab6ph Si^ijih x-fecHbi. (9) JIanKH ryceii 6i^ijih BHflHbi. (10) Majib^HKH cxajin mokph. (11) >KaJiKO 61J1J10. Proverbial Sayings X^AO XOM^, Kxo Ao6pa ne n-fejiaex-b hhkom^ [xMa tAmd, xto dAbrd na detAJat nikAmu], Woe he to him who does good to no man. }KH3Hb Aana na aoGpbm oi'fejia [sizfi dAnd iia dobrija data], Life was given us for good deeds. (j^aHT} is the predicative form of JtaHHbiii, passive past participle of juaxb. Such participles in anx*, ana, ano, anbi are very frequent.) CKyqeH-b nenb js,o B^^epa, kojiii A'fejiaxb H^qero [skiitjan de^ii dA v^tJarA, kAii dstAt n^tJavA], The day is long {weary, tedious) till evening, if there is nothing to do. y Bora Bcfe p^BHbi [u bogA fss ravm (rAvni)], Before Ood all are egual. . 1 =m6jioai. ^ rpoMT, rpewcATb [grom gtonilt], the thunder rolls. 152 LESSON L 192-195 LESSON L The Compaeative Degree 192. Tlie predicative form of the comparative degree of the adjective is formed by changing tift, ift, or oii into "fee. The short form 'feii is frequently used in poetry and popular speech. In most adjectives of more than two syllables the accent remains where it falls in the positive ; in words of only two syllables in the positive, the predicative comparative is accented on the ife. Examples : npflM6tt, npHM'fee [pr9m6i, pram6J9], upright, straight npiiiTHbitt, npiiiTH'fee [prijatni, prijdtiiaja], pleasant KpacHBbitt, Kpaci^B'fee [krAsivi, krAsivajo], beautiful ^MHBitt, yMHibe [umni, umn^ja], intelligent MOKpLift, MOKpie [mokri, mAkr^jo], damp, wet 193. A number of adjectives, mostly in frequent use, have the predicative comparative in -e. Many of these also modify the final consonant of the stem. A Hst of some of the forms in frequent use is given in Par. 238. 194. Than following the comparative is translated by H'feM'b [tSem] or He>KeJiH [nesali], e.g. Gbm-b j^MH-fee H-feMTj n6HKa [sin umn^ja tjgm dotJkA], Th son is more intelligent than the daughter. JKeji-feao nojiesHifee q'feM'b cepe6p6 [^bUza pA^znaja tjsm sorabro], Iron is more useful than silver. M6tt nplHTCjib ji^HUie H-twh A [m6i prijatai tdtja tjsm ja], My friend is better than I. Another way of using the comparative is to omit H'feM'b or HCJKejiH and substitute for the nominative the genitive case. The three examples might therefore have been written : GbiH-b yMH-fee HO^KH [dotjki]. JKcji'feao nojiesHifee cepe6pa [sarabrd]. Moii nplHTCJib Ji^^me MCHii. 195. When the comparative is attributive it is formed, as in EngHsh, by prefixing doji'fee [bolaje], more, to the positive, e.g. OoJiifee Hoporoii cxyjii) [bdiaja dArAgoI stut], a more expensive, a dearer, chair. 196-198 LESSON L 153 (a) As in English, a few words have exceptional forms, e.g. xop6mitt [xAroJi], good Ji^qmift [Mtji], better xyji6u [xudoi], bad x^^flmitt [xutji], worse MOJioaoft [mAtAdoi], young MJiaflmift [mtdtji], younger or junior CTapbifi [stdri], old CTapuiiii [starji], elder or senior BbicoKiii [visoki], high Biicmifi ^ [viji], higher HH3Kitt [niski], low Hiianiitt ^ [niji], lower MaJiMft [mati], little fM^Hbmift [rii^^nji], less or lesser iMCHbrnofi [m9nj6i], younger, youngest 6oJibm6tt [bA^ijo!], Zarae^ ^, ri^'iir-n ' -^r-i'i-i / Y 663ihUiiVi [ho}lh\ greater BCJiHKift [velikij, great J l j j> ./ 196. A few adjectives have a special form for the attributive superlative ending in -aHmin, -tlimiH, e.g. rJiySoKiii, deep rjiydoHaftmlii [gtubAtJdlJi] npocToii, simple npocT-feiimifi [prAst^iJi] cjiaSbiH, weak CJiaG-fefimitt [stAb^iJi] SoraTbiii, rich SoraT-fetiiniii [bAgAt6lJi] sajieKifi, distant, far ^ajibH-feiiniift [dA4n6lJi] KopoTKitt, short Kpaxq^fimift [krAtJaIJi] HdJirifi, kmg nojiJK^iimitt [dAtsaiJi] Kp-fenKitt, strong Kp-fenHaiimift [kraptjdlji] These words are absolute superlatives in meaning, as they correspond to the English very deep, very simple, etc. 197. The relative superlative, the form corresponding to the Eng- hsh adjective in -est, is expressed in various ways ; the most useful form is obtained by prefixing caMbifi to the positive (cf. Par. 186). This superlative is used both attributively and predicatively. 198. The three degrees of comparison of an adjective having all the forms, attributive and predicative, that have been mentioned, are therefore as follows : Attbibutive Form Predicative Form Positive Kp-feuKift CTOJI-b CTOJI-b Kp'fenOK'B Comparative Sdji-fee Kp-feuKift CTOJi'b ctojit, Kp-fenqe Superlative Kp-fenHaHiuifi CTOJi'b A CaMblft Kp-fenKifi CTOJi'b CTOJi'b C^Mblft Kp-feuKlft ') Qj]>f^ ^ These forms are not now so frequent as the regular forms with Sdnie. / 154 LESSON L s 198 Vocabulary edp-B, a, LI (oBt) [vor], thief paneHbifi [ranani], wounded CEHH^ix-B, Hi^a [svinets], lead {metal) Hopor6fi, Hop6jKe [dArAg6i,dAr659], CTOJiilua [stAiitsA], capital {city) dear, dearer CKapjiaxHHa [skArtAtinA], scarlet- meji^SHLiii [5oiszni], iron (adj.) fever 6pHTaHCKiH [britanski], British nepqaxKa, h, h (ok-b) [partJdtkA], HcnancKm [ispdnski], Spanish glove 3apa6aTbiBaTb [zArAbdtivAt], to earn Aop6ra [dArogA], road, way BopoBaxb (pyio, feuih) [vArAvdit], CTpana, ik, -^ti [strAnd], country to steal npnCbiJib, H, H [pribii], profit, MHt KaJKexcH [mns kdsatsA], it gain seems to me rnSejib, h, h [gibai], ruin A'fefiCTBHTejibHO [d8ls(t)vit9inA], njiomaffb, H, H (6h) [ptoJtJAt], really place, square 66jibnie Bcero [bo^ija fsavo], more 3HaHie, fl, fl (ift) [zndnja], knowledge than all, most Gor^TCTBO, a, a [bAgdts(t)vA], nanpoTHB-b {with gen.) [nAprotif], wealth opposite Exercises A. Translate : (1) HepHoe Kp6cjio, na KOxopoM'b bm chahtc, ropasao KpacHB-fee ^Toro cxyjia. (2) Bijibifi xji'fe6'b ne Bcer^a AopojKe qepnaro. (3) GaMoe 6ojibm6e saanie bt, nameM-b ropoAife caMan cxapan rtepKOBb, HO nocji-feaHHfl M^Hbine toh i^^pkbh, KOTopyio bm Biia-fejiH HanpoTHB-b CBoeii KBapTHpbi B-b cTOjnkixh. (4) yMniiiuiaH yqeHH^a HHKorAa He xoneT'b oTB-fenaTb, Korji;a ee cnparnHBaex-b ao^paa yHHxejibHHi^a. Ona yMHa, ho en cxapmiH dpax-b npnjiejKCH'b h ropasao BHHMaxejib- H-fee en. (5) P;^kh paHeHbix-b 6ifeji'fee q-feM-b KpoBaxn, na Koxopbn/b OHH jiejKaxTb. (6) HeyjKejiH ne Bcfe SHaioxT,, hxo xojiepa Coji-Be yjKacHafl Soji-fesHb H-hwh CKapjiaxiina? (7) GaMan xeMHaa KOMHaxa MH-fe HpaBHXCfl dojibme Bcero. (8) Mn-fe roBopHxi,, mo caMaa cxapan jKenmnna BHrnex-b caMbie Jiyqmie qyjiKH h nepnaxKH. (9) UoHemf Sorax-feHinie ^0Mib^:^HKH Bcer^a mejiaiox-b HM'fexb en;e 66jibme scmjih? (10) Mn-fe KaJKexcH, qxo HacxoHmiii aomtj ixapa BejiHKOJi'fenH'fee ^xoro rpoMaanaro ABopi^a, Koxopbiii xen6pb expoHX-b. (11) Xopom6, qxo caMbie xpyjtoJiK)6iiBbie Kpecxbane HHor^a sapaSaxbmaiox'b 66jibme. (12) Ohh nojiyqaiox-b caMyio SoJibmyio npnGbiJib. (13) npaB^a CB'fexji'fee cojiHLta. (14) SnaHie Jiyqmee 6oraxcxBO. (15) FIpaBaa nopojKe 36jioxa. (16) Bop-b Bop^ext He hjih npii6biJiH, a hjih cBo6fi rii6ejiH. 199-201 LESSON LI 155 B. Translate into Kussian : (1) In their letter they say that white bread is now dearer than black. (2) Perhaps your sister is younger than you. (3) In the majority of towns there are broad streets and narrow streets, and all the streets are narrower than the squares. (4) The largest village is more distant than your town. (5) I do not like that white paper that you sent me, it is too thin ; send me some thicker paper [partitive genit.]. (6) Of course, the railway [iron way] is shorter than the river. (7) It seems to me that the problem we are solving to-day is far easier. (8) In our country the evem'ng in summer is generally hotter than the morning. (9) The Russian language is, in my opinion, much harder than Spanish. (10) When I was living in that village, they told me that the old blacksmith was richer than all the hard-working peasants. (11) We thought that the light was brighter in the other room. (12) I thought that everybody knew that lead was heavier than iron, and also that iron was cheaper than lead. (13) I do not know whether the Russian Empire was really larger than the British Empire, but in the opinion of the Russians their empire was the largest of all. LESSON LI The Aspects of the Verb 199. The Russian verb has no special form for the conditional mood of other tongues : this is rendered by simply adding the particle 6bi [bi] to the past tense, e.g. Oh-l HM-fejiT) 6bi [on iriist bi], He would have. 200. Nor is there any special form for subjunctive or conjunctive : the past tense introduced by the conjunction ht66h [Jtobi], that, in order that, does duty for that mood, e.g. IJapb nocjiajit MHHHCxpa, qT66bi oHt KynHji-L caATb My>KHKa [tsa^r pAstdt ihinistrA, jtobi on kupit sat mu3ikd]. The czar sent his minister, that he might buy the peasant^ s garden. 201. In order to express modifications in the meaning of verbs some languages have elaborate systems of moods and tenses : this is characteristic of Greek, Latin, and the Romance tongues. Other languages achieve the same end by the facihty with which they combine, in an almost endless variety, infinitive and participles with auxihary and modal auxihary verbs : Enghsh and German 156 LESSON LI 202-204 are two sucli tongues. The Russian verb lias but tbree moods : infinitive, imperative, indicative ; and of these only the indicative appears in different tenses ; it has the three tenses that have been discussed. The Russian verb possesses only to a very Hmited extent the power of forming compound tenses. Yet, lacking the character- istic features of both the French and the Enghsh verb, the Russian verb is one of the subtlest instruments of expression, as the want of variety in mood and tense is more than compensated for by the modifications introduced by the use of numerous prefixes and by transformations of the stem itself. 202. One form of the verb indicates merely that the action was going on, is going on, or will be going on, without any reference to its beginning or end, without affording any information as to its completion. In this form, which is called the imperfective aspect, the action is thought of only as a duration. Most, not all, simple verbs, i.e. verbs not compounded with a prefix, are imperfective. All the verbs under A, in Paragraph 121, are examples of this aspect, which therefore, in the indicative mood, has three tenses : past, present, future. 203. Another form of the verb expresses the action from the point of view of its completion : it indicates that something happened once and was done with, or that something is about to be begun and completed. This form of the verb is called the perfective aspect. All the verbs under B, in Paragraph 122, are examples of this aspect. Now, as an action cannot at one and the same time be conceived as perfected and as still going on, this aspect has no present tense ; it has only two tenses : past and future. 204. For foreigners the chief pecuharity of this perfective aspect is, that the future tense has exactly the appearance of a present tense.^ That is to say, all the verbs under B, in Paragraph 122, have a tense with the inflexions of a present tense and the meaning of an immediate future. A mistake that must be carefully avoided, is to form the future of the perfective aspect on the model of the imperfective future. ^ The verbs given in Par. 160 are examples of this perfective future. 206-206 LESSON LI 157 205. The complete scheme of the verb in the infinitive, indicative, and imperative, is therefore as follows : Impebfbotive Aspect Perfective Aspect Infinitive HHCdTb, to loritey to he busied with Hannc^Tb, to turite once, to start writing writing and get it finish^ Indicative Past ^ fl nHC^JiT*, / vrrotey I was writing, h nannc^Ji'L, I wrote once, I Jiave I was occupied in writing, written on a definite occasion, I buried myself with ivriting I have completed the writing Indicative Present H niim^, I write, I do write, I am None ^*'*^ Indicative Future fl ^fjiy HHC^TB, / shall write, I shall H nannm^, / shall write now or soon, busy myself with writing I shall get the writing started and Imperative nnm^xe, write, make it your practice Hannm^TC, write now, write something to write, be busied with writing definite on a definite occasion, write and get it finished 206. In the hst of verbs given mider A, in Paragraph 121, it will be observed that each word is accompanied by a prefix enclosed in brackets, or by one of the signs (1), *, or (2). a. Verbs marked (2) have no separate form for the perfective aspect, are not used as perfective veits, or undergo a real change of meaning in the so-called perfective. 6. * indicates a verb whose perfective aspect is expressed by the use of a different root, e.g. roBop6TB,2 cKasdTb, to say. c. (1 ) indicates a verb whose perfective is derived by modifying the form, often the length, of the stem or by changing the termination ; e.g. cnp^mHBaTb, cnpocHTb,^ to ask, P'femdTb, p-feniHTb, to resolve. In this class of words the perfective is frequently a simpler form than the imperfective, the latter being derived from the former. ^ These Past Tenses also render our / have or had written. ^ roBopttTi.=^MaTb [zAdiiinAt], to propose to oneself All the verbs given under * other compounds ' are perfective verbs in virtue of the fact that they are simple verbs compounded with prefixes, and corresponding imperfective forms are made from most of them on a system which is explained in Paragraph 232. Note. There is, however, a class of verbs of which xoahtb and HTTH (for the distinction see Paragraph 40) may be taken as the type. These words occur in two forms, each form having both imperfective and perfective aspects. xoflHTb is called the indefinite, potential, or abstract form of the word, and htth the definite, actual, or concrete form. In verbs belonging to this category the com- pounds of the indefinite verb are all imperfective and the com- pounds of the definite verb are perfective. (See Voc. LII (4) ; LIV (5) ; LV (5) ; LVI (4).) Such verbs are : (no)6^raTb (aio) and (no)6'fejKaTb, to run (no)BOj];HTb (jk;^, 6AHmb) (no)BecTH, to lead (no)B03HTb (jk^, 63Hmb) (no)Be3TH, to convey (no)roHHTb (>iK)) (no)rHaTb, to drive, persecute (no)jieTaTb (aio) (no)jieTibTb (nf, ernmb), to fly (no)HOCHTb (m^, 6cHMb) (no)HecTii, to carry (no)njiaBaTb (aio) 3 (no)njibiTb (hiBf, enib), to swim, float (no)'fe3ji;HTb ('fe3}Ky, ^anuib) (no)'fexaTb, to drive, ride, travel 209. Onty a few exercises on the use of the aspects are given, but before undertaking these exercises it will be useful to read carefully the following passages, observing, in the light of Pars. 199-208, in which aspect each verb appears. New words occurring in these passages are given in the vocabulary, but as the purpose in printing them here is solely to illustrate the distinction between the imperfective and the perfective, a close translation of each passage is given : the English version is, for our present purpose, as important as the Kussian. 160 LESSON LI 209 1 {Perfective Verbs are in Italics) Jld^Ka 6liji^ roT6Ba. H crbjih bt> nee cl JteyMii rpeSi^aMH. Ohh omndjiujiu u yddpujiu Bt Becjia. H660 6iijio HCHO. Jlyna cinjia. nor6Ha 6wji^ THxan. Bojira Hecjiacb poBHo h cnoKofino. JIojtKa cKOJibSHJia no noB^pxHocxH TeMnLix-L BOJiHt. npouuio OKOJio nojiy^aca. Mh docmdzAii cpe- fliiHbi p-feKii. Bjipyr-L rpeSi^iii HdHCUiu inenxaTtcH M^JK^y co66k). Hto TaK6e? cnpocujih h. He SHaeMTj. FpeSuii CMOTp'fejiH B-B onuf CTopoHy. Fjiaaa MOii npduAjiu T6/Ke HanpaBJi^Hie, h h yeudrnjih b-b cyMpaK-fe ht6-to. HesnaKOMbift npen- M^TT. njibijn> BHHS-b no Bojirib. npnSjiHJKajicfl. Jlyna aaiu/id 3a 66jiaKO. IIjibiB^mift npnapaK-b cdrbJicuicR e^^e TCMn-fee. Oh-b 6biji'b oil, Menfl yjKc 6jih3ko, a h Bce eme ne Mor-b ero pasAUHumh. Bapyr-b Jiyna ei^iiujia H3b-3a 66jiaKa, h osapd/ia 3p'fejiHme ymacnoe. K-b naivi-b naBCTp-fe^y njibijia BHcfejini^a, ymeep^HcdeHHaa na njioxy. Tpn T^jia BHcfejiH na nepeKJiannnife. Boji'fe3nennoe JiioSonbiTCTBo OBAadrbJio Mnoio. H aaxomfbAh ese/iHH^mb na JiHLta Biic'fejibHHKOB'b. KannxancKaH J];6qKa, n^mKHn-b. {Perfective Verbs are in Italics) BojibuiaH, BbicoKan, TeMnaa 34jia, ocerhii^eHHaR TOjibKO Hexbipbiviii lijiH nflxbib CB'feHaMH, ch KOxopbiMH AOKXopa noAXOAHjiH ocMaxpHBaxb p^nenbix-b, 6hijik SynBajibno nojina. HociijibmnKH desnpecxanno BHOCHJiH panenbix-b, cKJia^biBajin hxx> ojiMWh n6ji;ji'fe npyroro na noji-b, na KOxdpoM-b ym6 6biJio xaKX) x^cno, qxo necnacxnbie xojiKajincb H MOKnyjiH B-b KpoBH Apyr'b apyra, n mjin sa noBbiMH. Gecxpbi, co cnoKOHHbiMH JiHitaMH H cb BbipaH^^HicMx. A-fenxcjibHaro npaKxii- qecKaro yqacxin, xo xaMb, xo chmt* MCJibKajin uemjiy panenbiMH. J^OKxopa, Cb sacyneHHUMU pynaBaMH, ocMaxpHBajin, onj^nbmajiH H 3onfl6poBajiH panbi, necMoxpn na yjKacHbie cxonbi cxpasajibLteB-b. Oflnn-b H3'b AOKxopoB-b cHfl-fejib 6kojio HBepn 3a cxojiHKOMb, n B-b xy MHn^xy, nan-b bt* KOMnaxy eoiuejib o^nnep-b, 3anHCbiBaji'b yjK6 532. GeBacx6nojibCKie Pa3CKa3bi, ToJicx6ft. 209 LESSON LI 161 Translation The boat was ready. I embarked (seated myself into it) with two boatmen . They cast off and set to work (struck away) at the oars. The sky was clear (bright). The moon shone. The weather was calm. The Volga flowed smoothly and quietly along. The boat glided over the surface of the dark waves. About half-an-hour elapsed. We had reached the middle of the river. Suddenly the oarsmen began to whisper to each other (among themselves). " What is that ? " I asked. " We do not know." The oarsmen were looking in a certain direction (to one side). My eyes took the same direction, and I caught sight in the gloom of something or other. The unknown object was floating down the Volga. It was approaching. The moon went behind a cloud. The floating apparition became still darker. It was already close to me, but I was still unable to make it out. Suddenly the moon shone out from behind the cloud, and illumined a terrible spectacle. The thing that was floating along to meet us was a gallows /os^ericd to a raft. Three bodies were hanging from the crossbeam. A morbid curiosity mastered me. I was seized with the desire to look upon the faces of the dead men (hanged men). The Captain's Daughter, Pushkin. Translation The great, high, dark hall lighted only by the four or five candles, by the aid of which the doctors were stepping up to examine the wounded, was literally full. Stretcher-bearers were continually bringing in wounded men ; they laid them down one beside the other on the floor, on which they were already so closely packed that the unfortunate men were roUing up against each other and weltering (being drenched) in each other's blood ; [then] they would go for more. The nurses, with unruffled countenance and an expres- sion of active practical sympathy, flitted hither and thither among the wounded. The doctors, with sleeves turned up, examined, palpated, probed the wounds, in spite of the awful groans of the sufferers. One of the doctors was sitting near the door at a little table and at the moment when the officer came into the room he was already entering number 532. Tales of Sebastopol, Tolstoi. L 162 LESSON LI 209 3 {Perfective Verbs are in Italics) Ilocji^uiaii, cji-fendtil cKasd/ih oh'l: depern to m^^cto . . . SHaeuib? THM-B CoraTbie TOBapLi . . . cnaofcd xosHnny, hto h eM^ 66jibme ne cjiyr^ . J^ifejia nouiJiu xyflo , oht, Menii 66 Jibuie ne yeudumh : Tenepb onacHo: nomdy HCKaxb paSoTbi B-b npyroM-b M-fecx-fe; xaM-b a 6^y }Kji;aTb y^oSnaro cjiyqaa. fla ckq^hcil, ecjinS-b ohT) nojiynme njiaTHJi-b 3a Tpyabi, xan-b u h 6bi ero ne noKunyjih. Ona noihdemh CO MHOK); em nejibSH s^-fecb ocxaBaTbCH. A fli cKaadjih cji-fenott >Kajio6HbiM'b rojiocoM-b. On-b HTo-TO nojiooicuAh cjiifenoMy B-b pyny, npuMOJieueh: Ha, Kynd ceG-fe npHHHK0B'b. TojibKo? cnasdAh cji-fenott. Hy, botT) Te6^ eme, h yndemaR MOHexa saaeenrbjia, y^apacb o KaMCHb^. Cji-fenoii eii ne noduRjih. Ohh cm/iu B-b jiojuKy; Bibxepi. ayji-b ox-b 6epera; ohh Si^icxpo noHecjidcb. ^ojiro npn cB-fex-fe whcRixa. MCJib- KaJiX) S-fejibiH napycx> M^H^^y bojihT); cji-feHoii Bce CHflibji-b na 6eper^ H HJiaKaji-b, H AOJiro sojiro. ^ , , FepoH Hamero BpeMenn [slightly altered], JlepMOHTOBT>. 4 {Perfective Verbs are in Italics) TeMa q^BCXBOBaji-b ce6A OKonqaxejibHo cddmuMh cb noaJiuiH: K6pnycT>, eme xaKT> neaaBHO KasaBinittcH a^JioM-b pmiueHHbiMh, omodeuHyjicH Kyaa-xo najieKO-aajieKo . Tbi Korjia, TeMa, nomdeuibl cnpocuAa Haxama, Bxopan cecxpa, cxapaacb cnpumh BOJinoBaBiniH ee nyBCXBa nosx> MacKoft npocxoro jiio6onbixcxBa. TeMa sazjiRHyAh B-b rjiasa cecxpiJi. HHityna fl ne nomdy, omerhmujih ohx>, eadoxHijeh, h ecmaeh, HanpdeujiCR bx. Ka6HH6xx.. TaMx> OHX) marajix> bx> coananiH npuHeceuHou hmx> jKepxBM. M6>KexX)-6bixb, hjih jKepxBbi ero BHnx> 6bmx> cjihuikomx. cnoK6eHx>, HO xifeMx> He MCH-fee ^xo He M-femajio eMy cnnxaxb ce6H JKepxBoii, h eMy' Kasajiocb, hxo ohx> cpaay xohho eiiipoch na nibcKOJibKO Ji'fexx>. Ohx> ^626 Ha HHBaHXj, sajiootcujih 3a rojioBy py^KH h aad^MQAca. o xoMx>, Hxo jKH3Hb He xaKafl npocxan h JierKaa Ben^b, KaKoii ona Kamexcfl no napyjKHOMy BHuy. TaKx> H ycH^jih, ny^Man Bce o xomt> JKe. CeMefiHaa XpoHHKa, v> FapHHTj. 1 o= against governs the accusative. 209 LESSON LI 163 8 Translation " Listen, blind boy," he said ; " keep a watch on that place. You know ? There is great wealth (are rich wares) there. Tell the master that I am no longer his servant. Things have turned out (gone) badly, he wonH see me any more ; it's dangerous now. I am going to seek work in another place. There I shall await a convenient opportunity. And tell him, if he had paid me better for my labour, I should not have left him in the lurch. She is going to go with me ; it is impossible for her to remain here." " And what about me ? " said the blind boy in a piteous voice. He put something in the blind boy's hand, adding {having said) as he did so, " There, buy yourself some spice-buns." " That's all ? " said the blind boy. " Well, there is something more for you," and a falling {fallen) coin tinkled as it struck (striking) the stone. The blind boy did not pick it up. They took their places in the boat ; the wind was blowing off the shore and they ivere swiftly carried away. For a long time the white sail in the midst of the waves shimmered in the light of the moon ; the blind boy still continued sitting on the shore and wept and wept. A Hero of Modern Times ^ Lbrmontof. 4 Translation Timothy felt himself driven once for all from his position \i.e. felt that he had no ground left to stand upon] ; [his entrance into] the corps [of officers], which, such a short time before, had appeared a settled thing, had [now] receded to a point (somewhere) far, far away. " When are you to set off, Timothy ? " asked Natalia, his second sister, trying to con^ceal the emotions that agitated her under the mask of mere curiosity. Timothy looked into his sister's eyes. "I am not going anywhere," he answered with a sigh {having sighed) and getting up {having stood up), he betook himself to his room. There he strode up and down in the consciousness of the sacrifice he had made (that had been made by him). Perhaps, for a victim, his aspect was too calm, but nevertheless that did not prevent him from regarding himself as a victim, and it seemed to him that he had, as it were, grown older all at once by several years. He lay down on the sofa, put his hands behind his head, and gave himself up to musing on the fact that life was not such a simple, easy thing as it seemed on a superficial view. And thus, still thinking over that fact, befell asleep. Family Chronicle, Garin. 164 LESSON LII 210-212 LESSON LII The Imperative 210. As indicated in Paragraph 205, both the imperfective and the perfective aspects have an imperative mood, formed in the im- perfective from the present and in the perfective from the future tense. The 2nd singular ends in -li, -h or -h ; the 2nd plm-al ends in -Hie, -HTe, -LTe. 211. I. When the termination of the 2nd singular is preceded by a vowel, change the termination into -ft and -ftxe, e.g. CH-fejiaemb cfeemb CTapaemBCfl CA^jiatt [sdetA!], do cfeft [s6i], sow cxapaftcb [stArdis], try Cfl'fejiaHTe [sdetAlta] cibftre [s6lt9] cxapaiiTecb [stAraltas] (a) The verbs in Par. 162 change the h which follows the initial consonant into e, e.g. nbemb n6ft [p61], drink nefixe [p^Ita] (6) The verb HaTb, which is very irregular in the future tense, has JXSlPl [dai], flattTe [daita] (cf. Par. 231). 212. II. When the termination of the 2nd singular is preceded by a consonant : A. If the termination is accented in the 1st singular,^ change the termination of the 2nd singular into H and Hxe, e.g. necf CKajK^ xomf Hecemb CKajKcmb x6ji;Hmb HecH [nasi], carry CKSimA [skA3i], say, tell xoAti [xAdi], go HCCHTC [nasita] CKamAxe [skA3it8] xouhxc [xAdita] jiio6jii5 y^f jubSnmb ynnmb JI1066 [iubi], love ynik [utjf], teach (learn) jiK)6Axe [iubita] yq^xe [utjita] ^ The accentuation of the 1st sing. pres. is generally that of the infinitive* 2ia-2i6 LESSON LII 165 B. If the stem is accented in the 1st singular, change the termina- tion of the 2nd singular into h and bxe ; e.g. BJiibsy njia^y G^sy (future) Bji-feaemfa njianemt dyaemb BJi-fesb [vie^s], climh njia^b [ptatj], weep 6yAb [bu^t], be BJi-fesbTC [vksta] njiaHbTC [ptatjta] O^Abxe [bd^ta] C. If two consonants precede the termination, then, irrespective of where the accent faUs, change the termination into H and Hxe ; e.g. KpiiKHy [kriknu] M^ajiH) [lii^dlu] nyni^ [pujtjd] KpiiKHcmb [kriknaj] M^AJinmb [ih^diij] n^CTHmb [ptistij] KpiiKHH [krikni], cry out MCflJiH [ihedii], hesitate nycTH [pustl], let KpiaKHHxe [krflinita] m^ajihtc [rii^dlite] nycTHTe [pustita] 213. The verb jichb has Jifln> ^ [lak], Jiarxe [iakta], lie down. -fecTB tmb[jeS],'fjmbTe[jeSt8],ea^. (Cf.Par.220.) 214. The first plural of the future perfective may be used without a subject as the equivalent for let us do etc. ; e.g. Gfl'fejiaeM'L TO, HTO oht. naM-b BejiHTi> [sdstAJam to, Jto on nam valit]. Let us do what he orders us (dat.) to do. 215. The imperative nycKaft [puskai] of nycKaxb, to allow^ or the form nycxb [pu^st] is used with the 3rd sing, or plur. of the present imperfective or future perfective as 3rd sing, or plur. imperative ; e.g. nycKaii on-b npoHAeT-b ca^-b [puskdi on prAidot sat], Let him go through the garden. 216. Many salutations and other frequently used expressions are imperatives ; e.g. sjtpaBCTByiiTe [zdras(tvul)t8], good day, how are you? is really the imperative derived from the present SApaBCXByK), euib etc. of the verb SflpaBCXBoeaxb, and means hail I he of good health ! npon;aftTel [prAJtJalta], farewell ! (no CBHsanifl [dA sviddnja], au revoir) and npocTATcI [prAstite], pardon me/ are respectively the imperfective and perfective imperative of npomaxb, npocxnxb. CMOTpHTel [smAtrita], look out/ H3BHHiiTeI [izvinita], excuse me/ nomaJiyHl [pA3dtui], after all, as far as I am concerned, may be; nojKajiyftCTal [pA3dt(ui)stA], please. ^ The only imperative ending in i. 166 LESSON LII 217-218 217. The imperfective imperative is a general command ; the perfective imperative is an indication that something is to be done now, at once. In negative commands the imperfective form is generally used. 218. The infinitive is often used instead of the imperative in general commands or prohibitions, e.g. He BCxaBaTbl [na fstAva^t], Do not stand up! He roBopHTbl [na gAVArit], No speaking ! Vocabulary (1) Perfective formed with prefix (no)6oiiTbCfl (lb, nmb) [(pA)bAJa^tsA], to fear JjKeHb (JKry,i jKJKeuib, JKryT-B) [setj], to hum \c>Keqb (coJKr^) [ssetj] (noji;o)>KAaTb (y^, emb) [(pAdA)5da^t], to wait, await (2) Imperfective in axb, perfective in HTb rnojiyqaTb I A [pAtutJait], to receive InojiyMHTb (qy, ^qnmb) [pAtutjit] fnocTynaTb I A [pAstupd^t], to act, behave \nocTynHTb (njiib, ^nnmb) [pAstupit] JnycKaxb I A [puskd^t], to let, allow, admit \nycTiiTb {m^, ^CTHmb) [pustit] (npomaxb I A [prAjtJd^t], to remit, pardon npocTHTb {u\f, CTiimb) [prAstit] (3) Imperfective long : perfective short. (In this group many of the imperfectives, especially those in eaxb, are verbs indicating the repeated or continuous occurrence of the act, and are derived from the perfective verb, which is itself a compound of a simple verb. Cf. Par. 232.) rnoKasbiBaTb I A [pAkdzivAt], to show \n0Ka3aTb (my, aJKcmb) [pAkAzd^t] /BCxaBaTb (Bcxaib, euib) [fstAvd^t], to stand up, get up, rise ^BCTaxb (any, emb) [fstait] r oai^BaTbCH I A [Adavd^tsA], to clothe oneself, dress [oji^ThCH. (^Hycb, embcfl) [Ad^^tsA] Jpaan'feBaTbCfl I A [rAzdavd^tsA], to undress \pa3jtibTbCH [rAzd6^tsA] {yMbiBaxbca I A [umivd^tsA], to wash {oneself) yMi^iTbCfl (oH), emb) [umitsA] ^ Imperative mm, mrHxe. 218 LESSON LII 167 (4) Imperfective and perfective from different roots or from different forms of cognate stems /npoxoaHTb (mfy OAHUib) [prAXAdit], to traverse \npofiTH (nf, euib) [prAiti] f npHHOCHTB (m^, ocHUib) [pririAsit], to bring \npHHecTli (c;^, enib) [prinasti] (Cf. note to Par. 208.) T6jibK0 qxo [to^ikA |to], just (with o chx-l nopi. [dAsixpor] {up to past tenses) these times), till now nopa cj^'fejiaxb (perf.) 5x0 [pArd Cb T-fex-b nopi. [stexpor] {since those sdstAt stA], it is time to do that times), since then nopa, ik, -^y, -^u [pAra], time Proverbial Sayings KfA (from KOBaxb) JKeji-feao, noKa ropHqo, Strike the iron while ifs hot. yeaJKatt cxapHKa, caMX. 6fji,emh cxapx.. Honour {esteem) the aged {man), you will be old yourself B-feKX) JKHBii, B'feK'b yqilCb, Live a life-time {an age), learn a life-time, i.e. it's never too late to learn, Beperii KoneeqKy npo nepHbiii nenb, Save the farthing for a rainy day. J1io6h 6jiiiJKHHro, KaKX> caMor6 ce6fl, Love thy neighbour as thyself He MOJiH Ji'fexa aojiraro, mojih xenjiaro, Don't pray for a long summer, pray for a warm one. . rr, T ^ Exercises A. Translate : I. ji-fejiaiixe, cfeflxe, cxapaiixecb, aaBaft, cjiy^maftxe, cxott, cxpottxe, nycKatt, npomaiixe, sjipaBcxByiixe, HM'fettxe, ne 66iixecb, noJKa- Jiyiicxa, play, answer, work, ask questions, read, build, continue, laugh, do not blush, dress, undress, let, farewell, sing, wash, behave. {a) n6iixe, Ji^iixe, beat, wind, sew. II. {a) HecH, CKajKHxe, cnpocHxe, xoanxe, n^iixe, yniixecb, speak, show, sleep, sit down, pardon me, live, seek, write, look, inquire, plough, act {perf), bring. (6) BJi^3bxe, njia^b, Bcxanb, eat, sit down, dress, (c) Kp^KHHxe, MeJiHxe, let, press, reap, wait, burn. III. cA-fejiaeMX), noHeceMX>, sanjiaqeMX., KpliKHeMX>, let us sow, let us listen, stand, build, play, go, live, look, wait, write, burn, dress, wash. B. Translate : (1) IIpHHeciixe MH-fe, noH^ajiyHcxa, 5xy H6ByK) p^ccKyio KHHryl (2) npHHOCHXe MH'fe OKCflH^BHO Xexpa^H CXapmHXX> yHCHHKOB'bl 168 LESSON LIII 219 (3) JIojKHxecb cnaTb Ka>Kflbiii BdHep-b b-l ceMb Hacoetl (4) Ilopa UTTik cnaTbl Pasfl^Hbxecb, M^jib^HKH, h siAne cnaxbl (5) niiuiH M^flJieHHO H npaBHJibHoI (6) HanniiTHTe to, ^to h BaM-B CKam;^I (7) GMOTpHxel (8) nocMOTpHxe to, hto OHii fl-fejiaioT-b Tenepbl (9) He roBopi'iTe 6ft o tom-b, ^to h BaMi> TOJibKo hto paacKasajiTiI (10) He a-fejiafixe ^Torol (11) He oTB-fenattTe Ha dTOTTb Bonpocbl (12) nycKdii OHa CA-fejiaeT-b, KaK-b ona JKejiaeTi,! (13) IlycTb ohh noPLjxfT-h Tenepb b-b uiKdjiyl (14) Bcer^a cjiymafiTe to, hto roBO- p^T-b yqiiTejibI (15) Y^HTejib roBopHTi. xen^pb; nocjiymaHTC erol C. Translate into Russian : (1) Stand up at once. (2) Always sit on this chair, please. (3) Don't do that. (4) Let him receive the money. (5) Read this paper quickly. (6) Read aloud at home. (7) Let us have a look ^ at what is going on out of doors. (8) Show me, please, what you are holding in your hand. (9) Do not eat so quickly. (10) Halt [stand]. (11) Get up early in the morning, wash, dress, and go to school ; do [act] so every day. (12) It is time to get up, boys. Get up, wash, dress, and go to school. (13) Let them live here. LESSON LIII 219. Declension of BpeMfl, time. Sing. Plur. nom. Bp^MH [vr^riiA] BpcMCH^ [vrariian^] gen. CHH [vr6m9m] CH'b [vraihon] dat. CHH [vr^marii] enaM-b [vraiiiondm] ace. H [vr^iiiA] ena [vraihana] instr. CHCM'b [vf^ihenam] enaMH [vramondmi] prep. CHH [vr6m8iii] enax-b [vramandx] There is a small group of nouns, all neuters, of this form. The most frequently used of them are : 6peMfl [br^riiA], burden Amh [iihA], name 3HaMfl (sHaMCHa) [zndriiA], banner nJiCMH [pierfiA], tribe njiaMfl [ptdriiA], flame CTp^MH [str6mA], stirrup cfeMH [s6mA], seed ^ Perfective of cMOTp^Tb. 220-224 LESSON LIII 169 220. The verb -fecTb, noicTL [jest, pAJest], to eat, is irregular. The present tense is ^Mt, 'fenib, 'fecT'L [jsm, jej, jsst], ImAwby lixe, AtTj [jedim, jedita, jaddt] The imperative is 'feuib, i^iULTe [jeJ, jejta]. 221. (no)'fexaTb, to drive or ride, has in the present "637, -^euib [jedu], and only one form in the imperative, no'fesjKaii, afixe [pAJQsai]. 222. Present tense of xoT'tib [xAte^t], to wish; perfective BaxoTiTb [zAXAte^t], to conceive a wish or desire : XOHf [XAtJli] XOTHMt [xAtim] xo^emb [xdtjaj] xoxiiTe [xAtita] xo^eTT. [xotjat] xothtt* [xAtat] 223. (1) The conditional in Russian is formed by adding the particle 6h to the past tense, e.g. Oht. npociiJn> 6m [on prAsit bi], He would ask or he would have asked. If the condition is unfulfilled, this form of the verb is used in both parts of a conditional sentence, e.g. H 6bi HanHC^Ji-B cm^, 6cjih 6bi h snajit ^to [ja bi iiApisat jamti, j6sii bi ja znat stA], / should write {have written) to him, if I knew [had knoum) that. With ecjiH or qxo, 6u often becomes 6t> : ecjiH 61., htoSt,. (2) If the present tense is used in EngHsh in the conditional clause, there is still a chance of the condition being fulfilled or if may have the force of whenever ; and in Russian the present and future tenses without 6hi are used, e.g. JScjih Bbi SyACTe roBopiiTb cb HHM-b, CKamiiTe cm^, etc. [j^sii vi budate gAVAiit siiim, skA3it8 jemii], If you speak with him, tell him, etc. H B-fepio CM^, 6cJiH OHT. MH-fe THK^ roBop^T'b [JQ v6ru jamu, j6sii on mns tak gAVArit], / believe him (dat.), if he speaks to me so. 224. (1) With xoxixb when only one person or group of persons is involved, the construction is the same as in Engfish, e.g. H XOH^ (c)xi;'fejiaTb [ja xAtJd (s)d8tAt], / wish to do. (2) If there are two persons or groups of persons involved, the Russian does not say I wish you to do but / wish that you did or I wish that you should do : H xo^f, ht6 ^h Bbi CA-fejiajiH [ja xAtJii, Jto bi vi sd^tAli], This is the construction to use with other verbs of requesting. 170 LESSON LIII 224 Vocabulary (Where no special indication of genitive case, etc. is given, it is to be understood that the oblique cases of the noun in question are regularly derived and that there is no change of accent.) Bon> [box], God cxap^niKa [stAriijkA], old woman BojKel [bosa], God/ Jionaxa [lApatA], spade ^paHi^^ST) [frAntsiis], Frenchman CTapHHa [stArina], former days, days KJiaST) [ktad (t)], treasure of old HaxoAKa [nAxotkA], a find, treasure- 6iiiJib [bii], true story trove HTO-HH6y3L [jto-nibu^t], something or other CB'feTJioe BocKpec^HLe [svsttAJa vAskres^njg], Easter Sunday {Bright day of Resurrection) Heqero [ni^T'i. nnqero, Hero] [n^tJavA], {there is) nothing of which HCH'feM'B [H-fexi* HH^ero, H-feMT*] [n^tjam], {there is) nothing with which Verbs (1) Perfective formed by use of prefix {HTTH {ujif, euib) [iti], to go {on foot) noHTii (noiiay) [pAiti] (no)piJiTb (oK), eiub) [(pA)rit], to dig (no)npocHTb (m^, ochuib) [(pA)prAsit], to request, beseech (no)MOJiHTbCH (locb, -HUibCfl) [(pA)mAiitsA], to pray, say one* s prayers /(no)njiaKaTb (a^y, euib) [(pA)ptakAt], to weep, lament, bewail \(3a)njiaKaTb ^ [(zA)ptakA.t], to weep, start weeping (o6)paaoBaTbCH (paayiocb, embcn) [(Ab)radAVAtsA], to rejoice (2) Imperfective lon^ perfective short {see Par. 232) / JnoMoraxb I A [pAmAga^t], to help, assist \noM6Hb (like Mory, Par. 168) [pAmotj], {dat. of person) fsapbiBaxb I A [zArivd^t], to bury \3ap1iiTb (6k), euib) [zATit] TnocbiJiaTb I A [pAsitd^t], to send \nocjiaTb (niJiio, euib) [pAstd^t] /BcnoMHHaTb I A [fspAriiind^t], to remember ^BcnoMHHTb (k), Hinb) [fspomnit] fnoKynaxb I A [pAkupd^t], to buy \KyniiTb (njiib, fnmuih) [kupit] . . (3) fpasroBJiiiTbCfl I A [rAzgAvid^tsA], to eat meat for the first time after a fast \pa3roB^TbCH (-feiocb, ^eiiibCfl) [rAzgAv6^tsA] ^ Perfectives formed with the prefix aa are mostly inchoatives, i.e. they indicate the beginning of an action. ; t>bsjt>tCe^ C<^^.^*^^ /Ky, euib) [skAzd^t], to say, tell (Gpaxb (6epfy enib) [bra^t], to take \B3flTb (B03bM^, euib) [v:ia^t] Exercises A. Translate: ^^^^^ B-b OAHofi Aep^BH-fe WHJia cxap^uiKa co (cb) BH^qKoft. OH-fe 6i[JiH oqcHb 6feHbi, H i^CTb HMT, 6iijio H^qero. rXpHiiiJio CB-feTJioe BocKpec^Hbe. Hapda-b pa^yeTCH. Bcfe KyniijiH ce6^ paaroB-feTbCH, xdjibKo cTap^uiK'fe CO BH^qKOH H^qi^MT. paaroB-fexbCH. IIonjiaKajiH OH^ H cTajiH B6ra npocnxb, qxodx. On-b hmx. noMdrx.. H Bcn6MHHJia cxapy^uiKa, qxo bt> cxapHHy^, bo bp6mh $paHi;^3a, MyjKHK^ A^Hbrn Bx> a^MjiK) sapbiBajiH. Cxap^xa h roBopiix-b BH^qK'fe: BosbMli (xh), BH^qKa, Jionaxy h HAii na cx^poe ceji6, noMOJi6cb Bory, Ha nop6tt Bx, acMJii: M6>Kexx. 6bixb, Borx> HaMx> h nonijiex-b wro-uvL6fji,h. Tojicx6ii (a) Pboverbial Sayings He p6tt Apyr6My HMy, caMX> bx> nee nonaAeiub, DonH dig a pit for another y you may fall into it yourself. Hxo nocfeemb, xo h noJKHeuib, WJmt you sow^ that also shall you reap. Oxx> xyji;6ro c^mchh He >kah A66paro njieMCHH, From had seed do not expect a good stock. Kxo pa66xaexx>, xom^ Bori. noMor^exX), Who worksy him Ood helps, B. Translate into Kussian : (1) Do you know that they are digging ? Always let him dig here. Dig now. We shall dig at once. You will be digging (this) afternoon. She has just dug. She was digging. She would dig if she had a spade. Her mother wants her to dig. (2) Why will she be crying ? Why will she lament ? Why will she begin to cry ? Do not cry. She bewailed her misfortune. She would have started to cry, if they had taken her father away. We do not want her to cry. (3) Go home at once. Do you not know that she has gone already ? I am going home now. I shall go home now. I should go to the village, if my mother told me that (there was) a treasure there. (4) The old woman would have been glad, if God had sent her a treasure. * The perfective noroBopiiTi. must be used when the verb corresponds to to speak. 172 LESSON LIV 226-227 (5) She says her prayers every morning. Has she said her prayers this morning ? No, she is going to say her prayers now. Every day say your prayers night and morning. (6) Who usually helped the poor girl to do her work ? We often help her. You are going to help her now. Surely you did [neyjK^JiH . . . He] help her. She wants me to help them. I should be glad if you helped them. (7) Send us a lot of those pretty flowers every week. Send her the flowers now. I should have sent them, if I had got to know that she liked flowers. (8) I generally buy my books of [y] that man, but to-day I am going to buy what I need [what to me (is) necessary] of my friend. Surely you have not bought yours already ? I should have bought them, if I had had any money. I want you to buy your books here. (9) She'll tell you what we are talking about. Speak with him about it and tell him what you think of the matter. I should speak to him about it, if I knew where he lived [hves]. I want to tell you something. (10) Take this pen and paper. We'll take them now. He is always taking what does not belong to him. You would have taken the money, if it belonged to them. (11) Do not eat that meat. (12) He will drive to church. Drive home. C. Translate into Russian : Before [js,o with genitive] that time I did not know that peasants in that district buried their treasure in the earth, but at Easter, when the others were buying food for the feast, we prayed to God that He might send us something, 80 that we too might have food and clothes. I took a spade and went into the old village ; I asked God to help me and started to dig in the damp earth. LESSON LIV 225. Verbs in -OBaxb have the present in -yio, -yenib ; -eBaib changes to -lOK), etc., e.g, pHCOBaTb, pHC^^K), imperat. pHc;^fi [risiii], to draw. p^AOBaxbCH, panyiocB, imperat. pa^yficfl [raduIsA], to rejoice. ropeeaTB, ropibio, imperat. ropibii [gArava^t, gArtii], to grieve, mourn. 226. Verbsin-biBaibj-HBaxb are regular verbs with -BaK),-Baemb, etc., e.g. oTKpBmaTB, otkpbib^k) [Atkrivaju], to open. 227. Ex. A of the last lesson and Ex. A of this lesson are almost exactly Tolstoi's version of this story. It will be noticed that the 228 LESSON LIV 173 writer mingles past and present tenses, where, in English, we should prefer the past or the present throughout. 228. Kemember the form corresponding to whether in sub- ordinate clauses : Oht. MBHii cnpocHJi'b, 3H^K) (sHaji-L) JiH fl ^TO [on ihana sprAsft, zna ju (znat) li ja dtA], He ashed we, if {whether) I knew {had known) that. Vocabulary FocnoAb (rocno^a, y, a, OMt, -fe) MOJiHTBa [mAiftvA], prayer [gAspo^t], the Lord cep^SpflHMtt [ser^brani], of silver rocnoaHl [gospAdi], Lord nojind [pAtno], {it is) fill npasAHHKTb [prdznik], festival n6jiH0 [polnA], stop, enough ! JKiixeJib [sitai], inhabitant o, 66o (with ace.) [o, obA], against iiMa [jamA], pit, hole BHcaanHO [vnazapnA], suddenly KySbiuiKa [kubiJkA], jug ny [nu], loell MOH^xa [mAnstA], coin S^ACTt [budat], that will do, evmtgh I Verbs (1) Perfective with prefix (no)a^MaTb I A [(pA)diimAt], to think (no)Beji'feTb (lb, Hinb) (dat. of person) [(pA)v9i6^t], to order, command (^o)6JIa^oJ^apIiTb (ib, nmb) [(pA)btAgAdArit], to think (no)6'fejKaTb ("fer^, JKiiuib, 3rd plur. Tfi-h) [(pa) basalt], to run (3a)3BeH'feTb (lb, Auib) [(zA)zv9n6^t], to ring, tinkle, jingle (3a)xoT'feTb (Par. 222 and note to Voc. LIII) [(zA)xAt6it], to wish (c)A'fejiaTb I A r(s)dstAt], to do, make (y)cjnimaTb (|6, nnib) [(u)stiJAt], to hear (y)Bi;ifl'feTb (>Ky, ^Hmb) [(u)vid9t], to see (perf. =to catch sight of) (2) axb, HTb rSpocaTb I A [brAsa^t], to throw t6p6cHTb (6my, ocHUib) [brosit] (3) Long and short {see Par. 232) jEbipbiB^Tb I A [viriVa^], to excavate VBiipbiTb (oK), enib) [virit] JoTRpbiBaTb I A [Atkriva^t], to open \oTKpiiiTb (oH), enib) [Atkrit] {noAHHMaTb I A [pAdnimd^t], to lift, pick up nosHiiTb (hhm^, ^Menib) [pAdna^t] /noTpflcaxb I A [pAtrasd^t], to shake tnoTpacTH (c^, euib) [pAtrastfj 174 LESSON LIV 228 (4) Perfective in Hyxb {HarHSaxb I A [iiAgiba^t], to bend HarH^Tb (ny, euib) [nAgnuit] fcxyqaxb (qy, HHUib) [stutja^t], to knock \cxyKHyxb (y, euib) [stuknut], to knock once JKpHHaxb (h^, qiiuib) [kritja^t], to cry, call out (KpHKHyxb (y, euib) [kriknut], to cry out once Perfective verbs in Hyxb indicate a single, and often sudden, performance or occurrence. (5) Different stems jHaxoaiixb {mf, ojirnuh) [nAXAdit], to come upon, find \iiaHXH (ay, euib) [nAiti] Exercises A. Continuation of the " True Story " from Tojictoh. Translate : Bu^qKa H jiyMaex-b : KaK'b mojkho KJiaa-b HaftxH? Hy aa, cn-fejiaio , KaK-b 6a6ymKa bcjiuxtj.)) BsHJia Jionaxy h noiujia. Biiipbijia oua ;iMy H ayMaex-b: By3ex'b, nottay 0M6ft. Xoxijia noaunxb Jionaxy, cjuiiuiHX'b ^ 66o hx6-xo Jionaxa cxyKuyjia. Oua Haruyjiacb, BiiAHX'b 1 KySiiiUKa Gojibmaa. noxpncjia ee, hx6-xo BBeuHX'b. Oua 6p6cHJia Jionaxy, noS'fejKajia kX) 6a6yiUK'fe, kphhhxx>: Ba6ymKa, KJiaa-b nauiJial OxKpi^iJin KyObiuiKy, B'b nen nojino cepeSpHUbix'b Monex-b. H 6a6ymKa co BnyHKott KyniiJiH ceS-fe ki> npaaaHHKy, q-feM-b pasroB-fexbCfl, n KopoBy KyniiJiH, h 6jiaroflapiijiH Bora, hxo Ohtj ycjuiuiaji-b ux-b MOJiuxBy. {a) Proverbial Sayings MaxepHHCKafl MOJiuxBa co jina [dna] Mopa noflUHMaex'b, A mother's prayer raises (even) from the bottom of the sea, i.e. can remove mountains. Focnojib noBCJi'feji'b ox-b scmjih KopMHXbCH [gAspo^t pAvoist At 4amii kArriiitsA], The Lord commanded men to live on the fruits of the earth. Kxo BHepa cojiraji^, xoMy h saBxpa ne noBibpax-b [xto ftjara SAtgat, tAniu i zaftrA na pAv6rAt], Who {hus) lied yesterday, ivill not be believed to-morrow. B. Translate into Russian : (1) How difl&cult (it is) to find the treasure we are seeking ! How easy to dig a hole in the garden when you have a good spade ! We must do as granny has ordered. (2) Thank you. When we thanked him for his goodness, he said, " Don't mention it." ^ This broken construction with verbs of hearing and seeing is very common. 228 LESSON LIV 175 (3) The old man ordered his grandson to bring him his pipe. Why does he order you to take a look at what the other pupils are doing ? Order him to write this letter to-day. (4) Why is she running ? They are not running. I should like [condit. of xoT'feTb] to know whether she did indeed run home to her grandmother. Run to her. (5) Suddenly we felt a desire to hear what they were saying to each other. Did you hear that they had already opened the book ? We hear the coins jingling [how the coins jingle or we hear the coins are jingling]. (6) We caught sight of them throwing stones at the dog [how they were throwing with stones into the dog]. Throw (away) the wooden spade. I shall throw it away, if you command me. (7) What are they excavating in the ground ? Let them go into the garden ; let them excavate a deep pit, perhaps they will find what we want. (8) Do you know whether they have opened the door ? They always open the doors at six o'clock. They will open them at once. If they open them, we shall go in. If they opened them, we should go in. (9) I want them to pick up all those white stones and throw them into the river. Pick them up. She will pick up the spade at once. Why did the old teacher want the elder pupils to write on white paper instead of copy-books ? If you shake the black jug, you will hear the coins jingling. If you had shaken it, you would have heard the coins jingling. Shake it. Do not shake it. (10) She was always bending down. She bent down and saw something in the ground. (11) It is well that they always knock. Then he knocked, opened the door and went in. Surely they are not still crying out ? They started to cry out. He cried out, " Mother, I have found that beautiful treasure you were speaking of. God has heard our prayer." We do not always find that which we seek. We always used to find it. I found it yesterday. I want to find it. I want you to find it. I asked him whether you had found it. I'll seek it and perhaps I'll find it. If I find it, I'll tell you. (12) If those foreigners had known that cholera (was) in the town, perhaps they would not have come to the fair. I should like to know how many of the unfortunate inhabitants have already died of such dreadful diseases. 176 (1) (2) T.ESSON LV 229-2 LESSON LV 129. Declension of two words for child. 8ing, Plur. nom. aHTji [dita] Ai^TH [deti] gen. Ath [ditdti] eft [dat6i] dat. HTH [ditati] H'feTHM'b [d6tam] ace. fl [ditd] 6ft [daUi] instr. HTCK) [ditataju] kmi (bmh) [data mi (datmf)] prep. HTH [ditati] a-feTflX-L [d^tax] nom. pe6eH0KT> [rabonAk] pe6iiTa [rabatA] gen. HKa [r9b6nkA] "L [rabat] dat. HKy [rabonku] aM-L [rabatAm] ace. HKa [rabonkA] t [rabdt] instr. HKOM-b [rabonkAm] aMH [rabdtAiiii] prep. HK-fe [rabdnka] ax-B [rabdtAx] (3) Of these the singular of (2) and the plural of (1) are in most frequent use. Pe6flTa ! is used by officers addressing soldiers. (4) The declension shown in (2) is typical of the names of young of animals. (Of. Group 10, Par. 77.) 230. Many names of peoples, of classes or ranks, end in -anHHt, -HHHHt, -HHt. In the singular they are regular. The plural endings are -(aH)e, -(aH)'b, -(aH)aMT>, -(an)!,, -(aH)aMH, -(aH)ax'b or -HHC, etc. (Cf. Group 11, Par. 77.) Such words are : 6ojirapHHT>, ape [bAtgdrin, dfa], Bulgar aHrjiHqaHHHTb, dne [angiitjdmn, dna], Englishman naTqaHHHt, ane [ddtjanin, Ana], Dane flBopHHHH-L, HHe [dvAranin, rdna], noble rpajKflaHAHT., ane [grA3dAnfn, dna], burgher M'fen^aHiiHT), ane [liiajtjanin, dna], small townsman KpecTbiiHHH'b, Ahq [krastjdmn, jdna], peasant xpHCTlaHJ^Ht, ane [xristJAnfn, jdna]. Christian Typical feminine form : Gojir^pKa; anrJiHq^HKa [bAtgdrkA, angiitJdnkA] 231 ^ LESSON LV 177 231. The verb ji;aBaTi>, naxb, to give, is irregular. Present tense of HaBaTb is ^aI5, eiiib, etc. [dAJii, dAJ 6J], but the imperative is aae^fi, ^ftxe [dAval, dAvdIta]. Future tense of flaxb is jtaMT) [dam], aanib [da J], AacTi) [dast], HaA^M-B [dAdfm], ^xe [dAdfta], Hafl^TT. [dAdiit], and tbe imperative is Aaft [dal], n^iiTe [daita] The imperative pjaBaii is frequently used with an infinitive in the sense of let us, e.g. Jl^aB^ti ^HT^Tb [dAvdl tjitd^t], Let us do some reading. Vocabulary CJiyr^, iky -^H {masc.) [stuga], servant cepaue, a, d (^itt) [s^rtsa], heart caMOBapt [sAmAvdr], tea-urn KOJi'feHO, a, h [kAlsiiA], knee SapHHi), a, 6ape [barin], master ocTaJibHoii [AstA^noI], remaining maji^Hi. [Jatun], young scamp ^OBOJlbHO [dAvo^nA], sufficiently, npnpoaa [prirodA], nature fairly, rather npHx6>KaH {adj. inform) [prix659J9], KaK6ii-HH6yAb [kAkoi-nibii^t], some ante-room, corridor or other BopoTa {also accent on a) {neut. pi.) np6cT0 [prostA], simply [vAr6tA], gate caajiiH [ssadi], from behind CTopoHd {accent on ct6 in ace. sing. hb to [na t6], not that, if not that, or and nom. pi.) [stAiAnd], side else JiejK^HKa [i83dnkA], bench beside HeTaKT>[ri^ tak], not in the right way the stove paByM^excH [rAzum^jatsA], it is K^qa [ktitjA], hap, lot, group understood, of course Verbs (1) Perfective formed with prefix (no)6oJiTaTb I A [(pA)bAttd^t], to chatter (no)cT^BHTb (bjik), Hmb) [(pA)stdvit], to set, put, stand (trans.) (no)cTOHTb (lb, limb) [(pA)stAJd^t], to stand (intrans.) (no)jiK)6HTb (6jii5, ^nuih) [(pA)lubit], to love (no)MHpHTb (lb, limb) [(pA)mirit], to reconcile, make peace between (MMpi) [riiir], peace) (no)cHji;'feTb (JK^, anmb) [(pA)sid6^t], to sit . (no, 3a)BopHaTb (f, uuih) [(pA, zA)vArtJd^t], to grumble, growl (B3)HpeMaTb (K^, anuib) [prAVAdit], lit. to lead through, pa^s, spend (time) \npoBecxH (ejif, eiiib) ^ [prAvasti] Exercises A. Translate: Ji-feHHBBm Cjiyra JI-feHiiBbitt ox-b npnpoabi, 0HT> ocxajibH6e BpeMH HH^ero ne A'fejiajix>. On-b He aaBaji-b ced'fe xpy^a hh ^ nocxaBHXb caMOBapa, hh ^ noflMecxii iJ7 nojioB-b. On-bi HJiH jipcMaji-b B-b npHXOJKeii, hjih yxoAHJi-b 6oJixaxb BT> KyxHK); He^ x6, xaK-b no n'fejibiMx> nacaM-b cxoHJi-b y Bopox-b n nocMaxpHBaji-b na Bc-fe cxopoHbi. Oht, Bopqaji-b BCHKin pasx., KaKx> rojiocX) Capnna 3acxaBJi^jn> ero noKnaaxb jiemanKy. HecMOxp)i na Bce ^xo, oht> 6biJix> aoBOJibno MarKaro n aoSparo cepana. Onx* jiK)6Hjn> flame npoBo^nxb BpeMH cii fl-fexbMH. Ha flBop-fe, y Bopox-b, er6 ^acxo BHflajin cx> Kyqeii fl-fexen. Ohi> hxx Mnpiix-b, ycxpanBaexX) i^rpbi, 6jih npocxo cHfliixx> c-b hhmh, BSfiB-b^ oflHoro na 03h6 KOJi-feno, flpyroro na npyroe, a csaflH m^io ero oSoBbexx, enie KaKofi-nndyab maji^m> pynaMH. Adapted from 06^6U0B'b , by FonqapoBX) * For past tense see List A, Par. 239. ^ neither . . . nor . . . ^ ' Having taken,'' from BSHXb, to take. 231 LESSON LV 179 (a) Proverbial Sayings He ocTaBJiHH [AstAvidi] oxixa h M^Tepn na cTapocTH [staiAsti] Jii^TT), H Bor-b Te6fl He ocTaeHT'b, Do not abandon father and mother in their old agCf and God ivill not abandon you. Kto npaBJibi iimex-B, Toro Bon. dimex-b [sijtjat]. Who seeks truth, him Ood will find {seek out). KaKX. Borx> no Jiioa^ft, xaKi> ox6ux> ao n'fex^ft, As Ood is to men, so is a father to his children. MajieHBKoe ahxh Maxepn rope; GojiBuioe ahxh oxiiy 3a66xa [zAbotA], A young {little) child is the mother'' s sorrow : an older (big) child is the father'' s care. 3a yqenaro [utJonAVA] Byxx HeyqeHbixi [n9utJ6nix] Aaibxx>, One instructed person is worth two ignorant ones. Tepninie Aaexx. yM'fenie [tgrp^nja uih^nje], Patience brings power [understanding). B. Translate into Russian : (1) The rich burghers would sometimes like to be [Lesson XL VIII] nobles, and poor workmen often wish to be burghers. (2) Surely those two lazy servants are not always standing chattering in the corridor ? Would you like to know what they are chattering about ? Perhaps they are grumbling because their master makes them get up so early. Make them go to bed. When their master is kind, few industrious servants will grumble. (3) Let us sweep this dirty floor. I thought it had been swept already. Give me what you are holding in your hand. I am not holding anything. I'll give the poor man what he needs. Give him a few silver coins. (4) As he was rather kind-hearted [of a fairly kind heart], you might [could] often have seen him sitting near the iron gate, playing with his master's little children. One would sit [sat] on one knee, a second would be on his other knee, while (a) third young scamp would embrace his great thick neck from behind. (5) He is always looking about him on all sides. Look at [na with acc.'\ him ! If you had looked at what [xo, qxo] was going on out of doors, you would have known that he was not a bad man, in spite of the fact that [xo, Hxo] he was lazy by nature. He has just been arranging the children's games, but he did not do it right. I wish you would make peace [between] those three children. (6) I wonder why [I should wish to know] he always makes me leave the bench when I am dozing in the comfortable kitchen. He'll make you go away. They will oblige us to go to one of [H3X>] those old houses that still stand on the meadow behind the wooden church. Do not leave your kind old master. _ ^ 180 LESSON LVI 232 (7) How do you spend so much time at home when it is raining and it is impossible to work outside ? I like to play with the child ; I study a little, of course not too much ; or I repair the furniture. I should have spent the whole day in bed, if I had not been well [healthy]. I want her to spend the day at home ; I want her to sweep the floor, to prepare the dinner and then to knit stockings for her father. Do you know whether she has put on the samovar ? (8) You have lived a long time [already Uve long] with us in this cold, dark forest ; if you went away now you would never know what might [ = could {cond.)] happen to [CB, instr.] all your friends. If she goes away, what will you say to her ? I do not want her to go away. She goes away every day at six o'clock. Go away. Do not go away. LESSON LVI 232. In vocabularies LII-LV appear a number of verbs under * Long and short ' belonging to a very numerous class. The typical verb of this class has in tbe perfective aspect a form com- posed of prefix plus simple verb, and from the perfective is formed the imperfective infinitive by adding to tbe stem tbe termination (i>i)BaTb or (H)BaTL, the stem-vowel occasionally being modified. Such words are : (1) (Ha)nHcdTi>, to tvrite (5) (no)cTp6HTL, to build, construct fonucsLTh (perf.), to describe TycTpdHTb, to arrange \onHCbiBaTb (imperf.) tycTpaHBaxb (2) (no)piJiTb, to dig . (6) (c)BHTb, to twine /sapiJiTb, to bury f o6BHTb, to embrace \3apbiBaTb 1o6BHBaTb (3) (no)KpiJiTb, to cover (7) KaadxbCH, to appear j OTKpbiTb, to open /noKasaxb, to show \OTKpbIBaTb \nOK^3bIBaTb TsaKpiiTb, to close rpaacKaaaxb, to relate tsaKpbiBaTb tpascKasbiBaTb (4) (no)npocHTb, to request /cnpocHTb, to ash \cnpamHBaTb This type of imperfective indicates that the action takes place again and again (cf. Voc. XIX, cnpauiHBaTb and cnpocHTb) or occupies some duration of time. 23a-235 LESSON LVI 181 233. The verbs (no)Hafl;'feflTBCH [(pA)nAdejotsA], to hope, and (no)6oflTLca [pAbAJa^tsA], to fear, have the same construction as xoT^Tb (cf . Par. 224 (2)), i.e. they are used with the conditional, e.g. H HaA'feiocb, htoSbi ona npnuiji^ [ja nAddjus, Jtobi Ana prijtd], I hope she comes. Owb 6oiiTCfl, ht66li h hc ndHflJii) [on bAitsA, Jt6bi ja na ponAt], He is afraid I shall understand. Note the He in the last example. 234. If the subordinate clause following 6oflTLCfl is negative, use the future perfective with conj. hto, e.g. Owb doiiTCH, HTO fl He noiiM^ [on bAftsA, Jto ja na pAlmii], He is afraid I shall nx)t under sta7id. 235. Distinguish clearly between caMBiH (used before nouns with the meaning of same, very, and before adjectives to form the superlative) ^ and caMt, the emphatic pronoun (meaning self). CaMHH is decHned Uke any adjective in -hh. CaMT) is dechned hke o^HHt (see Par. 107 (c)). Examples : Oh^ caMa He noHHMdex'B [And sAma na pAiiimdjat], She herself does not understand. GaMO co66k) paayM-feeTCH [sAm6 sAboju rAzum^jatsA], That understands itself of itself, i.e. it is, of course, understood ; it goes without saying. but TOJKe caMoe [tosa sdmAJa], (just) the same thing ; B-B caMOMT> a-feji-fe [fsdmAm d6ia], in very deed ; c^MBifi Ji^qmiti npHM-fept [sdmi tiitji priihsr], the best example. VOCABULAKY rCHcpaJi'b [ganardt], general BCibAy [fstidu] or BCSff^ [vazd^], nox6ji;'L [pAxot], campaign everywhere HenpiiiTejib [liaprijdtai], enemy He B-fepHO? [na vsrnA], not tru ? i.e. b6hcko, a, a [voiskA], army is it not so ? Bpari>, a, ii [vrak], enemy HcnpaBHbiii [isprdvni], correct, exa^it pa3CKa3'B,Bi [rAsskds], toZe,mirra^*o?i CM'fejiBift [srfisti], 6oiW cJi^JKSa {gen.pl. e6'B)[stu3bA],5emce BCceJiBiii [vasoti], glad, jolly Kama [kdjA], gruel, porridge cojifl^TCKlH [sAtddtski], soldierly m^TKa (OKT)) [jntkA], joke bo6hhbih [vAJsni], warlike, military uxa, m^fi (/em. pi.) [Jtji, |tJ6i], h.t.h. =HTaK'BAaji'fee[itakddiaja], cabbage-soup and so forth CTOHTB Ha nacaxT) [stAJd^t nA tJAsdx], to be {stand) on guard. 1 Cf. Voc. X, Pars. 186, 197. 182 LESSON LVI 235 Verbs (1) Perfective formed with prefix (no)6HTB (6bH), eiiib) [(pA)bit], to heat (no)HiicTHTb (nmy, iActhuib) [(pA)tjistit], to clean (no)Han^flTbCH (tio, feeuib) [(pA)nAd6J8tsA], to hope (na, no)cM'femiiTb (;^, HUib) [(ha, pA)smoJit], to make laugh (Ha)yqHTbCH {dat. of svhject learned) [(nA)utjitsA], to learn, study (Bbi)y^HTbCfl ^ {dat. of subject learned) [(vi)utjitsA], to learn, learn off (o)6e3noK6HTbCH (lo, HUib) [(A)b9spAk6itsA], to put oneself about, take thought /noK6ft (m.), rest i noKottHbiii [pAkoini], peaceful, at rest, deceased \(c)noK6fiHOH HOHH I [(s)pAk6inAl notji], good night // (npo)cJiyH{HTb (f, -^HUib) [(prA)stu3it], to serve (c)KOMaHAOBaTb (ayio, euib) (gov. instr. case) [(s)kAmandAVAt], to command (2) axb, HTb fnocxynaTb I A [pAstupa^t], to step, act, behave, enter (upon) \nocTynHTb (njiib, ^nniub) [pAstupit] /noS'femAaTb I A [pAb85dd^t], to conquer, overcome tno6ifeflHTb (-hmjif, 'femiuib) [pAbadit] (3) Long and short /oniicBiBaTB I A [ApisivAt], to describe \onHcaTb (m;^, ^uieuib) [Apisa^t] {CHHTaxb I A [stjita^t], to count, consider, regard as cqecTb (co^xy', enib) [stjest] /HaHHH^Tb I A [iiAtJina^t], to begin \usmkTh (HHy, Henib) [nAtja^t] (4) Different stems {npHXOfliiTb [prixAdit], to come npHTTii [priti] Exercises A. Translate : CyBopoBt MaJibHHKt p^HO HaqajiTb yqiiTbCH h cb p^hhhx'b ji'feT'B nojiioSiijn, KHiirH, BT, KOTOpbrXT) OHliCBIBaJIHCB BOfiHBI, nOXO^BI, H.T.A. IlflTH^A- ^ Perfectives in bu are accented on the prefix. 235 LESSON LVI 183 AaTH ji-feTt MOJioA6fi CyB6poB'B nocTyn^Jit na so^HHyio cji;^>K6y h fl^BHTb JI-feTT, npOCJiyJKHJI-b npOCTMMT. [aS a] COJIAaTOM-b. H6 6biJio cojiAaxa HcnpaeH'fee ero : OHt BCTaB^jn> panbuie ApyrHX-L , caMt qncTHJi-b ceG'fe canorii h njiaxbe h cxoiijii. na qacaxi. bo BCiiKyio nor6y. JKHJi-b OH-b BM'fecx'fe ch npocxiiMH cojinaxaMH h ifejn> coji^ax- CKifi mn H Kamy; CbiJiii Bcer^a CM-feji-b h Becejii. h CM-fem^jix. cboiixt. xoBapHmeii BecejibiMH ui^xKaMH h paacKaaaMH. Bcfe jik)66jih er6. Korj];a oht* cxaji-b o^ni^^poMX) h nanaji'b KOManaoBaxb coji^axaMH, BcioAy Ha BOHH-fe OH-b noS-femaajii. nenpiflxejifl. Pe6Hxa roBopHJiT. GyBdpoB-b cojiaaxaM-b, Bceraa mjivne Bne- pea-b Ha Bpara. He 6e3noK6ttxecb o xoM'b, CKOjibKO nepe^-b BaMH Henpiiiiejieft. Bh B-fe^b npHuijiii 6HXb HX-b, a ne cHHx^xb. From HexBepxafl Kniira ajih Hx^hIh , by H. G. MnxecB'b (KaaaHb, 1907) B. Translate into Eussian : (1) The brave general was at that time only a private [Lesson XL VIII] in the Russian army. I thought that the Russians regarded [Lesson XL VIII] him as their best officer. Why did he call him their weakest general ? (2) Don't beat the poor children. She was always beating them. I wish she would not beat them. Let her beat them, if she likes. If she often beat them, they would not love her. (3) I want the same servant to clean the children's black boots and I hope that she will clean all the windows and the utensils in the kitchen too. She is cleaning them now, I am told. (4) Some of that boy's friends are always laughing ; he keeps them laugh- ing all day. It would be a pity if the silly boy made his little friends laugh on that occasion. (5) Surely your youngest brother has not learned his lesson yet ? Yes, he has already learned it by heart. Has he been studying the Russian lan- guage [dat. case] ? (6) If you put yourself about over that business, it would be a pity. It will be a pity, if you put yourself about. Don't put yourself about. I should be glad if she took [gave herself] a little more trouble when I tell her to put on the samovar and to sweep the floor. Perhaps she did not understand what you said. (7) Perhaps your eldest son finished his service long ago. Do you not understand that that dark pit served the animal as a dwelling ? I did not understand you. (8) Of course, as an officer, he had command of large numbers of private soldiers. 184 LESSON LVI 235 (9) Would you not like to know how he would act, if you told him whai had happened to [ct, instr.] his rich old aunt ? When will you enter military service ? Really, I scarcely know myself yet. I hope that I may soon enter the service, but I am afraid that I may not enter it till Christmas. (10) Is, it really true that that general always defeated his numerous enemies ? He would always defeat them, if he had enough soldiers. (11) If you ask those two intelhgent children, they will describe fairly well what took place. Describe it to me. (12) You must never count your enemies. Do not count them. I hope he won't start counting them to-day. If he does, we shall not come home till late [come only late]. (13) I am afraid the lazy boys will not get up before nine o'clock. We always used to get up early in the morning, but to-day we did not get up till eight. Stand up. Sit down, please. (14) When the four httle boys came into the wooden hut, they found their father and mother weaving. They begin to work very early. When will he begin to repair the old arm-chair ? He has already begun, hasn't he ? We shall begin a little later. Begin now, if you Uke. Why must I begin ? PREPOSITIONS 185 236. PREPOSITIONS EMPLOYED IN LESSONS I-LVI With Oeniiive dJiHS'L, near BM^CTO, instead of B63Ji'fe, near, beside KpoM'fe, besides MHMO, past HanpoTHB'L, opposite 6kojio, about, approximately n6AJi'fe, beside nocji-fe, after np6THB'b, against (The words from SjiHSt np^JK^e, before (of time) caa^H, from behind 6 est, without Jifl, for flO, up to, till, before usii, out of, from M^JKJty (cf. instr.), between OTb, away from, from Ch (co) (cf. instr.), /rom, ojf y, at, near, with to cs^AH are also adverbs.) With Dative Kt (ko), to, txywards no (cf. ace. and prep.), over, on, along, according to BTb, into (cf. prep.) 3a, behind, in exchange for, in return for (cf. instr.) Ha, on to (cf. prep.) HecMOTpii Ha, in spite of o, oOT), 66o, against (cf. prep.) n^peai,, before (place) (cf. instr.) With Accusative no, up to, at the rate of (cf. dat. and prep.) no^t, under (cf. instr.) npo, about, concerning CKB03b which has not occurred means through H^peat, through, across, in (of time) M^WKHy, between (cf. gen.) CL (co), with (cf. gen.) With Instrumental 3a, uowby ndpe^t (cf. ace.) Hajti), over, above With Prepositional no, after (cf. dat. and ace.) npn, near, at, in the time of BT,, in (cf. ace.) Ha, on (cf. ace.) o, oST), 66o, concerning (cf. ace.) _^ofe. 3a, n^pe^t, noaii govern ace. or msfr. Bt, Ha, o govern ace. or ^e^. CT, governs gen., ace. (=a5 in comparisons), or instr, no governs dat., ace, or prep. M^JKjuy governs gen. or tW^r. 186 PREDICATIVE ADJECTIVE 287 237. PREDICATIVE FORM OF ADJECTIVES Observe that o or e is inserted very frequently in the mascuUne singular. Other forms in brackets indicate alternatives. The neuter may generally be used adverbially, though the accent sometimes changes. (1) Feminine termination accented^ e.g. npocToii : npocT'L, npocxa, npocTO, np6cTbi Similar are : Sji-feaHHii (ch-l) S-feflHbiH (en-b) C-fejibiii (6) BCcejibiH (Beceji-b) BHflHblH (cH-b; 6, li) BKy^CHblH (CHt) BbicoKiii (6, h) rjiasKiH (OKT* ; 6) rjiySoKift (6, A) rjiynbift rHHJi6ft rOJIOaHbitt (CHT)) rojibifi (6) rp6MKiH (OK-b) rpjisHbift (cH-b) aiiKitt HJIHHHblft (liHCH'b) AOJiriii (on.) aypnott (cH-b) a^mHbiii (cHT.) majiKift (oK-b) jKapKiii (oK-b) jKejiTbift (6) JKHBOii mnpHbiii (cH-b) sejieHbift Kp^CHblH (CHT, ; 6, li) KpOTKiii (OKT)) Kp^rjibiii Kp-fenKitt (OKT.) mcjikIh (okt.) MepTBblfi (6, li) Mlijiblfi MOKpblii MOJIOAOtt (MOJIOflT.) HH3Kift (OKT.) HOBblH H^JKHblfi (CH-b) njioxoii nOJIHblH (OH-b) npaBbiii npocToii npHMofi nycToii paBHbiii (eiTb) p66Kitt (oK-b) poBHbiH (en-b) p-feaKift (OKT.) ciijibHbiii (cHJieH'b ; or (2)) CKpOMHblii (CHl.) CK^qHblH (CHT.) cjiaSbitt cjnJimHbiii (en-b) cn'fejibitt CTapbiti cyxoft cfepbitt (or (2)) TBcpjiibiii Tenjibitt (xeneji-b ; or (2)) Tiixiii xpyaHbift (bhtj) ^3Kitt (OKTi) xpa6pbm (a or a) xyaott PREDICATIVE ADJECTIVE 187 HepHBiii (eu-b) H^CTHbitt (em,) Note. ciiHift : chhb ; A, e, h (2) Terminations accented, e.g. H66pbiH : flo6pT>, SojibHoii (66jieH'b ; o) Sojibinottl . , . Be^HKlft /(B^^HK-t; O. ") BOJIBHblH (BOJlCH'b) BblCOKift ropiiqift (e, h) n66pbiii KaKOBOH (OB-b) KOpOTKitt (dTOK-b) jierKiii (oK-b) HMaji'b) MajibiH J ^ ^ qncTHii iipKift (OKT,) iicHbift (em,) no6pa, Ao6p6, aoSpii MiirKia (oK-b) 6cTpbift (ocTep-b) CB-feTJibiii (ejiTb) CHJibHbiii (see (1)) CMifeUIHOH (dH-b) TCMHblft (ewb) Tynoii THJKCJIblii ;^MHbiii (en-b) XHTpbiii (ep-b) xopomiii mnpoKift (3) Accentuation of the attributive adjective preserved, e.g. SAOpOBblH : S^OpOB'b, SflOpOBa, SAOpOBO, 3Op6BW SoraxbiH BCJiHKOJi'fenHbm (en-b) BHeaanHbiii (en-b) BHHM^TejIbHblii (CHTb) n-fettCTBHTeJIbKblii (CHT.) HOBOJIbHblH (CHT,) SflOpOBblfit 3JI0H (aoJiT,), 3Jia, etc. H3B^CTHHH[ (CHT,) HHTep^CHblft (eHT,) HcnpaBHHti (en-b) KHCJibiii (ejiT. ; or (1)) KpaciiBHft JlibHHBblfi JII0663Hblii (CH-b) M^ajieHHbiil Morynitt HCKpaciiBbift HeCH^CTHblii (CH-b) OHeBiiflHbm (cH-b) noKottHbiii (ocH'b) noK6pHbift (em,) noJi63Hbiii (em,) npHJi6?KHbiii (em,) npiiiTHbift (em,) (pa^T,) piiiJKiii cepAiiTbifl CKopbiii CM'fejibiii cyp6Bbifi CHacTJiHBbiii TpyA0JIK)6HBblft Tpycjii^Bbiii T-fecHbiii (em,) yMKacHbiii (eni,) yibxHbitt (em,) xiimHbiHi (eni.) (4) iVo^e. xoJiojXHbiH : xojioaem,, nna, 6 or o, li or bi xopomeHbKifi : xopomeHeK-b, ^HbKa, etc. {pretty) CBHToft : CBiixa etc. 188 PREDICATIVE COMPARATIVES 238 238. PREDICATIVE COMPARATIVE IN -E (1) ENDING IN ->Ke 6ji63Kiii, lame, near H^SKitt, lijKe, low {not high) rjia^Kii!, ^jkb, smooth p-fej^Kifi, 'hme, rare rjiySoKift, 6me, deep cxporift, ome, strict aoporoii, 6>Ke, dear TBepatiH, pme, ^rd H^iiAKift, ume, fluid ;^3Kifi, ;^JKe, narrow MOJioflott, 6me, young xyaoii, x^jKe, bad Note. The stem of the positive ends in -r, -a, -HK, -3K. (a) n63AHHtt has n63?Ke or nosAH-fee, late. (2) ENDING IN -me BbicoKift, Biiime, high cyxoii, 3^me, dry najiCKlii, Jibme,/ar Ti^xift, i4me, Zot^? {not loud) ndJiritt, ojibme or oji-fee, long T6HKift, OHbiue, thin Note. ^The stem of the positive ends in a guttural. {a) Observe the irregular forms : xop6mlft, Ji^^Huie, good CT^pbifi, ^pme, old 6ojibm6tt, SoJibuie, large paHHitt, ^Hbine, early M^jieHbKitt, M^Hbine, little (3) ENDING IN -me rycT6fi, ^me, thick, dense TOJiCTbift, 6jime,/a^ npocT6tt, 6me, simple ^iicTbitt, ^me, clean Note. ^The stem of the positive ends in -ct. (4) ENDING IN -He 6or^Tbifi, dne, rich Kpyxofi, fne, steep, brusque r6pbKiii, pne, bitter Kp^nKiii, n^e, strong rp6MKiH, qe or n-he, loud JierKiii, erqe, light JKaJiKift, ne or H'he, pitiful m^jikIA, Jibne, fine, shallow HK6jie or XHJKeji'fee, mHp6Klii, mnpe, broad heavy The pronunciation of these forms in -e is simple : the syllable preceding the termination bears the accent. 239 IREEGULAK VERBS 189 239. A FEW COMMON IRREGULAR VERBS i A. Some verbs in -ctb, -cth Infin. Pres. Imperat. Past (1) (no)BecTH ejify enib ejsjk ejit, d, 6, ii, to lead KJiacTb any, enib a^Ii ajit, a, o, h, o put, lay The perfective is noJioJKHTb (JK^, 6jKHmb). (y)KpacTb ' (no)npiicTb (2) (BlJl)MeCTH (3a)i;B'fecTii (3) (no)rp6cTb an^, enib ajuk aji-b, a, o, h, to s^eaZ sijlf, enib flii flJi-b, ^, 6, iky to spin eTff enib exii ejii>, ^, 6, li, to ^i^eep i^T^, euib "feTH 'feji'b [jot], ^, 6, li, to bhom e6f, euih e6A eS^, 6ji^, 6, h, to rot/? Perfective also rpeSn^Tb. CKpecTii e6fy enib e6ii Perfective CKpeSnyTb. e6T3, 6jid, 6, H, to scrape (4) (no)HecTH (no)TpHCTii (BIj)pOCTH (5) (npo)KJi;icTb Infin. (no)Be3TH (pa3)rpiJ3Tb (no)ji^3Tb ec:^, eiub ecii eciy, cjia, 6, h, to carry ncf, enib hch HCb [jos], cji^, 6, ili, to sAafce CT^, enib CTii OCT., ocjid, 6, h, to grow Huf, enib HHH HJiT), &y o, H, to cwrse B. Verbs in -3Tb, -3th Pres. Imperat. Past esf, euib 636 gs-b, 3Jia, 6, ii, to convey, carry in a vehicle bi3^, enib bi3H rpiJis-b, Jia, o, h, to gn^iw ^3y, enib fe3b Ji'fe3'b, Jia, o, h, to climb C. Verbs in -hb Infin. Pres. Imperat. (no)6ep6Hb r^, jKenib ^ ern (c)jKeqb ry, JKenib ^ jKrn Future Perfective coJKr;^ etc. (no)c'feqb K^, Henib ^ 'hK^ (no)T6Hb K^, Henib ^ eKH Past enb, rjia, 6, 6, to jfcee^, preserve jKer-b, jKFJia, o, h, to bum "feK-b, "feKJia, o, H, to cw^, ^0^ CK-b, Kjia, 6, A, tofiow Infin. jieqb CfeCTb D. The perfective verbs jichb and cifecTb Fut. Imperat. Past Jiflry, iijKemb Jifln>, Hrxe Jien,, Ji^, 6, li, to Zie down cjiny, enib cit^fc, bxe cifejfb, a, o, h, to sit down The Imperfectives are JiOJKiATbCfl and cafli^TbCH. Cf. Par. 156. 2 Present tense like that of Mo^b : ry (ky), wenn. (qenn.) e "sariiemAja xromkA, gdrin. Exercise LII B. (1) prinasita mns, pA5dt(ui)stA, etu novuju riiskuju knigu ! (2) prinAsita mns jasadnevnA tatradi stdrjix utjanikof ! (3) tA3itas spa^t kdsdi vetjar fsem tjAsof ! (4) pAia iti spa^t ! rAzde'ntas, ma^tjiki, i iakta spa^t ! (5) piji ihedlanA i pravilnA ! (6) nApiJita to, Jto ja vam ska5u ! (7) smAtrita ! (8) pAsmAtrita to, Jto Ani dstAJut tape^r ! (9) na gAVArita jei Atom, Jto ja vam to^lkA Jto rAsskAzat ! (10) na dstAita stAVA ! (11) na Atvatjaita nA stAt VApros ! (12) puskai Ana sdsUjat, kak Ana satajat ! (13) pu^st Aiii pAidtit tape^r fjkotu ! (14) fsagda stujata to, Jto gAVArit utSital ! (15) utSital gAVArit tape^r ; pAsttiJata javo 1 Exercise LIII A. bii VAdnoi darevna 5ita stAitiSkA SAvnutSkAi. Ans bili otjan bsdni, i jest jim bi'tA netJavA. prijto svsttAJa VAskrasenja. nAiot radujatsA. fss kupili sabs lAzgAve^tsA, toUkA stAruJka SAvnutSkAi netjam lAzgAve^tsA. pAptdkAli Ans i stdli bogA piAsit, Jtob on jim pAmog. i fspomnitA stAruSkA, Jto fstArinu, VAvremA fiAntsusA, mnsiki de^ngi vzemlu ZAiivali. stAnixA i gAVArit vnutSka : " vAzmi (ti)^ vnutJkA, tApatu i idi nA starAJa sato, pAmAlis bogu, da pAroi vzamls : mosat bit, bog nam i pASlot Jto-nibu^t." PHONETIC TRANSCRIPT 209 Exercise LIV A. vnutSkA i dumAJot: "kak mosnA ktad (t) nAiti? nu da sdetAJu, kak bdbuJkA valit." vzAta tApdtu i pASta. viritA Ana jdmu, i dumAJQt : " biidat, pAidii dAmoi." xAtstA pAdna^t tApatu, stiSit obA Jto-tA UpatA stuknutA. Ana nAgnuUs, vidit ^kubiSkA bA4jaJA. pAtrostd J8J6, Jto-tA zvonit. And brositA tApdtu, pAbasdtA xbdbujka, kritSit : ^' bdbuJkA, ktat nAjtd ! " Atkrili kubiSku, vnei pAtno sarebronix mAnst. i bdbuJkA sAvnutSkAi kupili sabs kprdzniku, tjem lAsgAve^tsA, i kAiovu kupili, i btAgAdArili bogA, Jto on ustijAt jix mAHtvu. Exercise LV A. lanivi slugd ianivi At prirodi, on AstA^noja vferiiA nitjavo na dstAt. on na dAvdt sabs trudd ni pAstdvit sAmAvdiA, rd pAdihasti pAtof. on, ili dramdt fprixosai, ili uxAdit bAttd^t fkuxnu ; na to, tak pA tsetim tjAsdm stAJdt u vArdt i pAsnidtrivAt nA fse stoiAni. on VArtSdl: fsdki ras, kak gotAs bdriuA zAstAvldt javo pAkidd^t lasdnku. nasmAtrd ua fso stA, on bit dAv64nA ihdxkAVA i ddbiAVA sertsA. on lubit ddsa prAVAdit vreriiA sdatihi. nAdvArs, u vArot, javo tJdstA viddli skutjai datei. on jix riiifit, ustrdivAJat igri, ili prostA sidit sniriii, vzaf AdnAvo UA Adno kAleuA, drugovA nA drugoja, a sddi Jeju javo AbAvjot jaStJo kAkoi-rdbii^t jAtun rukdihi. Exercise LVI A. SUVOIAf md^itjik rduA ndtjAt utJitsA i srdnix 1st pAlubit knigi, fkAtorix ApisivAlis voini, pAxodi, i tak ddlaja. patndtsAti 1st mAtAdoi SUVOIAf pAstupit UA vAJsnuju stu5bu i devat 1st prAstus'it prAstim SAtddtAm. ns bitA sAtddtA isprdvnaja javo : on fstAvdt rd^nja drugix, sam tjistit sabs SApAgi i ptdtja i stAJdt nA tjAsdx vAfsdkuju pAgddu. s'it on vihesta sprAstiiiii sAtddtAihi i jst sAtddtskija Jtji i kdju ; bit fsagdd sihst i yesat i sihsSit svAix tAvdri^tJai vasotiriii JutkAihi i rAsskdzAriii. fss lubili javo. kAgdd on stat A^itssiAm i ndtjAt kAmdndAVAt sAtddtAihi, fstidu nA VAins on pAbasddt naprijdtalA. " rabdtA gAVArit suvoiAf sAtddtAm, fsagdd idita fparot nA viAgd. na baspAkoitas Atom, sko^IkA perat vdihi naprijdtalai. vi ve^t prijll bit jix, A ns stjitd^t." o GENERAL VOCABULARIES VOCABULARY OF VERBS The verbs are arranged alphabetically according to the form of the imperfective aspect, but every verb used in the exercises is given separately whenever its form differs so markedly from that of the imperfective infinitive that its meaning might be troublesome to find. The form of the perfective aspect is indicated by the prefix enclosed in brackets or is given immediately below as a separate verb. First and second singular present and first and second singular future perfective are indicated. Reflexive pronouns are not always repeated. The number enclosed in brackets indicates the vocabulary, paragraph, or exercise where a phonetic transcript of the word will be found. Verbs marked with an asterisk will be found also in the lists in Par. 239. (o)6e3noK6HTbCH (6k)ci> dviuihcn) (56), put oneself about, take thought *(no)6ep.6Hi. (6eper^, Hierat, r^rfc), pre- serve, keep, watch (no)6HTb (6bib, eiut) (Par. 162), beat (no)5jiaronapHTb (i5, iimi>) (38), thank > (no)6ji1iHH-feTb (-tio, -feemb) (31), turn pale (no)6ojiT^Tb (^K), ^emb) (55), chatter {(3a)6oji'feTb (-tio, feeuib) (27), be (fall) ill SojniTT,, SojiHT-b (3rd pers. form) (44), be sore, hurt (no)6orfTbCH (oibcb, liuibCH) (52), fear /Spaxb (6epy, emb) (53), take \B3HTb (BoabMy, emb) (28) (no)6ponHTb (my, 6nHmb) (28), wander about /6poc^Tb (&K), &erab) (54), throw \6p6cHTb (6my, 6cHmb) (16) eyaex-b (54), that will do ! ewB^Tb (aio, Aeuib) (46), be usually, happen, occur 6biTb (see 2, 6 ; Par. 123), be - (no)6'fe>KaTb (ry, JKiimb, ryxx.) (54), run *(no)Be3xii or Be3Xb (af, euib) (Par. 157), convey, drive (trans.) Beat (Par. 96), past tense of Be3xii (no)Beji-fexb (lb, limb) (Par. 214), order, command *(no)Becxii or Becxb (ji^r, emb), lead / B3r JirfflbiBaxb (aio, aemb), look at \ BsrjiHHyxb (y, rfnemb) /B3nbix6xb (^K), aemb), sigh \B3aoxHyxb (ny, oxnemb) B3HXb (28) (see 6paxb), take; B3HTb Kx ceS-fe, adopt (y)BHflaxb (aio, ^emb) (55), see (y)BHH'fcxb (JKy, numb) (8), see fBHc-fexb (my. Climb) (Par. 141), hang -| (intrans.) (noBHcnyxb (y, emb) ^BHXb (BbK), emb) (Par. 162), wind, -| twine, build (nest) [cBHXb (cOBbK), emb) (3a)B.iTaH'fexb (-feio, -feeiiib) (48), rule, pos- sess, command /BJi'fe3^xb (aio, aemb), climb into \ BJitsxb (3y, emb) (49) /BHOcrixb (my, dcumb), bring in^ \BHecxii (cy, emb) Boiixii, see Bxoniixb (B3)BOJiHOB&xb (Hyio, yemb), excite, agitate (c)BopoBaxb (pvK), yemb) (50), steal (3a)BopMaxb or (no)BopHaxb (iy, limb) (55), grumble Bomeji-b (Par. 62) {see Bxoaiixb), entered 210 VOCABULAEY OF VERBS 211 fsnajiATh (km, ^einb), fall into VenacTB (any, eiiib) (48) BcnoMiiHaxb (aio, deiin>) (53), re- member BCnOMHHTb (k), nuuy) BCTaBaTi> (^K>, ^emi>) (52), stand up, rise Bcxaxt (^ny, emi.) /Bcxp-feq^Tb (km, Aeuib), meet XBcxp-fexHXB ("feny, -fexHrnt) (18) (sxojiATb (Ky, oflHmjb), go into, -| enter [BOttXH (H^p-, euxb) I Btm-fejiMBaxb (aio, aemb), prepare, -| execute [ BiiH-fejiaxfe (aio, aemb) (Par. 208) Bbiflfly, Bi^MxH, see Buxomixs fBtrnji^qiiBaxb (aio, aemi>), pay out ^BbmjiaxHXb (ny, xHuib) (Par. 208) f BbipacxAxb^ (aio, ^eiiib) (18), -j sprout, grow up \ *BiiipacxH^ (cxy, enib) {BbipbiBdxb (^lo, ^enib) (54), dig out, excavate BiJipbixb (oH), enib) rBwxoHiixb (>Ky, 6jmua,)f go out, -| come out [bMiixH (ny, emb) (Par. 160), (no)B'tpHxb (k), Hiiib) (Par. 223), believe, trust (c)BH3^xb (jk;^, -*iiib) (Par. 168), knit, bind (no)rH4xb (6hh), dnHiiib), hunt, drive /(no)roBopiixb (ib, limb) (3), speak, say \ CKaa^xb (jKy, ^TKeoib) (3), say, tell (no)roHrfxb (hk), euib) (6), hunt (no)ropeB^xb (pibio, eiiib) (Par. 225), grieve, mourn (3a)rpeM'fexb (mjiio, Miimb) (Ex. 49 (c)), thunder *(no)rpecx^ (e6y, eiiib), row *(pa3)rpii3Xb (3:y^, eiub), gnaw, torment (no)ryjijixb (jiio, ri;emb) (10), walk ; be idle naB^it {imperat. of naBdxb, Par. 231), let us, etc. /naB^xb (naib, emb), give Inaxb (3) (jiaM-b, Par. 231) HajiT,, he gave (no)aep>KAxb (>K^,6p>KHiiib) (Par. 149), hold flottxii, see oxoHHXb /aocxHr^xb (&K), aeuib), reach tflocxiirHyxb (ny, emb) {noxo^HXb (>Ky, oflHmb) (48), reach, arrive at Hoaxii (ttfly, emb) (Par. 160) Homejit, mjia {see oxoflHXb) (28), reached (B3)jxpeMaxb (MJiib, 6MJieinb) (55), doze, slumber r(3a)flpo>K^xb (mf, limb) (29), tremble \ Hpornyxb (ny, eiub, or n^, emb) (no)aj'Maxb (aio, aemb) (10), think (no)Hyxb (y^H), emb), blow (c)'fejiaxb (aio, aemb) (2), do, make (c)H'tjiaxbCH (Par. 69), happen, take place, become ecxb (13) {pres. tense of 6iirrb, be), there is, there are r(no)a{axb (>KMy, emb) (Par. 163), press -| (c)}Kaxb (coHMy, emb) \ Ht^xbCfl (43), shrink together r Hiaxb (>KHy, enib) (18, Par. 163), -| reap [ (c)H{axb (cojKH^, emb) (noao)H{H&xb (mjnYy euib) (Par. 163), wait, await, expect (no)Htejiaxb (^H), ^enib) (35), wish, desire (*mem> (52) (>Kry, HOKenib, jKryx-b), -| burn (^CHteqb (cojKry) (no)w^xb (jKHBy, emb) (2, 6), live /3a6oji'feB&xb (km, ^emb), faU ill Xsaeoji-txb (-tio, iemb) (27) /3a6MB6xb (^lo, aemb), forget \3a6uxb (5yay, eim.) (41) (no)3^BxpaKaxb (aio, aemb), breakfast r 3arjiHHBiBaxb (aio, aemb), glance at Vsarjimiyxb (ny', rfnemb) r3aHyMLiBaxb (aio, aeuib), conceive -] a plan (^3aayMaxb (aio, aemb) (28) aamurkTb (610, Aemb) (35), light, kindle 3a}K6ib (HKHmb) /saKpuB^xb (^K), Aemb) (35), cover \3aKp1ixb (p6K), 6emb) ^ Also spelt with o in stem. 212 VOCABULARY OF VERBS /aaM-feq^TB (&I0, ^eniB), notice XaaM-txHTi. (-feny, -feTHim,) (31) raaHHMaxB (^lo, ^eim>) (36), busy, 4 occupy, engage [aaHjiTB (sattMy, eim.) fsanikcuBaTB (aio, aemB), inscribe, 4 enter l^aanHc^Tfc (Hmy, iimemb) {aapaS^THBaxfc (aio, aenn>) (50), earn aapaSoxaTt (aro, aeiiib) /aaptiB^xB (^H>, aems) (53), bury \3ap1i1xb (poK), deuTb) raacxaajijixb (hk), rieiiib) (55), oblige, -J compel, cause [aacxasHXfc (bjiio, bhuib) faacyqaxb or aacy^HBaxB (aio, aeim>) XaacyqiixB (y, yqHnib), roll up aaxonjifixb (hh), rieuib) (46), stoke, keep up fire aaxoniixfc (njiio, 6nmui.) faaxoHHXb (jKy, oaHiiib) /set (of sun) \3aftxH (finy, eiiu,) \go behind (no)3Baxb (aoBy, eiin>) (Par. 185), caU (aa)3BeH'fexb (hio, linib) (54), resound, tinkle (y)3Hdxb (kK), aemb) (2), know andiHXb (qy, ninb) (27), mean aoHfliipoBaxb (pyio, yemt), sound, auscultate / Hrpaxb (km, aeim,) (2), play \ CMrpaxB /naBHHHXb (liK), rieiub), excuse VnaBMHiixb (mb, limb) (Par. 216) rH3o6pa>Kaxb (aio, aenib) (41), depict, -| represent (HaoSpaaiixb (JKy, aiinib) /Hsyqaxb (aio, &emb) \ learn, study \HayuHXb (iiy, yiHiub)/ thoroughly HM-txb ("tic, "feeiiib) (41), have, possess (no)HCKaxb (Hiny-, ]&memb) (28), seek f HxxH (HAy, enib) (Par. 157), go, go -| on foot, be actually going (nottxii Hxxii endxb (46), go to bed Kaa^xbCH (KajKexcH) (50), appear, seem /*K;iiacxb (ajif, emb), put, lay \ nojiojKiixb (>Ky, 6>KHuib) (c)KOBaxb (Kyi5, emb), forge, hammer (c)KOMaHaoBaxb (yK), erab) (56), have command of troops / KOHq^xb (4h), ^emb), finish, end \(o)K6HqHXb (qy, emb) (19) (Ha)KopMHXb (MJiib, opMHmb) (39), feed (no)KpacH'fexb or (3a)KpacH4xb (hio, keuih) (31), blush *(no)Kp&cxb or (y)Kp^cxb (ny, emb), steal r(aa)KpHq&xb (qy, limb) (54), cry, cry J out 1 KpiiKHyxb (ny, enib) (Par. 212), cry 1, out once Kyniixb (see noKyn^xb) (6), buy (no)Kyp6xb or (3a)KypHXb (ib, :^pmnb) (Par. 149), smoke (no)Kymaxb (aio, aemb) (10), eat (co)jir^xb (jiry-, jiJKemb, Jiryxt) (Ex. 54 (a)), tell lies jierx, (15) (see jiontiixbCH), he lay down (no)jiemkTh (my, jKiimb) (10), lie, recline Jieqb {see JiojKHxbCH), lie down (no)jiHXb (jibib, emb) (16), pour jiojKHXbCH (mycb, HiiimbCH) (Par. 141), lie down *jieqb (;iiiiry, jijiHteiiib, jiryxt) *(no)ji't3Xb ("feay, enib), climb (no)jiio6HXb (Sjiib, ibSnuib) (Par. 149), love (no)M6jiJiHxb (k), Hnib) (Par. 212, C), hesitate, delay /MCJibK^xb (aio, aeiiib), flit, flit past \MejibKHyxb (ny, emb) (no)MHpiixb (h), limb) (55), reconcile Mort (6) (past tense of MO'ib), could MdHtex-b (present tense ofmovcb), can, may (npo)M6KHyxb (ny, emb), be wet through (npo)M6jiBHXb (bjik), BHmb), speak, say (no)MOJiiixb (jiib, 6jiHmb), pray (no)MOJiiixbCH (53), say one's prayers (c)MOHb (Mor;^, djKemb, dryxx.) (Par. 168), be able, can, may (no)MyqHXb (iy, mnb), torture, torment (no)M'femaxb (^K), ^emb), prevent, dis- turb rHarH5^xbCH (4iocb, aenibCH) (54), 4 bend, stoop (HarH^xbCH (H^cb, HembCH) (no)Han'tHXbCH (-feiocb, -feembCH) (56), hope CHaabiB^xb (Aid, 4emb), call, name HaaB^Xb (aoBy, emb) HaawB^xbCH (Par. 185), be called 1: VOCABULARY OF VERBS 213 /nanpaBaiiTi. (Am, Aemb), direct (nanp^BHTb (bjik), BHinb) fuaxojiATi, (jKy, 6ji.muh) (64), come J upon, find I HattTii (iifly, emt) (44) VHaxomixbCH (42), be, be found THaqMH^Tb (km, ^eim>) (56), begin Vnaq^Tb (my, enib) HamejiT. (Par. 62), found HeHp^BHTbCH, neg. of Hp^BHTbca *(no)HecTik (necy, enib) (Par. 157), carry, be actually carrying HecTHCb, hurry along Hect (Par. 63), carried (no)HociiTb (my, denmb), carry, be in the way of carrying (no)HpaBHTbCH (BJiiocb, BHuib) (Par. 38), be pleasing roSBHB&Tb (km, kemb) (55), twine -j round, embrace VoSBiiTb (oSoBbib, enib) (no)o6^HaTb (aio, aeuib), dine roBJian-feB^Tb (aio), master, take -I possession I^OBjiaji-feTb (-feio, -feemb) roa-feB&Tb (aio, aeuib) (52), put on, -| dress, clothe Vofl-feTb (iny, emb) (52) I oaapjiTb (riio, rfenib), shine (upon), -| light up [ oaapiiTb (lb , limb) {on^cbiBaTb (km, aemb) (56), de- scribe onHC^Tb (my, limemb) {ocB-fem&Tb (km, ^emb), illumine ocB-feTiiTb ("femy, 'fexHinb) {ocM^TpHBaxb (aio, aemb), survey, inspect OCMOTp-feTb (pib, dxpHiiib) rocTaB^xbCH (ocTaibcb, embCH), re- -| main, be left, stay VocTdTbCfl (dnycb, embcn) (27) {ocxaBJijiTb (Am, ^ienib) (55), leave, forsake OCT^BHTb (bJIK), BHUIb) foTBoaikTb (>Ky , dannib), convey away \oTBe3Tii (3f, emb) (27) /oTB-feH^Tb (km, ^einb) (19), answer XoTB-feTHTb (iiy, "fexHIIIb) J OTroHjiTb (Am, jiemb), drive, chase -| away (oTroHdTb (oTroHib, dHHmb) (16) /oTHBHr&Tb (km), remove \oT(o)HBliHyTb (ny, nemb) /oTHMx^Tb (km, ^enib) (18), rest \oTaoxHyTb (h;^, emb) {oTKpuBATb (km, ^emb) (35), uncover, open OTKpiiTb (6io, 6eiiib) (22) f oTi^jiHBaTb (aio, aemb), unmoor, cast off OTH^JIHTb (H), Hmb) oTh-kamkTb (km, &enib), drive off, start OT-b-fexaxb ("feny, emb) omi^nbiBaxb (aio, aemb), palpate, finger om^axb (aK), aemb) /n^Haxb (aio, aemb) (Par. 159 note), fall \nacTb (ajif, enib) (Bc)naxaTb (namy', ^meiiib) (Par. 168), plough nepettay (Par. 160), see nepexo6Tb TnepexomiTb (my, 6aHmb),go through, -j across (nepeiiTH (eiAjif, emb) (Ha)nHc^Tb (my, nmemb) (Par. 168), write (BiJi)nHTb (nbio, nbemb) (Par. 162), drink (3a)naaKaTb or (no)nMKaTb (k^y, emb) (27 and 53), weep, bewail, lament nji^KaxbCH, wail (intrans.) (3a)njiaTiiTb (aiy, ^xHmb) (Par. 208), pay noGji'feAH'feTb, see Gji-fe^H-feTb rnoS-feHta^Tb (km, keun>) (56), conquer, 4 vanquish l^noS-fefliiTb ("kmuf, 'l^nilmb) / noflMeT^Tb (aio, ^enib) (55), sweep up \*nonMecTii (erf, emb) {nojiHHMdxb (km, ^enib) (54), lift, raise nojiHHTb (HHMy, Am emb) (22) noHKHM^TbCH, rise (nojixomixb (mf, dniraib), go up to; -| resemble ( noHoiixH (iiy, emb) fnojKHB^xb (km, demb) (35), live, -] dwell VnoHoiTb (>KHB^, emb) /noK^3biBaTb (aio, aemb) (52), show \n0Ka3ATb (mf, ^Htemb) (3) {noKHH&Tb (^10, ^eiiib) (55), abandon, leave in the lurch noKriiiyxb (y, eim>) noKpacirtxb, see Kpacirfexb /noKynaxb (km, keuib) (53), buy \Kyniixb (njiib, ynnmb) (6) Tnojiar^xb (^10, 4eiiib) (35), suppose, J think l^nojioHoixb (my, dmwnh) (ofoo= put) 214 VOCABULARY OF VERBS /nojiHBAxb (Aio, Aeim.) (43), water i.nojiHTt (jii>K), bemt.) nojiojKHTi. {see KJiacxt,) lay, put /nojiyq^Tt (dio, deiiib) (52), receive \nojiyqHTb (yiy, ^qninb) (Par. 98) (Bc)n6MHHTi> (h), Huib), remember; cm;^ noMHHTCH, he remembers (Par. 147) /noMoraxb (aio, 4erab) (53), help \noM6qb (ory, 6>Kemb, 6ryTh) {noHHM^Tb (^H), Aemb) (6), under- stand noHiiTb (noiiMy^, erab) TnonaAaTb (aio, ^emb), faU upon, light -{ upon VnondcTb (any, emb) (Hc)n6pTHTb (6pqy, dpxHmb) (39), spoil, ruin /nopbiBaxb (^H), aeim>), tear \nopBaTb (pBy, eiiib) nopMB^TbCH, strive for, try hard nocji^Tb {see nocbiJiaxb), send nocMarpHBaTb (aio, aemb) (55), look at, observe nOCMOTP'feTb (h), dTpHmb) nocxaBJiHTb (hk), fieuib) (55), set, set up, erect nocxaBHXb (bjifo, BHinb) rnocxynaxb (aio, Aemb) (44), behave, -| act, enter upon Vnocxyniixb (njiio, yoHmb) (16) /nocbiJi^xb (4io, ^euib) (53), send Inocji^xb (mjiib, emb) (10) [noc-femaxb {km, aemb) (19), visit, -| frequent VnoctxHXb (-ferny, "fexiiuib) nocfenjiH, see c-feaxb / noxpHc^xb (^K), aemb) (54), shake l*noxpHCXH {cf, emb) /noiHHHXb (liio, Hemb) (46), repair InoqHHiixb (w, liHBtmb) fnoHurkTb {Am, &ena>) (Par. 185), I esteem, regard, consider \noq6cxb ('ixjf, emb) noHHX&xbCH, be considered as nomejix>, mji& (10) {see hxx6), went noicxb, see -fecxb /npewnoiHx^xb {Am, aemb), prefer \npennoHecxb (qxy, emb) /npeHCxaBJirixb (hid, Hemb), represent Vnpeacx^BHXb (bjiio, Bumb) rnpH5jiH}Kaxb {km, ^emb), bring -| nearer VnpH5Jiii3HXb (liJKy, iiaimib) npH6jiHH<&xbCH, approach rnpHroxoBJiflXb (liio, lieiiib) (18), pre. -| pare (^npHrox6BHXb (bjiio, BHmb) npHHaHJieH^^xb (my, ikmb) (Par. ,141), belong /npHHHMaxb (aio, &emb), accept \npHHrixb (npHMy, laiviemb) rnpHHociixb (ouiy, 6cHmb) (52), bring -j npHHCcxH (cy, emb) (52) (npuHecx. (Par. 63), he brought rnpHxoHiixb {my, d^nmb) (56), arrive, J come (on foot) j npHxxH {ujif, emb) l^npnmejib, mji^, etc. (Par. 62), came npiHHyx-b (Par. 160), will come, are to come Tnpi'feaHiaxb {km, 6eiiib), arrive (not -| on foot) (npi-txaxb (-fejiy, emb) (Par. 97) rnpoBOHHXb (my, djmmb) (55), lead -j through, spend (time) ^npoBecxii (ejiy, emb) /npoflaB^xb (aaib, emb), sell \npoflaxb (aMb) (Par. 231) rnpoflojiHtaxb (^10, ^emb) (35), con- A tinue [npoji6ji>KHXb (6ji>Ky, 6ji>Kikmb) npofifly, see npoxofliixb, go through (no)npocHXb (my, 6cHiiib) (53), beg, request 'npoxofliixb {my, 6HHiiib) (52), tra- verse, go through npottxii (ftAy, emb) (52) npomejn>, mjia, 6, A (Par. 62), tra- versed rnpomaxb {km, ^enib) (52), pardon, I remit 1 npocxiixb (om^, cxiimb) (52) inpom^xbCH, bid farewell /npiiraxb (aio, aemb) (2), jump about \npiirHyxb (ny, emb), jump (once) *(no)np}icxb (nay, eim.) (Par. 157), spin /nycK&xb {km, ^eiiib) (28), let, admit \nycxHXb (ymy, ycxHmb) (52) nycxb, let ! (Par. 215) (c)n'fexb (noH), emb) (Par. 165), sing (no)pa56xaxb (aio, aemb) (2), work {o6)pkjioBaTb (ayio, emb) (53), delight (o6)panoBaxbCH, rejoice, be glad rpasroBJiflXbCH (rfioeb, liembCH) (53) J paaroB-ixbCH (-feiocb, -tembCH), eat 1 meat for the first time after the I. fast VOCABULARY OF VERBS 215 rpaaa-bBaxb (km, &einb) (52), undress J {trans. ) I paaa-fexb (iny, -tHenib) (52) l^pasfl-feB^TbCH, undress (m (ifero, 'temt), understand paayM-fecTCH (55), it is understood, it goes without saying *(Bii)pacTH or pocxH (cxy, euib), grow (Ha)pHcoBaTB (cyio, euib) (19), draw /posKji^TBCH (^locb, keuibcn), be born \poaiiTi>CH (Htycb, niiuiBCfl) (47) (no)pi.iTb (p6io, 6emb) (53), dig (no)p6TbCH, stir up, rummage about in {p-feuiaxb (^lo, aeuib) (35), solve, resolve p-femHTb (y, 6mt) (28) (no)caaiiTt (JKy, kwkuib), plant / cajxHETbCH (jKycb, ^HiiuibCH), sit down t.*c'fecTi> (cjiay, euib) (15) rcGHBaxb (^K), aemb), knock off, A lead astray l^cSnxb (co5bK), erab) ca-fejiaxb (see aifejiaxb), do, make (no)cHfl'fexb ()Ky, HHUib) (15), sit (3a)cirfxb (fiio, riemb) (16), shine JcK^awBaxb (aio, aemb), relate \cKaaaxb (my, antemb) (3), tell, say TcKJi^auBaxb (aio, aemb), put to- I gether, fold \CKaacxb (aAy, emb) cjiojKHXb (my, 6>KHiin>) also means compose /cKOjibaiixb (my, aiimb), slide, glide \cKOJib3Hyxb (uy, emb) CKOiiqaxbca (aiocb, dembca) (47), die {CKpbiBaxb (kjo, ^emb) (31), hide, conceal CKpbixb (p6K), 6emb) (31) (no)cjiy}KHXb (my, ymnmb) (Par. 149), serve /cJiyi^xbCH (aexcH), happen \cjiyquxbCH (-^uxcn) (16) (no)cjiymaxb (aio, aemb) (35), listen (y)cjibimaxb (y, umb) (29), hear (no)cMOxp-fexb (i5, dxpumb) (Par. 149), contemplate, look upon, consider (no)cMtiUHXb or (Ha)cM'feinH[xb {^, limb) (56), make laugh (3a)cM'ferfxbCH ("feibcb, -feeuxbCH) (Par. 157), laugh {CHHM^xb (^H), ^euib), take down, take off CHHXb (cHHMy', liMeim.) (Par. 98) cojiraji-b, see Jiraxb Tcnac^xb (Aio, Aeuib), save -I cnacxii (cy, emb) icnac-b (15), he saved (no)cnAxb (cnjiib, cniimb) (2), sleep [ cnpamHBaxb (aio, aemb) (19), ques- -| tion, ask [cnpociixb (my, 6cHmb) (19) (no)cxABHXb (bjik), BHiub) (55), set, stand {CXaHOBHXbCfl (BJIlbCb, dSHmbCH), become cxaxb (16) (cxAny, emb), become, set about, begin (no)cxapaxbCH (aiocb, aeuibCH) (31), try, strive, endeavour TcxdHXb (oH), 6Him>) (9), cost, be -! worth ; ne cxohxt., don't mention I it (no)cxojixb (oi5, oiimb) (9), stand (no)cxp6HXb (6io, dumb) (10), build '(no)cxyiAxb (qy-, limb) (54), knock cxyKiiyxb (ny, emb) cinxaxb (aio, aemb) (56), count, reckon cqecxb (eoqx^, emb) clicKHBaxb (aio , aeiub) (Ex. 55 A (a)), seek out CMCK&xb (emu^, i^memb) c-feji-b (15) (see ca^iixbcfl), he sat down c-fecxb (see cajnixcH), sit down *(Bbi)c'feib or *(no)c'feHb (-feKy, -feqemb, feKyx-b), chop up; flog (no)c'feflxb ("feio, -feemb) (6), sow (no)xeMH-fexb or (3a)xeMH4Tb (iio, -ieiiib) (46), grow dark (Ha)xK4xb or (c6)xKaxb (xny, qemb, Kyxi) (Par. 157), weave rxojiKaxbCH (Aiocb, AeuibCH), strike, -! knock against VxojiKHyxbCH (nycb, embCfl) (Hc)xonHXb (njiib, dnumb) (46), heat, stoke {xp6raxb (aio, aemb) (35), touch, move xpdiiyxb (ny, emb) (no)xflHyxbCH (xHHycb, jinembCH) (48), extend (intrans.) 216 VOCABULARY OF VEEBS /yS-fer^Tb (^lo, Aemb), run away XyG-fewK^Tb (try, jkhiiib, ryxt) (16) [ ynaw^TB (Aio, 4emi>), respect, -| esteem [ yB^HtHTJb (jKy, KHnii>) TyroHiiTb (riio, jieuib), drive, hunt -j away (^yrii^Tb (roHib, dHHUib) /ynapiiTB (rfio, jteuib), strike \yfl^pHTB (K), HUIfc) TyaHaB^Tb (yanaib, emi.), recognize, -! get to know (ysHaxB (yaiiaio, eim>) (22) jyunpk-Tb (aio, ^erni.) (42), die \yMep6Tb (yMpy, emt) (Par. 96) TyMfciB^Tb (^Hj, ^emb) (52), wash -{ (face and hands, etc.) [ yivrfiTb (yM6io, 6emb) (52) (c)yM'feTb (fkio, -feeuib) (35), under- stand, know how to, be able /ynafl^Tb (^lo, &emb), fall (off), sink \yn&CTb (any, enib) ynaji-b (15), he fell r ynoxpeSJiHTb (hk), jienib) (35), use \ynoTpe6iiTb (6jik), 6iimb) {ycxp^HBaTb (aio, aeuib) (55), arrange ycxpoiixb (6io, 6Hnib) / ycbinaxb (^lo, &emb), fall asleep \ycHyxb (Hy, emb) r yxBep>K;iaxb (aio, aeuib), affirm, -{ strengthen t yxBcparixb (pH{()^, pHiiiiib) {yxoanxb (>Ky, 6flHmb) (55), go away; escape yfiXH (iifly, eiiib) {(Ha)yqHXb (y^y, ^HHiiib) (19), teach (Ha)yHHXbCH (19), learn, study yniixb Hanaycxb, learn by rote ymeji-b.mjia, etc. (34) (see yxcjiiixb), went away (no)xBajiHXb (lb, ajiumb) (39), praise xoHHxb (xoHty', xdflHmb) (2, Par. 149), go, be in the habit of going (3a)xox'fexb (6; Par. 222), wish xdHeim. (46 ; Par. 222) n^pcxBOBaxb (cxByio, emb) (48), rule, reign *(3a)tiBecxik (-fexy, emb), bloom (no)qHCXHXb or (BiJi)HHCXHXb (limy, licxHmb) (56), clean (no)qHxaxb (aio, aeuib) (19), read (no)iyBCXBOBaxb (BCXByio, yemb), feel /mar^xb (aio, ^emb), step, stride \marHyxb (ny, emb) mejib, mjia, etc. {see iixxii), went /(npo)menxaxb (nny, 6nqemb), whisper \^ mennyxb (ny, emb) mnxb (lubio, mbenib) (Par. 162), sew (c)mHXb (combib, euib) fejib, past tense of -fecxb (no)'fccxb (6 ; Par. 220), eat (no)'fexaxb (iny, -tjiemb) (Par. 97), go by any conveyance, not on foot RUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY Verbs are given in a special vocabulary on pp. 210-216, and do not appear in this vocabulary. Of nouns the nominatives singular and plural, and occasionally the genitive plural, are given. When the noun ends in -t or when any other cause of ambiguity is present, the gender is marked. Otherwise nouns in -t, -ft are masculine ; nouns in -a, -h are feminine ; nouns in -o, -e, -Mfl are neuter. When a masculine noun ^ is printed : I. Bt-taa-b, Bi, the accent remains throughout on the stem ; II. rdj^h, a, the accent in the singular is on the stem and in the plural on the termination ; III. flBopT>, li, the accent falls throughout on the termination. IV. b6jiki., h (dBi.), all cases of the singular and the nominative plural are accented on stem, oblique cases in plural have accent on termination. Of adjectives the predicative forms (see Lesson XLIX), when in common use, are given in the lists in Par. 237. ' Regularly derived adverbs in -o (see Par. 189 (1)) are not always separately mentioned. The number enclosed in brackets indicates the vocabulary, paragraph, or exercise where a phonetic transcript of the word will be found. a (1), and, but ^BrycTT., H (47), August 6BTopi>, BI, author 636yKa, H, alphabet, ABC book Ahcti., bi, I (37), stork AjiBKC^HHpa, Alexandra AjieKc^nHpi,, Alexander aHrjiHq^HHH'b, ^ne (34), Englishman anrjinqaHKa, h (Par. 230), Englishwoman aHrjiIticKitt (13), English AhfjiIh (34), England anp-fejib, H (m.) (47), April 665a, bi (14), peasant-woman 6&6yuiKsi, H (12), grandmother, woman e^pHH-b, 66pe (55), master, lord old 66cHH, H (eni) (39), fable 66TK)mKa, H (m.) (46), father, dear father 6e3npecT&HHo (36), incessantly SeanpecT^HHbiii, continual, incessant Seat, 5630 (4), without Ceper-b, 6, II (10), shore, bank 6JiH>Ke, nearer 6jiiijKHifi[ {adj.) (52), neighbour 6jiH3Kift, near 6jiH3'b {gen.) (Par. 70), near Sji-fenHbiii (31), pale eor^TCTBo, a (50), riches, wealth 6oraTHii (5), rich Gor^ue, richer B6r'b, H (dB-b) (53), God B6>Ke! (53), O God ! Sojir^pHHT,, 6pe (Par. 230), Bulgar BojirAplH, Bulgaria 6ojirapKa, H (Par. 230), Bulgarian woman eojibHiina, bi (27), infirmary, hospital ^ With many nouns, and especially with monosyllables, the use of the figures I, II, etc. not necessary. 217 218 RUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 6ojibH6ii (4), sick, ill 66abme (32), more; 66ai>me Bcer6 (50), more than all, most 65jibmitt (Par. 195), greater, larger Sojibiudtt (5), great, large, grown up 66ji-fee (40), more Soji-fesHeHHtitt, sickly eoji-fesHb, H (/.) (27), disease, sickness Span, TbH (eBi) (3), brother epHxAHCKitt (50), British SyflexT. {impers. verb) (54), that will do, enough e^nymitt (Par. 128), future, coming SyKBaJitHua, literal, exact 6yM^ra, h (19), paper 6m, 61. (Par. 199), conditional particle diiK-b, H (49), ox SbiJib, H (/.) (53), true story GucTpbitt, quick, sudden eijmocTb (/.) (17), poverty S-fe^HbEa (5), poor 6'fe.ribitt (1), white BAra-b, a, e, H (7), your, yours Bflpyr-b (27), suddenly Bcapd, epa (13), pail Besfl-fe (56), everywhere BejiiiKift (25), great BejiHKOJi^nHbitt (40), splendid, magni- ficent BepSjiibH-b, M (48), camel BepeBKa, h (43), rope BepcT^, epcTM (48), verst (1067 metres) Bepx6Mi, (Par. 48), on horseback; ixaxb BepxdM-b, to ride BfepxT,, H (10), top, summit BecejiMtt (56), merry, glad, jolly Becji6, ecjia, oar BecM, ecHM (18), spring (season); BecH6H), ofi, in spring Becb, BOH, Bce, Bc-fe (Par. 106), all, entire BecbM^, very, extremely B^qep-b, k (18), evening; BeqepoM-b, in the evening B6mb, H (/.) (39), thing, affair BsaflT. (44), backwards B3p6cjibitt (46), grown-up, adult Biiaubiti, visible, evident BiiflT., M, sight, view, aspect bhh6, -^a (43), wine BiicfejiHua, bi, gallows B^cfejibHHKT., H, man who has been hanged BKycHutt (7), nice, tasty Bjiafl-fenie, H (48), possession, territory BM-tcTo {gen.) (Par. 70), instead of BM-fecT-fe (36), together BHcsanHLili (54), sudden BHHSb, down(stream) BHHM^xejibHbia (19), attentive BHyKa, H, granddaughter BHyK-b, H (3), grandson BHyqKa, h (14), little granddaughter Bo^B-b, in, into BOBce (34), at all, completely; BdBce hb, not at all BOH^, -^M (12), water Bo6HHMft (56), military, warlike Bdsji-fe {gen.) (Par. 70), beside, near B03M6>KHbitt (Par. 41), possible BoitHa, -M (28), war BdiicKO, k (56), army BOKs^ji-b, u (19), railway-station BdjiK-b, H (dB-b) (37), wolf BOJiH^, -bi, wave B6jibHbili, free Bopdxa {neut. pi.) (55), gate B6pb, bi (oBT.) (50), thief BoceMH^Huaxb (Par. 148), eighteen B6ceMb (36), eight BoceMbHecflxT, (Par. 150), eighty BoceMbcox'b (181 (6)), eight hundred BOCKpeceHie, resurrection, Easter BOCKpec6Hbe, h (Par. 128), Sunday BocxdR-b, I (48), East BocbMHaeciixbiti, eightieth BocbMHcdxbiii (Par. 184), eight-hundredth BocbM6ft (Par. 166), eighth Boxb (2), here is ! there is I there are I BuepeA'b (44), forwards Bparb, li (56), enemy bp6mh, mcM {n.) (Par. 219), time Bce (18), all, entire; always BcerAa (18), always Bcer6, gen. case of Bccb, etc. Bcibay (56), everywhere BOH, fern. sing, of Bscb BcriKia (36), each, every Bx6pHHK'b, H (47), Tuesday Bxop6ft (Par. 166), second Biep^ (16), yesterday Bb, BO {ace. or prep.) (10), in, into B-bisHb, M (10), entrance Bbi (Par. 80), you BbipajKCHie, H, expression Bbicdidtt (30), high, tall Bbicox^, oxu (45), height Bbicmitt (Par. 195), higher, highest RUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 21& Biiime Bcerd, higher than all, highest B'hjib (41), ^y, surely B-tKT,, H or k (48), age, century, lifetime B-fepHo, truly ; iie B-fepno? (56), is it not so? B^pHtifl, true, faithful B^Tepi., xpH or k, wind ra* (2), where reHep^ji-b, bi (56), general repMaHiH (34), Germany rep6H, H (5), hero repoiinH, h (14), heroine rii6ejib, h (/.) (50), ruin rjianKiti, smooth rjidai,, k (i.) (16), eye rjiy66Kitt (30), deep rjiynbrti (1), stupid rHHJi6tt, decayed ra-feaad, -a (43), nest roBop^miii, the person speaking I rdfli., k (10), year ^ rojioBd, r6;ioBu (16), head roJioHHMa (42), hungry rdjioc-b, ky II (29), voice rojibitt, naked rdnqiii (40), hunting (dog) rop^ano (32), by far r6pe, A (28), grief, misfortune rdpofli,, k, II (27), town r6pie, more bitter r6pbKifi, bitter ropHHiti (Par. 94), hot rocn6b (m.) {gen. sing. r6cnoa) (54), the Lord rocyH^pcTBo, a (48), state, empire rocyflapb, h (m.) (48), ruler roTdsMii, ready rpajKHamiHt, ^ne (Par. 230), burgher, citizen rpamina, m (44), frontier rpeSeu-b, 6mi, III, rower rpHS-b, li (49), mushroom rpo3^, -^bi (49), thunder-storm rpoM^aHbift (34), enormous rpdMKift (29), loud rpdM-b, bi (^B-b) (49), thunder rpyjta, u, heap, lot rpynb, H (/.), breast rpjisHbiii (13), dirty ryGepulH (42), a government rycxda, thick, dense i^cb, H (6ft) (m.) (49), goose Ha (6), yes, and, but aBHiS[Mi.-HaBH6 (21), long ago flaBH6, long, long since H^me (18), even flajieKitt (45), far, remote n^jibme, H^ji-fee, farther H&Ma, bi (12), lady H^mibiit, given naTqaHHH-b, aiie (Par. 230), Dane nkHSL, H, summer resort HBa, SB-fe (7), two flB^auaxb (36), twenty HBepb, H (6ii) (/.) (Par. 64), door HBop^n-b, pm^iy III (5), palace ABop-b, li (36), court, yard; na nBop-fe (Ex. 18, A), out of doors HBopHmiH-b, jine (Par. 230), nobleman (courtier) Byxc6Tbitt (Par. 184), two-hundredth HB-feH^nnaxb (Par. 148), twelve HB-tcTH (Par. 155), two hundred eBHH6cTo (Par. 150), ninety HeBHTHc6Tbiii (Par. 184), nine -hundredth acBHTH^nuaxB (Par. 148), nineteen fleBHTb (36), nine ji;eBflTbc6T'b, nine hundred flCK^Spb, 6 (w.). Ill (47), December HCHb, HHH (w.) (18), day 6HbrH (/. pi.) (40), money Acp^BHH, H (6Hb) (18), hamlet (without church) ; bt. Hep6BH'fe, in the country n6peBo, k or cbbh (bes-b) (37), tree HepeBHfflibiit (9), wooden H6cHTb (36), ten nem^BJie, cheaper HcmeBbiit, cheap HHB^H'b, w, couch HiiKitt (Par. 92), wild flHTH, n-fexH (ji.) (Par. 229), child njiiiHHbitt (16), long AJiH {gen.) (4), for flHCMi. (Par. 68), by day flHo, 6HbH (beBT.), bottom flo {gen.) (Par. 70), up to, till, before floGpoT^ (39), goodness, kindness H66pbili (1), good, kind flOBdjibHo (55), sufficiently, fairly, rather nojKHb, li (m.) (42), rain HOKTopi., ^, II, doctor jl6jiritt (30), long fldJiro {adv.) (43), long adjimen-b, predicative of n^JimHua (42), obliged, compelled 220 KUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY ndma (8), at home noM^uinifl (24), domesticated, tame ndMHKT.. H (9), little house noMdii, home, homewards H6MTb, & (l), house nop6ra, H (50), way, road Hopordii, op6}Ke (50), dear, dearer HOCK&, -^H (19), board jxd'iKa, H (14), little daughter HciB, fldqepH (Par. 86), daughter HP^Ka, H (16), fight, scrimmage upoB^ {n. pi.) (46), firewood, timber UpoHtdmitt (29) trembling pyr6ft (5), other, second Apyrt, py3b}4 (36tt) (Par. 15), friend Hpynb, npyra (44), one another; npyrt CB npyroM-B (46), with each other HPj'jKdKi,, li. III (14), little friend, dear friend HySi,, bi (38), oak HypHofi (18), bad, hateful H^mHMii, close, oppressive niBOHKa (12), little girl nieymKa, h (37), girl (growing up) H-feHymKa, h (eKt) (m.) (46), grandfather H-fefli., BI (1), grandfather H-feticTBHTejibHO (50), really, indeed n-fejio, & (34), deed, affair, business H-fexH {n. pi) (Par. 229), children n^TCTBo (41), childhood H-feHxejifcHbiii, active jijiHH, H or Bji (b6bb) (w.) (29), uncle er6 (2), him, of him, his, it, its ejxB^ (43), hardly, scarcely eateHH^BHBitt (42), daily eMy- (Par. 21), to him 6CJ1H (34), if ecTB (13), there is, there are eme (16), still eA (12), her, of her, hers Ht&jiKitt, piteous, pitiful jK&jiKo (49), it is a pity Ht^pKiii (18), hot Ht^TBa, BI (18), harvest, crops jKe (37), for, but, yet, on the other hand, though, too, anyway jKCJiTBitt (23), yellow jKeji-fesHBia (50), of iron >Keji-fe30, a (Par. 194), iron JKBH^, eHH (27), wife HtfemnHiia, BI (12), woman w6pTBa, H, victim, sacrifice HtHB6ft, living, alive HHBdTHoe {n. adj.) (24), animal jKiiflKift, thin (of fluids) H3HB (/.) (49), life jKHJiBc, -^H (39), dwelling JK^pHBllt, fat jKiixejiB, H (m.) (54), inhabitant jKiJTo, a (18), crops, com jKyp&BJib, Tk (m.). Ill (37), crane 3a (ace, instr.) (Par. 44), behind, for, at; HH 3^ ^xo, not at any price; 1TO 3a-? what sort of ? 3a66Ta, u, care 3^BTpa (Par. 68), to-morrow s^BxpaK-B, H (34), breakfast, lunch sajikna, H (36), exercise, problem s^jia, BI, hall, drawing-room 3^MOKB, 3^MKH, Castlo 3aM6K'B, 3aMKH, III (21), lock 3&najiB, I (48), west 3aqi;MB (10), for what, why sB-tpb, H (61i) (m.) (37), wild beast 3fl&Hie, H, I (7), building 33;op6BBiii (4), well, healthy 3Hop6Bbe, health 3Ap&BCTByttTe! (Par. 216) {imperative mood of sHp^BCTBOBaxb (Byio, yemb), good day ! how are you ? hail ! 3Htcb (3), here sejieHwti (16), green 3eMJiri, -^H (6nb) (21), land, earth 3hm6, -^bi (2), winter 3HM6fi (Par. 68), in winter 3Ji6ii, bad, cross, spiteful 3HaK6MBifi (41), known BH^K-b, H (23), sign 3H^MH, ena (Par. 219), banner sH^Hie, H (50), knowledge ankHvu-h (pres. tense of ank^mrb) (27), that means, that is 36JIOTO (29), gold 30JioT6tt (29), golden 30JI1., predicative form of sjioft ap^jinme, a, sight, spectacle H H (1), and, also ii6o (conj.) (36), for Hrp6, -^Bi (Par. 60), game H36^, -^u (42), peasant-house, hut H3BHmiTe! (Par. 216) {imperative mood), excuse me I RUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 221 H3BtcTHHtt (45), well-known, certain H3o6paataiomift {pres. part.) (40), re- presenting Hsi., H30 (gen.) (Par. 70), out, out of, from Hat-aa igen.), from behind lijiH (18), or HMnepaTopt, u (48), emperor HMt (Par. 21) (dat.), to them liMH, HMenA (Par. 219), name HHor4 (18), sometimes HHocTpAHem, HnM (34), foreigner HHTep6cHfcitt (41), interesting Hcn^HCKlft (50), Spanish Hcnp^Biibifi (56), correct, exact UxkniPL (34), Italy HTEJibiiHCKiti, Italian HXT, (Par. 21), them, of them, their iiojii,, H (47), July libHb, H (47), June K KaCHH^Ti,, w, I, private room Kamaua (36), each KaK6Bi> (2), predicative of KaKOBdii? which ? what sort of ? , KaK6ii? (6), which ? what sort of ? KaK6ii-HH6yHi (55), some or other KaKT. (2), how, as KaK-b paat (16), just, just as it happened K^MeHHBift (9), of stone K&MCHt, MHH (6ft) (W.), StOUO KaoHxaHCKift, belonging to the captain Kapana^m-B, h. III (Par. 67), pencil KapxiiHa, u (37), picture K&ma, H (56), gruel Kaeenpa, u (19), pulpit, teacher's desk KBapxHpa, ti (40), flat, dwelling KB&c-b, I, kvass (beverage made with rye-bread and malt) KiicjiBitt (7), sour KJikKb, M (53), treasure KJi^ccHMft (19), class, belonging to class- room KJHoq-b, li (21), key KHiira, H (18), book KHjiat, hA (aeft) (m.) (8), prince KO=K'b Korn^ (2), when Kor6? (Par. 21), whom ? whose ? KdjKa, H (12), leather, skin Koiak, if K0Jibu6, K6jibna (29), ring KOJi-tHo, a (55), knee K6MHaTa, w (21), room KOMy (Par. 21), to whom KOMT. (prep, of KTo) (10), whom KOHT6pa, bi, office KOHibmHH, H (17), stable Kon6eHKa, h, a little copeck KoneftKa, h (Par. 153), copeck Kop^Sjib, li, III (m.), ship Kop6Ba, bi (21), cow Kopoji6Ba, w (48), queen Kopdjib, H, III (w.) (9), king Kop6TKift (30), short Kopdie, shorter K6pnyc'b, k, II, corps (of officers) KocA, -^bi (18), scythe KdcTb, H (eft) (/.)* (49), bone KOxeHOK-b, Tfixa (Ex. 16, C), kitten KOTopbift {relat. pron. ; relat. or interrog. adj.) (7), who, which K6mKa, H (12), cat KpMnift (Par. 82), extreme, last; no Kp^ftHcft M-tpi, at least KpacHBuft (9), beautiful KpdcHbift (19), red; beautiful Kpecjio, a (9), arm-chair KpecTbfiHHn'b, jine (18), peasant KpoB^xb, H (/.) (31), bedstead KpdBb (/.), blood KpbM-fe (gen.) (Par. 70), besides, except; KpdM* Tord, besides (that) KpdxKitt, gentle KpyrJibift (16), round Kpyxdft, stiflF, abrupt, thick KpinKift (29), firm, strong Kxo (2), who KySiimKa, h (54), jug, pot Kyn^ (2), whither KyHa-xo, to somewhere or anywhere Kyanen-b, li. III (48), smith KyneuT., niw. III (23), merchant KycdK-b, CKii, III (13), piece, bit Kj^xHH, H (oHb or OH-b) (21), kitchcu Kyqa, H (55), heap, lot Kj^maiibe, a (7), food KT., KG {dat.) (Par. 39), towards, to K-feMx.? (ci.) (9) (interrog.), with whom ? ' ji^Mua, bi (35), lamp ji^na, bi (12), paw jiauKa, H (49), little paw jicBT., jibBbi (37), lion jierKitt (25), light, easy jierne, easier jiejK^HKa, H (55), bench by the stove 222 EUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY jiH, Jib, interrogative particle (Par. 12), whether (jiHc4) jiHCHita, w (37), fox jiHu6, -^a, face; person jidKa, H (49), boat jion^xa, u (53), spade ji6maHi>, H (6tt) (/.) (17), horse jiyn>, 6 (10), meadow jiyM, -^bi, moon ji^qmitt (Par. 195), better, best ji-&Hi)Bbifi (19), idle, lazy ji-fenb (/.) (39), laziness ji-fecTHHna, u (22), stair Ji-fecb, ^ (1), wood, forest ji-feTO, k (2), summer, year ji-feroMb (2), in summer jiK)663Hbitt (41), amiable, dear jiio56Bb {gen. 6Bii) (/.) (39), love jiio6oniiTCTBO, a, curiosity nibHH (w. pl.)f 6ft (42), people M M&tt, H (47), May M&jiem>Kitt (5), little, small M^ao {adv.) (6), little Majibiti (40), little M&JIbHHKb, H (1), boy M^px-b, bi (47), March M^cKa, H (oKx), mask M&cjio, a (9), butter M^xepH, see Maxb, mother MaxepHHCKifl, motherly M^xymKa, h (bki) (46), mother, dear mother Maxb, Maxepii (Par. 86), mother MamiiH&jibHO (31), mechanically, absently M66ejib (/.) (46), furniture McnB-fenb, H, I (8), bear M6jiJieHHbiii (32), slow M6mffy {instr. or gen.) (16), between, among M^JiKitt, small, fine M^Hbiue, M^H-fee {adv. and adj.) (40), less ; M^Hbme Bcer6, least M6Hbraitt (Par. 195), smaller, less MeHbm6ft (Par. 195), younger, youngest MBHrf (3), me, of me MepxBHtt (Par. 190), dead Mex6jib,H (/.) (46), snow-storm, blizzard MHJiJiidHT., M (Par. 155), million MiiJiwii (40), nice, dear M^MO {prep, with gen. ; adv.) (Par. 62), past MHHricxp-b, bi (9), minister MHH^xa, bi (Par. 181 (c)), minute Miip-b, I (55), peace Mipx,, li (39), world; village community MJian6ft= Moaojx6ti MJi^amitt (19), younger, youngest MHcJro (2), much MHdroHHCJieHHbiii (40), numerous MH6>KecxBo, a (40), a lot, large number MH6ii, mh6io (9), (with etc.) me MH-fe (Par. 21) {dat. or prep.), me MH^Hie, H (34), opinion Moryiitt (9), mighty Mdatex-b-Suxb (32), may be, perhaps MdJKHO (4), it is possible M63rb, ri, brain, marrow M6ii, MOH, Moe, moh (Par. 104), my, mine Mditpbift (18), wet, damp MOJiHXBa, M (54), prayer MOJiofldtt (1), young MOJIOK6 (16), milk MOH^xa, bi (54), money, coin M6pe, ri (7), sea Mop63i>, bi (18), frost MdcTh, ik (10), bridge My>KHKb, ik. III (3), peasant MyHiqiina, u (23), man M^m-bj MyjKbrf (6ii), husband Mbi (Par. 80), we Miimb, H (6ii) (/.) (38), mouse M-fejib, I (19), chalk M-fepa, bi (22), measure M-fecxo, & (16) place M-fecHirb, bi, I (44), month, moon M'femaHHH'b, ^He (Par. 230), small towns- man MriFKiii (25), soft MHco (13), flesh, meat H Ha {ace. and prep.) (10), on to, on HaBcxp-feqy, towards, to meet Hajio (49), it is necessary; Mn-fe ukjio, I have to, I must Haa-b, naao {instr.) (Par. 127), over, above Haa^-b (21), back, ago HaHsycxb (39), by heart HaKOH^n-b (10), at last HanpaBJiHie, h, direction Hanp6xHB'b (50), but, on the contrary; {prep, with gen.), opposite napdwb, bi, I (27), people nacxoriiuiii (Par. 128), present; real HaxdflKa, H (53), a find Hai^ao, a (28), beginning Ham-b (7), our, ours RUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 223 He (1), not h66o, iieSec^ (7), sky, heaven iier6, form used for ero after prepositions Hen^BHo (41), recently, not long since He^-tjiH, H (43), week H6>KejiH=q-feMTb (Par. 194), than He3HaK6Mbitt, unknown, strange HeKpaciiBbitt (9), ugly, not pretty Hejifcsji (Par. 41), (it is) impossible HeMH6ro (2), a little, not much, some- what HeM^=eM:(' after prep. Henpijixejib, h (66), enemy HenpifiTHuft (Par. 116), unpleasant HecMOTpji Ha {ace.) (43), in spite of HeciAcTie, h (26), misfortune HecMdcTHbiti (28), unfortunate, unhappy He t6 (55), if not that, or else HeyjK^JiH (15), surely not, can it be ? is it possible that ? Heyq^Hie {or be) (7), ignorance HeyqcHMii (55), ignorant H64ero (53)=H'feT'b naqerd, qxo (qer6), nothing of which H^q-feM-B (53)=H'feT'b HHqer6, q'feMi., nothing whereby HHrn-fe (8), nowhere HiiJKe, lower HH3Kitt (30), low, not high HHKaKdit, no sort of HHKorjii (3), never HHKOJiatt {gen. &h), Nicholas hhkt6 (Par. 47, E), no one HHKyji&, to nowhere HHM-b (ct HHMT.) (9) tnstr. of oHt, him HiiMH (cT. HiiMH) (9) instr. of oHii, them HHXT., see Par. 126 Hwqerd (6), gen. of Hnqxd, nothing; (^to) HHqero (34), it does not matter HHqT6 (Par. 47, E), nothing HO (2), but HOBBift (34), new HaJK-b, li (40), knife HocHJibmHKT., H, bearer h6ci., ik (16), nose Hdqb, H (ett) (/.) (17), night ; H6qbK) (Par. 68), by night HorfSpb, li (m.). Ill (47), November Hy (54), well HyMKHBitt (29), necessary ; mh* HyatHo, I need H*MeuKiii, German H-iMeni., Mubi, German n-fecKOJiBKle {adj.), a few, some H-fecKOJibKo {with gen.) (40), a few, some H-fexTb (6), no, not, there is not HfiHH, H (12), children's nurse o, 66o, 061. ( 1 0),conceming, about {prep,); against {ace.) 66a, 66* (Par. 176 {d)\ both 66jiaKo, A, cloud 66pa3'b, H (Par. 115) form, manner, image; KaKiiM-b 66pa30M'b? in what manner ? how ? o6MKnoB6HHo (9), usually o6MKHOB6HHMtt, usual, customary 66*, fern, of 66a oe-feat, H (34), dinner; nocjit o&kjvBLy in the afternoon oaecTb, OBCii, III (6), oats OBu^, -^w (21), sheep orop6HT., M (3), kitchen -garden oflHHHajmaxb (Par. 148), eleven omiH-b, H^, 6, li {m. and w.), i (/.) (Par. 107 (6)), one, a certain, sole, alone oHH^HtHbi (4), once onH&KOJK'b (46), however 63epo, a or epa (48), lake okh6, -^a (9), window 6KOJ10 (Par. 181 (c) {gen.), about, nearly OKOHq&xejibHo, finally, definitively OKp6cxHocxb, H (/.) (40), environs oKxri6pb, li (m.). Ill (47), October oji6Hb, H (m.) (5), stag oHi., OH&, 6, li (i) (2, 12, Par. 126), he, she, it, they onacnbitt, dangerous ocejix., cjiii. III (6), ass 6ceHb, H (/.) (17), autumn ocxajibH6fl (5^, remaining 6cxpbift (40) ^^^ 0x6111., xniii, r^^^, father oxKyna (19), wheni oxqer6 (28), wherefoT^^ ^yhy ox-b, 6x0 {gen.) (Par. 70)VaHpfclrom, from o(|)Hu6pT., bi or ^, I or II, 01 oqeBiiflHO (31), evidently 6qeHb (3), very n n^jieHTb, abnw (29), finger nanHp6ca, w (39), cigarette n^peHb, pHH (31), (peasant) lad napyc-b, 6, II, sail n&cnopx'b, M or 6 (Par. 146), passport n6pBbiii (Par. 166), first nep6HHH {fern, adj.) (24), ante-room, hall 224 KUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY n6pejti> (Par. 44) (ace, instr.), before, in front of nepcKJi^HHHa, bi, cross-beam nep6, nepbH (10), feather, pen nepi^TKa, h (50), glove necT., ncbi (49), dog n6Hb, H (6ft) (/.) (46), stove niiBO, k (43), beer nHCbM6, ^a (44), letter miTbe, ri (7), drink niima, H (35), food nji&MH, CH^ (w.) (Par. 219), flame nji^Tbe, H (besT.) (43), clothing nji6MH, uenk (Par. 219), race, breed njicM^iHHiiK'b, H (29), nephew njiBMHHHHua, M (29), niece nji6Ti, M, raft nji6xo (2), badly njiox6ft (1), bad njidmajxb, H (/.) (50), square, (market-) place no (Par. 87), {dat.) on, along, according to, etc. ; {ace. ) up to, as far as, at the rate of (Par. 183); (Par. 69) {prep.) after no-^HrjiiftcKH (3), in English noBapHxa, n (Par. 69), cook noBepxHocTb, h (/.), surface noBTopeHie, h (22), repetition norojia (18), weather n6j;ji'b {gen.), beside, near noapiy^ra, h (14), friend (/.) noH-b, ndflo {ace, instr.) (Par. 127), under nom^jiyii {imperat. of noHcajiOBaxb) (Par. 216), if you like, as far as I am concerned, perhaps nojK^jiyficTa (Par. 216), please ndaflHitt (24), late n63>Ke (32), later noaiiniH, h (ift), position noK^, as long as ; noK^ ne, tUl, until noKdfiHLift (48), peaceful; deceased; (c)noK6ftHoft Hdqn! (56), good-night ! noKopHo (38), humbly, obediently n6jie, H (18), field nojiesHbift (48), useful n6jiHo (54), stop, that is enough n6jiHbiH (54), full, complete nojiyime, better, in a better manner nojiHaca , gen. nojiyiaca {m. ) , half -an-hour no JIT., 6 (10), floor nojii, H, sex noM-feiuHKi,, n (38), land-ownei* noHea'feabHHK'b, h (34), Monday nop^, -^bi (52), time ; nopa, it is time nopdn-b, H (17), vice nopTH6ft, MH (30), taflor no-pyecKH (3), in Russian ndcji-b {gen.) (32), after nocji-tnHift (36), latter, last nocT6jib, H (/.) (15), bed nocyna (/. coll.) (46), vessels, utensils noTOMy, therefore noTOMy mo (8), for, because noTdM-b (7), thereafter, then no-(J)paHny3CKn (5), in French noxBajid, ii (19), praise noxdAi, bi (56), campaign noqeMy (6), wherefore, why nouTH (18), almost, nearly no^TOMy (22), therefore npaBa (32), truth npaBHHBocTb (39), truthfulness, upright- ness np^BHJiBHHtt (32), regular, correct np^BO (32), really, truly np^Bbift, right, just npasflHHK-b, H (54), festival np^3flHHimbitt (48), festival {adj.) npaKTHHHutt, practical npeBocxoAHbiii, excellent npeHJiojKeHie, h, offer, proposal npeflMexi,, h, object npfejKfle {prep, with gen. ; adv.) (32), before; npe;Kj;eBcer6(46),firstof all npn {prep.) (Par. 45), at, near, in the time of npiiSbiJib, H (/.) (50), profit npHK^aqHK'b, h, I (21), shop-assistant, clerk npHJiejKHMft (19), diligent npHM-fep-b, bi, example; na npHM-fepi (39), for example npHpdfla (55), nature npHTdK-b, H (48), confluent, tributary npHx6>KaH (/. adj.) (55), ante-room, corridor npirtxejib, h (Par. 194), friend npiflXHbift (Par. 116), pleasant npo {ace.) (Par. 100) =o {prep.), concern- ing, about npocxiixe! {imperat. of npocxiixb) (Par. 216), excuse me ! pardon me ! np6cxo (55), simply npocxoft (Par. 88 (6)), simple upduijibiii (34), past ; last, preceding npomattxe! {imperat. of npom^Tb) (Par. 216), farewell ! npHM6a (Par. 192), upright npHHHKi., H, gingerbread RUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 225 nxiiixa, Bi (12), bird ^ nTiiHKa, H (43), little bird nycxdft, empty; vain nycTiiHH, H (48), desert, wilderness nmemina (34), wheat n-fecHH, H (43), song n-fiuiKdwh (44), on foot nHTHc6TMti (Par. 184), five-hundredth nHTH&anaTfc (Par. 148), fifteen n^THHna, u (47), Friday HHTuti (Par. 166), fifth HHTi. (36), five HHTbHecriT-B (Par. 150), fifty HHTbcdTi, (Par. 155), five hundred paSdxa, bi (48), work paSdTHHKt, H, I (5), workman pa66Hia (48), workman; working (day) paBHojtymHBitt, indifferent p^BHwtt, equal pkR-b, a, o, BI (Par. 188), glad p^aB-fc (44), perhaps ; interrog. particle paacKda-B, bi (56), tale, narration p^a-B, li, time, occasion ; (adv.) (4), once p^na, BI, wound paneHBifl (50), wounded P^HHitt (Par. 89), early pdHo (32), early p^Hbme, pka-he (32), earlier peSeHOK-B, HKa, Grfxa (Par. 229), child PHcynoK-B, HKH (38), sketch, drawing p66Kili (5), timid p6bho (46), exactly poHH6ft (14), related, native, dear poKHecTBd (28), Christmas poKB (/.) (34), rye pdaoBBiit (16), pink Poccfa (34), Russia pyS^mna, h (43), shirt pySjiB, A{m.) (9), rouble pyK^, -^H (29), hand, arm pyccKifi (13), Russian pyH6ii, BH (b^b-b). III (43), brook, stream pyifceMi., pyqBHMH (43), in torrents PMJKifi (16), tan( -coloured) p-tHKitt (Par. 128), rare, infrequent p-feKd, --H (16), river pAjiOM-b c-B (31), beside, in one row with pjia-B, 6 (31), row c45jih, h (40), sabre c^-B, ^ (3), garden cdMKa, H (14), female animal; hind caMOB^p-B, BI (55), tea-urn, lit. self-boiler caM-B, k, 5, H (emphatic) (22), self, same c^MBitt (Par. 186), very, same; prefixed to adjective it has the force of extremely, most can6r'B, li, III (46), boot capAfi, H (5), barn, cart-shed CBHa^Hie, H, re-union, meeting; no cBHH^HiH (Par. 216), au revoir cBHii^u-B, gen. sing, nq^ (50), lead CBHHBri, ^H (eft) (37), pig CB6tt, A, e, A (Par. 104), one's own cB-ixjiBiii (17), light, bright CB-fexjioe BocKpecdHfce (53), Easter Sunday CB-fexT,, I (7), light ; world cB'fe'i6, -^H, candle CBflx6fl:, holy ce6;i (reflex.) (Par. 103), self, of self; cesi, to oneself cer6jmH (8), to-day ceBM6ft (Par. 166), seventh cefi, ci;i, e, 6 (Par. 106), this ceiiqac-B (27), at once cejid, ejia (7), village (with church) ceMHc6xBiii (Par. 184), seven-hundredth ccMH^auaxB (Par. 148), seventeen ceMB (36), seven ceMBHecHxi (Par. 150), seventy ceMBcox'B, seven hundred ceMBji, -^H (6fl) (28), family cenxiiepB, A, III (47), September cepaiixBitt (21), angry, violent c6pAue, & (44), heart cepe5p6 (Par. 194), silver cep65pHHBitt (54), of silver cepeiiHa, u, middle cepn-B, li (18), sickle cecxpA, ecxpH (12), sister ca&jin (adv. and prep, with gen.) (56), from behiad CHTdpa, BI (39), cigar c^jiBiiBitt (1), strong c^Hitt (7), blue CHpox^, -^H (m. or f.) (28), orphan CHpdxKa, H (28), Uttle orphan CHpoxcxBo (43), orphanhood CKasKa, H (39), fairy-tale cKaM6ttKa, H (19), bench, seat CKapjiaxikiia (50), scarlet fever ck6jibko (6), how much, how many CK6po (32), soon ckp6mhocxb (/.) (39), modesty cKp6MHBift (39), modest 226 RUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY cKyHiiLitt, sad, wearisome cjia6Mti (1), weak cjiesA, e3H (43), tear cjiiiniKOM'b (39), too cjiyr&, -^H (w.) (65), servant cjiywKdHKa, H (12), maid, servant cjiy>K6a, M (56), service cjiyqall, H (Par. 61), case, occasion, op- portunity ; BO BCHKOM-b cay^iat (41), in any case cmJiraHHii, audible cji-feflyiomitt, following cji-fendti, Tblind CMepxi., H (6a) (/.) (48), death CM-fejibiii (56), bold CMtmndit, ridiculous, laughable; eiviy cM-femnd, he is inclined to laugh CHa^Ajia (22), first, to begin with CH6Ba (16), again, anew CH-feri., & (42), snow 00=01. ooS^Ka, H (12), dog oo66ii, 6io, instr. case of ceQA, self ooBo-tMi. HO (H-fext) (42), not at all oojKaji^nie (8), regret; Kt ooHtaji-feHiio (8), unfortunately ooaHAHie, consciousness cojiaaxoKiJl (56), soldierly oojin^xx,, Bi (XT.) (36), soldier o6jiHu;e, a (Par. 61), sun oopoKOBdtt (Par. 171), fortieth c6poK'b (Par. 150), forty ooxi,, gen. of oxo, hundred odxbiii (Par. 171), hundredth COX&, -^H (18), Russian plough on&jibHJi, H (em.) (38), bedroom onoK6iiHBitt (66), quiet, still, restful on-fejiuii (7), ripe op^ay (49), together, at one time opena, -^bi (47), Wednesday cpejiHHa, bi, middle cxaKdii-b, bi (39), glass, tumbler oxapuK-b, li, III (3), old man cxapHM (53), days of old cx^pooxa, bi (m.) (39), village elder cx&pooxB (/.), old age oxapyxa, h (14), old woman cxapyraKa (53), old wifie cx4pmiit (19), elder, eldest ox^pbitt (1), old oxo (Par. 150), hundred oxoJIJi^a, bi (50), capital (city) 0TOJi6Ban (/. adj.) (38), dining-room oxDji-b, III (9), table CTdjifcKo (40), so much oxdH-b, M, groaning oxopoH^, 6poHbi (56), side oxoxbicHHHbiii, hundred-thousandth oxpaAajieu-b, jibuu, sufferer oxpanA, -^bi (60), country, land oxp6MH, en^ (Par. 219), stirrup oxp6riti, strict cxyji-b, oxyjiBH (esi.) (Par. 60), chair cx-fena, -^bi (37), wall cy666xa, m (47), Saturday oyMpaK-b, I, twilight, gloom o^rn,, bi (26), soup oyp6Bbiti (19), rough, severe; dark oyx6fi (21), dry OH^cxie (26), happiness ; no (ki) cq^cxlio, happily oqaoxjniBbrti (28), happy o-b, oo (gen.) (Par. 44), from, off, since; {ace. ) about (approximately), as ; (instr.) with, along with c6hx,, cbiHOBbH (6ii) (1), son oiipi., bi (3), cheese o-feBep-b, I (48), north o-feiviH, cfeMOHa (Par. 219), seed c-ipbiit (16), grey ciojik (16), hither xaSAK-b, A, III, tobacco x^itjKe (10), also, likewise xaK6ft (2), such xaK-b (2), so; xaK-b Mki. (36), as (conj.); He x^K-b, not so, in the wrong way xaM-b (3), there xBepHHfi (23), hard xBoit, ji, e, Tk (Par. 104), thy xe5i {dat. or prep, o/xm) (Par. 21), thee xe6ji (gen. or ace. of xm) (Par. 21), thee xBKyniiii (Par. 128), current xeMH6, (it is) dark xeMHbiii (17), dark xenepb (3), now xen^nbift (17), warm xepninie (55), patience xexKa, H (29), aunt xexpajib, H (/.) (17), copy-book xAxift (30), low, soft, not loud xo, neuter of xox-b, that; ne x6, if not that, or else ; xo me, the same thing ; xo . . . xo . . ., now . . . then, at one time ... at another time xo56k), 6tt, instr. of xm (9), the TOB^pmm., H (9), companion RUSSIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 227 TOB^p-b, M, wares, goods Tord (3), then, at that time Tord, gen. of toti., to (Par. 21) T6)Ke=T^KHj4, e, 6 (Par. 106), whose? qejioB-feKT. {l)fPl JiionH (42), man, people {after the numerals 5, 6, 7, etc., in the nom. or ace. use ^ejioB-feK'B) qcM^, dat. of ito (Par. 21) qeMt (10), prep, of hto q^pea-B {ace.) (42), across, through, after the lapse of qepHLitt (1), black q^cTHBiit, honest qcTB^pn., li. III (47), Thursday qexBepTbift (Par. 166), fourth q^TBepTb, H (6ft) (/.) (181 (c)), quarter qexiipe (Par. 27), four qexiiipecTa (Par. 155), four hundred qeTHpexc6TMfi (Par. 184), four-hundredth qexiipnajmaTi. (Par. 148), fourteen qHHdBHHKt, H (39), ofiSicial qncjid, -^a (40), number qiicTHft (13), clean qx^Hie, H, reading qxo {pron. and conj.) (2), which, what; that; why qx6, that which, what qx66M, qxce-b (10), that, in order that qx6-jiH5o, anything; qxo-HH6:^Hb (Par. 47, E), something or anything j qxo- xo, something q^BcxBo, a (31), feeling qyAHutt, wonderful qyjKdft (28), strange, not one's own qyjidKt, JiKi'i, III (44), stocking qyxb, scarcely q-feMTb, instr. case of qxo, conj. (9), where- with; than (Par. 194) m majiyH-b, li. III (55), scamp raecxHc6xHft (Par. 184), six-hundredth mecxiiAHuaxB (Par. 148), sixteen mecxdft (Par. 166), sixth luecxb (36), six mecxBHecHxi. (Par. 150), sixty m^Hy H (12), neck miipe, broader mHp6Kia (25), broad mnant or mK^$i>, li (49), press, cup- board mndjia, h (18), school m:^xKa, H (56), joke m mendKi., HKii or menrfxa (Ex. 16, C), puppy mn (/. pi.) (56), cabbage soup acx^MHi,, M, print, engraving ^xoro, gen. of i^xoxi,, 5xo (Par. 21) 5xoMy, dat. of ^xoxi, dxo (Par. 21) 5x0X1,, i^xa, o, H (2, Par. 107), this, that K) i5ri. (48), South H (2), I }i6jiOKO, H (7), apple HsiiKt, A, III (23), tongue, language Ama, u (54), pit, hole HHB^pb, ri, III (47), January fipKitt (21), bright-coloured ripMapKa, H (27), a fair jicHbift (32), bright, clear HqM6Hb (w.). Ill (6), barley ENGLISH-RUSSIAN VOCABULARY The two preceding vocabularies give more detailed information as to forms of verbs and nouns and to pronunciation. This vocabulary gives, quite frequently, only one form for each verb the infinitive of the imperfective aspect ; where two verbs are given separated only by a comma, the second form is perfective. Of nouns the nominative, singular and plural, is given. abandon, to, ocTaBJuiTb ; noKHn^Tb ABC, ^36yKa able, to be, Mca ; ywkji, about, o {prep.); npo (ace); no {dat); 6KOJIO (gen.) about, to be put, CeanoKdHTbCH above, over, naHi. {instr.) abroad, aa rpaniiny (motion); aa rpamiueio (rest) abrupt, Kpyxdft absently, MamHH^jn,HO accept, to, npHHHM&TB according to, no (dat.) across, q6pe3'b,^pe3i> (ace); CKBoab {ace.) act, to, nocTynaxb active, fl-feHxejibHwii activity, H-feHxejibHocTb (/.) admit, to, nycKaxb adopt, to, B3Hxb {perf.) ki ceS-t adult, B3p6cjiLift affair, H-fejio, &; B6mb (/.), h affirm, to, yxBepjKflaxb afraid, to be, see to fear after, ndcji-fe {gen.); no {prep.) afternoon, ndcjit 06'jbHa again, cndsa; onjixb against, npdxHBt {gen.) age, see century age (old), cxapocTb (/.) agitate, to, bojihob^xb ago, xoMy Haa^H-b Alexander, AjieKC^Ewp-b Alexandra, A;ieKc4HHpa alive, moBda all, Becb, BCfl, see, Bc-fe all, not at, ndBce nifex-b (ne); coBcfeM'b H-fcx-b (ne) all, that is, aa h xdjibKO almost, noqxii alone, oniiH'b along, no {dat.) along with, ex., pji^oMi. ex. {instr.) aloud, rp6MKO alphabet, ^36yKa already, yHt6 also, x^KJKc ; x6jKe ; h always, BcerHd amiable, jiio6e3Hbift; M^Jiutt among, m^mjiy {gen. and ivMr. ) and, h; a (=but) angry, cepniixbift animal, jKHBdxHoe, uh another, npyroft; one another, npyn Apyra; to one another, jtpyrb P:^ry; with one another, Hpyrt ex, np:y'roMx> answer, to, oxB'feq&xb {dat. of person; Ha with ace. of question) anything, Mxo-HH6^wb anywhere, rfl-fe-KHG^flb appears, it, KajKcxcH apple, hSjioko, h approach, to, npHSjiHHt^xbCH April, anp-tjib (w.) arm, pyK&, -^h arm-chair, Kp6cjio, a army, B6ttcK0, k arrange, to, ycxp^HBaxb arrive, to, npHxoniixb ; npi-txaxb ; (attain to) ocxiiraxb arrived, he, npnmejn. ; npi-fexajix. as, KaKx.; xaKX>KaKx>; instr. case of nouns 230 ENGLISH-KUSSIAN VOCABULARY as it were, T6qHo ask, to, npociixb (request) ; to ask (ques- tions), cnp^uiHBaxb, cnpociiTb aspect, BiiAt, m ass, oceji-B, cjiii at, y {gen. ) ; npn {prep. ) ; bt. ( = in, prep. ) ; Ha (=on, prep.); aa (=for, behind, ace.) at once, ceHMkcb ate, -feji-b ; Kyniajit attentive, BHHMaxejibHHtt audible, cjniiimuft August, ^BrycT-b aunt, TCTKa, h author, aBTopb, bi; nnc^xejib (m.), h autumn, 6ceHb (/.), h await, to, jKn^xb away from, ox-b {gen.) backwards, Bsajix. bad, HypH6it; xyA6ii; njiox611 badly, nji6xo bank (shore), Cepen,, k banner, sh^mh, ena barley, H^iMeub (m.) bam, capati, h be, to, 6bixb ; HaxoHiixbCfl ; to be usually, 6biBaxb ; to be (of health), noatHB^xb bear, uejua-kab (w.), h bearer, HocikjibmHK'b, h beast, wild, sB-fepb (w.), h beat, to, Snxb beautiful, KpaciiBbift; npcKp^cHbitt because, noxoMy mo become, to, (c)H'fejiaxbCH; cxauoBiixbCH bed, nocxejib (/.), h bed, to go to, see Par. 143, Voc. 46 bedroom, cnajibHH, h bedstead, KpoB&xb (/.), h beer, niiBO, k before, {time) np^mjie {gen.); no {gen.); {space) nepeab {instr. or ace.) beg, to, npocHXb begin, to, HaiHH^xb; cxaxb beginning, Han^Jio, a behave, to, nocxynaxb, nocxyraixb behind, aa {ace. or instr.) behind, from, c3kjm {gen.) believe, to, B^pnxb {dat.) belong, to, npHnaajieHtaxb bench (seat), cKaM^fiKa, h bench by the stove, jiem^HKa, h bend, to, {trans.) narHC^xb; {intrans.) HarH6^xbCfl beside, b63Ji* {gen.); priaoMb cb {instr.) besides, {prep.) Kp6M'fe {gen.); {adv.) KpdM-fe xor6 best, jiy^miM; HaHJiyimitt betake oneself, to, nanpaBJijixbCH better, ji^imitt better {adv.), Jiyqrae; nojiyHrae between, Memny {instr. or gen.) bewail, to, (no)nJi4Kaxb beyond, see behind big, 6ojibm6a bird, nxHua, h; little bird, nxj^qKa, h bit (piece), Kyc6Kb, CKJk bitter, rdpbKiti ; more bitter, r6pHe black, qepHHti blacksmith, see smith blind, cji'fen6tt blizzard, Mex6jib (/.), h blood, KpOBb (/.) blow, to, ayxb blue, chhIh blunt, xyn61i blush, to, KpacirfeTb board, nocKa, -^h boat, ji6aKa, h body, x-fejio, & bold, cM-tjiuti bone, Kocxb (/.), h book, KHiira, h boot, candrb, li bom, to be, po>KaxbCH, poHJiTbCH both, 66a, 66* bottom, AHo, H6HbH bought, he, Kynnjib boy, M^JIb^HKb, H brain, M63rb, nk brave, xpA6pbttt bread, xji-teb, u breakfast, a^BxpaKb, h breakfast, to, a^BxpaKaxb breast, rpyb (/.), h bridge, M6cxb, ii bright, cB-txjibiii; HCHHft; ftpKifl bring, to, npHHocnxb {impf.); npHHecxii bring in, to, BHociixb (carry); BBOjtHXb (lead) bring near, to, npuSjiuHt^xb British, 6pHxaHCKitt broad, inupdKiili broader, ni^pe brook, pyH6ft, bik brother, ep^xb, bH brown (tan), pi&Htia bucket, see pail ENGLISH-EUSSIAN VOCABULARY 231 build, to, CTp6HTb; bhtb (nest) building, anknie, h Bulgaria, BojirapiH Bulgarian, Sojir^pHH-B, Ape; (/.), SojirapKa, h burgher, rpasKaaniiH'B, kne burn, to, mem, bury, to, sapuBaTB business, ^-ijio, A busy oneself, to, aaHHMdTtcH but, ho; a butter, M^cjio, & buy, to, noKyn^TB, KymiTB by, instr. case of noun by far, ropAaao cabbage soup, mn (/. pi.) call, to, sBaTb ; HasuB^Tt called, to be, HaabiBaxbCH came, npnuieji-B ; npi-fexajit camel, BepSjnoat, u campaign, noxdat, bi can (verb), motb; yM-fexb candle, cB-fena, ^h canton, see district capital (city), cTOjiiiiia, bi care, aaddxa, bi carried away, he, otbcs-b carry, to, HociiTB (indef.); aecrA {def.) ; B036TB (in a vehicle) cart-shed, capatt, h case (occasion), cjiyqait, h; in that case, b-b TaK6M'B cjiy^a-fe ; in any case, bo BCjiKOMB cji;^qa'fe cast off (unmoor), to, OTqdJiHBaxt castle, a^MOKi., mkh cat, K6mKa, h cause, to, aacTaBJijiTB century, b-^k-b, h or A certain, oHto-B; HaB-fecTHBifl chair, cxyji-B, bh; (arm-chair), Kp6cjio, a chalk, M-feji-B chatter, to, 6o:ixAxb cheap, neraeBuft cheaper, jiemeBJie cheese, ciip-B, u child, AHxti ; peSenoK-B {see Par. 229) childhood, n'txexBO children, n-fexn; peSiixa cholera, xoji6pa Christ, of {adj.), xphcx6b'b Christian, xpHcxiamiH'B, Ane Christmas, PojKflecxB6 (Xphcx6bo) church, aepKOBB, kbh (/.) cigar, CHr&pa, m cigarette, nanHp6ca, m citizen, rpajKflanAH'B, Ana class, KJIACCB, BI class, connected with, kjiAcchuK clean, qncxBiii clean, to, iiicxHXB clear, rfcHutt; CB'jbxjiBi^t clerk, npHKasHHR-B, h climb, to, ji-feaxB ; to climb into, BJi-feaAxt close (stuffy), aynraBitt close, to, see to shut clothing, njiaxBC, a cloud, 66jiaKO, A coin, MOH6xa, u cold, xoji6HBitt cold, with, ox-B x6jiony colour, nB-fex-B, A come, to, npHxoAiixB ; npi'l^aHt^xB (not on foot) come out, to, biIxojihxb comfortable, cosy, yibxHutt coming {adj.), 6yHymi command, to, see to order command of, to be in, KOMaHoBaxB {instr.) companion, xoBapHmt, h compel, to, aacxaBjijixB compelled (obliged), 6ji>KHBitt complete, ndjiHBiii ; u,-hjihiii completely, coBepra^HHo conceal, to, CKpBiBaxB conceive, to, aa^yiviBiBaxB {see Voc. 28) concerned, as far as I am, nojKdJiytt conquer, to, noS-featjiAxB consciousness, coaHaHie consider, to, noHHxaxB considered, to be, no^HxaxBCH contemplate, to, cMoxp-fexb continual, eeanpecxAmiBiii continue, to, npoHOJiH^AxB contrary, on the, nanpdxHBB; naoSopdx'B convey, to, BoaiixB ; Bcaxii; (carry), HociixB ; iiecxrit cook (/.), noBapiixa, h copeck, Kon6aKa, h ; little copeck, mite, Kon6eiKa, h copy-book, xexpaj;B (/.), h corn, xji-fee-B, & corps (officers'), KopnycB, & correct, np^BiuiBHBitt corridor, npnxdman. {adj.) cost, to, Cx6HXb cosy, see comfortable couch, jmnkwh, M 232 ENGLISH-RUSSIAN VOCABULAEY could, he, Mort count, to, CHHT^TI. country, expand, -^m ; in the country, bi course, of, see understood, it is court(yard), Bopi., 6 cover, to, sanptiB^TB cow, KopoBa, M coward, tp:^ci>, m cowardly, xpycjiiiBMii crane (bird), wKyp&Bjit (w.), ^ crops, JK^TBa {/.), M cross {adj.), ajiott cry, to, KpHiaTi>; nji^Kaxb (weep) cunning, xiixptitt cup, q^niKa, h cupboard, uiKani. or nm^^b, ii curiosity, JiK)6oniixcxBO current {adj.), xsK^mitt czar, napB, li (m.) czarina, napiina, bi daily, e>Keji;H6BHbia damp, MdKpMli Dane, naxqaHHrn., ane; (/.), naxidHKa, h dangerous, onacHbiii dark, xeMHtiii ; it is dark, xeMHd dark, to grow, xeiwH-fexb darkness, xcmhoxA ; xbM^ daughter, ji6m,, qepn ; little daughter, H6qKa, H day, jteHb (m.) Hhh; by day, nneM-b; good day ! aflp^BcxByfixel dead, MepxBuft dear, nopor6tt ; M^Jiuii dearer, nopbiKe death, cMepxb (/.) decayed, mundn deceased, noKdiiHbia December, neK^6pb (m.) deep, rjiy66Kift defeat, to, see to conquer delay, to, M6j(JiHXb depict, to, H3o6paH<&xb describe, to, oniicHBaxb desert, nycxiiHH, h desire, to, jKCJiaxb; xox-fexb desk (teacher's), K^eenpa, m did, H^jiaji-b, ca'fejiaji'b ; indicates past die, to, yMHp^xb ; cKOHq^xbCH died, he, ;^Mep'b difi&cult, xpy'HHMtt difficulty, xp^flHOcxb (/.) dig, to, pHXb ; to dig out, BupwB&xb diligent, npHJi6H{HbiiS dine, to, oS'tAaxb dining-room, cxoji6Bafl, uh dinner, oQ-kn-b, h direction, HanpaBJidnie dirty, rpriaHwfi disease, Coji'taHb (/.), h distant, see far distinctly, hcho district (canton), ytafl-b, bi do, to, fl-tjiaxb doctor, ndRxopx, d dog, coG^Ka, H ; necb, ncH domesticated, nomkumiH door, Bepb (/.) h; out of doors, na HBop-fe down, BKHSl. doze, to, HpcM^xb draw, to, pHcoB&xb drawing (sketch), pnc^^HOK'b, hkh drawing-room, a&jia, m; rocxIiHan, ua dreadful, ywdcHMtt drenched, to be, M6KHyxb dress, to {act), oatB^xb; {neut.), on-fe- B&xbCH, onixbCH drink, uHXbe, h; drink, to, nnxb drive, to (=go in a vehicle), -fexaxb ; (= convey in a vehicle), Boaiixb; to drive away ( = chase), yroHHXb; oxroHriixb; ( = depart), ox-b-fesHi^xb drove up, he, npiixajix. ; ncfexajiTb dry, cyx6ft dwelling, munb'e, -^h E each, KkmjihiPL ; each other, Hpyn. np^^ra ; to each other, npyr-b npyry; with each other, Hpyrx. ex. pyroMx> ; see Par. 183 early, p^HHili ; {adv.), pkao earn, to, sapaG^xtiBaxb earth, aeMJia, -^h ; Mipi, li (world) easier, jier^e east, BocxdK'b Easter, CB-fexjioe BocKpec6Hbe easy, jierKifi eat, to, -fecxb; K^maxb eight, B6ceiMb eighteen, BoceMHAfluaxb eighth, BOCbMdii eight hundred, BoceMbc6xi. eightieth, BocbMHHeoixMii eighty, BoceMbAecHX'b ENGLISH-RUSSIAN VOCABULARY 233 either, lijin elder, cxApmitt elder, village, cxdpocTa, u (m.) eleven, onikHHamxaTib else (or), ne t6 embrace, to, oSBHB^Tb emperor, HMnepAxopi. empire, a^pcxBo, & empty, nycxdii end, KoneuT., umi enemy, iienpi&xejib, h (m.)j Bparx., li engage, to, see to occupy England, AhfjiIh English, ^HrjiiftcKiii ; in English, no- ^HrJlfttCKH Englishman, aHrjiKHdramx., ^ne enormous, rpoMaAHtiit enough, hob6jh.ho ; enough! n6jiHoI enter, to (=go in), Bxcaiixi.; (= in- scribe), 3an6cMBaxb ; to enter upon, nocxyn^xB entered, he, Bomejii. entire, i^-ijiutt; h^jihuK entrance, BTb-fesAx., ti entrance-hali, nep6aHHH, ia environs, okp6cxhocxi> (/.), h equal, p^Bii&iit erect, to, nocxaBJiiixb estate, yc&abSa, m esteem, to, ysajK^xt; noHHxdxb even, h^jkc evening, B6Hep'i,, k; in the evening, B^qepoM'B every, Kkmjihiii; bcAkIH everybody, BCjiKia qeJiOB'&K'b everything, Bce everywhere, Bcibay; Bean'^ evident, oneBikjiHuA exact, Hcnp^BHutt exactly, p6bho example, npHiviipi, h; for example, na npHM-fepx. excavate, to, BLipuBdxb excellent, npeBocxdAHMit excuse, to, HaBHurfxi. ; excuse me ! H3BHHHXel execute, to, Bi>mijiuBaxi> exercise (problem), aanaqa expect, to, jKHaxb expression, Bupa>K6Hie extend, to (intr.), xHHyxbCH external, napyHtHutt extreme, Kp^uitt extremely, c&uhiA (adj.), d^ieni. eye, rji^ai*, 6 fable, 6&CHH, h face, jiHuid, -^a fair, a, >ipMapKa, h fairly, noB6abHO fairy-tale, CKAsKa, h faithful, B-^pHbiH fall, to, ynafl^xb ; to fall into, Bnan^xb family, ceMbii, -^u far, jianeuiPL far {before compar.), rop^sno farewell ! npom^xel farther, nkn-he, H^Jibme fast, see quick fat, inApHuii father, ox^u-b, tu^; C^xiomKa, h fear, to, GojixbCH feast, see festival feather, nep6, n6pbH February, $eBp^jib (m.) feeble, cji&6Mit feed, to, KopMiixb feel, to, lyBCXBOBaxb feel a desire, to, aaxortTt (per/.) feeling, qyBcxBO, a fell, he, yn^Jix. festival, np^aflmiKX., h; {adj.)^ np&a- HHHHHMtt few, H-tcKOJibKO {with gen.); HeMH6rie {adj.) field, n6jie, A fifteen, nnxH^naxb fifth, njixutt fiftieth, nHXHHecrtxBitt fifty, naxbaecfixb fight, Hp^Ka, H finally, oKOH^idTejibHo find, a, Hax6HKa find, to, iiaxoniixb fine, see good finger, n^Jieub, Jibqu finish, to, KOHq&xb fire, or6Hb, thA (m.); to keep up the fire, to stoke, aaxonaiixb firewood, flpoB^ {n. pi.) firm, Kp-fenKitt first, nepBMft ; at first, cHaq^Jia ; first of all, np6>Kae Bcerd five, HHXb five hundred, nnxbcdx-b flame, hji^mh {n.), ena flat (a house), KBapxiipa, u flesh, Miico 234 ENaLISH-BUSSlAN VOCABULARY flit past, to, MejibK&Tfc flog, to, C-tHB floor, nojii, i^ flower, ElB'feT'B, i^ fold, to, CKJI^HMBaXB following, cjiinyiomifi food, nnuxa, h; K;^inaHbe, h foot, HorA, -^h; to go on foot, HTXii n'feniK6M'i. for (conj.) liSo, noxoMy qxo; (prep.), HJiH (gen.); aa (ace.) {of price); Ha (ace.) {time) ; as lor, qxo Kac^excH {with no and gen.) foreigner, Hiiocxp^Hei^'b, nqw forest, ji-t cb, a forge, to, KOB^xB forget, to, aaOHB^xB form (figure, way), 66pa3Tb, bi fortieth, copoKOBdfi fortunately, kb (no) cq^cxiio forty, cdpoK-B forwards, Bnepen-B; to go backwards and forwards, xoflrixB Bsanx. h BnepeflB found, to be, HaxoHri;xBCH found, he, nameji'B four, qex^pe four hundred, qex^pecxa fourteen, qexiipHaauaxB fourth, qexBepxBiii fox, jiHc4 ; aHCH^a, bi France, m6ii; Beji^nitt greater, 66jii>miK green, aejienufl grey, cfepufl grief, r6pe, A grieve, to (intr.), ropesATb groaning, cxdHt, u ground, see earth grow, to, pacxA ; Btipacx^Ti. grown up, B3p6cjii>itt gruel, K^ma grumble, to, Bopq^Tt guard, on, na qac^xi. H half, nojiOBiiHa, h hall, aajia, li; (vestibule), nep6AHHH, in halt != stand! hamlet, Hep6BHH, h hammer, to, kob^tb hand, pyK^, -^h hang, to {intr.), bhcIte* happen, to, cjiyq&TbCH, cjiyqirrtcH ; H-tjiaXBCH happiness, cq^cxie happy, cqacxjiiiBtifl hard, xsepnuii ; see difficult hardly, ej^sk hard-working, xpyHOJHoS^BBiit harvest, w^xBa, u; to harvest, jKaxi. have, to, 6uxi> y + gen. of person; hm^xb ; BJiaaixt; have I ? ecxb jih y Mcnii? I have to, h HdjiateHt (hA, h6, mi) he, oHx. head, rojioB^, r6jioBu; to take into one's head, see to conceive health, snopdBBe healthy, 3op6Bufl heap, K^qa, h hear, to, cjnimaxB heart, c6pAue, k; to learn by heart, yv&Tb HaH3;^cxi> heat, to, Tonrixb heaven, h66o, -6ec^ heavy, xHHtejiHft height, Bbicox^, drui help, to, noMor^xfc (dot.) hence, oxcibfla her, eA {gen.), ett (dat), ee {ace.) here, ajifbcb; here is ! boit.! hero, rep6il, h heroine, repo^HH, h hesitate, to, m^ajihtb hide, to, cKpMB^xfc high, Bucdrntt higher, BumiA highest, Biime Bcer6 him, er6 {gen. and ace.), eyif {dat.) hind, c^MKa (oji6Hfl) his, erd hither, ck)h& hold, to, HepjKdxfc hole (=pit), AMa, u holy, cBHx6fi[ home, at, H6Ma; home {with verbs of motion), RoudA honest, q^cxHMtt hope, to, uafffeHXbCH horse, ndmajif,, h (/.) horseback, on, Bepx6Mt hospital, 6ojibHuixa, bi host (master), xosiiHH'b, -^CBa hot, ropjiiiii ; mkpmA hotter, rnkpne hour, Hkcb, Tai house, jidwh, k; little house, ndMUK-b, H ; peasant house, H36d, -^h how, KaK-b; KaKiiM-b dSpaaoMi; how are you ? KaKTb BH nojKHB&exe? however {conj.), ojmkKom'h; BcexaKH how many, how much, CK6jibKO huddled, to sit, see to press (themselves) humble, noK6pHbitt humiliating, yHH36xejn>Hbia hundred, cxo hundredth, c6xutt hunt, to, roHHXb ; raaxb hunting (used for), rdniitt hurry along, to, Hccxiicb {used of the river) hurts, it, Gojiiix-b, Cojihxi. husband, MyHt-b, bh hut (wooden house), naQk, -^m I, H idle, ji-feHHBMtt if, 6cjiH ignorance, Heyq6Hie ignorant, Heyneraibiti ill, 6ojiBH6tt ; to be ill, Qoirkji, ; to fall ill, 3a6oji'txB illumine, to, ocB-fem^TB; oaapAvb image, depaa-b, m immense, see enormous impossible, HeB03M6Hi 236 ENGLISH-EUSSIAN VOCABULAEY in, BT,, BO {prep.) incessant, nocxoHHHMii; Henpep^BHufi; SeanpecT&HHBifi indeed, jx-feiicxBiiTejibHO ; np^Bjta; np^BO indifferent, paBHoayniHua industrious, npHJi6>KHHtt; jpyAOjiioSiiBMit infirmary, 6ojibHikna, m inhabitant, jKj^xejiB, h (m.) inquire, to, see to ask inscribe, to, aanHCbiBaxs inspect, to, ocM^xpHBaxi. instead of, BM-tcxo (gen.) intelligent, ;y^MHwit interest, yn^cxie interesting, HHxep6cHBitt into, Bx, {ace.) iron, meji-feao ; of iron, mejrk3iahi& is there ? ecxb jih? is to, jidnmewb it, oh6 ; dxo {or masc. or fern, forms) Italian, HxajibfiHCKitt {ad^.); in Italian, no-HxajibjiHCKH Italy, Hx^jiiH its, er6, eA J January, hhb^pi. (w.) jingle, to, SBeH-fexfc joke, myxKa, h jolly, BecejiMii jug, KyeiimKa, h July, iibjib (w.) jump about, to, npiiraxb June, iibm. (m.) just (= right), np^BMii; just {with past tense), x6jibKo mo; just as it happened, KaKx. p^ax. keep, to, nepjK^xb; 6ep6qB key, KJiioHi, li kind, adeptitt; jiioS^shuM kindle, to, aajKHraxb kindness, noSpox^ king, Kop6jib, 1^ (w.) kitchen, k:^xhh, h; kitchen-garden, oropoax., M kitten, koxchokx., -Tiixa knee, KOJi-feHO, a knife, hojkx., 6 knit, to, BH3^xi> knock, to, cxyi^xb know, to, 3Haxb; to know how to, yM-fexb; to get to know, yanaB^xi., yan^xb knowledge, an^Hle known, anaKdMbiii ; weU-known, HaaicT- HMti 3, KBaCb labour, see trouble lad, MOJioA6tt qejioB-tKT.; n^penb (w.), PHH (= peasant-lad) lady, n^Ma, m lake, daepo, k or epa lament, to, (no)nji^Kaxb lamp, jikMua, h land, aeMJiji, -^n ; cxpaM, -^h landed proprietor or land-owner, noM-fe- miiKX., H language, h3ijkx>, A large, 6ojibm6tt larger, 66jibmiit largest of all, 66jibraiit Bcer6 last, nocji-feflHltt; np6mjiMtt (past) last, at, HaKOHenx. late, n63Hiii; ( = deceased), noK^iiHuft late {adv.), n63AHO later, n63me latter, nocji^HHbitt laugh, to, cMtAxbCH; to make laugh, CM-feinikxb laughable, CMtmndit lay, to, KJiacxb lay down, she, Jierji^ laziness, jii&m> (/.) lazy, ji-knABhiA lead, cBHHenx., gen. Hu,k lead, to, BecxHi lead astray, to, cSHB&xb learn, to, yHHXbCH {neut.) {dat.); visyH&rh {transitive,=to study a subject) ; to learn by heart, yq^xb Hanaycxb ; see to get to know learned, yqeHMfi learning, yq^nie least, M^Hbmitt; at (the) least, no Kp^Hcii M-tpt; not in the least, COBcfeMX. (He) H'feXX> leather, K6>Ka leave, to, noww^xb (=to leave in the lurch) ; to leave (school), K6HqHXb ; to leave alone, ocxaBJijixb left, ji-feButt left, to be, ocxaB^xbCH less {adj.), M^ubmiik; {adv.), M^Hbme ; M^H-fee lesson, yp6KX,, h; to learn a lesson, yq]4xb ypdKb ENGLISH-KUSSIAN VOCABULAKY 237 let, to, nycK&Tb ; let ! nycxt! ; nycK&KI ; let us ! aaB^tt! letter, nHci>M6, --a lie, to (=to tell lies), Jiraxb; (=to recline), jieat^xb; to lie down, JIOHtHTbCH life, HuksHbt H (/.) lifetime, in his own, bi. cBoeMt B-feK^ lift, to, nOJXHHM^Tb light, cB-feTi, {gen, sing, a) light (=not heavy), jiermfl; (=not dark), cB^xjiMii light, to, 3aHHr&Tb; to light upon, nonan^TB like, to, jiK)6iiTb; Hp^BHTbcn (=to be pleasing) ; if you like, nomknyH lion, jieB-b, jibBbi listen, to, cjiymaxb literal, GyKB^jibHbcft little (adj.), M^jieHbKift; m^jiuj^; {adv.), M^jio ; a little, iieMndro live, to, HtHXb ; nomHB^xb living, HtHBdfit lock, aaMdR-b, MKii long, HJiHHHuli; ndjiritt {time); long ago, aaBHiiMT.-AaBH6 ; not long since, Hefl^BHO look, to take a, nocMoxpikxb {perf.) look, to, cMoxpixb ; to look at, cMOxpixb Ha (ace); nocM&xpMBaxb; Bsrjiii- nbiBaxb ; to look for = to seek Lord, the, rocndAb (w.), r6cnoa {gen. aing.) lot, a, MH6ro; MHimecxBO, a; (=heap), Kyqa, h loud, rp6MKitt love, jiK)66Bb (/.), gen. sing. 6bA love, to, jiio6iixb low (=not high), H^sKia; (=not loud), tAxiH lower, Hiiamifi, hAtkb M magnificent, BejiHKOJiinHuft maid(servant), cjiyjK^HKa, h majority, 66jimaH Hacxb, h make, to, n^jiaxb ; see to oblige man, qejioB-feK-b, pi. jiibnH ; Mymqiiiia, m manner, dSpaax., w; in what manner ? KaKiiM'b dSpaaoM-b? many, MH6ro March, M^px-b market-place, n;ii6maHb, h (/.) marrow, Mdan., 6 mask, M&cKa, h master, xoariHH'b, jiesa matter, ^-fejio, k; it does not matter, HHqerd May, M^tt may {verb), Moqb (be able); it may be, M6Htex-b-6brrb me, MCHji {gen., ace), mh* {dat.) meadow, Jiyrb, k means, that, snainxb measure, M-tpa, w meat, Miico mechanically, MaraHH^jibHO meet, to, Bcxp-feqdxb; till we meet again, HO CBujikain meeting, cBiw^ie, h mention it, don't, ne ctduTb merchant, Kyn6itb, nmk merry, Becejiwtt middle, cpeikHa, m mighty, Moryqiii; ciijibUhiA military, Bo^HHuii milk, MOJioKo million, MHJiJii6H'b, h mind, never, HHHer6 mine, Mofi, Mo>i, Moe, Moii minister, MHHiicxpi>, m minute, Mnnyxa, m misfortune, Heci^cxie, a; rdpe, A modest, cKp^MHuli modesty, CKp6MHocxb (/.) moment, mom6hxt., u ; MHH^xa, u Monday, noHen'&JibHHK'b money, 6HbrH (/. pi.) month, M'fecHU'b, m moon, nynk, -^u more, SdJi-fee, 66jibme; far more, rop&sno 66jibme morning, ^xpo, &; in the morning, ^xpoM-b most, Sdjibrae Bcer6 ; see majority mother, Maxb, M^xepn; M^xymKa, h motherly, inaxepjiHCKift mourn, to, (no)nji^Kaxb ; ropsB^xb mouse, Miimb, h (/.) much, MH6ro mushroom, rpne-b, li must, I, H fldjiHteiTb, nrnk, etc.; mh* my, Moii, mojI, Moe, mo A N naked, rdjiuft name, Amh, hmchA (w.) narrow, :^3Kitt; TicHutt 238 ENGLISH-RUSSIAN VOCABULARY native tongue, poH6ft aa^Kt nature, npHp6Ha near, ejinai. {gen.); 6Jiii3Ko oxi. {gen.) nearly, ho^itA necessary, HyHtubifi neck, m^H, h need to, I, mh* h^h) ; BdBce ne (H'fex'b) nothing, hhix6; HH'ierd notice, to, saM-fei^xb November, hohSpb, i4 (m.) now, xen6pi> nowhere, Hnrjrt nowhere (nowhither), hhkyh^ number, qHCJi6, -^a ; MHomecxBO, a (=a great many) numerous, MHoroqiicjieHHLitt nurse (child's), Hjinn, h O oak, H^6i>, ii oar, Becji6, -a oats, oBecb, bcbi object, npenMext, m; B6mi>, h (/.) oblige, to (= compel), sacxaBJirixb ; to be obliged, 6uxb ndjuKent, hkhA, etc. observe, to, nocM^xpHBaxb ; BaMffenaxb occasion, cjiyqafi, h occupy, to, saHHM^xb o'clock, at what ? bi KoidpoMT. qac^? October, oKxriGpb (w.) of, H31. (out of; gen.) ; oxt, (from ; gen.) off, ex. (away from; gen.); ox-b {gen.) offer, npeHJioHK6Hie, a office, K0Hx6pa, m officer, o$HH6px>, w or ^ official, HHH6BHHK'b, H often, q^cxo old, cxApMti; old age, cx&pocxb (/.); old man, cxaptiKx., li ; old woman, exapyxa, h; days of old, cxapraia on. Ha {prep.); on to, na {ace.) once, oflH&Htaw; p^ax.; oflHHX. pAai; at once, cefiq&cx.; once more, eme pa3x> one, onliHx>, hh^, 6, li, 4 only, xojibKO open, to, oxKpMBaxb opinion, MH-fenie, h; in my opinion, no Mdejviy (MH-feHlro) opportunity, see occasion opposite, Hp6xHBi. {gen.) oppressive, HynmHtt (= close) or, ikjin; jih order that, in, wr66hi order, to, Bcaixb {dat.) orphan, cHpox^, -^u; little orphan, CHp6xKa, H other, npyr6ii ; each other, Hpyrx. np^ra ; to each other, Hpyrx, jipyry our, ours, Hamx>, a, e, h out of, H3X. {gen.); out of doors, na HBop-fe outside = out of doors over, Hanx. (above; instr.); o (about; prep.); qepeax. (through; ace.) own, CBdft ; c66cxBeHHHrtt own, to, HM-ixb ox, 6l>IKX>, H paU, BeHp6, -a palace, ji;Bopenx>, piui pale, Cji-tAHbift; to be (turn) pale, Gji-feAH-txb palpate, to, omynHBaxb paper, 6yMara, h pardon, to, npomaxb; H3BHH>ixb; pardon me ! npocxiixe! part, 'i^cxb, H (/.) pass, to {of time), npoBOHiixb ; pass by, Hxx6 m6mo ENGLISH-EUSSIAN VOCABULARY 239 passed through, he, npomejii. passport, n^cnopTT., u or k past {adj.), np6mjibitt; (prep, time), n^ca-fc (gen.); {adv. or prep, space), mAmo {gen.) patience, Tepn-feiiie paw, Ji^a, m; little paw, Ji^Ka, h pay, to, njiaxHTb; to pay out, buhji^- HHBaXb peace, uikp-b; to make peace between, see to reconcile peasant, myskhki,, A ; KpecTBjtiiHH'b, Aue ; peasant-house, H36a, -^u; peasant- woman, 645a, bi pen, nep6, n6pBH pencil, KapaHH^rai, A people, jubnii (folks) ; nap^nt, h (nation ; working-class) perhaps, M6jKeT'b-6i.iTb person, jiHa6, -^a pick up, to, see to lift picture, KapxikHa, u piece, Kyc6K'i,, ckh[ pig, CBHHbji, -^H pink, posoBbitt pipe, TpyGKa, h pit, siua, H piteous, pitiful, mdjiKifi pity, it is a, jk^jiko place, MicTO, & play, to, Hrpaxb playground (school), yq^JiraijHbift SBopi* pleasant, npirixnufi: ; M^jibift please, to (to be pleasing), HpasaxbCH; if you please, nojK&jiyiicxa plough (Russian), cox4, -^h plough, to, nax&xb point, x6HKa, h poor, e-feAHbia position, no3iii5iH, h possess, to, HM-fexb ; BJianixi. (=have under command) possession, BJian-ime, h possible, B03M6H{Hbitt ; is it possible ? m6jkho jih? B03M6mHO JiH? ; it is possible, m6>kho ; is it possible, can it be ? Hey}K6aH . . . He? pot (jug), KySiimKa, h pour, to, jiHXb poverty, S-feHHOcxb (/.) powerful, Moryiift practical, npaKXHHHwti praise, noxBajia, 6c praise, to, xBaaiixb pray, to, MOjniTb prayer, MOJiiixBa, w ; to say one's prayers, MoMxbCH prefer, to, npeHnoiHx&xb prepare, to, npHroxoBJijixb ; BbiA'^JibiBaTb presence of, in, npn {prep.) present {adj.), Hacxojimia preserve, to, 6ep6Hb press, see cupboard press, to, jKaxb : hk&xbch (Voc. XLIII) pretty, KpaciiBbiJi; xopdmeHbKitt prevent, to, M-fem^xt price, atnA, -^m; not at any price, HH 3a qx6 Ha CB-fex* prince, KHrfsb, bA print, a, acx^Mnx, m prison, xiopbM^, -^m private, see simple problem, sandia, h profit, np:^6Mjn., h (/.) proposal, npeHJioKCHie, h proprietor, see landed proprietor pupil, yneHiiK'b, A (m.); yqeHiii;a, m (/.) puppy, mendK-b, hkiI or menrixa put, to, KJiacxb (=lay); to put on, cx^BHXb (=set, stand); to put on (clothes), oH'feB&xb ; to put behind (to pawn), saKJidjibiBaTb ; to put questions, see to ask quarrel, see fight queen, Kopoji6Ba, u question, Bonp6cT>, u question, to, cnp&mnBaxi. quick, cK6pbiit quiet, cnoK, k short, Kop6xKitt shorter, Kop6qe show, to, noKasuBaxb, noKas^xb shrink, to, waxbCH shut, to, saKpuB^xb sick, 6ojibH6a sickle, cepm>, ik sickness, Soji-fesHb, h (/.) side, cxopoH^, -^ m sigh, to, B3HHX^Xb sight (spectacle) 3piJ^m^e, a ; (view) Bl^Kb, bl sight of, to catch, yBHtH-fexb {perf.) sign, auawh, h silly, see stupid silver, cepe6p6; {adj.), cep66pHHbifl simple, npocx6ii simply, np6cxo since {prep.), c-b {gen.); {adv.), ex. xtx-b nopx. ; xom^ Hasanx. ( = ago); long since, yme flasHd; not long since, HeH&BHo ; {conj.) xaKx> KaKx. (=a8) ; cx> x-fexTb n6px., KaKx. {of time) sing, to, ntxb sister, cecxp^, -m sit, to (=to be seated), cnn^xb; to sit down (=take a seat), cannxbCH six, mecxb six hundred, mecxbc6xx. sixteen, mecxnafluaxb sixth, mecxdii sixty, mecxbHec>ixx> sketch, pHcyHOKX., hkh ' skin, udma, h sky, h66o, He6eca sleep, to, cnaxb sleep, to go to, httA cnaxb ; jioadtTbCH enaxb ; ycbra^xb slide, to, cKOJibsiixb slow, MeHJieHHbrit slumber, to, npcM^xb ; cnaxb sly, x6xpbitt small, M&Jibitt ; M&Jiem.Kiit ; M6jiKltt ( = fine) smaller, M^Hbmitt smith, Kyan^ux., i^ smoke, to, KypAxb smooth, rji^Kitt snow, cH-ferx., ^ ; snow, to, cH*rb Hexx> snow-storm, Mex6jib, h (/.) so, xaKx,; cxdjibKo; so much, cx6jibKo; so that, qx66bi soft, M^rKitt (=not hard); xiixiii (=not loud) soldier, cojiHaxx., bi soldierly, cojindxcKili solve, to, p-femdxb some, irtKoxopwtt ( = a certain); KaK6Jt- HH6yab; H-fecKOJibKie, in (=a few) ; H-fecKOJibKo {governs g&n.) something, m6 - jihSo ; qxo - HH6yHb (= anything) ; qx6-xo sometimes, HHorH^ somewhat, H-fecKOJibKo ; neMndro somewhere or other, to, Kyfld-xo so much, cxdjibKO son, CI>IHX>, HOBbril song, n-tcHH, H soon, cKdpo ; p^no sooner, paiibme ; CKop-fee sorrow, r6pe, A sort of, no, HHKaK6ii; what sort of, KaKOB^ft (ae^*.) ; KaK6fi soup, cynx., h; cabbage - soup, ma sour, KiicjiMtt south, ibrx. sow, to, c-inxb spade, Jionaxa, bi Spanish, HcnaiicKift speak, to, roBopiixb ; M6jiBHXb spectacle, 3pfeJIra^e, a spend, to (time), npoBOHiixb spin, to, npjicxb spite of, in, necMoxpii na {ace.) 242 ENGLISH-RUSSIAN VOCABULARY spiteful, 3;i6it splendid, BejinKOJi-fenHua spoil, to, ndpxHTfc spring (season), bbchA, ^ti; in spring, BecH6tt sprout, to, BHpaCT^TB square (in a town), njiima^b, h (/.) stable, KOHibmHH, h stag, oji6Hb, H (w.) stair, jiicTHHiia, u stand, to, cxcjiTi. (intr.); ct^bhtb (tr.) stand up, to, BCTaB^xB, bct^tb start, to, Haimiaxi, ; cxaxi. (= begin); OTh'hamk'n, (= drive away) state (polit.), rocyn&pcxBo, a station (railway), BOKsajit, m stay, to, see to remain steal, to, BopoB^xfc; Kpacxi. stiff, Kp-iuKiti still {adv.)f see yet; {adj.), xHxitt ; cnoK6flHott stirrup, cxp6mh, eM (w.) stocking, qyjidKt, jikhi stoke, to, 3axonji>ixb; xomixi. stone, KaMCHb, mhh (w.); {adj.), k^mbh- stoop, to, HarnSaxbCH stop ! ndjiHo! stork, ^Hcx-b, bi story, paacKAs-b, m ; cK^SKa, h stove, n6ib, h (jf.) strange, cxp^HUbifi; Hymdu (=not one's own) stream, pyieii, bii ; p-feK^, -^h street, yjiHua, m strict, cxp6rift stride, to, mardxb strike, to, ynapaxb; Cnxb; to strike against, xojiKAxbCH strive, to, cxapaxbcn strong, cHJibHwtt ; Kp-fenKiii study, to, see to learn stupid, rjiyuMii such, xaKoit sudden, BHea^nHMft suddenly, B^pyn. sufferer, cxpanajieux,, -^m^uhi sufficiently, noBdjibHo ; Hocx^xcmo summer, ji^xo, k; in summer, ji'fexoM'b; summer (country) residence, aqa, H sun, c6jiHne, a Sunday, BocKpec6m>e, h superficial, Hapy^mnwii supper, yjKHH-b, M suppose, to, nojiar^xb sure, B'fepHBia surely, B-tpno; surely not, Heyat^JiH surface, noB^pxHocxb, h (/.) survey, to, ocM^xpHBaxb sweep up, to, nomviex4xb sweet, cji^HKiti T table, cxcji-b, 6 ; at (the) table, aa cto- Jl6M'b tail, xBocxTb, ii tailor, nopxH6ft, lie take, to, 6paxb; to take away (in a conveyance), oxBoaiixb; to take off (down), cHHMaxb; to take place, cjiyq&xbCH ; n-fejiaxbCH ; to take thought, 6e3noK6fixbCH tale, paacK&a'b, m talk, to, Sojix^xb ; roBop^xb taU, Bbic6Kiit tame, j^oM^mHifi tan (colour), pbijKiitt tasty, BKycHbdi taught, to be, see to learn tea, H^, ik teach, yqiixb teacher, yuixejib, A {m.) ; yqiixejn>HHi;a, BI (/.) tear, cjieaa, -u tear, to, nopHB^xb tea-urn, caMOB^pb, h tell, to, CK^3HBaxb, CKaa&xb ; Bejiixb (order) ten, n6cHXb terrible, yiK&cauA territory, BJian-fenie, h than, HtMb; H^mejiH thank, to, ejiaronapHXb ; thank you, cnaciiSo that {demonstr.), xoxx., xa, xo, xt ; t^xox-b, 5xa, ^xo, ^xh; {relative), Koxopwft ; Kxo ; ixo; {conj.), ixo ; qx66u; that is, xo ecxb ; SH&iHXb that is why, boxx, noqeM^ thee {ace. and gen.), xe6ji; {dat.), xeS-fe their, theirs, hxx. them, HXb, HMX., etc. then, xorfl^ (=at that time); noxdMX. (= after that) thence, oxxy^na there, xamx,; there is or are, ecxb ENGLISH-RUSSIAN VOCABULARY 243 therefore, noxoMiy', no^xoMy there is ! there are ! botb! they, ohA {m. and n.) ; oH-fe (/.) thick, T^jicTufi thief, Bdpt, u (dfit) thin, T6HKitt ; HK^sKifi {of fluids) thine, see thy thing, B6mi>, H (/.); npeHM^xt, u; H-fejio, & think, to, ny'Maxi. third, xp6xifi[ thirteen, xprni^qaxB thirty, xpiijtqaxt this, ^xox-B, 5xa, i5xo, ^xh thither, xya^ thou, xM though, xoxji 6h thousand, xiiicH^a three, xpn; three hundred, xpricxa through, q^peai. (ace.) ; cKBoab (ace.) through, went, nporaeji-B throw, to, 6poc&xi>, 6p6cHXE. thunder, rp^Mt, u; to thunder, rpcM-fexb thunderstorm, rpoa^, -^u Thursday, qexB^prB, A thus, xaKi.; xaKiiMt 66paaowb thy, xB6ii, oA, oe, oik till, o (gen.); till now, ho chxi. ndpt; (co?y.), noK^ . . He time, bp6mh, en^ (w.) p^s-b, iJi (=occa- sion); it is time, nopd; at the present time, bx, Hacxorfmee bp6mh ; at a time (=at one stroke), cp^ay; what time is it ? KoxdptEtt qacx,? every time, BcriKifl: paa-b ; at times, waoTjik time of, in the, npn {prep.) timid, p66Kitt tinkle, to, 3Beirfexi> to, Bi. {ace.) (=into); kx. {dat.) (=to- wards); ho {gen.) (=as far as); Ha {ace.) (=on to); hjih {gen.) (=for) ; dative case of noun tobacco, xaC^KT., ik to-day, cerdHHH together, BM-fecx* to-morrow, a^Bxpa tongue, HsiiKt, li too, cjiAmKOMt; too much or many, cji^mKOM'b MHbro; too ( = also), X&KJKe top (= highest part), B6pxt, 6 torment, to, Myqnxb torrents, in, pyqteMx. ; pyqBrfMH torture, to, m^hhxi. touch, to, xp6raxi> towards, kx. {dat); HaBcxp-iqy town, rdpofl-i., k townsman, small, Mimantoi., ^ne traverse, to, npoxoHHxi treasure, kji^x., u tree, afepcBo, & or ^bbh tremble, to, npoHt^xi. trembling, HpojK^ift tributary, npHx6KX>, h trouble, xpym, ^ true, B-kpuuA truly, Bnp4By; np^BO truth, np^Bna try, to, cxap&xBCH Tuesday, bx6phhkx, turn ill, to=to fall ill, see ill turn pale, to, CjifeflH-fexi. twelve, HB'feH&mtaxb twenty, ^B^ixaxB twice, Hsa p^aa ; twine, to, bhxi. two, HBa, HB-fe two hundred, SBicxH U ugly, HeKpac^BMil uncle, nfiH, h (w.) under, hohx, {instr. or ace.) understand, to, noHHMdxb ; yMi&xb understanding, yM-fenie understood, that is (=goes without say- ing), paayM-texen undress, to {intr.), paan-feB^xbCH unfortunate, Hec^acxHtitt unfortunately, kx. coHtaji'^HiH) unhappiness, Hecq^cxie, h unhappy, Hecq^cxHufi: unknown, He3HaK6ivii>Ltt unpleasant, HenpiHXHutt until, see till up, o {gen.) (=as far as) ; no {dat.) (=over, along); {adv.), BBepxt; HaBdpxx.; up and down, Baaax. h Bnepefli. upright, npHM6fi ; npaBmkBufi uprightness, npaBHriBocxb upstairs, nas^px-B {with verb of motion) use, to, ynoxpeSjiiixb used to, rendered simply by the Im- perfective Past or by this tense followed by 6mb^jio useful, nofl63Huii 244 ENGLISH-RUSSIAN VOCABULARY usual, oSblKHOB^HHbltt usually, 06UKHOB6HHO utensils, see vessels utmost, Kp^Hifi vanquish, to, noC-fejKaaTfc verst, BcpcT^, "m very (adj.), c^MLiii; (adv.) dqera. vessels (= utensils), noc^aa (/. collect.) vice, nopdR-B, h victim, jK^pxaa, u view, B^jTB, fci village, ceji6, -a ; nep^BHH, h (without a church) ; village community, Mfpt, u virtue (quality), K^qecxBo, a visible, BiiaHutt ; oqeBiiflHwtt visit, to, nocfemaxb voice, r6jioc'b, A W wait, to, }KaTfc walk, to, xoflHTb ; htth ; ryjirixb ; to go for a walk, u-nik ryjiiixB wall, CT^Hkf -^u wander, to, Spo^iixi. want, tOj see to wish, to seek war, BOiiH^, -^m wares, see goods warlike, BoiiHcxBemiMJi warm, xenjibiii ; ropriiiii (=hot) was, SiiiJix., jia, JIG wash (oneself), to, yMHsAxbCH water, boa^, -bi water, to, nojiHB^xB wave, BojiH^, -^bi way, Hop6ra, h ; nyxt, 6 {m.) we, Mbi weak, cji^Sbitt wealth, GoraxcxBo wearisome, CKymbiii weather, nordfla weave, to, xKaxb ; bhxb (wind) Wednesday, cpcH^ week, neaijiH, h weep, to, nji^KaxB well, xopomd; ny; see healthy well-known, HSBicxHbift went, xowkrn, ; meax., nomejix>, see to go were, Sijjih West, a^aax. wet, M6KpBifi wet through, to be, M6KHyxB what {adj.), Koxopwii ( = which); KaK6tt (=what sort of?); (pron.), qxo ; (=that which) qx6 ; xo, qxo wheat, nmeniiua when, Korfl^ ; xorad KaKx> whence, oxKyna ; oxHer6 where, ra-fc; nowhere, Hnrni; every- where, noBcibHy, eeaa-fe; where- with(al), q-feM'B whether, jih (Par. 228) which, Kox6pBEtt {adj. and pron.); ixo {pron.) whisper, to, menx^xB white, e-fejiwtt whither, Kya^ who, Kxo ; Kox6pbiii whole, u'fejibitt; BecB, boh, bcc, Bcife whom, Kor6, KOMy, etc. whose ? nePi, hbh, iBe, hbh; whose, gen. of KOXdpblfl why, uo^euif ; aaq-feivix. ; oxHer6 ; qxo wide, miip6Kifi wider, miipe wife, meHk, -u wild, n^Kitt; wild beast as-tpB, h (m.) wind, B-txepi, xpbi or & wind, to, BHXB window, oitud, -^a wine, Bmi6, -^a winter, aHM^, -^h; in'winter, aHM6tt wish, to, Hteji^xB ; xox-fexB with, c-B {instr.); y {gen.); {from) on, {gen.) without, 6eax, {gen.) wolf, B6aKX>, H (6bx>) woman, jK^Hmnna, u; old woman, cxapyxa, h wonderful, yauBiixejiBHBEtt wood (=fore8t), ji-fecx., a; (= timber), n6peBo ; (=fuel), apoB^ {n. pi.) wooden, aepeBjimibrti work, pa66xa, bi; work, to, pa66xaxB working (day), pa66qitt workman, pa66xHHKB, h; pa66qitt world, CBixT.; Mipx,, li; acMJiri, -^h worse ^ worst /xyflmm, xyjKe worth, to be, cxohxb; it is not worth mentioning, ne cxduxx, ; Hii^erd would, see Par. 199;= wished wound, pana, bi wounded, p^eHBifl i ENGLISH-EUSSIAN VOCABULARY 245 write, to, nnc^xb wrong, Henp&Bufi; in the wrong way; He T&Kt yard, jtBopi, iSi year, r6Hi,, & ; Ji-fexo, k. After 1, 2, 3, 4 use roHt, rdjia ; after 5, 6, 7, etc. in nominative or accusative use yellow, mernhiA yes, a yesterday, sqepa yesterday, the day before, TpfexBHro HHH yet (adJv.), em6; {conj.)y osb&ko; hc- cMOxpji Ha dxo you, Bu, Bacb, e, ecTfc jiH, Voc. XIII ' from,' translation of, 98 3a, 44, 115, Voc. XXXIX 8a as prefix, Voc. LIII (note) Gender, 3, 66 Genitive : meaning, 19 after numerals, 27, 138, 179, 180 after prepositions, 70 after adverbs of quantity, 30, Voc. XL after comparative, 194 in negative phrases, 28, 29 partitive, 31 plural masculine, 133-136 feminine, 151-153 neuter, 172, 173 ending in y, Voc. XXVII (note), Voc. XLII, Voc. XLIII after y with Cmtb, 24 246 INDEX 247 * go,' translation of, 40, 97, 160 Greetings, Ex. XXXV. A (13), 216 Gutturals, xv * have,' translation of, 24 Hours of the day, 181 (c) iii=also, Ex. XVI A (11) Hs-b, 98 Imperative, see Verb Instrumental case : after prepositions, 44 after verbs, 69, 185 exceptional form in plural. 111 of means, 67 of manner, 115 in time phrases, 68 Interrogative forms, see Verb Irregular verb, see Verb ji interpolated in 1st singular of verbs, 141 (note 2) Labials, xiv ' let him (them),' 215 ' let us,' 214, 231 Liquids, xx Modification of verb stem, 141 (note), 142, 158, 169, 201, 207, 232 H prefixed in declension, 25 Ha, 60, 61, 128 Hafli,, 127 Nasals, xix Negative, 8, note to Ex. I, 217 double, Voc. Ill and note Nouns : accentuation, 48-60, 54, 75, 112 declension, see Declension plurals, 72-76 lists, 77-79, 117-119 genitive, see Genitive fffert, 29 Numerals : approximate number, 182 cardinals 1-10, 20, see 138, and Voc. XXXVI 11-19, see 148 30-100, see 150 hundreds, thousands, 155 declension, see Declension distributive, 183 ordinals, l8t-19th, 166 20th-100th, 171 200th upwards, 184 Numerals continued time of day, 181 (c) with genitive singular, 138, 179 with genitive plural, 138, 180 o or e dropped or interpolated, 39 (note), Voc. XIX (note), 153, 172, 190, 237 ojniH-B, 107 (6), 178 Orthography, general rule of, 91 oTb, 98 Passive voice, see Verb Peoples, classes, names of, 230 ndpejTi., 44 (note 3), Voc. IX Phonetic symbols, iii transcript, 194-209 iiHTi. and n-fexb, 165 no, 87, 183 no as prefix, 207 nojri., 127 Prepositions, list of, 236 Prepositions in o or i, 39 (note) Prepositional Case : occurrence, 45 in time phrases, 128, 181 (6) in^, 46 npn, 45 npH as prefix, 62, 63, 97 npo, 100 npo as prefix, 62 Pronouns, see Summary, p. 33 Pronunciation, ee Introduction, especi- ally iv and vi PoccfH, Voc. XXXIV Salutations, 216 caMBitt and caMt, 107 (c), 186, 235 CBott, 104, 109 Script, pp. 190-193 ceft, 106 Sibilants, xvii, xviii Signs, hard and soft, xiii Suggestions for use of this book, p. 36 Summary of Regular Forms, pp. 32-35 CB, CO, 39 (note), 44, 98 * than,' 194 ' they ' (indefinite), 101, 102 Time phrases in, on, at, by, 68, 128, 160, 181 date, 181 TOTB, 107 (a) 248 INDEX Verbs : see Summary of Regular Forms, pp. 34-35 actual and potential (or definite and indefinite, or concrete and ab- stract), 40, 159, 208 (note) aspects, 199 et seq. changes in stem, 141 (note), 142, 158, 169, 201, 207 classification, 129, 130; 202, 203; 208 (note) conditional, 199, 223' dative, governing, 214, 223 (2) (ex- amples), Voc. LIII (2), LVI (1) of fearing, 233, 234 future : 6HTb, 123 imperfective, 124 perfective, 160, 204 of hoping, 233 imperative, formation of, 210-218 first plural, 214 imperfective and perfective, 217 negative, 217 expressed by infinitive, 218 imperfective aspect, 202 imperfective aspect derived from per- fective, 232 indefinite 3rd plural, 101, 102 indicating a state of rest and cognate verbs describing an act or motion, 60, 143 infinitive, 32, 33, 41 irregular forms, 158, 239 as imperative, 218 use of, 33, 41, 218 instrumental, governing, 69, 185 interrogative forms, 12, 13, 24 (c), 228, Voc. XV and XLIV irregular, 156, 220-222, 231, 239 n interpolated in 1st singular present, 141 (note) in OBaxB, CBaxb, 225 omission of verb, 7 participles, see Summary, p. 35 passive voice, see Summary, p. 35, and Pars. 80 (a), 102, 139 (6), 157 (a) past tense : form, 32, 57, 58, 80, 161 without ji in masculine, 96 Verbs continued past tense : irregular forms, 96, 239 with 6h, 199, 223 with HToG-b, 200, 233 perfective aspect, 203 formation of, 206, 207 forms of, illustrated in Vocs. LII- LVI illustrative passages, following 209 plural for singular, Ex. XXVII B (note) prefixes, effect of, 208 present tense : in aio, aemb, 131 -fero, Hfeeuib, 131 f, -emfa, 157 bK), berab, 162 -y or -f, -^emb, 168 H), limb, 141 -^K), -^Hmb, 145 K), -^Hmb, 149 -yio, yemb, 225 irregular forms, 220, 221, 222, 231, 239 present for English past, 144, 227 reflexive verb, 37 spelling, 132 for passive, 102 (6) scheme of Russian verb, 205 tense sequence, 144, 227 tense systems, 202, 203 of wislong, 224 m -HBaxb, 226, 232 ' there is,' Voc. II, XIII Vowels, hard and soft, iv, viii-xii ' whether,' 228 y with genitive and 6HTb= to have, 24 Young of animals, declension of names of, 229 XDjoiTb and HTni, 40, 159, 208 (note) qeii, 106 ^TOTb, 107 14 DAY USE RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED LOAN DEPT. This book is due on the last date stamped below, or on the date to which renewed. Renewed books are subject to immediate recall '9H '^^'62KB IN STACKS OCT 31962 W wETC^D LD ^B=-tt ^i^tWf /D La APHj.3'6/-^ gJB^SLPi W 23'G5-lPNl ' T:C70978]0)476B UOAN dEPT. ^ fS630 6 m 8'fi9-9Pf^ LOAM DPT. UiSiBI a\98^ ^ SEP a joeral Library Uiffversity of California Berkeley _a U.C.BERKELEY LIBRARIES ft- -f * i^J290667 W THE UNIVERSITY OF CAUFORNIA UBRARY u